rules for classification ships part 6 additional class ......7 requirements for helicopter...

The content of this service document is the subject of intellectual property rights reserved by DNV GL AS ("DNV GL"). The useraccepts that it is prohibited by anyone else but DNV GL and/or its licensees to offer and/or perform classification, certificationand/or verification services, including the issuance of certificates and/or declarations of conformity, wholly or partly, on thebasis of and/or pursuant to this document whether free of charge or chargeable, without DNV GL's prior written consent.DNV GL is not responsible for the consequences arising from any use of this document by others.

The electronic pdf version of this document, available free of chargefrom http://www.dnvgl.com, is the officially binding version.

DNV GL AS

RULES FOR CLASSIFICATION

Ships

Edition July 2018

Part 6 Additional class notations

Chapter 5 Equipment and design features

FOREWORD

DNV GL rules for classification contain procedural and technical requirements related to obtainingand retaining a class certificate. The rules represent all requirements adopted by the Society asbasis for classification.

© DNV GL AS July 2018

Any comments may be sent by e-mail to [email protected]

If any person suffers loss or damage which is proved to have been caused by any negligent act or omission of DNV GL, then DNV GL shallpay compensation to such person for his proved direct loss or damage. However, the compensation shall not exceed an amount equal to tentimes the fee charged for the service in question, provided that the maximum compensation shall never exceed USD 2 million.

In this provision "DNV GL" shall mean DNV GL AS, its direct and indirect owners as well as all its affiliates, subsidiaries, directors, officers,employees, agents and any other acting on behalf of DNV GL.

Part

6 C

hapt

er 5

Cha

nges

- c

urre

nt

Rules for classification: Ships — DNVGL-RU-SHIP Pt.6 Ch.5. Edition July 2018 Equipment and design features

DNV GL AS

CHANGES – CURRENT

This document supersedes the January 2018 edition of DNVGL-RU-SHIP Pt.6 Ch.5.Changes in this document are highlighted in red colour. However, if the changes involve a whole chapter,section or subsection, normally only the title will be in red colour.

Changes July 2018, entering into force 1 January 2019Topic Reference Description of change

Helideck load combinations -Alignment between ship andoffshore classification

Sec.5 Table 9 The minimum deck loads/wind loads, etc., have been replacedby a new load called minimum environmental load.

Update of night operationmarking

Sec.5 [6.5.2] Requirement to distance between lighting segments in thehelideck circle corrected from maximum 0.5 m apart tominimum 0.5 m apart. Specification of length of segmentsadded to specify required coverage of the circumference.

Entering of mandatoryinformation for self unloadingsystem for two cargoes

Sec.10 Table 13 Adding of missing information regarding the self unloadingsystem for AMORPHOUS SODIUM SILICATE LUMPS (closed/open) and BORIC ACIDS (closed/open).

Dangerous goods -correction of ventilationrequirements for SEED CAKEand SILICONMANGANESEand personnel protectionrequirements for ALUMINIAHYDRATE

Sec.10 Table 13 SEED CAKE (UN 2217): set ventilation from natural tomechanical ventilation as required by the IMSBC Code.SILICOMANGANESE (low carbon): set ventilation from naturalto mechanical ventilation as required by the IMSBC Code.

ALUMINA HYDRATE: personal protection requirements set totwo sets of self-contained breathing apparatuses instead of twoadditional ones in line with the IMSBC Code.

Cyber security Sec.21 New requirements on cyber security barriers.

Editorial correctionsIn addition to the above stated changes, editorial corrections may have been made.

Part

6 C

hapt

er 5

Con

tent

s


DNV GL AS

CONTENTS

Changes – current.................................................................................................. 3

Section 1 Transportation of containers - Container...............................................191 General.............................................................................................. 19

1.1 Introduction................................................................................... 191.2 Scope............................................................................................ 191.3 Application..................................................................................... 191.4 Class notation................................................................................ 191.5 Documentation............................................................................... 191.6 Certification....................................................................................201.7 Surveys and testing........................................................................ 20

2 Stowage of containers on deck..........................................................202.1 General..........................................................................................202.2 Stowage on deck with neither lashing nor lateral rigid support.............. 212.3 Stowage on deck with lashing but without lateral rigid support..............212.4 Stowage on deck with lateral rigid support.........................................21

3 Stowage of containers below deck.................................................... 213.1 General..........................................................................................213.2 Stowage below deck with neither cell guides nor lashing...................... 213.3 Stowage below deck with lashing but without cell guides..................... 223.4 Dimensioning of other rigid lateral support structures.......................... 22

4 Lashing computer system..................................................................244.1 General..........................................................................................24

5 Hull support structures......................................................................245.1 General..........................................................................................24

6 Special requirements........................................................................256.1 Wave breakers................................................................................25

Section 2 Ships designed without hatchcover - Hatchcoverless............................ 261 General.............................................................................................. 26

1.1 Introduction................................................................................... 261.2 Scope............................................................................................ 261.3 Application..................................................................................... 261.4 Definitions......................................................................................261.5 Documentation requirements............................................................27

2 General requirements for all ships with the class notationHatchcoverless......................................................................................27

Part

6 C

hapt

er 5

Con

tent

s


DNV GL AS

2.1 Strength requirements in the intact flooded condition.........................273 Special requirements for vessels with the class notation Multi-purpose dry cargo ship or General dry cargo ship................................ 27

3.1 Adaption of MSC/Circ.608/Rev.1 requirements.................................... 273.2 Model tests for the determination of green water ingress in open cargoholds.................................................................................................. 283.3 Procedure for model tests................................................................283.4 Intact stability................................................................................ 293.5 Damage stability.............................................................................303.6 Cargo hold bilge dewatering system and freeing ports......................... 303.7 Fire protection requirements............................................................ 313.8 Dangerous goods............................................................................ 323.9 Solid bulk cargoes.......................................................................... 33

Section 3 Permanently installed cranes - Crane....................................................341 General.............................................................................................. 34

1.1 Introduction................................................................................... 341.2 Scope............................................................................................ 341.3 Application..................................................................................... 341.4 Definitions......................................................................................341.5 Certification....................................................................................341.6 Documentation............................................................................... 35

2 Design loads...................................................................................... 352.1 General..........................................................................................35

3 Overturning and sliding..................................................................... 363.1 Overturning....................................................................................363.2 Sliding........................................................................................... 36

4 Testing...............................................................................................364.1 General..........................................................................................36

5 Stability............................................................................................. 365.1 Stability requirements for heavy lift operations...................................36

Section 4 Additional fire safety - F....................................................................... 371 General.............................................................................................. 37

1.1 Introduction................................................................................... 371.2 Scope............................................................................................ 371.3 Application..................................................................................... 371.4 Class notations............................................................................... 371.5 Documentation requirements............................................................381.6 Firefighter's outfit........................................................................... 38

Part

6 C

hapt

er 5

Con

tent

s


DNV GL AS

2 Accommodation - F(A).......................................................................392.1 General..........................................................................................392.2 Restricted use of combustible materials............................................. 402.3 Escape...........................................................................................402.4 Fire Integrity..................................................................................402.5 Ventilation......................................................................................412.6 Fire detection and alarm system.......................................................412.7 Portable fire extinguishers................................................................412.8 Fire main system............................................................................422.9 Other items....................................................................................42

3 Machinery spaces - F(M)................................................................... 423.1 General..........................................................................................423.2 Oil systems.................................................................................... 433.3 Hot surfaces...................................................................................443.4 Fire detection and confirmation........................................................ 453.5 Local extinguishing systems............................................................. 463.6 Main extinguishing systems..............................................................473.7 Portable fire extinguishers................................................................50

4 Cargo decks and cargo spaces - F(C)................................................ 504.1 Introduction................................................................................... 504.2 Tankers for oil, tankers for chemicals................................................ 504.3 Tankers for liquefied gas..................................................................524.4 General cargo carriers and dry bulk cargo carriers.............................. 544.5 Ships with ro/ro decks (car carriers, general ro/ro ships, ferries)...........554.6 Container carriers........................................................................... 58

Section 5 Helicopter installations - HELDK............................................................601 General.............................................................................................. 60

1.1 Introduction................................................................................... 601.2 Scope............................................................................................ 601.3 Application..................................................................................... 601.4 Class notations............................................................................... 601.5 Definitions......................................................................................611.6 Documentation requirements............................................................611.7 Certification requirements................................................................ 641.8 Testing requirements.......................................................................641.9 Materials........................................................................................651.10 Steel and aluminium connections.................................................... 66

2 Design loads and load combinations..................................................66

Part

6 C

hapt

er 5

Con

tent

s


DNV GL AS

2.1 General..........................................................................................662.2 Landing forces................................................................................672.3 Gravity and inertia forces - due to vessel motions and accelerations.......672.4 Minimum environmental loads.......................................................... 67

3 Structural strength............................................................................ 703.1 General..........................................................................................703.2 Deck plating and stiffeners.............................................................. 703.3 Primary supporting members and supporting structures of erectedseparate platforms............................................................................... 723.4 Miscellaneous................................................................................. 74

4 Miscellaneous.....................................................................................754.1 Personnel safety............................................................................. 754.2 Tie-down points..............................................................................764.3 Surface friction of helicopter deck.....................................................76

5 Requirements for vessel safety − qualifier S..................................... 765.1 Fire-fighting - general..................................................................... 765.2 Structural fire integrity.................................................................... 775.3 Firefighting equipment.....................................................................775.4 Communication between helicopter and vessel................................... 78

6 Requirements for helicopter safety − qualifier H...............................786.1 Size of helicopter deck.................................................................... 786.2 Location.........................................................................................796.3 Height of obstacles......................................................................... 796.4 Daylight marking............................................................................ 806.5 Night operation marking.................................................................. 816.6 Instrumentation.............................................................................. 82

7 Requirements for helicopter refuelling and hangar facilities −qualifier F............................................................................................. 82

7.1 Classification and application............................................................827.2 Helicopter refuelling area.................................................................837.3 Hangar.......................................................................................... 83

8 Requirements specified by the Norwegian Civil Aviation Authorities− qualifier CAA-N................................................................................. 84

8.1 Helicopter deck dimension............................................................... 848.2 Loads............................................................................................ 848.3 Allowable stresses...........................................................................858.4 Rescue equipment...........................................................................858.5 Marking......................................................................................... 858.6 Location.........................................................................................85

Part

6 C

hapt

er 5

Con

tent

s


DNV GL AS

Section 6 Damage stability for offshore service vessels - SF................................ 861 General.............................................................................................. 86

1.1 Introduction................................................................................... 861.2 Scope............................................................................................ 861.3 Application..................................................................................... 861.4 Documentation............................................................................... 86

2 Damage stability................................................................................872.1 Damage stability.............................................................................87

Section 7 Special purpose ships - SPS.................................................................. 881 General.............................................................................................. 88

1.1 Introduction................................................................................... 881.2 Scope............................................................................................ 881.3 Application..................................................................................... 881.4 Definitions......................................................................................881.5 Documentation............................................................................... 89

2 Requirements.....................................................................................902.1 General..........................................................................................902.2 Stability and subdivision.................................................................. 902.3 Machinery installations.................................................................... 912.4 Electrical installations...................................................................... 912.5 Emergency source of power............................................................. 912.6 Periodically unattended machinery spaces..........................................912.7 Fire protection................................................................................912.8 Dangerous goods............................................................................ 922.9 Life-saving appliances......................................................................922.10 Radio communications................................................................... 922.11 Safety of navigation...................................................................... 92

Section 8 Inert gas systems - Inert......................................................................931 General.............................................................................................. 93

1.1 Introduction................................................................................... 931.2 Scope............................................................................................ 931.3 Application..................................................................................... 931.4 Documentation............................................................................... 931.5 Arrangements and systems..............................................................94

Section 9 Offshore service vessels for transportation of low flashpoint liquids -LFL........................................................................................................................ 95

Part

6 C

hapt

er 5

Con

tent

s


DNV GL AS

1 General.............................................................................................. 951.1 Introduction................................................................................... 951.2 Scope............................................................................................ 951.3 Application..................................................................................... 951.4 Assumptions...................................................................................951.5 Definitions......................................................................................961.6 Documentation requirements............................................................961.7 Certification requirements................................................................ 971.8 Materials........................................................................................981.9 Surveys and testing........................................................................ 98

2 Vessel arrangement...........................................................................982.1 Tank arrangement...........................................................................982.2 Access and openings general............................................................992.3 Access and openings to accommodation............................................ 992.4 Access and openings to pump room and cargo tanks...........................992.5 Chain locker and windlass................................................................992.6 Miscellaneous................................................................................100

3 Piping system in cargo area............................................................ 1003.1 General........................................................................................1003.2 Cargo piping system......................................................................1003.3 Cargo heating system....................................................................101

4 Gas-freeing, inerting and venting of cargo tanks.............................1024.1 Gas-freeing of cargo tanks............................................................. 1024.2 Inerting of cargo tanks.................................................................. 1024.3 Cargo tank venting system............................................................ 103

5 Ventilation system within the cargo area........................................ 1035.1 General........................................................................................103

6 Fire protection and extinction..........................................................1036.1 Fire protection.............................................................................. 1036.2 Fire extinction...............................................................................103

7 Electrical installations in hazardous areas....................................... 1047.1 General........................................................................................104

8 Area classification............................................................................1048.1 General........................................................................................1048.2 Definitions.................................................................................... 104

9 Instrumentation and control system............................................... 1069.1 General........................................................................................1069.2 Level gauging and level alarm........................................................ 1069.3 Gas detection............................................................................... 106

Part

6 C

hapt

er 5

Con

tent

s


DNV GL AS

10 Signboards..................................................................................... 10710.1 General...................................................................................... 107

11 Operational Instructions................................................................10711.1 General...................................................................................... 107

Section 10 Carriage of dangerous goods in packaged form and solid bulkcargoes – DG and DBC....................................................................................... 109

1 General............................................................................................ 1091.1 Introduction..................................................................................1091.2 Scope.......................................................................................... 1091.3 Application................................................................................... 1091.4 Class notations............................................................................. 1091.5 Certification.................................................................................. 1101.6 Definitions and abbreviations..........................................................1101.7 Documentation requirements.......................................................... 1141.8 References to other rules...............................................................116

2 Requirements for the carriage of dangerous goods in packagedform.................................................................................................... 117

2.1 General........................................................................................1172.2 Fire-extinguishing system...............................................................1192.3 Fire water supplies........................................................................1202.4 Water cooling............................................................................... 1202.5 Sources of ignition related to electrical equipment.............................1212.6 Sources of ignition related to safety of fans......................................1222.7 Other sources of ignition................................................................1222.8 Detection system.......................................................................... 1222.9 Ventilation.................................................................................... 1222.10 Bilge pumping.............................................................................1232.11 Additional bilge system................................................................ 1232.12 Personnel protection.................................................................... 1242.13 Portable fire extinguishers............................................................ 1252.14 Machinery space boundaries......................................................... 1252.15 Separation of ro-ro spaces........................................................... 125

3 Requirements for the carriage of solid bulk cargoes........................1413.1 General........................................................................................1413.2 Fire-extinguishing system...............................................................1423.3 Fire water supplies...................................................................... 1423.4 Sources of ignition related to electrical equipment.............................1433.5 Sources of ignition related to safety of fans.................................... 1433.6 Other sources of ignition................................................................144

Part

6 C

hapt

er 5

Con

tent

s


DNV GL AS

3.7 Measurement equipment................................................................1443.8 Ventilation.................................................................................... 1453.9 Additional provisions on ventilation................................................. 1453.10 Bilge pumping.............................................................................1463.11 Personnel protection – full protective clothing................................. 1463.12 Personnel protection - self-contained breathing apparatuses..............1473.13 No smoking signs........................................................................1473.14 Machinery space boundaries......................................................... 1473.15 Other boundaries.........................................................................1473.16 Gas sampling points.................................................................... 1473.17 Weather tightness....................................................................... 1483.18 Fuel tanks.................................................................................. 1483.19 Self-unloading system..................................................................149

Section 11 Recovered oil reception and transportation - OILREC........................1631 General............................................................................................ 163

1.1 Introduction................................................................................ 1631.2 Scope.......................................................................................... 1631.3 Application................................................................................... 1631.4 Class notations............................................................................. 163

2 Documentation and testing............................................................ 1632.1 Documentation..............................................................................1632.2 Testing.........................................................................................164

3 Basic requirements.......................................................................... 1653.1 General........................................................................................1653.2 Fire protection and extinction......................................................... 1653.3 Tank arrangement......................................................................... 1663.4 Support of heavy components........................................................ 167

4 Hazardous and non-hazardous areas...............................................1674.1 Area classification........................................................................1674.2 Access openings between non-hazardous spaces and hazardous area.. 168

5 Arrangement and equipment........................................................... 1685.1 General........................................................................................1685.2 Ventilation system.........................................................................1695.3 Tank venting system..................................................................... 1695.4 Arrangement of piping systems.......................................................1695.5 Tank heating - general...................................................................1705.6 Steam nozzle arrangement - Penetrations below top of tank............... 1715.7 Steam nozzle arrangement - penetrations from top of tank.................171

Part

6 C

hapt

er 5

Con

tent

s


DNV GL AS

5.8 Power supply and electrical equipment........................................... 1715.9 Miscellaneous requirements........................................................... 172

6 Operational instructions.................................................................. 1726.1 General........................................................................................172

Section 12 Single point moorings - SPM............................................................. 1741 General............................................................................................ 174

1.1 Introduction..................................................................................1741.2 Scope.......................................................................................... 1741.3 Application................................................................................... 1741.4 Class notations............................................................................. 174

2 Procedural requirements................................................................. 1752.1 Certification requirements.............................................................. 1752.2 Documentation requirements.......................................................... 175

3 Materials.......................................................................................... 1763.1 General........................................................................................176

4 Arrangement and general design.....................................................1764.1 Bow chain stoppers....................................................................... 1764.2 Bow fairleads................................................................................1774.3 Position of pedestal rollers............................................................. 1774.4 Winches or capstans......................................................................1784.5 Winch storage drum...................................................................... 178

Section 13 Enhanced system verification - ESV.................................................. 1791 General............................................................................................ 179

1.1 Introduction..................................................................................1791.2 Scope.......................................................................................... 1791.3 Application................................................................................... 1791.4 Class notations............................................................................. 1791.5 Definitions and abbreviations..........................................................1811.6 Documentation requirements.......................................................... 183

2 Hardware-in-the-loop testing.......................................................... 1842.1 Objectives.................................................................................... 1842.2 Class notations............................................................................. 1842.3 HIL test requirements....................................................................1842.4 Requirements for the maker of the HIL test package......................... 1842.5 HIL type approval......................................................................... 186

3 Documentation.................................................................................1863.1 Documentation requirements.......................................................... 186

Part

6 C

hapt

er 5

Con

tent

s


DNV GL AS

4 Tests................................................................................................ 1894.1 General........................................................................................1894.2 Test at manufacture’s works...........................................................1904.3 Test upon completion.................................................................... 1914.4 Onboard test................................................................................ 191

5 HIL test package............................................................................. 1925.1 General........................................................................................1925.2 Risk assessment........................................................................... 1935.3 Verification and validation.............................................................. 193

Section 14 Gas bunker vessels - Gas bunker...................................................... 1951 General............................................................................................ 195

1.1 Introduction..................................................................................1951.2 Documentation..............................................................................1971.3 Certification.................................................................................. 2001.4 Survey and testing........................................................................202


3 Arrangement and system design..................................................... 2033.1 General........................................................................................203

4 Fire safety........................................................................................2094.1 General........................................................................................209

5 Safety, control and monitoring systems.......................................... 2095.1 General........................................................................................209

6 Operations....................................................................................... 2106.1 General........................................................................................210

7 Special features/optional qualifiers.................................................2107.1 General........................................................................................210

Section 15 Transportation of toxic chemicals for offshore service vessels -CHEM...................................................................................................................213

1 Introduction.....................................................................................2131.1 Background.................................................................................. 2131.2 Scope.......................................................................................... 213

2 Application....................................................................................... 2142.1 General........................................................................................2142.2 Relation to other DNV GL documents...............................................214

3 References....................................................................................... 2143.1 Terminology and definitions............................................................ 214

4 Procedural requirements................................................................. 215

Part

6 C

hapt

er 5

Con

tent

s


DNV GL AS

4.1 Documentation requirements.......................................................... 2154.2 Certification.................................................................................. 216

5 Materials.......................................................................................... 2176 Vessel arrangement......................................................................... 217

6.1 Tank arrangement......................................................................... 2177 Volumes to be carried..................................................................... 217

7.1 Access and openings general..........................................................2177.2 Access and openings to accommodation...........................................2187.3 Access and openings to pump room and cargo tanks......................... 218

8 Piping system in cargo area............................................................ 2188.1 General........................................................................................2188.2 Cargo piping system......................................................................2198.3 Cargo heating system....................................................................2208.4 Cargo tank washing.......................................................................2208.5 Ballast tanks................................................................................ 220

9 Gas-freeing, inerting and venting of cargo tanks.............................2219.1 Gas-freeing of cargo tanks............................................................. 2219.2 Cargo tank venting system............................................................ 2219.3 Inerting........................................................................................222

10 Ventilation system within the cargo area...................................... 22210.1 General...................................................................................... 222

11 Fire extinction................................................................................22211.1 Fire extinction.............................................................................22211.2 Cargo area definitions..................................................................223

12 Instrumentation and control system..............................................22312.1 General...................................................................................... 22312.2 Level gauging and level alarm...................................................... 22312.3 Gas detection..............................................................................224

13 Personnel protection......................................................................22413.1 Protective equipment................................................................... 22413.2 Safety equipment........................................................................ 22413.3 Emergency equipment................................................................. 225

14 Lifeboat..........................................................................................22615 Signboards..................................................................................... 226

15.1 General...................................................................................... 22616 Operational instructions................................................................ 226

16.1 General...................................................................................... 226

Section 16 Offshore gangway installations - Walk2work................................... 228

Part

6 C

hapt

er 5

Con

tent

s


DNV GL AS

1 General............................................................................................ 2281.1 Introduction..................................................................................2281.2 Scope.......................................................................................... 2281.3 Application................................................................................... 2281.4 Certification requirements.............................................................. 2281.5 Documentation requirements.......................................................... 228

2 Hull.................................................................................................. 2302.1 Support within the vessel...............................................................230

3 Testing............................................................................................. 2303.1 General........................................................................................230

4 Stability............................................................................................2304.1 Application................................................................................... 230

5 Station keeping................................................................................2305.1 General........................................................................................2305.2 Capability..................................................................................... 231

Section 17 Anchoring in deep and unsheltered water - ADW............................. 2321 General...........................................................................................232

1.1 Objective......................................................................................2321.2 Scope.......................................................................................... 2321.3 Application................................................................................... 2321.4 Class notations............................................................................. 232

2 Documentation............................................................................... 2332.1 Documentation requirements.......................................................... 233

3 Design requirements...................................................................... 2333.1 Equipment Number for deep and unsheltered water...........................2333.2 Anchors........................................................................................2353.3 Chain cables for bower anchors...................................................... 2353.4 Anchor windlass and chain stopper..................................................236

Section 18 Specially constructed cargo ships for bulk cargo liquefaction -BCLIQ..................................................................................................................237

1 Introduction................................................................................... 2371.1 Objective......................................................................................2371.2 Scope.......................................................................................... 2371.3 Application..................................................................................2371.4 Class notations............................................................................2371.5 Definitions and symbols............................................................... 237

2 Documentation............................................................................... 2382.1 Documentation requirements........................................................ 238

Part

6 C

hapt

er 5

Con

tent

s


DNV GL AS

3 General requirements.....................................................................2393.1 General...................................................................................... 2393.2 Design scenario...........................................................................239

4 Stability..........................................................................................2404.1 Design cargo characteristics........................................................... 2404.2 Loading conditions.......................................................................2404.3 Intact stability.............................................................................2404.4 Damage stability......................................................................... 241

5 Hull strength.................................................................................. 2415.1 Cargo pressure............................................................................2415.2 Hull local scantling...................................................................... 2425.3 Hull Girder Buckling.....................................................................2425.4 Finite element analysis.................................................................242

Section 19 Transportation of vehicles loaded as RO-RO cargo- RO-RO................2431 General............................................................................................ 243

1.1 Objective......................................................................................2431.2 Scope.......................................................................................... 2431.3 Application................................................................................... 2431.4 Class notation...............................................................................2431.5 Documentation..............................................................................2431.6 Certification.................................................................................. 244

2 Racking............................................................................................ 2442.1 General........................................................................................2442.2 Scope.......................................................................................... 244

3 Primary supporting members.......................................................... 2443.1 Strength.......................................................................................2443.2 Local scantlings............................................................................ 244

4 Buckling........................................................................................... 2445 Strengthening for wheel loading..................................................... 2446 Special strength considerations.......................................................2447 RO/RO equipment............................................................................2448 Securing points for lashing..............................................................244

Section 20 Gas power plants.............................................................................. 2451 General............................................................................................ 245

1.1 Objective......................................................................................2451.2 Scope.......................................................................................... 2451.3 Application................................................................................... 245

Part

6 C

hapt

er 5

Con

tent

s


DNV GL AS

1.4 Class notations............................................................................. 2451.5 Terms and definitions.................................................................... 2461.6 Documentation..............................................................................2481.7 On-board documentation................................................................2521.8 Certification and standards.............................................................2541.9 Classification.................................................................................257


3 Gas Systems.................................................................................... 2583.1 Arrangement and protection........................................................... 2583.2 System design.............................................................................. 259

4 Fire safety........................................................................................2614.1 General........................................................................................261

5 Electrical systems............................................................................ 2625.1 General........................................................................................262

6 Safety, control and monitoring systems.......................................... 2636.1 General........................................................................................263

7 Manufacture, workmanship and testing...........................................2657.1 Manufacture, testing and commissioning.......................................... 265

8 Additional requirements for qualifier performance.......................... 2658.1 General........................................................................................2658.2 Electrical power plant.................................................................... 265

Section 21 Cyber security................................................................................... 2671 General............................................................................................ 267

1.1 Objective......................................................................................2671.2 Scope.......................................................................................... 2671.3 Application................................................................................... 2681.4 Class notation...............................................................................2681.5 Alternations and additions of approved systems................................ 2691.6 References................................................................................... 2691.7 Terminology and definitions............................................................ 2701.8 Abbreviations................................................................................2711.9 Documentation requirements.......................................................... 2731.10 Implementing cyber security.........................................................276

2 Policies, procedures and responsibilities for the vessel.................. 2802.1 General........................................................................................2802.2 Procedural requirements................................................................ 280

3 System design................................................................................. 281

Part

6 C

hapt

er 5

Con

tent

s


DNV GL AS

3.1 General........................................................................................2813.2 Assigning cyber security requirements............................................. 2813.3 Remote access..............................................................................2853.4 Incident handling and reporting...................................................... 285

4 Certification and classification.........................................................2864.1 General........................................................................................2864.2 Pre-approval................................................................................. 2864.3 Verification and scope....................................................................2864.4 Testing at site/ onboard.................................................................2874.5 Final integration testing................................................................. 287

5 Systems for consideration............................................................... 2875.1 General........................................................................................2875.2 Initial system selection.................................................................. 2885.3 Essential and important systems.....................................................2885.4 Bridge systems............................................................................. 2885.5 Industrial purpose systems............................................................ 289

6 Requirements to policies, procedures and responsibilities...............2896.1 General........................................................................................2896.2 System documentation.................................................................. 2896.3 Addressing cyber security with policies, procedures andresponsibilities....................................................................................2906.4 Monitoring and improving the policies, procedure and responsibilities... 293

7 Security requirements..................................................................... 2937.1 Identification and authentication..................................................... 2947.2 Use control...................................................................................3007.3 Systems integrity.......................................................................... 3067.4 Data confidentiality....................................................................... 3107.5 Restricted data flow...................................................................... 3117.6 Timely response to events............................................................. 3137.7 Resource availability...................................................................... 314

Changes – historic.............................................................................................. 318

Part

6 C

hapt

er 5

Sec

tion

1


DNV GL AS

SECTION 1 TRANSPORTATION OF CONTAINERS - CONTAINER

1 General

1.1 IntroductionThe additional class notation Container provides a design standard enabling safe and reliable transportationof containers on ships. Compliance with this notation, not only protects the ship, the cargo and the crew,but also provides for the maximum use of the available capacity of the ship, and for rapid and systematicdischarging and loading.

1.2 ScopeThe scope for additional class notation Container sets requirements for container storage arrangement, andrefers primarily to the Society's ship rules, IMO and IACS regulations.

1.3 ApplicationThe additional class notation Container applies to ships without the class notation Container Ship, andwill be assigned the notation Container when the vessel is found to be in compliance with the requirementsin this section. The requirements include those found in Pt.5 Ch.2 Sec.8 and Pt.5 Ch.2 Sec.9, and the Codeof Safe Practice for Cargo Stowage and Securing (CSS code) Annex 14 adopted by MSC.1/Circ. 1352 andrelated /IACS UI SC265, considering design aspects to be implemented at the newbuilding stage.

1.4 Class notation1.4.1 Additional notation - design and survey requirementsShips built in compliance with the requirements as specified in Table 1 will be assigned the additional classnotation as follows:

Table 1 Additional class notation Container

Class notation Description Application Design and surveyrequirements

Container Equipped for carriage ofcontainers

Ships with class notationother than Container ship

Design: [2.1.1], [5.1.1] andSec.2Survey: Pt.7 Ch.1 Sec.2,Pt.7 Ch.1 Sec.3 and Pt.7Ch.1 Sec.4

1.5 Documentation1.5.1 Documentation requirementsDocumentation shall be submitted as required by Pt.5 Ch.2 Sec.1 Table 4.

Part

6 C

hapt

er 5

Sec

tion

1


DNV GL AS

1.6 Certification1.6.1 Certification requirementsFor products that shall be installed on board, the builder shall request the manufacturers to order certificationas described in Pt.5 Ch.2 Sec.1 Table 5.

1.7 Surveys and testing1.7.1 ApplicationThe survey and testing requirements shall be applied as defined in Pt.5 Ch.2 Sec.1.

2 Stowage of containers on deck

2.1 GeneralTypically container securing systems on deck shall be designed as described in Pt.5 Ch.2 Sec.8. Typicalcontainer stowage systems are single stowed stacks secured by twistlocks or stacks stowed in cell guides. Fornon-typical container securing systems which are not covered by the aforementioned rules, such as line load-or block stowage systems, the following requirements are applicable.

Guidance note:It is strongly recommended for ships designed for carrying containers on deck to ensure the compliance with Code of Safe Practicefor Cargo Stowage and Securing (CSS code) Annex 14 adopted by MSC.1/Circ. 1352 and related /ACS UI SC265, consideringdesign aspects to be implemented at the newbuilding stage.

---e-n-d---o-f---g-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e---

2.1.1 Linear seating of containersIf containers are stowed with linear seating in several layers, the total weight of the containers above thefirst layer shall not exceed the following values:

— 0.8G for 40 ft containers and— 1.0G for 20 ft containers

where G is the container's maximum gross weight according to classification guideline DNVGL-CG-0060App.B.This kind of seating may be set up by arranging continuous steel or wooden dunnages below the longitudinalbottom rails of the containers or by directly seating these bottom rails on the hatch covers or the decks, withsunk-in pockets being arranged below the container corners.The arrangement of short steel pads serving as dunnages placed on the girders of short hatch covers shall beavoided.Equipment used to obtain a linear seating shall be configured to leave a sufficient clearance (about 5mm) between corner castings of the container and hatch covers or decks. For ISO standard containers, aprotruding depth of their corner castings of 4 mm to 17.5 mm from their bottom longitudinal rails and of 11mm to 17.5 mm from the bottom transverse girders may be assumed. Special container types may requireadditional dunnages for their transportation.Linearly seated containers shall be secured against shifting by locking devices arranged on the hatch coversand/or the deck.

Part

6 C

hapt

er 5

Sec

tion

1


DNV GL AS

2.2 Stowage on deck with neither lashing nor lateral rigid support2.2.1 Containers in one layerContainers carried in one layer shall be secured against tilting and shifting by locking devices arranged attheir lower corner castings.

2.2.2 Containers in several layersIf containers are stowed in several layers, locking devices shall be arranged between the container layers.Containers located in the lowermost layer shall be locked as well at their lower corner castings.

2.2.3 DunnagePlacing containers on dunnage without lashing them is only permissible if effective securing devices can bearranged to prevent them from shifting and tilting, see [2.2.1] and [2.1.1].

2.3 Stowage on deck with lashing but without lateral rigid supportLocking devices shall be arranged between container layers and below lowest container layer betweencontainer corner castings/container support fittings.

2.4 Stowage on deck with lateral rigid support2.4.1 Buttress system stowageInstead of being lashed, containers may also be secured against sideward shifting and/or tilting by meansof buttress structures placed on deck (if necessary, on hatchways) or by a system consisting of buttressstructures and cone adapters.Containers shall be shored by buttress structures in such a way that inadmissible deformations of thecontainer framework are prevented and the permissible container racking loads are not exceeded.

3 Stowage of containers below deck

3.1 GeneralTypically container securing systems on deck shall be designed as described in Pt.5 Ch.2 Sec.8. Typicalcontainer stowage systems are single stowed stacks secured by twistlocks or stacks stowed in cell guides. Fornon-typical container securing systems which are not covered by the aforementioned rules, such as line load-or block stowage systems, the following requirements are applicable.

3.2 Stowage below deck with neither cell guides nor lashing3.2.1 Container securingContainer stacks placed side by side shall be coupled by dual cone adapters or equivalent devices to formcontainer blocks. For container blocks extending over the hold width, bridge fittings for compression shall beprovided on the uppermost layer of containers if there is a lateral shoring point at this level. If containers areseparated into two blocks, bridge fittings for tension and compression shall be arranged at the level of theshoring points.In the lowest container layer each container shall be secured against shifting at all four corner castings.Each container block shall be laterally supported at its container corner fittings. Support shall be provided bysufficiently strong structural elements of the ship, such as decks and web frames.

Part

6 C

hapt

er 5

Sec

tion

1


DNV GL AS

3.2.2 Shoring forcesThe number of lateral shoring points shall be determined so that the corner castings loads and containerracking loads will not be exceeded, see class guideline DNVGL-CG-0060 Sec.3.Where necessary, the force at a shoring point may be distributed to the two adjacent corner fittings by aspecial design of the shoring element.Shoring forces may also be reduced by dividing the containers to be shored into two separate containerblocks, thus splitting up the transverse container forces into compressive shoring forces on one side andtensile shoring forces on the other side of the hold.

3.2.3 Shoring element constructionShoring elements shall be constructed to transmit compressive loads or, where necessary, compressive andtensile loads. Shoring elements may be of fixed or removable configuration. Both kinds shall ensure that theclearance between their contact faces and the container corner castings is as small as possible.Wedges shall be sufficiently secured against their inadvertent loosening (e.g., on account of vibrations).Shoring elements shall be easily accessible. Their weight and the associated number of loose parts shall berestricted to a minimum.

3.3 Stowage below deck with lashing but without cell guidesInstead of or in combination with shoring systems described in [3.2], cargo hold containers may also besecured by lashings. If this is the case, provisions in Pt.5 Ch.2 Sec.8 [2.3] apply additionally.

3.4 Dimensioning of other rigid lateral support structures3.4.1 Dimensioning of cross tiesIn general, forces acting on cross ties shall be calculated based on LC1 in accordance with Pt.5 Ch.2 Sec.8[6.3.1]. Where necessary, additional compressive or tensile loads on the cross ties caused by transversedeformations of the ship's hull shall be taken into account.

The resulting tensile and compressive stresses in cross ties shall not exceed permissible values given in Pt.5Ch.2 Sec.8 [7.2].

Where longitudinal ties are not arranged, also bending and shear stresses in cross ties induced bylongitudinal container loads based on LC2 in accordance with Pt.5 Ch.2 Sec.8 [6.3.1] shall not exceedpermissible stresses given in Pt.5 Ch.2 Sec.8 [7.2]. The distribution of longitudinal loads on cross ties followsfrom the arrangement of vertical guide rails. Alternatively, a load distribution throughout the length of thecross tie may be assumed, as shown in Figure 1.

Part

6 C

hapt

er 5

Sec

tion

1


DNV GL AS

Figure 1 Load distribution throughout cross tie

For cross ties not directly connected to the hull, the minimum required sectional area, As req, in cm2, of thecross tie bar subject to the compressive load, Ps, shall be calculated as following:

[cm2]

where:

σp = permissible compressive stress, in N/mm2

=

Ps = compressive tie bar load, in kNκ = reduction factor

=

φ =

np = 0.34 for tubular and rectangular profilesnp = 0.49 for open sections

λs = degree of slenderness of the tie bar

=

ℓs = length of the tie bar, in cmE = Young's modulus, in N/mm2

is = radius of gyration of the tie bar, in cm

=

Is = smallest moment of inertia of tie bar cross section, in cm4

Part

6 C

hapt

er 5

Sec

tion

1


DNV GL AS

S = safety factor= 1.4 for λs ≤ 1= 1.65 for λs > 1

3.4.2 For cross ties rigidly connected to the hull, the slenderness ratio of tie bars is required to be λs ≤ 250.The slenderness, λs, shall be calculated according to [3.4.1], where the effective (buckling) length, sK, in cm,is used instead of the tie bar length, ℓs:

sK = 0.7 · ℓs for welded connectionssK = ℓs for screw connections and suspended structures.

3.4.3 Dimensioning of longitudinal tiesCompressive and tensile loads on longitudinal ties shall be calculated based on LC2 in accordance with Pt.5Ch.2 Sec.8 [6.3.1] and the number and arrangement of longitudinal ties. Resulting stresses shall not exceedthe permissible values given in Pt.5 Ch.2 Sec.8 [7.2].

For longitudinal ties subject to compressive forces, the slenderness ratio, λs , according to [3.4.1] shall notexceed 250.Longitudinal ties shall be connected to the ship's hull in a manner to not absorb compressive and tensilestresses resulting from the ship's global deformations.

3.4.4 Dimensioning lateral supporting railsThe shoring forces according to classification guideline DNVGL-CG-0060 Sec.4 [5] shall be used fordimensioning these rails. Resulting stresses shall not exceed the permissible values given in Pt.5 Ch.2 Sec.8[7.2].

4 Lashing computer system

4.1 General

4.1.1 For vessels with more than 2 tiers of containers on deck or more than 3 tiers of containers in hold,a lashing computer system shall be installed on board and certified by the Society in accordance withrequirements given in Pt.5 Ch.2 Sec.8 [9].

4.1.2 For other ships not in compliance with [4.1.1], the container securing arrangement plan shall beprepared for a limiting metacentric height (GM-value) not lower than that given in Pt.5 Ch.2 Sec.8 [6.1.2].Actual operational conditions shall be below the GM-value used in the container securing arrangement plan.

5 Hull support structures

5.1 General5.1.1 ApplicationThe requirements regarding hull support structures for container support fittings and container securingstructures shall be applied as defined in Pt.5 Ch.2 Sec.9.

Part

6 C

hapt

er 5

Sec

tion

1


DNV GL AS

6 Special requirements

6.1 Wave breakers

6.1.1 If containers are intended to be carried above the weather deck at a location forward of 0.15 L fromF.E. a wave breaker shall be fitted in accordance with the requirements given in Pt.3 Ch.10 Sec.6 [10].

Part

6 C

hapt

er 5

Sec

tion

2


DNV GL AS

SECTION 2 SHIPS DESIGNED WITHOUT HATCHCOVER -HATCHCOVERLESS

1 General

1.1 IntroductionThe additional class notation Hatchcoverless sets requirements for vessels with the ship type notation

— Container ship where one or more cargo holds are not fitted with hatch covers or— Multi-purpose dry cargo ship and General dry cargo ship where the hatch covers may be completely

or partially open or removed during sea voyageThis additional class notation is based on the IMO Circular MSC/Circ.608/Rev.1, dated 5 July 1994 "InterimGuideline for Open-Top Containerships".In order to apply this class notation, flag administration needs to grant an exemption from the InternationalConvention of Load Line.

1.2 ScopeThe additional class notation Hatchcoverless establishes requirements to:

— dimensioning of longitudinal structures for the intact flooded condition.; considering the still waterbending moment in flooded condition for the required hull girder ultimate bending capacity check

— initial and periodic surveys— intact and damage stability— fire protection— arrangements and equipment for transportation of dangerous goods.

1.3 Application1.3.1 Container ShipThe additional class notation Hatchcoverless is applicable to container ships designed such that one ormore cargo holds are not fitted with hatch covers, and may be assigned under the provision of compliancewith MSC/ Circ.608/ Rev.1 "Interim guidelines for open-top containerships" and when the requirements in [2]are met.

1.3.2 Multi-purpose dry cargo ship or general dry cargo shipThe additional class notation Hatchcoverless is applicable to open-top multi purpose or general dry cargoships, designed such that one or more cargo holds are not fitted with hatch covers or where the hatch coverscould be completely or partially opened or removed during sea voyage. The notation may be assigned underthe provision of compliance with requirements defined in [2] and [3] for multi-purpose dry cargo and generaldry cargo ships, as applicable.

1.4 Definitions1.4.1 Maximum sustained speedThe Maximum sustained speed is defined as the maximum service speed, in kn, taking into account speedloss due to resistance increase in regular waves. Voluntary speed loss is not taken into consideration.

Part

6 C

hapt

er 5

Sec

tion

2


DNV GL AS

1.4.2 Minimum ship manoeuvring speedThe Minimum ship manoeuvring speed is defined to be the minimum speed, in kn, which maintainsdirectional control and is consistent with the operating characteristics of the ship.

1.5 Documentation requirementsThe builder shall submit the documentation required by Table 1. The documentation will be reviewed bythe Society as a part of the class contract. This table is applicable for ships with the additional notationHatchcoverless.

Table 1 Documentation requirements

Object Document type Additional description Info

Model test Z261 - Model test report Considering the requirements as laid down in[3.2] FI

Stabilitycalculation B120 - Final stability manual Additional stability case with still water

bending moments for flooded hold condition AP

Fire-extinguishingsystem

G200 - Fixed fire extinguishing systemdocumentation

With additional requirements as laid down in[3.7] AP

2 General requirements for all ships with the class notationHatchcoverless

2.1 Strength requirements in the intact flooded condition

2.1.1 For ships with the class notation Container Ship the vertical hull girder bending strength in intactflooded condition shall comply with Pt.5 Ch.2 Sec.4 [2.6]. For ships with the class notation Multi-purposedry cargo ship or General dry cargo ship the vertical hull girder bending strength in intact floodedcondition shall comply with Pt.5 Ch.1 Sec.4 [5.4].

2.1.2 The still water bending moment Msw-f applied in [2.1.1] shall be taken as the still water bendingmoment for the intact flooded condition. For ships with the class notation Container ship, the intact floodedcondition is given in MSC/Circ.608/Rev.1, Ch.6. For ships with the class notation Multi-purpose dry cargoship or General dry cargo ship the intact flooded condition is given in [3.4]. The still water bendingmoment in the intact flooded condition shall be provided by the designer.

2.1.3 The hull structure shall be considered as intact for the hull capacity calculation.

3 Special requirements for vessels with the class notation Multi-purpose dry cargo ship or General dry cargo ship

3.1 Adaption of MSC/Circ.608/Rev.1 requirementsThe application of the MSC/Circ.608/Rev.1, dated 5 July 1994 "Interim Guideline for Open-TopContainerships" including the deviations giving in this document to vessels other than container ships, needsto be individually agreed with the flag state.Requirements, given in this sub-section [3], shall be considered and replace the related requirements of thecircular.

Part

6 C

hapt

er 5

Sec

tion

2


DNV GL AS

3.2 Model tests for the determination of green water ingress in open cargoholds

3.2.1 Model tests and calculations shall be carried out to provide the Society with

1) Measured data for the maximum hourly rate of ingress of green water likely to be shipped into eachcargo hold.

2) Evaluation of the adequacy of the discharge rates from cargo hold freeing ports (if they are fitted).

3.2.2 The maximum hourly rate of ingress of green water in any one open hold determined from modeltesting should not exceed the hatch opening area multiplied by 400 mm/hour.

3.3 Procedure for model tests

3.3.1 The model experiments shall be carried out in long-crested irregular waves in the following conditions

1) The JONSWAP wave energy spectrum has to be used with the peak enhancement factor of 3.3.2) Significant wave height to be set to 8.5 m.3) The most unfavourable realistic wave period as determined by calculation or previous testing experience

to be used.Guidance note:For head and bow-quartering seas the following peak wave period , [s], can be used:

where:

U = Ship forward speed, in m/s

= is the wave direction (see [3.3.4]), in degree


3.3.2 For ships operating in restricted areas only, the Society may allow other spectra.

3.3.3 The effect of wind generated spray need not be simulated during the tests.

3.3.4 The model experiments shall be carried out for at least the following wave directions based oninternational towing tanks conference conventions:

1) following seas (0 degrees/360 degrees)2) stern-quartering seas (45 degrees/315 degrees)3) beam seas (90 degrees/270 degrees)4) bow-quartering seas (135 degrees/225 degrees)5) head seas (180 degrees).

3.3.5 The model experiments shall be carried out for at least the following ship speeds:

1) maximum sustained speed in head seas and bow-quartering seas2) minimum ship manoeuvring speed in stern-quartering seas and following seas3) zero ship speed (dead ship condition) in beam seas.

3.3.6 The Society may require additional tests.

Part

6 C

hapt

er 5

Sec

tion

2


DNV GL AS

3.3.7 The model experiments shall be carried out with a self-propelled, unrestrained model without thenecessity to change course. The time duration of each experiment shall correspond to at least one hour in fullscale.

3.3.8 The loading condition used for the tests shall correspond at least to the maximum loaded draughtwith level trim. If operational trim values differ substantially from level trim or are considered in the damagestability calculation, additional trim values shall be included in the model test program.

3.3.9 The KG value selected for the test in all wave direction specified in [3.3.4] shall correspond to theresonance of the wave peak period with the natural roll period in beam seas. Further runs in the three worstwave directions out of the full test shall be taken with the KG value at the GM limit curve valid for the opentop condition.

3.3.10 For each test condition, the cargo hold which is meant to be open to sea shall be simulated as havingno cargo. Cargo placed on deck or reaching outboard of the open cargo hold shall not be used as a means toprevent shipping of water into an empty cargo hold. Rain covers for the open holds shall not be used in themodel tests.

3.3.11 In addition to the usual parameters measured (ship motions, ship speed, relative motions, rudderangles, etc.) the volume of water entering all open cargo holds shall be measured for each experiment. Thequantities of water taken aboard the model shall be removed and measured after each test run so that themetacentric height, moment of inertia and displacement in the following tests are not appreciably disturbedby any accumulation of water from the previous tests.

3.3.12 Where freeing ports are fitted, an additional model test to comply with [3.2.1] shall be conducted ata draught which corresponds to the condition of the ship fully loaded with cargo and open holds flooded tothe static equilibrium level with freeing ports open. A hold permeability of 90% by volume shall be assumed.Tests shall be conducted at zero speed in beam seas at the wave peak period corresponding to the resonancewith the natural roll period.

3.3.13 The Society may require an observer to witness the tests.

3.4 Intact stability

3.4.1 Where cargo hold freeing ports are fitted, they shall be considered closed for the purpose ofdetermining the flooding angle, provided that the reliable and effective control of closing of these freeingports is designed satisfactory to the flag state administration.

3.4.2 All open cargo holds shall be filled with a water level of 2m above tank top with a density of 1 t/m3. The stability of the ship in the intact condition shall meet the survival criterion (with factor s=1) of theapplicable damage stability requirement.

Guidance note:For vessels without a damage stability requirement the survival criterion (s=1) of the applicable SOLAS regulation shall be used.


3.4.3 For the condition with flooded holds and an intact ship the free surfaces may be determined asfollows:

— The holds are treated as empty.— The seawater will not pour out during heeling.— The free surface correction to initial metacentric height shall be based on the inertia moment of liquid

surface at 5° of heeling angle divided by displacement.— The correction to righting lever shall be made on the basis of real shifting moment of water in the cargo

hold.

Part

6 C

hapt

er 5

Sec

tion

2


DNV GL AS

3.4.4 Intermediate conditions of hold flooding should be investigated.

3.5 Damage stability

3.5.1 For open-top multi purpose or general dry cargo ships subject to compliance with the applicabledamage stability requirements, the permeability for the cargo holds shall be 0.90 for the partial andsubdivision draught, and 0.95 for the lightest service draught. The coamings of open-top holds shall beconsidered as downflooding areas.

3.6 Cargo hold bilge dewatering system and freeing ports

3.6.1 The bilge systems shall be designed for dewatering the hold at the required capacity and shallincorporate sufficient redundancy features, so that the system will be fully operational and capable ofdewatering the hold spaces at the required capacity in the event of failure of any one system component,including the piping system.

3.6.2 The bilge pumping system shall have a required capacity to pump, whichever is the greater:

1) The maximum hourly rate of green water shipped in seagoing conditions as established by thecomprehensive model testing specified.

2) An amount equal to rainfall of 100 mm/hour regardless of the installation of rain covers.3) The amount of shipped green water measured during the seakeeping model tests for the dead ship

condition in beam sees, multiplied by safety factor 2.4) 133% of the amount of water required for fire-fighter purposes in the largest hold.5) An amount equal to the capacity required for ships with closed cargo holds.

3.6.3 The pumping of hold bilges shall be possible by at least three bilge pumps connected to a ring pipingsystem while each side is capable of being isolated from the pumps and from each other. Remote controlledvalves to be used.

3.6.4 Two bilge suctions (each with individual isolation valve) shall be fitted in each bilge well.

3.6.5 At least one of these pumps shall have a capacity of not less than the required capacity as defined in[3.6.2] and shall be dedicated to bilge and ballast service only. It shall be located in such a way that it willnot be affected by a fire or other casualty to the space containing the pumps required in [3.6.6] below or thespace containing the main source of power and shall be supplied from the emergency switchboard.

3.6.6 The combined output of at least two further pumps shall not be less than the required capacity asdefined in [3.6.2]. These pumps shall be supplied from the main source of electrical or any other source ofpower independent of the emergency switchboard.

3.6.7 The bilge pumping system shall be arranged to be effective within the limiting angles of inclinationrequired for the emergency source of electrical power.

3.6.8 All bilge wells of open cargo holds shall be fitted with high level alarms. The alarms shall annunciate inthe machinery spaces and the manned control station and be independent from bilge pump controls.

3.6.9 Bilge valve to be remote controlled from engine control room or other suitable location, provided withindications for open or closed valve position. In case volumetric valve position indicators are used the controlsystem shall trigger alarm in case of malfunctions (e.g. valve control pipe leakage, blocking of valve, etc.)For operation of valves please see generally the Pt.4 Ch.6 Sec.3, esp. item Pt.4 Ch.6 Sec.3 [1.2].

Part

6 C

hapt

er 5

Sec

tion

2


DNV GL AS

3.6.10 Cargo hold bilge wells shall be specially designed to ensure discharge of water in all conditions. Thewells shall be readily accessible for cleaning. To prevent loss of suction the bilge wells shall have a minimumcapacity of 0,4m³ and designed with at least two chambers, separated by a grid.

3.6.11 Special attention is drawn particularly to strainer plates and drums. The perforations shall be at least25mm is diameter as the hold is not designed for transport of bulk cargo. Hence, sealing of bilge well strainerplates is not accepted.

3.6.12 Alternative arrangements of the dewatering system may be accepted if equivalent level of safety isprovided.

3.6.13 If freeing ports are provided to prevent the accumulation of water above the level defined in [3.3.12]they should be subject to the following:

1) The number, size and location of the freeing ports should be sufficient at each side of the open hold todewater at least 125% of the most serious water ingress to be considered.

2) Efficient means of closure to prevent the accidental ingress of water should be provided. Such meansshould be operated from above the freeboard deck. In case of a ship operating in areas where icing islikely to occur, suitable arrangements and procedures shall be established to enable the freeing ports tooperate efficiently under such conditions.

3.7 Fire protection requirements3.7.1 General

3.7.1.1 For carriage of dangerous goods and/or combustible cargo, fixed fire safety arrangements shallcomply with the requirements as specified in [3.7.2] and [3.7.3].

3.7.1.2 Paragraph [3.7.1.1] is not applicalble, if no dangerous goods and only non-combustible materials(cargoes) are carrried in the open-top multi purpose or general dry cargo ship hold(s).

Guidance note:A definition for «non-combustible materials» is given in the 2010 FTP Code, Annex 2, paragraph 1.


3.7.2 Fixed fire-extinguishing arrangements

3.7.2.1 Cargo spaces of open-top multi purpose or general dry cargo ships shall be provided with a fixedpower monitor system consisting of at least two water monitors located on deck, one forward and one aft ofthe open hold.

3.7.2.2 The min. capacity of each monitor shall be selected from Table 2. With that output, each location ofthe cargo hold shall be capable of being reached with a rigid jet of water at the required pressure dischargedfrom at least one monitor.

Table 2 Minimum water monitor capacity

Length of cargo space Min. water monitor capacity

up to 80 m 2000 l/min



> 120 m to be agreed with the Society

Part

6 C

hapt

er 5

Sec

tion

2


DNV GL AS

3.7.2.3 The distance from the monitor to the farthest extremity of the protected area forward of eachmonitor (mid cargo space) shall be not more than 75 % of the monitor throw in still air conditions.

3.7.2.4 The monitors may be supplied by the ship's fire main provided that capacity and pressure of the firepumps and the fire main diameter are sufficient for a simultaneous operation of one monitor at the requiredoutput and the required number of jets of water discharged from the ship's fire hoses.

3.7.2.5 The monitors shall preferably be positioned on the vessel's center line and be so located that theyhave a free line for the water jets over the horizontal area covered. The monitor movement shall be asfollows:

1) The horizontal angular movement shall be sufficient to cover the protected area forward of each monitor.2) The necessary angular movement in the vertical direction shall be determined by the required throw

height of the water jet taking account of the maximum stowage height of cargo to be loaded in the cargospace.

3) The monitors shall be lockable in any position within these ranges.

3.7.2.6 The monitors and their foundations shall be of strong construction and capable of withstanding theloads due to recoil action and sea conditions normally encountered in service.

3.7.2.7 The monitors shall be of approved type and be made of seawater resistant material.

3.7.2.8 Each monitor shall be equipped with a discharge nozzle of dual purpose spray/jet type.

3.7.2.9 The monitor controls and the associated control system shall be designed as follows:

1) The monitors and their controls and any associated shutoff valves shall be provided with remoteoperating capability and local/manual control.

2) The remote control shall be arranged in a safe area, e.g. in a control room or at a control position with agood general view to the protected area.

3) The open and closed indication of remotely controlled valves if fitted, shall be indicated at the remotecontrol position.

4) Failure in the remote control system shall initiate an alarm at the remote control position.5) The monitor control circuits shall be independent from each other.

3.7.2.10 If non gas-tight tween deck panels (movable stowage platforms) are used, the area underneath thepanels shall be protected with water spray nozzles. The system design shall follow the principles specified inSOLAS II-2/19.3.1.3.

3.7.2.11 Upon installation and prior to the vessel's delivery, an operational test of the monitors in thepresence of the Societies attending Surveyor shall be conducted verifying the remote/local control functionsand the required throw length and throw height of the water jet.

3.7.3 Fire detection arrangement

3.7.3.1 If the open-top multi purpose or general dry cargo ship hold is designed for carriage of dangerousgoods, a fixed fire detection and fire alarm system shall be provided, taking into account the holdconfiguration and ventilation arrangement, see Sec.10.

3.8 Dangerous goods

3.8.1 Dangerous goods for which "stowage on deck only" is specified in the IMDG Code shall not be carriedin or vertically above the open-top hold.

Part

6 C

hapt

er 5

Sec

tion

2


DNV GL AS

3.8.2 Dangerous goods other than those described in [3.8.1] shall not be carried in or vertically above theopen-top cargo hold unless the hold is in full compliance with SOLAS II-2, Reg. 19 as amended, applicable toenclosed cargo spaces as appropriate for the cargo carried, see Sec.10.

Segregation of dangerous goods3.8.3 The stowage and segregation requirements of the IMDG Code as amended shall be applied.

3.9 Solid bulk cargoesTransport of solid bulk cargoes without weathertight hatch covers is normally not permitted but can beconsidered individually, see Sec.10.

Part

6 C

hapt

er 5

Sec

tion

3


DNV GL AS

SECTION 3 PERMANENTLY INSTALLED CRANES - CRANE

1 General

1.1 IntroductionThe additional class notation Crane sets requirements for a design standard for permanently installed craneson vessels.

1.2 ScopeThe scope for additional class notation Crane provides requirements for cranes with respect to: safety andfunctionality, devices for locking the crane in a parked position (vessel at sea) and for supporting the cranestructure. Three terms are used in this section to describe the intended use of the crane, these are: Offshorecrane - for cargo handling outside the vessel while at sea: Shipboard crane - for cargo handling in andoutside of the vessel, in harbour or sheltered waters; Platform crane - for cargo handling on offshore vessels.For vessels with more than one crane installed, class notation Crane may be applied to selected cranes only.The selected cranes will be identified in the Appendix to the Class Certificate.

1.3 ApplicationThe additional class notation Crane applies to the selected cranes installed on vessels. See Pt.3 Ch.1regarding additional requirements for the supporting structure, and Pt.5 Ch.10 Sec.2, concerning stability.DNVGL-ST-0377 Standard for shipboard lifting appliances and DNVGL-ST-0378 Standard for offshore andplatform lifting appliances cover requirements for preventing overturning and sliding. Vessels found to be incompliance with the requirements in this section may be assigned the additional class notation Crane.

1.4 Definitions1.4.1

Table 1 Definitions and abbreviation

Term Definition or abbreviation

LF length of the ship as defined in the International Convention of Load Lines

offshore crane a lifting appliance on board a vessel intended for handling of loads outside the vessel while atopen sea

shipboard crane a lifting appliance on board a ship intended for handling loads within and outside the vesselwhile in harbour and within the vessel while at sea

platform crane a lifting appliance on board an offshore unit intended for handling loads within and outside thevessel while in harbour and within the vessel while at sea

1.5 Certification1.5.1 For cranes that class notation Crane shall be applied to, the builder shall request the manufacturers to ordercertification as described in Table 2

Part

6 C

hapt

er 5

Sec

tion

3


DNV GL AS

Table 2 Certification requirements

Object Certificate type Issued by Certification standard* Additional description

Offshorecrane PC Society DNVGL-ST-0378 Product certificate CG2, see

DNVGL-ST-0378

Platformcrane PC Society DNVGL-ST-0378 Product certificate CG2, see

DNVGL-ST-0378

Shipboardcrane PC Society DNVGL-ST-0377 Product certificate CG2, see

DNVGL-ST-0377

*Unless otherwise specified the certification standard is the rules.

1.5.2 For definition of certification types, see Pt.1 Ch.3.

1.6 Documentation

1.6.1 Documentation shall be submitted as required by Table 3.


Object Documentation type Additional description Info

Cranes Z030 - Arrangement plan

Including:

— main dimensions— limiting positions of movable parts— location onboard during operation and in

parked position.

FI

AP = For approval; FI = For information

Guidance note:Documentation requirements to hull support of the cranes are covered in Pt.3 and electrical power supply are covered in Pt.4 Ch.8.


1.6.2 For general requirements to documentation, including definition of the info codes, see Pt.1 Ch.3 Sec.2.

1.6.3 For a full definition of the documentation types, see Pt.1 Ch.3 Sec.3.

2 Design loads

2.1 GeneralIn addition to the specific design loads given in DNVGL-ST-0378 Standard for offshore and platformlifting appliances and DNVGL-ST-0377 Standard for lifting appliances, loads due to ship motions shall beconsidered. Design values of linear and angular accelerations are given in Pt.3 Ch.1 Sec.4.

Part

6 C

hapt

er 5

Sec

tion

3


DNV GL AS

3 Overturning and sliding

3.1 OverturningDevices shall be provided for all cranes in parked position (vessel at sea) to be anchored to the hull structure.The anchoring devices shall be designed to withstand inertia forces due to ship motions and loads due toout of service winds. The strength calculations shall be based on accepted principles of statics and strengthof materials, applying the safety factors as stipulated for load case III in the DNVGL-ST-0378, or, loadcombinations III in DNVGL-ST-0377.

3.2 Sliding

3.2.1 In parked position (vessel at sea) sliding is preferably to be prevented by means of anchoring devices.See [3.1]. If sliding is intended to be prevented by friction between rail and wheels only, the coefficient offriction shall not be taken greater than 0.15.

3.2.2 For a crane in operation, sliding shall not to take place unless the forces parallel to rails exceed 1.3times the values for load case II in the DNVGL-ST-0378, or, load combinations II in DNVGL-ST-0377. Whenthis is not satisfied, sliding shall be prevented by a device locking the crane in position. The strength of thisdevice shall be based on the safety factors for load case II/load combination II, as referred to above.

4 Testing

4.1 GeneralAfter completed installation onboard, functional testing and load testing of the crane shall be carried out asspecified in the DNVGL-ST-0378, or DNVGL-ST-0377.

5 Stability

5.1 Stability requirements for heavy lift operationsThe stability for vessels with length LLL of 24 metres and above for which lifting operations is one of thefunctions , shall be in compliance with the crane criteria given in Pt.5 Ch.10 Sec.2 [4.1], Pt.5 Ch.10 Sec.2[4.2] and Pt.5 Ch.10 Sec.2 [4.3].The crane criteria shall be applied when the maximum heeling arm created by the crane and its load exceeds0.10 m at any operational displacement.For lifting conditions carried out within clearly defined limitations as set forth by Pt.5 Ch.10 Sec.2 [4.4] thealternative intact and damage stability criteria as set forth in Pt.5 Ch.10 Sec.2 [4.4] and Pt.5 Ch.10 Sec.2[4.5] may be applied, subject to prior consent by the Society.

Part

6 C

hapt

er 5

Sec

tion

4


DNV GL AS

SECTION 4 ADDITIONAL FIRE SAFETY - F

1 General

1.1 IntroductionThe additional class notation F introduces preventive measures, and other measures to reduce consequencesof fires beyond that of the normal regulations. Such measures include: additional firefighters' outfits,restricted use of combustible materials, prevention of oil leakages, subdivision of spaces, enhanced firedetection, alarm and extinguishing systems, more attention to emergency escape and ventilation, colour TVmonitoring and specific requirements for a minimum number of communication radios for firefighters andfirefighting teams.

1.2 ScopeThe scope for additional class notation F together with chosen qualifier(s) provides additional fire safetymeasures in accommodation spaces, machinery spaces or cargo areas through preventive measures, as wellas measures for reducing the consequences of fire. Ships can be assigned one or a combination of differentqualifiers as defined in Table 1.

Table 1 Qualifier scope

Additionalclass

notationQualifier Scope

(A) Additional measures for accommodation spaces

(M) Additional measures for machinery spacesF

(C) Additional measures for deck and cargo areas

1.3 ApplicationThe additional class notation F applies to cargo ships or passenger ships that comply with the SOLASregulations. The requirements in this section are supplementary to those given in SOLAS Ch. II-2, andfurther compliance shall be shown in the documentation required by Pt.4 Ch.11. Ships built and equipped inaccordance with all of the requirements of this section will be given the additional class notation: F(A, M, C).

1.4 Class notations

1.4.1 Ships with accommodation built and equipped in accordance with the requirements in [1] and [2] willbe given the additional class notation F(A).

1.4.2 Ships with machinery spaces built and equipped in accordance with the requirements in [1] and [3] willbe given the additional class notation F(M).

1.4.3 Ships with deck and cargo areas built and equipped in accordance with the requirements in [1] and [4]will be given the additional class notation F(C).

1.4.4 Ships built and equipped in accordance with all the requirements of this section will be given theadditional class notation F(A, M, C).

Part

6 C

hapt

er 5

Sec

tion

4


DNV GL AS

1.5 Documentation requirements

1.5.1 Compliance with the requirements in this section shall be shown in the documentation required byPt.4 Ch.11 (using the entry for SOLAS ships where the Society is authorised to issue safety certificates). Inaddition to documentation as required by Table 2 shall be submitted for approval or incorporated into plansrequired by Pt.4 Ch.11.

Table 2 Documentation required


Additional class notation and qualifier F(A):

Accommodation spaces M070 - List of combustiblematerials AP

Additional class notation and qualifier F(M):

Fire observation televisionmonitoring system Z030 - Arrangement plan Location of TV cameras. AP

Fire preventionarrangements Z100 - Specification Typical details and methods for shielding

of couplings in oil piping systems. AP

Fire preventionarrangements Z241 – Measurement report Infrared thermoscanning report, with

corrective measures. AP

Additional class notation and qualifier F(C):

Cargo holds fireextinguishing system

G200 - Fixed fireextinguishing systemdocumentation

For cargo holds, as installed. AP

Cargo tank deck fireextinguishing system


For cargo deck areas, as installed. AP

External surface protectionwater spraying system


Arrangement and capacity. AP




1.5.4 ManualsManuals for the fire-extinguishing systems, fire-fighting appliances and fire detection and alarm systems shallbe kept in one place e.g., wheelhouse or engine control room. The manuals shall include instructions for useof the systems, periodical maintenance and specification of periodical tests.

1.6 Firefighter's outfit

1.6.1 Ships with one or combinations of the additional class notations F(A), F(M), F(C) shall have at least 4sets of firefighter's outfit as specified in Ch.3 of Fire Safety Systems (FSS) Code. Additional requirements are

Part

6 C

hapt

er 5

Sec

tion

4


DNV GL AS

given for some ship types under the F(C) notation in [4]. The firefighter's outfit defined in these rules neednot be additional to those required by SOLAS/II-2/A/17.

1.6.2 Each of the breathing apparatus shall be provided with cylinders of 1,800 litres capacity. The totalweight of one apparatus (including cylinder filled with air, valves and mask) shall not exceed 12.0 kg. Twospare cylinders shall be provided for each apparatus. All cylinders, apparatus and valves shall be of the sametype. Apparatus with less capacity and less weight may be accepted if deemed more suitable for the intendedservice and if more spares are provided.

1.6.3 The firefighter's outfit (protective clothing, boots, gloves, helmet and breathing apparatus) shallcomply with the EN and ISO standards defined by the EU marine equipment directive (MED approved).

1.6.4 A high-pressure compressor suitable for filling of the cylinders for the breathing apparatus shall beinstalled. The compressor shall be driven by a separate diesel engine or from the emergency power plantand shall be placed in an easily accessible and safe place onboard. The capacity of the compressor shall be atleast 75 litres/minute.

Guidance note:When considering the compressor location it should be kept in mind that, when a fire has broken out onboard, the compressorshould be operable and that the air to be compressed should be sufficiently clean for breathing purposes.


1.6.5 The firefighter’s outfits shall be divided between two fire stations placed at a safe distance from eachother. The fire stations shall be clearly marked and shall have access from open deck. Both stations shall bereadily accessible and located within the main accommodation block, preferably with one station on the portside and one on the starboard side. The stations shall have minimum A-0 fire integrity towards other spaces.

1.6.6 The arrangement of the fire stations shall be such that all the equipment has its own place and iseasily accessible and ready for immediate use. There shall be arrangements for hanging up protectiveclothing and other equipment, which should be stored in a suspended position.

2 Accommodation - F(A)

2.1 General2.1.1 PurposeThe purpose of the requirements for fire technical subdivision of the accommodation is:

— to prevent a fire in any other part of the ship from spreading to the accommodation— to prevent a fire in the accommodation from spreading to other parts of the accommodation (within the

time limits established for the concerned material's fire-technical class)— to reduce the use of combustible material— to provide rapid detection and safe escape from the cabins and corridors.

2.1.2 ApplicationPassenger ships having the F(A) notation need only comply with:

— [2.2] Restricted use of combustible materials— [2.5] Ventilation— [2.9] Other items

.

Cargo ships having the F(A) notation shall comply with all subsections

Part

6 C

hapt

er 5

Sec

tion

4


DNV GL AS

2.2 Restricted use of combustible materials

2.2.1 Curtains and other suspended textile materials shall have resistance to flame as given in Part 7 of thefire test procedures (FTP) Code.

2.2.2 Furniture and other items in stairways and corridors shall only be accepted when fixed to the ship'sstructure, does not obstruct the escape ways and complies with FTP Code, Part 8.

2.2.3 Bedding components shall comply with FTP Code, Part 9.

2.3 Escape

2.3.1 Dead end corridors are prohibited. Recesses are accepted where the depth does not exceed the width.

2.3.2 Spaces exceeding 30 m2 shall be provided with at least two independent escape routes. The primaryescape route shall be a door directly to a corridor or an open deck. Windows that are of adequate size andprovided with ladders may be used as the second means of escape for spaces between 30 m2 and 50 m2,whereas the secondary means of escape for spaces above 50 m2 shall consists of doors, corridors andstairways being independent of the primary escape.

2.4 Fire Integrity

2.4.1 Construction method IC shall be used (see SOLAS Ch.II-2/9.2.3.2).

2.4.2 Corridors in the accommodation shall be divided by self-closing class B-15 doors at a maximumdistance of 20 m from each other. When transverse corridors and longitudinal corridors are connected to eachother, self-closing class B-15 doors are also to be provided if the total corridor length exceeds 20 m.

2.4.3 All doors fitted in corridors serving cabins and/or public spaces shall be of self-closing type. Servicehatches need not to comply with this requirement.

2.4.4 If a door required to be self-closing is equipped with an approved hold back device, this shallautomatically release the door when the fire alarm is sounded.

2.4.5 All decks in the accommodation spaces, including corridors, shall be of minimum class A-0.

2.4.6 All bulkheads and decks separating the accommodation from all machinery spaces (fire category6 and 7), cargo holds and ballast and cargo pump rooms, as applicable, shall be of class A-60. Thisrequirement does not apply to fire category 7 spaces located within the accommodation unit and only servingaccommodation and service spaces, (examples are air condition machinery spaces and service trunks servingonly cabins and similar spaces).

2.4.7 All bulkhead and decks enclosing the drying rooms and laundries shall be of minimum class A-0. Thedoors, ventilation system and other penetrations shall be of A-class standard. The exhaust ducts shall haveservice hatches for cleaning and serve no other spaces but can be connected to the common accommodationair condition unit.

2.4.8 All divisional bulkheads, linings, deckhead in accommodation spaces, service spaces and controlstations shall be of at least class B-15. The sanitary unit can be accepted as part of the cabin. Divisions ofminimum A-0 class will in this context be considered to be equivalent to B-15.

Part

6 C

hapt

er 5

Sec

tion

4


DNV GL AS

2.5 Ventilation

2.5.1 On cargo vessel corridors serving cabins and/or public spaces and stairway enclosures shall be servedby an independent ventilation fan and duct system (exhaust and supply) which shall not serve any otherspaces. This corridor and stairway ventilation system shall be designed to provide a slight overpressurein the corridors and stairways compared with other spaces. Louvers in doors are accepted to balance theoverpressure in the system. The nominal air flow shall be balanced so that normally there should be no netair flow though these louvers.

2.5.2 On passenger vessels corridors shall be served by an independent ventilation fan and duct system(exhaust and supply) which shall not serve any other spaces in the ventilation systems. The ventilationsystem shall provide overpressure in the corridors (typically 50 Pa) compared to other spaces in theaccommodation, except stairways. Please observe also the SOLAS requirement for an independent system forstaircases (SOLAS Ch. II-2/9.7).

2.5.3 For all vessel the corridor ventilation system shall be designed as a passive smoke extraction systemwith supply on a low level and at a low velocity (typically < 1.0 m per second) whereas exhaust shall beprovided at ceiling level. Other designs are accepted when documented safe by calculations (standard fireload and awareness time 120 seconds).

2.5.4 The smoke control systems for corridors and staircases are intended to run in a fire until all personshave escaped the area (this is an operation procedure and does not place additional requirements on thecomponents of the ventilation systems).

2.6 Fire detection and alarm system2.6.1 GeneralIn all accommodation, service spaces and control stations, an approved automatic fire detection and alarmsystem of addressable type shall be installed in accordance with Pt.4 Ch.9. Optical smoke detectors shallbe used, except that heat detectors shall be installed in refrigerated chambers and in any saunas. Galleysshall be provided with smoke detectors in preparation parts and heat detectors above deep fat fryers, steambaths, ovens and similar equipment.

2.6.2 The fire detection system shall be of the addressable type.

2.6.3 Detectors fitted in cabins, when activated, shall also be capable of emitting, or cause to be emitted,an audible alarm within the space where they are located. The alarm shall be immediate and local for thecabin in question. PA / alarm system for a larger area shall not be used unless alarm can be routed to asingle cabin whereas designs extending alarms to a suitable number of adjacent cabins and/or corridoroutside cabin affected will be accepted.

2.7 Portable fire extinguishers2.7.1 Number and locationThe required extinguishers shall be 12 kg powder or 9 litre foam portable extinguishers of an approved type.

2.7.2 Two portable extinguishers shall be provided in corridors or stairways at each deck. In addition, atleast one such extinguisher shall be installed in all pantries, laundries, crew day rooms and similar spaces. Atleast two extinguishers of suitable type for deep fat fryers shall be provided for the galley.

Part

6 C

hapt

er 5

Sec

tion

4


DNV GL AS

2.8 Fire main system

2.8.1 When planning location of fire hydrants, the fact that the fire shall be fought from the outsideshall be considered. Hydrants and hose equipment are shall be located outside the entrance doors to theaccommodation. Size of fire hoses shall in general be 38 mm but other sizes ,may be approved on a case-by-case basis considering locations, spaces served and the number of fire fighters dedicated to this task.

2.9 Other items

2.9.1 The electric power supply to deep fat fryers within the galley shall be disconnected when the fixedfire extinguishing system protecting this item is release (see SOLAS Ch. II-2 Reg.10.6.4). This disconnectionshall not be automatically reset when the fixed fire extinguishing system is turned off, a manual action isrequired for this purpose.

3 Machinery spaces - F(M)

3.1 General3.1.1 Emergency escape and accessAt least one of the escape routes from the engine control room shall be independent of the engine room.

3.1.2 Other machinery spaces (fire category 7) and workshops not being part of engine room (fire category9) on cargo ships and similar spaces on passenger ships shall have minimum one escape route beingindependent of machinery spaces of category A.

3.1.3 VentilationAt least one of the machinery space fans shall in addition to the main power supply also have a supply fromthe emergency source of power in order to purge the machinery spaces after a fire incident. This fan shall beof the reversible type.

Guidance note:Hold time after a fire will depend on type of extinguishing media and how long the space has been on fire. In case only a gas fireextinguishing system has been used, typical hold time will be several hours.


3.1.4 All ventilation and air inlets shall be fitted with dampers or other closing arrangements, which canbe secured in a closed position. Indicators showing the open or closed position of the dampers shall befitted adjacent to the controls. The dampers shall be manoeuvrable from open deck or any space separatedfrom the space served by A-60 and with access directly from open deck. For passenger ships, this will bein addition to the controls arranged at the safety centre if arranged below weather deck. The hand lever ofdampers is not to be located more than 2 m above the deck.

Guidance note:The aim of these requirements is to isolate a fire to the space it originated and to prevent supply of oxygen.


3.1.5 All dampers and fire dampers enclosing the engine room shall be made of a material that is corrosionresistant in the marine environment, without the need for coatings or galvanizing, such as stainless steel of atype suitable for the marine environment.

Part

6 C

hapt

er 5

Sec

tion

4


DNV GL AS

3.1.6 Centralised fire control stationControls for release of the local extinguishing system, stop of fuel pumps and ventilation fans shall be locatedin a manned station (typically 16 hours a day). This station can be the engine control room or a mannedsafety centre. The stations shall be separated from the engine room with minimum smoke tight divisions withaccess and escape being independent of the engine room.

3.1.7 The CCTV system required by these rules and a fire detection slave panel station shall be located inthis station, in the vicinity of the controls installed in the station specified in [3.1.6].

3.1.8 Controls for release main extinguishing system and closing of oil fuel valves shall be readily accessiblebut can be located outside the centralised fire control station.

3.1.9 Ships accepted to operate with unmanned engine room shall in addition to the above have controls forrelease of the local extinguishing system also in the wheelhouse.

3.1.10 In cases where the division between engine control room and engine room is of A-class, the aboverequirement can be combined with the control positions required by SOLAS, as applicable.

3.1.11 Emergency fire pump and fire hosesThe emergency fire pump shall have a capacity of not less than 72 m3/hour. If the emergency fire pumpserves other critical safety consumers, the capacity shall be increased accordingly. The pump shall providea minimum pressure of 5.0 bar for the hydrants in the vicinity of machinery spaces with two water jets inoperation.

3.1.12 The space containing the emergency fire pump and its mover shall be well ventilated and providedwith emergency light. The pump's prime mover shall be provided with heating unless the space in which it islocated has adequate heating facilities.The emergency fire pump shall be tested with power served only from the emergency generator. The pumpshall be started and run up to full flow with all other required consumers being connected to the emergencygenerator.

3.1.13 During start of the fire pump, it has to be ensured that voltage and frequency variations arekept within the limits given in Pt.4 Ch.8 Sec.2 [1.2.4]. Special considerations should be made when themotor driving the emergency fire pump has a power rating exceeding 30% of the rating of the emergencygenerator. Means to limit voltage peaks when starting the pump may be required.

3.1.14 The size of fire hoses intended for use in machinery spaces shall be chosen based on the number offire fighters dedicated to this task (38 mm hoses are recommended).

3.1.15 Protection of engine room casings, passenger shipsCasings on passenger ship carrying more than 36 passengers shall be assigned category 11 if separated fromthe engine rooms.

3.1.16 Where multiple plastic pipes are installed within casings on passenger ship carrying more than 36passengers, these plastic pipes shall be covered with a fire retardant material. The surface of the plasticpipes with the cover material shall be of low flame spread type according to a relevant standard (IMO FTPCode Part 5 or ASTM D3806 or DIN 4102, B2 or any equivalent standard).

3.2 Oil systems3.2.1 GeneralThe term oil system means systems for fuel oils, thermal oils, lubricating oils and hydraulic oils.

3.2.2 The arrangement of oil tanks, pipelines for oil under pressure, oil processing machinery etc. shall besuch that the danger of leakage and ignition is reduced to a minimum.

Part

6 C

hapt

er 5

Sec

tion

4


DNV GL AS

3.2.3 Separation of risk objectsThe following installations shall be located in space separated from the spaces containing combustion enginesand oil fired boilers:

— oil fired thermal oil heaters— fuel oil purifiers— incinerators.

3.2.4 The above rooms shall be provided with fixed main fire extinguishing system as per [3.6.1] and a localextinguishing system as per [3.5.1].

3.2.5 Hydraulic power aggregates, regardless of size, accepted within the engine room shall be provided withshielding plates where facing major ignition hazards, such as combustion engines (less than 10 m away) andelectric motors and similar (less than 3 m away).

3.2.6 Shielding of oil piping within machinery spaces of category A

1) All flanges and couplings shall be provided with steel sheet screens, with small diameter bore at bottomto indicate leaks and divert leakage to safe area. The requirement does not apply to flanges and couplingeffectively screened from ignition sources by other means, for instance tight floor plating.

Guidance note:Certified tape is not accepted as an equivalent.


2) Oil piping located within a machinery space of category A shall not be laid above or adjacent to potentialignition points unless arranged in double wall piping with safe drain from the annular space.

3.2.7 Visual inspection of oil leaksThe tank top or floor plating below oil piping located within a machinery space of category A shall be paintedwhite or with a light color to ensure easy visual detection.

3.3 Hot surfaces3.3.1 Infrared scanningAll engines, exhaust ducts, steam ducts (if any) and similar equipment, where hot surfaces above 220°C maybe expected, shall be examined by an infrared scanning camera during normal operation of the machinery(minimum 85% load).

3.3.2 A report shall be issued to the plan approval centre and the local surveyor, identifying all items withtemperatures above 220°C. The infrared scanning shall be carried out by certified personnel or in co-operation with a surveyor. The calibration of equipment to be documented and the chosen emissivity factorshall be justified.

3.3.3 Corrective actions shall be taken for all surfaces with temperatures above 220°C. Such actions mayinclude improved insulation or improved heat dissipation (cooling ribs and or similar).

3.3.4 The corrective actions may be verified by manual equipment.

3.3.5 The infrared scanning shall be repeated on an annual basis when the ship is in operation.

3.3.6 Insulation of hot surfaces

1) All insulation shall be made of non-combustible insulation protected by steel sheet cladding, orequivalent solution.

2) The cladding shall be easy to dismantle and assemble wherever inspection of the protected equipment isnecessary.

Part

6 C

hapt

er 5

Sec

tion

4


DNV GL AS

3) The intersection between the ducting system and complex geometries can be accepted with foiled facedinsulation provided that these areas are limited. For steam systems the steel sheet cladding shall only berequired for areas where oil leakage can be expected.

4) The protective plating, and foiled faced insulation when applicable, shall be designed to prevent any oilon its surface reaching the underlying insulation and potential ignition points.

Guidance note:Using positive overlap is an acceptable solution to prevent oil penetrating through the hot surface insulation/shielding:


3.4 Fire detection and confirmation3.4.1 Fire detectionThe requirements in SOLAS and Ch.3 Sec.1 E for ships with periodically unattended machinery space shall becomplied with for all ships with F(M) class.

3.4.2 Both machinery spaces of category A (fire category 6) and other machinery spaces (fire category 7)shall be covered by a detection system. For passenger ships, auxiliary machinery spaces (fire category 10and 11) shall also be covered by the detection system.

3.4.3 Fire detectors of more than one type shall be used for machinery spaces of category A. Smokedetectors shall be provided throughout the space as per FSS Code. In addition, flame detectors shall cover allengines, heated fuel oil separators, oil fired boilers and similar equipment.Each flame detector shall cover maximum two adjacent engines and in no case a larger coverage area thanthat approved for the detector in question. Only approved flame detectors of infrared type shall be used (UVis not considered to be equivalent).The response time (central unit scanning time) from when any detector(s) initiates an alarm, to this alarmcondition is reported at the central unit, shall not exceed 5 seconds.Casings on passenger ship carrying more than 36 passengers shall be protected by IR flame detectorscovering scrubbers and areas containing plastic pipes whereas optical smoke detectors with smoke collectionplates, minimum 500 mm in diameter, shall cover as a minimum every second deck. The smoke detectorsshall have spacing and coverage area in accordance with the IMO FSS Code.The above applies also to casings being separated from the engine room.

3.4.4 Any workshop shall be provided smoke detectors connected to a timer function that will automaticallyreset after not more than 20 minutes. In addition, heat detector(s) not connected to this timer shall beprovided at suitable locations.

Part

6 C

hapt

er 5

Sec

tion

4


DNV GL AS

3.4.5 TV monitoring systemA colour TV monitoring system shall cover all engines with rated power above 375 kW, heated fuel oilseparators, oil fired boilers and all oil fired equipment, except for the emergency generator which need not tobe provided with this system. Monitors shall be available in a manned control station or in an engine controlroom.The casing shall be covered by the CCTV system on passenger ships carrying more than 36 passengers. Thisalso applies to casings being separated from the engine room.

3.5 Local extinguishing systems3.5.1 GeneralA local application system in accordance with SOLAS Ch. II-2, Reg.10.5.6 and IMO MSC/Circ.1387 shall beinstalled. Spaces identified in [3.2.3] shall also be protected.

3.5.2 The local application system and the main fire extinguishing system shall in addition to the specificrules applicable to each system comply with the following requirements:

— the local application system and the main fire extinguishing system shall be independent of each otherand not have common components, and

— at least one of the systems shall be fully operable even in a situation where all power supply from thespace on fire is not available and the emergency power system is out of operation.

3.5.3 The requirement addressed in [3.5.2] shall be met by accumulators having the extinguishing mediastored under sufficient pressure at all times. These accumulators shall be provided in addition to the pumpserving the fire extinguishing system under normal conditions.An arrangement where pumps driven by dedicated diesel engines or ships having two independent powersystems in addition to the emergency generator (for example vessels with additional class notation forredundant propulsion, RP, may be accepted as equivalent to the accumulator solution if the arrangement isconsidered by the Society to be robust, reliable and quick acting.

Guidance note:Examples of acceptable systems are:

1) CO2 or equivalent gas system for main fire extinguishing system and a local application system with supply from main andemergency power supply.

2) Water based main fire extinguishing system and a local application system with a pump for continues supply and back-up of20 minutes water supply (and foam supply, if applicable) from a dedicated pressure vessel.


3.5.4 ArrangementThe local application system shall be type approved by the Society in accordance with IMO MSC/Circ.1387.

3.5.5 The system shall be provided with both main and emergency power supply. Systems being served byan accumulator (for instance as a means to comply with the requirement in [3.5.2]) shall also be providedwith a water pump complying with all parts of this section. Installation consisting of pumps moved directly bya dedicated diesel engine shall be capable of delivering water at full pressure within 20 seconds (measuredfrom stand-by condition).

3.5.6 The system shall discharge freshwater of potable quality. Foam additives are accepted, whereas useof seawater is prohibited for the first 20 minutes of the discharge. The pump shall be able to operate underall conditions without the use of any self-priming system. The pump and its mover shall be provided withheating unless the space in which they are located has adequate heating facilities.

3.5.7 Separation of the system into sections shall be approved in each separate case. In any case, pumpcapacity shall be designed to simultaneously cover risk objects less than 3m apart, also when arranged as

Part

6 C

hapt

er 5

Sec

tion

4


DNV GL AS

separate sections. In addition, the water supply shall be designed to cover all auxiliary engines within a spaceor the main engine, whichever demands the largest water supply. For other multi-engine arrangements, thesystem shall cover more than half the engines within an engine room.

3.5.8 The spray head arrangement shall be according to the IMO MSC.1/Circ.1387 requirements and theconditions specified in the Society’s type approval certificate, with the additional requirement that fuel oilinstallations attached to the engines shall also be protected.Turbo charger and other turbo machinery shall be protected. The spray heads shall be installed at a minimumof 1.0 m away from such equipment.Discharge of water directly into electric generators and engine air intakes shall be avoided.

3.5.9 A test and drain valve shall be provided. The valve shall be provided with means to secure it in aclosed position after use, whereas any isolation valve shall be secured in the open position. The valves maybe located upstream or downstream of the section valves, but shall in any case be installed close to thesection valve(s). No other in-line components (check valves, etc.) shall be accepted on the dry pipe side.

3.5.10 It shall be possible to manually operate the section valves via a direct manual operation on the stem.Where this is not possible (for instance valves operated on pilot pressure) a manual by pass valve, complyingwith 3.9.5, shall be provided in parallel with the section valve. A signboard identifying the valve and itsoperation shall be posted adjacent to the bypass valve.

3.5.11 The section valves, test and drain valves, any accumulators, pump unit and its power supply andcontrol equipment shall be readily accessible and shall be located outside the protected spaces (this beingdefined as outside a boundary being of A-class standard).

3.5.12 Automatic release shall be provided for the local application system. This shall be operational evenwhen the ship is without main power, but not necessarily in the dead ship condition where manual releasefrom a readily accessible position is acceptable.A suitable combination of flame detectors of infrared type and smoke detectors shall be arranged. Dischargeof water shall be arranged upon signal from not more than two detectors whereas not less than threedetectors shall be provided for each section. All detectors shall be of approved type.The response time (central unit scanning time) from when any detector(s) initiates an alarm, to this alarmcondition is reported at the central unit, shall not exceed 5 seconds.

3.5.13 The following procedures shall be stored in the engine control room:

— description of the operation of the system— how many sections that can be released simultaneously, based on available pump or accumulator capacity— recommendations for stop of ventilation— guidelines for when and how to use the main firefighting system in case the local application system does

not extinguish the fire.Guidance note:When considering ventilation philosophy, note that some small droplet water mist system may be sensitive with respect toperformance in well ventilated spaces, especially when distance from protected object to hazard is large. Risk of reducedpropulsion or power supply in case of erroneously release of the local extinguishing system should also be taken into consideration.


3.6 Main extinguishing systems3.6.1 GeneralMachinery spaces of category A shall be protected by one of the following fixed fire extinguishing systems:

— a high pressure CO2 total flooding system as described in [3.6.2]— a low pressure CO2 total flooding system as described in [3.6.3]

Part

6 C

hapt

er 5

Sec

tion

4


DNV GL AS

— a water mist system as described in [3.6.4]— a high expansion foam or inside air foam system as described in [3.6.5]— an equivalent gaseous agent as described in [3.6.6].

3.6.2 The main fire extinguishing system shall in addition to these specific rules applicable to each system,comply with the functional requirements of [3.5.2] and [3.5.3].

3.6.3 The following spaces shall be covered by a fixed fire extinguishing system:

— spaces containing main electric propulsion systems (if fitted). This includes electrical motors if inside hull,switchboards and transformers serving such motors

— spaces containing the main switchboards (of any size) and switch boards with capacity exceeding 1000kW for cargo handling systems (cargo pumps or cargo compressors)

— engine control room— casings on passenger ships carrying more than 36 passengers (including casings being separated from the

engine room).

The system may be omitted for bow thruster rooms if these spaces contain no other fire risks; such ascombustion machinery, fuel systems and similar equipment.The switchboard rooms and similar spaces covered by this requirement shall have a fire extinguishing systemsuitable for use on high voltage equipment. This will in general imply use of a gas based fire extinguishingsystem unless that it can be documented that other systems (water mist based on potable water) hasequivalent firefighting performance (small fires/enclosed cabinets) and do not damage the electricalequipment.The water mist protection of casings on passenger ships carrying more than 36 passengers shall be designedas a total flooding system based on IMO MSC/Circ.1165 as amended, and shall consider the chimney effectexpected for the casings in question. As a minimum, water mist nozzles shall be located on every seconddeck and additional nozzles shall be provided for areas containing scrubbers and multiple plastic pipes.

3.6.4 The main fire extinguishing system shall be type approved by the Society according to the IMOstandard applicable to the type of system.

3.6.5 If different types of main fire extinguishing systems (e.g. gas and foam) are used onboard, theprotected spaces shall be divided by minimum A-0 divisions.

3.6.6 Fixed high-pressure CO2 total flooding systemAny high-pressure CO2 total flooding system for the machinery spaces category A shall comply with FSS CodeChapter 5 and the requirements of [3.6.7] through [3.6.12].

3.6.7 The quantity of CO2 gas shall be sufficient for a minimum volume of 40% of the complete protectedspace, including any casing.

3.6.8 CO2 section valve shall be designed to avoid any corrosion problems. The moving parts of the valveshall be made of corrosion resistant materials (stainless steel or equivalent), and there shall not be metal tometal contact between the main moving part (e.g. ball) and the valve housing.

3.6.9 The CO2 valve shall also be designed for manual operation. For this purpose an extended lever shallbe provided for each type of valves with dimension exceeding DN25 (corresponding to pipe with 25 mmdiameter).

3.6.10 Piping system upstream of section valves shall be presented to the Society’s surveyor prior toinstallation of section valves to verify that these pipes are clean.

3.6.11 Slow leak valves shall be provided for the pneumatic release lines to evacuate minor leakages,whereas a pressure gauge shall be fitted to the each enclosed manifold.

Part

6 C

hapt

er 5

Sec

tion

4


DNV GL AS

3.6.12 The release station(s) shall be clearly marked. A principal diagram of the protected spaces shall beprovided at each release station if the CO2 system has more than one section valve.

3.6.13 Fixed low pressure CO2 total flooding systemAny low pressure CO2 total flooding system shall comply with FSS Code Chapter 5 and the requirements of[3.6.14] through [3.6.17] .

3.6.14 The CO2 tank shall be provided with an external connection (vertical pipe or multiple level drainagevalves) for determining liquid level. Float indicators are not considered as being equivalent to the externalpipe and shall not be accepted as single means of liquid indication.

3.6.15 The main tank valve and each section valve (timer operated valve) shall be provided with a manualby pass valve. This valve shall be operated manually in case the primary valves fail to operate. A signboardstating required opening time shall be posted adjacent to the bypass valve.

3.6.16 The tank and associated piping system upstream of section valves shall be presented to the Society’ssurveyor prior to filling the tank, this in order to ensure that these components are clean.

3.6.17 The release station(s) shall be clearly marked. A principal diagram of the protected spaces shall beprovided at each release station if the CO2 system has more than one section valve.

3.6.18 Water mist systemAny water mist system shall comply with SOLAS and the requirements of [3.6.19] through [3.6.21].

Guidance note:See IMO MSC/Circ. 1165, as amended.


3.6.19 Arrangement and dimensioning of the system shall be approved in each case, taking intoconsideration the volume of protected space, capacity, location of nozzles, location of pump units and powersource.

3.6.20 Foam injection pumps, if fitted, shall be duplicated. The backup pumps shall be installed in a mannerthat minimises the risk of both pumps being stuck by foam concentrate, or any other means of being put outof operation. One acceptable solution is keep the valves to one foam pump closed after flushing, while theother is in open standby mode.

3.6.21 It shall be possible to manually operate the section valves via a direct manual operation on the stem.Where this is not possible (for instance valves operated on pilot pressure) a manual by pass valve, complyingwith the above, shall be provided in parallel with the section valve. A signboard identifying the valve and itsoperation shall be posted adjacent to the bypass valve.

3.6.22 High expansion and inside air foam systemAll foam systems shall comply with FSS Code Chapter 6 and the requirements of [3.6.23] and [3.6.24].

3.6.23 Foam injection pumps, if fitted, shall be duplicated. The backup pumps shall be installed in a mannerthat minimises the risk of both pumps being stuck by foam concentrate or any other means of being put outof operation. One acceptable solution is keep the valves to one foam pump closed after flushing, while theother is in open standby mode.

3.6.24 It shall be possible to operate the foam system and the exhaust fan defined in [3.1.3] simultaneously.

3.6.25 Equivalent gaseous agentAny equivalent gaseous agent for the machinery spaces category A shall comply with IMO MSC/Circ. 848 asamended.

Part

6 C

hapt

er 5

Sec

tion

4


DNV GL AS

3.7 Portable fire extinguishers3.7.1 Number and locationOnly approved 12 kg powder or 9 litre foam portable extinguishers shall be installed in the category Amachinery spaces.

3.7.2 The numbers of portable extinguishers shall comply with SOLAS. In addition the following minimumnumbers shall be provided at readily accessible positions:

— 4 at the lower level and 4 at the platform level for each main engine (extinguisher can be combined ifthere are several main engines in one space)

— 1 near each auxiliary engine (3 required for 3 auxiliary engines)— 1 at the entrance to and 1 inside the spaces defined under [3.2.3].

Guidance note:The required location of the extinguishers is general, and efforts should be made to place these in the vicinity of the installationsrepresenting the greatest risk of fire. When installations are placed in separate rooms of limited size, some or all of the requiredextinguishers can be placed immediately outside the doors leading into these rooms.


4 Cargo decks and cargo spaces - F(C)

4.1 Introduction4.1.1 Purpose, application and general requirementsThe purpose of these requirements is:

— to quickly detect and confirm a fire (applicable for enclosed spaces)— to ensure that the fire extinguishing system operates as intended and has the reliability and performance

that is needed to extinguish a fire.

4.1.2 The rules apply to the following ship types:

— tankers for oil, tankers for chemicals (including combinations)— tankers for liquefied gas (LNG, LPG)— general cargo carriers and dry bulk cargo carriers— ships with ro-ro decks (car carriers, general ro/ro ships, ferries)— container carriers.

Each of the above ship types has a dedicated paragraph ([4.2] through [4.6]) in this section. Only therequirements defined under the applicable paragraph(s) shall apply with respect to F(C) additional classnotation.

4.2 Tankers for oil, tankers for chemicals4.2.1 Gas detection systems and inert gas systemsThe fixed gas detection system required by SOLAS Ch. II-2, Reg.4.5.10 shall be extended to cover all otherenclosed spaces in the cargo area, including ballast tanks, but excluding cargo tanks.

4.2.2 An inert gas generating system in compliance with SOLAS Ch. II-2, Reg.4.5.5 shall be provided for alltankers with F(C) class notation (also those being less than 20 000 GT).

Part

6 C

hapt

er 5

Sec

tion

4


DNV GL AS

4.2.3 Cargo pump roomsCargo pump room shall have a fixed fire extinguishing system that complies with SOLAS and therequirements defined for F(M) ([3.6]).

4.2.4 If a CO2 system is provided, the available quantity of CO2 gas shall be sufficient to give a minimumvolume of free gas corresponding to 45% of the gross volume. If gas fire extinguishing system of anothertype is provided, the gas concentration shall be minimum 1.3 times the ideal extinguishing concentration forthe cargos in question, but in no case less than that required by IMO MSC/Circ. 848.

Guidance note:Some of the cargoes carried on crude oil tankers and chemical tankers may require a higher concentration of the fire extinguishinggas than that established for refined fuel oils.


4.2.5 A smoke detection system approved for use in gas hazardous atmosphere and in compliance with IMOFSS Code Ch.9 shall be provided in the cargo pump room. The system shall be monitored from the cargocontrol room (if provided) and the wheelhouse.

4.2.6 One portable extinguisher shall be provided adjacent to the entrance of the cargo pump room andtwo shall be located in readily accessible positions in the lower part of the cargo pump room. The portableextinguishers shall be approved 12 kg powder or 9 l foam portable extinguishers.

4.2.7 Fire main system (ring main)The ship shall have a fire main on deck arranged as a ring main to the port and starboard side. Isolationvalves shall be globe valves of steel or approved fire safe butterfly valves. Both main fire pumps shall bearranged with remote start from the wheelhouse. Other requirements for the fire main shall be as specified inSOLAS and the rules.

Guidance note:Butterfly valves tested to API 607 or equivalent may be approved.


4.2.8 There shall be fire hose equipment for at least half the number of hydrants required for the tank deck,in no case shall less than 9 fire hoses be provided for ships below 10 000 GT and 12 fire hoses for shipsabove this size. The equipment shall be stored in clearly marked boxes made of corrosion resistant materials(FRP or equivalent). One box with a minimum of 3 hoses shall be provided next to the accommodationsuperstructure, readily accessible for use on the tank deck (not more than one deck above the tank deck).A minimum of two portable foam applicators, required by SOLAS, shall be stored next to the front of theaccommodation facing cargo area, whereas a minimum of two shall be at a suitable position for ready use onthe cargo manifolds (the position will be aft of the manifold on a standard tanker).

4.2.9 The size of the fire hoses shall take into account the manning and firefighting philosophy of the ship.The size of the fire hoses placed within cargo area shall have diameters of 50 mm or 38 mm. All couplingsand hose connections for use within the cargo deck area shall be interchangeable.

4.2.10 All hoses shall be capable of also handling supplies from the foam line. The hose shall be made ofsynthetic fibres and shall be approved according to the most recent edition of EN 671-2, ISO 15540 or 15541or an equivalent standard. The nozzle shall be made of metallic, corrosion resistant material. All movableparts shall be of copper alloy or equivalent. All the hydrants onboard shall be made of copper alloy or anequivalent material.

4.2.11 Foam main systemThese requirements apply to all tankers above 4 000 grt. Tankers below 4 000 grt need not a foam ringmain but shall have a fixed foam main and monitor system in compliance with the FSS Code Chapter 14(applicators only are not considered as equivalent).

Part

6 C

hapt

er 5

Sec

tion

4


DNV GL AS

4.2.12 The ship shall have an independent foam main for the deck foam extinguishing systems as specifiedin SOLAS and the rules. This line shall be arranged along the centre line as a single line with foam outletbranches to both port and starboard arranged just aft of each monitor. For the two monitors required infront of the accommodation, one foam hydrant to be arranged. Marked boxes made of corrosion resistantmaterials containing hose and foam nozzle to be placed adjacent to each foam hydrant. The arrangementshall otherwise comply with SOLAS and the rules.

4.2.13 The foam extinguishing system shall have redundancy in design with two foam mixing units and twofoam concentrate pumps placed together with the storage tank for foam concentrate in a dedicated room.

4.2.14 The water supply to the foam extinguishing system shall be supplied by the main fire pumps. Thecapacity of the pumps shall be sufficient for simultaneously meeting the requirement of the foam system asdefined in SOLAS and the rules (applied though the monitors) and with one foam nozzle engaged (400 l/min)from the foam line and two fire hoses engaged (2 x 400 l/min) from the fire main.

4.2.15 Arrangement of the foam concentrate pumps and the foam mixing units together with the main firepumps shall be such that each of the two sets will be capable of delivering the required amount of foamsolution. The pumps shall be installed in a manner that minimises the risk of both pumps being stuck by thefoam concentrate or otherwise put out of operation. One acceptable solution is keep the valves to one foampump closed after flushing, while the other is in open standby mode.

4.2.16 Foam concentrate sufficient for 30 minutes of continuous foam production shall be stored onboard.Only synthetic foam (not protein based) shall be provided.

4.2.17 The monitors shall have a free movement of plus or minus 45° in the vertical plane and in thehorizontal plane they shall be able to point at any part of the deck intended to be protected. The monitorsshall be lockable in any position within these ranges. The monitors and their foundations shall be of strongconstruction and capable of withstanding the loads that they will be subjected to on the open deck.

4.2.18 Two foam monitors at each side of the accommodation front and monitors covering the cargomanifold shall be arranged for remote control from the bridge or from another protected area with a goodview over the area covered by the monitors. The remote control arrangement shall cover the vertical as wellas the horizontal movement of the monitors. These monitors shall be of a type that is in a fixed positionwhen not operated by crew. Valves positioned within cargo area for supply of foam mixture to the monitorsshall be capable of remote operation from the same position as the remote control for the monitors.

4.2.19 Water spray protection for lifeboatsLifeboats that are not shielded by steel bulkheads from the cargo areas shall be provided with a water spraysystem. The system can be supplied from the fire main and shall in any case be capable of quick release fromthe wheelhouse. The system shall deliver minimum 10 l/min/m2 for the sides and top of each lifeboat. Thecapacity for water spray shall be added to the requirements for the main fire pumps given in [4.2.2] and[4.2.3] if these are used for supply to the water spray system for lifeboats.

4.2.20 Firefighter’s outfitsThe ship shall be provided with not less than 6 sets of firefighters' outfits, which shall comply with, [1.6].

4.3 Tankers for liquefied gas4.3.1 Cargo handling spacesThe following spaces shall be provided with a fire extinguishing system complying with this section:

— cargo compressor room— cargo re-liquefy room, if fitted— any electrical equipment room or other such spaces located in the cargo area.

Part

6 C

hapt

er 5

Sec

tion

4


DNV GL AS

4.3.2 The fire extinguishing system shall comply with the requirements defined for F(M) additional classnotation ([3.6]). Note the requirements for ex-rating electrical equipment in gas dangerous spaces.

4.3.3 If a CO2 system is provided, the available quantity of CO2 gas shall be sufficient to give a minimumvolume of free gas corresponding to 45% of the gross volume. If gas fire extinguishing system of anothertype is provided, the gas concentration shall be minimum 1.3 times the ideal extinguishing concentration forthe cargos in question, but in no case less than that required by IMO MSC/Circ. 848.

Guidance note:Substances like methane, ethane and heavier gases will normally require a higher concentration of the fire extinguishing gas thanthat established for fuel oils.


4.3.4 A smoke detection system approved for use in gas hazardous atmosphere shall be provided. Thesystem shall be monitored from the wheelhouse.

4.3.5 Fire main systemThe fire main system shall be as given for other tankers in [4.2.2].

4.3.6 In addition, fixed water monitors supplied with water from the fire main shall be arranged at the sameposition as the powder monitors for additional coverage of the cargo manifold area. The water monitors shallhave fixed arrangement for making dispersion of the water jet creating a water spray of not less than 10l/min/m2 horizontal coverage of the manifold area extending 1.5 meter to each side and aft and forwardfrom the manifold connections. The water monitors and section valve for water supply to monitors shall bearranged with both manual and remotely operation from a safe position outside of the cargo area.

4.3.7 Powder fire-extinguishing systemThe dry chemical powder fire-extinguishing systems shall satisfy the requirements as specified in Pt.5 Ch.7Sec.11 in addition the requirements in this sub-section element.

4.3.8 The dry powder stored on the tanks shall provide for 60s operation of each system, when all attachedmonitors are activated.

4.3.9 The powder distribution lines and the pressure gas lines shall be made of stainless steel grade 316 orequivalent corrosion resistant materials.

4.3.10 Nitrogen shall be provided as pressure gas for the powder. All release lines associated to the pressuretank (also on the low pressure side) shall be regarded as class I piping. However, the main powder line canbe classified as class III piping.

Guidance note:CO2 is not considered as equivalent to nitrogen as the content cannot be readily checked. Class I piping is required, as pressureregulators and safety valves are sometimes clogged by the powder and become inoperative. This can pressurise piping systems notintended for direct connection with the nitrogen cylinders.


4.3.11 The distance from the powder tank to the monitors shall be limited to 10 m. However, if full scaletesting has documented that the powder system can handle longer lines and measures are implemented toavoid free water in the lines (self-draining pipes for example), longer distances may be considered.

4.3.12 Each dry powder hose station shall consist of:

— 1 dry powder trigger nozzle— 1 dry powder hose line— 1 nitrogen gas container for pneumatic release.

Part

6 C

hapt

er 5

Sec

tion

4


DNV GL AS

The equipment shall be stored in boxes made of corrosion resistant materials. The boxes shall be clearlymarked and provided with brief instructions for operation of the system in the official language of the flagstate as well as in English.

4.3.13 Fire extinguishing in the gas venting arrangementVenting masts for cargo tank venting system on liquefied gas carriers shall be provided with a fixed systemfor extinguishing a fire at the vent outlet. Nitrogen, CO2 or any other suitable medium is acceptable.

4.3.14 Water spray system for cargo tanks and manifolds

4.3.15 The water spray system required by IGC Code 11.3 shall have piping made of CuNi or equivalentcorrosion resistant materials.

4.3.16 Water spray protection for lifeboatsLifeboats that are not shielded by steel bulkheads from the cargo areas shall be provided with a water spraysystem. The system can be supplied from the fire main and shall in any case be capable of quick release fromthe wheelhouse. The system shall deliver minimum 10 l/min/m2 for the sides and top of each lifeboat. Thecapacity for water spray shall be added to the requirements for the main fire pumps given in [3.6] if theseare used for supply to the water spray system for lifeboats.

4.3.17 Firefighter’s outfitsThe ship shall be provided with not less than 8 sets of firefighters’ outfits, which shall comply with, [1.6].

4.4 General cargo carriers and dry bulk cargo carriers4.4.1 ApplicationThe rules apply to dry cargo spaces (holds in bulk carriers and general cargo spaces) for ships having F(C)additional class notation. The requirements apply to all cargo spaces as defined in SOLAS.

4.4.2 Fire detectionThe requirements of SOLAS, FSS Code and the rules shall be complied with.

4.4.3 All dry cargo holds shall be fitted with a detection system based on smoke extraction or heat detection,which automatically indicates the presence of smoke or abnormal heat in any of these holds.

4.4.4 Fire extinguishing systemThe requirements of SOLAS, FSS Code and the rules shall be complied with. A ship having an exemptioncertificate (and thus not provided with a fixed fire extinguishing system for cargo spaces) cannot be assignedF-C additional class notation.

4.4.5 The storage room for the fixed fire extinguishing medium shall be easily accessible and close to themain superstructure. Operation controls for the fixed fire extinguishing system shall be grouped and shall beeasily accessible.

4.4.6 If a high pressure CO2 system is fitted, it shall comply with the requirements regarding componentsspecifications, cleaning of piping and operational procedures for F(M) ([3.5.4] and, [3.6.6] to [3.6.12]).Further, when CO2 is used for extinguishing, the available quantity of CO2 gas shall be sufficient to give aminimum volume of free gas corresponding to 40% of the gross volume of the largest hold.

4.4.7 Any other type of fire extinguishing system shall comply with applicable requirements specified in theF(M) notation ([4.5.3] to [4.5.5] and[4.5.7]to [4.5.8]).

4.4.8 Piping carrying fire extinguishing media such as CO2 and water, for example, shall be protectedinternally and externally against corrosion for parts located outside the cargo space being protected. Fullgalvanised piping is accepted unless other requirements specify higher material standards.

Part

6 C

hapt

er 5

Sec

tion

4


DNV GL AS

4.4.9 Firefighter’s outfitsThe ship shall be provided with 4 sets of firefighters’ outfits, which shall comply with [1.4].

4.5 Ships with ro/ro decks (car carriers, general ro/ro ships, ferries)4.5.1 ApplicationThe rules apply to ro/ro decks and special category spaces for ships having F(C) class notation.

4.5.2 Fire detection and confirmationThe requirements of SOLAS, FSS Code and the rules shall be complied with.

4.5.3 All ro/ro and special category spaces shall be covered by combined smoke and heat detectors servedby an addressable fire detection system. The system shall be connected to a software based presentationsystem that displays the alarms on a general layout drawing.

4.5.4 Fire confirmation (TV monitoring system for passenger ships)A colour TV monitoring system shall cover all decks, including moveable decks. Monitors shall be available ina manned control station. This requirement if only applicable to passenger ships (ferries).

4.5.5 Portable extinguishersThe requirements of SOLAS, FSS Code and the rules shall be complied with.

4.5.6 The required portable extinguishers shall be approved 12 kg powder or 9 l foam portable extinguishers.Portable extinguishers shall be located at easily accessible positions, such as along walkways or entry pointsto the ro-ro space.

4.5.7 Fire extinguishing systemThe requirements of SOLAS, FSS Code and the rules shall be complied with. The system that is provided shallin addition comply with [4.5.6] and [4.5.8] to [4.5.9]. One of the following systems shall be installed:

— high pressure CO2 system as described in [4.5.8]— low pressure CO2 system as described in [4.5.10]— water mist system as described in [4.5.12]— water spray/mist system according to MSC.1/Circ.1430— high expansion foam or inside air foam as described in [4.5.13].

4.5.8 High pressure CO2 systemsThe requirements regarding components specifications, cleaning of piping and operational procedures for theF(M) class notation ([3.5.4] and, [3.6.8] to, [3.6.11]) shall be implemented.

4.5.9 A connection from the fire main system to the CO2 discharge piping shall be provided. This connectionshall be non-permanent (spool piece or fire hose to be used) and located in a space being readily accessiblein case of a fire. It shall be possible to release the water through any of the CO2 section valves.

Guidance note:The purpose of this system is to cool down the space on fire after a CO2 release or in case the CO2 system fails to operate. It canalso be applied to cool down the cargo space above the space on fire.


4.5.10 Low pressure CO2 systemsThe requirements regarding tank level indication, components specifications, back-up valves, cleaning ofpiping and operational procedures for F(M) ([3.6.13] and, [3.6.15] to [3.6.17] shall be implemented.

4.5.11 A connection from the fire main, as defined for the high pressure CO2 systems ([4.5.9]) shall beprovided.

Part

6 C

hapt

er 5

Sec

tion

4


DNV GL AS

4.5.12 Water mistThe requirements regarding dimensioning and foam pump for F(M) ([3.6.18]) shall be implemented. Theapplicable IMO standard for this system is MSC.1/Circ.1430.

4.5.13 High expansion and inside air foam systemThe requirements regarding dimensioning and foam pump for F(M) ([3.6.22] and [3.6.23]) shall beimplemented.

4.5.14 It shall be possible to operate the foam system and at least one exhaust fan simultaneously. Thisfan can be served by power from the main switchboard, but power and control cables shall be routedindependent of the protected space.

4.5.15 Deluge and water mist systems

4.5.15.1 Release controls and markingsRelease stations with controls for start and stop of pumps and operation of deluge valves (opening andclosing) shall be provided in the engine control room, deluge station and wheelhouse. Each of the releaseunits shall have remote indication of pump running, position of valves (open/closed) and actual pressure invalve manifold.Each control valve (deluge valve) shall be provided with remote position indicator and shall be clearlymarked. A principal diagram of the protected area shall be provided for each valve and at the remote releasestation. However, if the total number of such valves are less than ten a common diagram will be accepted,but each valve shall be marked with its section number.A pressure switch shall be installed in the valve manifold (upstream of deluge valves).Sections within the protected space shall be marked using same designation as the one used at the releasestations. Letters and numbers shall be minimum 300 mm in height and be in a clearly visible and contrastingcolour.

4.5.16 PipingThe piping and couplings shall be protected internally and externally against corrosion for all parts betweensea inlet and the spray heads. Full galvanised piping is accepted unless other requirements specify a highermaterial standard.If stainless steel piping is used the grade shall be 316 or a grade providing higher corrosion resistance forseawater.A connection to a fresh water tank shall be provided. This shall have capacity to test any one section for5 minutes at the required flow of water. The connection may be used to supply the system with an initialsupply of fresh water in case of a fire if an approved and remote controlled switch-over to a seawater supplyis provided.An air connection and drain valve(s) shall be provided ensuring that all parts of the piping system can bedrained and blown through with air after testing. All parts of the piping system shall be self-draining to drainvalves or open nozzles.

4.5.17 Water monitors for weather decksAll weather decks shall be protected by dedicated water monitor(s). The monitor(s) shall be able to serve allparts of the weather deck even when calculating with 75% of the nominal throw length (this will compensatefor adverse wind condition). One water monitor is acceptable if this can cover all weather decks.Each monitor shall have a capacity of minimum 3.000 litre per minute (180 m3 per hour) for decks above1000 m2 and minimum 1.500 litre per minute (90 m3 per hour) for decks below 1000 m2.The monitors shall be accessible in case of fire on weather deck or ro/ro spaces. Manual control is acceptable.The monitors shall be supplied from the deluge pump of the fire main. The capacity shall be such that anymonitor, two deluge sections (the adjacent or below sections) and 4 hoses (calculated at their actual capacitybut not less than 4 x 25 m3/h) may be served by the actual pump configuration (deluge pumps plus fire mainpumps as applicable).

Part

6 C

hapt

er 5

Sec

tion

4


DNV GL AS

4.5.18 Access point of weather decksAn access point shall be provided to ensure that crew can have a clear view above cargo stowed on weatherdeck. This may be a deck structure or dedicated ladders and platforms provided for this purpose. The accesspoint should be designed to provide a safe access and escape in case of fire on the weather deck.

4.5.19 Arrangement of open ro/ro decksOpen ro/ro decks and open special category spaces are not permitted.

4.5.20 Ventilation systemsAccess to ventilation controls shall not be cut off by a fire in any ro/ro space or on weather decks unlesscontrols are remotely operated from a safe position with indication (open/closed) at this position anddesigned with fire resistant components (using steel piping or equivalent and fire resistant cables).Any inlet or outlet from a ro-ro space shall either be located at least 3.0 m above lifeboats, air intakes toengine rooms, emergency generator and accommodation or at least 10 m fore or aft of such items.Any damper or fire damper being operated by actuators shall be of a fail-to-close type. This requirementdoes not preclude use of manual dampers.

4.5.21 Safe operations on ro/ro decks

4.5.21.1 Electrical connections on ro-ro decks serving reefer units and other consumersA plan for stowing and fighting fires in reefer units shall be available if the vessel is intended to carry suchunits. It is advised that such units are stowed in locations where impact from fires is minimised, preferablyweather deck.Sockets serving reefer units and other consumers on ro/ro deck shall be of safe design and designedaccording to a recognised standard.Power supply circuits serving such units shall be monitored for short circuit / ground fault with alarm to acontinuously manned control station. Means to isolate these circuits shall be readily accessible for the crewand clearly marked.

4.5.21.2 Electrical vehicles / alternative fuelled vehiclesA plan for stowing and fighting fires in electrical vehicles and vehicles powered by alternative fuel, such asgas (compressed or liquid), methanol / ethanol and hydrogen shall be available. Hydrogen vehicles shall bestowed along bulkheads or other suitable locations where the impact of hydrogen fire is minimised. For othervehicles (electrical vehicles and alternative fuel other than hydrogen) there are no specific requirements butit is advised that electrical vehicles are stowed in locations where impact from fires in other cars and cargo isminimised.On board charging of electrical vehicles is only accepted if a safety case is presented. The case shall considerthe following elements:

i) Available charging per unit shall in general be provided with low / medium power (up to 5 kW). Chargingat higher power, including supercharging, will require special measures.

ii) Power supply circuits serving such units shall be monitored for short circuit / ground fault with alarm toa continuously manned control station. Means to isolate these circuits shall be readily accessible for thecrew and clearly marked.

iii) A manual for safe operation of the charging facility shall be available. Connection of chargers shall bemonitored by the crew.

iv) Charging shall be in an area where impact from a fire in other units is minimised and impact from a firestarting in charges or electrical vehicle being charge is minimised. An acceptable solution is A60 aboveand below the area where chargers are available.

v) The design of the charging system should be based on the principles from IEC 61851-1, Electrical vehicleconductive charging system, general requirements.

4.5.21.3 Other activitiesAll available sockets, other than any covered by the above safety case, shall be marked and secured toprevent unauthorized use.

Part

6 C

hapt

er 5

Sec

tion

4


DNV GL AS

Diesel powered reefer units are not allow to operate on board, except if located on weather deck.

4.5.22 Communication - radiosThe ship shall be provided with a minimum of 10 sets of type approved UHF radios of specified type. Onlyone type of radio shall be used for this purpose. Relevant SOLAS requirements and the Society’s statutoryinterpretations apply for mandatory internal communications systems.

4.5.23 At least two of the radios shall be especially adapted for use by the firefighting team (installed insidehelmet).

4.5.24 Stations for relaying the UHF signals shall be provided, where a radio at the ro/ro deck cannotcommunicate with the bridge or another radio on the ro/ro deck. This requirement shall apply to a minimumof 95% of the accessible ro-ro deck. Relevant SOLAS requirements and the Society’s statutory interpretationsapply for mandatory internal communications systems.

4.5.25 Firefighter’s outfitsThe ship shall be provided with 8 sets of firefighter’s outfits, which shall comply with [1.6].

4.6 Container carriers4.6.1 ApplicationThe rules apply to container carriers for ships having F(C).

4.6.2 Fire extinguishing system – enclosed cargo holdsThe requirements of SOLAS, FSS Code and the rules shall be complied with.

4.6.3 The storage room for the fixed fire extinguishing medium shall be easily accessible and close to themain superstructure. Operation controls for the fixed fire extinguishing system shall be grouped and shall beeasily accessible.

4.6.4 If a high pressure CO2 system is fitted, it shall comply with the requirements regarding componentspecifications, cleaning of piping and operational procedures for F(M) ([3.5.4] and [3.6.8] to [3.6.11]).Further, when CO2 is used for extinguishing, the available quantity of CO2 gas shall be sufficient to give aminimum volume of free gas corresponding to 40% of the gross volume of the largest hold.

4.6.5 Any other type of fire extinguishing system shall comply with applicable requirements specified in theF(M) additional class notation ([4.5.4], [4.5.5], [4.5.7] or [4.5.8]).

4.6.6 Piping carrying the fire extinguishing media such as CO2 and water, for example, shall be protectedinternally and externally against corrosion for parts located outside the cargo space being protected. Fullgalvanised piping is accepted unless other requirements specify higher material standards.

4.6.7 Fire extinguishing systems – open decksThe main fire pumps and available general service pumps shall have a total capacity of at least 250 m3/h at aminimum of 10 bar.

4.6.8 The fire main line on cargo deck shall be dimensioned for a flow of 250 m3/h at a flow velocity notexceeding 5 m/s (typically pipes with 125 mm diameter) and shall be provided with manually operableisolation valves every 40 m. Isolation valve shall also be installed adjacent to the accommodationsuperstructure before entering the cargo spaces forward and aft of this superstructure.

4.6.9 The fire main line shall have double hydrants for each 25 m. 10 fire hoses of suitable type (38 mmdiameter is recommended) shall be provided at an readily accessible locker for use on the cargo deck. Thehoses shall be divided equally both sides.

Part

6 C

hapt

er 5

Sec

tion

4


DNV GL AS

4.6.10 At least two mobile water monitors with flexible supply hoses of suitable capacity and length shallbe provided. These shall have a capacity of minimum 60 m3/h each, with an effective through length ofminimum 25 m when tested onboard with 2 monitors and 2 fire hoses in operation. The monitors shall be ofa type that can be fixed to the ships structure and thus be operated without the crew being in position.

4.6.11 At least two water mist lances shall be provided. These shall be of a type capable of penetrating astandard container. Alternatively, dedicated tools for this purpose shall be provided. A separate water supplysystem, capable of supplying the two lances for 60 minutes, shall be installed if the lances cannot use the firemain system.

Guidance note:This guidance note applies to [4.6.9], [4.6.10] and [4.6.11]. The purpose of these systems is as follows. The large numbers ofhoses are required to provide flexibility for the fire fighters when fighting fires in the containers or cooling the cargo hatches toavoid collapse. The mobile monitors are intended to cool down the container on fire and adjacent containers and thereby preventthe fire from escalating and preventing any hazardous cargo form exploding due to heat radiation. The water mist lances areprovided to extinguish fires in containers that cannot be accessed or where opening the container door can escalate the fire.


4.6.12 Communication - radiosThe ship shall be provided with a minimum of 10 sets of type approved UHF radios of specified type. Onlyone type of radio shall be used for this purpose. Relevant SOLAS requirements and the Society’s statutoryinterpretations apply for mandatory internal communications systems.

4.6.13 At least two of the radios shall be specially adapted for use by the firefighting team (installed insidehelmet).Stations for relaying the UHF signals shall be provided, where a radio at the cargo spaces cannotcommunicate with the bridge or another radio on the ro/ro deck. This requirement shall apply to a minimumof 95% of the accessible cargo spaces (see Pt.5 Ch.3).

4.6.14 Firefighter’s outfitsThe ship shall be provided with 8 sets of firefighters’ outfits, which shall comply with [1.6].

Part

6 C

hapt

er 5

Sec

tion

5


DNV GL AS

SECTION 5 HELICOPTER INSTALLATIONS - HELDK

1 General

1.1 IntroductionThe additional class notation HELDK provides a design standard for vessels with an erected landing platformfor helicopters, or a landing area arranged directly on the weather deck or on the top of a deckhouse.

1.2 ScopeThe scope for additional class notation HELDK provides requirements for design loads, structural strength,personnel safety, vessel safety and helicopter refuelling facilities for vessels with an erected or integratedhelicopter landing platform. These requirements are not intended to apply to landing areas used foroccasional or emergency operations as regulated by SOLAS Ch. II-2 Reg. 18.2.2. The responsibility forcompliance with national requirements, not covered by these rules, rests with the operator of the vessel onwhich the helicopter deck is arranged. It will be necessary also to comply with the safety regulations of theflag state in which the vessel is registered.

1.3 ApplicationThe additional class notation HELDK applies to vessels built in compliance with the relevant requirements inthis section. The basic notation HELDK may be extended by supplementary qualifiers where compliance withadditional requirements have been met; such as HELDK(S), HELDK(S, H), HELDK(S, H, F). An additionalsupplementary qualifier CAA-N may be added when the vessel has either HELDK(S, H) or HELDK(S, H, F)notation, e.g. HELDK(S, H, CAA-N).Details of these notations can be found in Table 1. If the Society is delegated to issue the SOLAS SafetyConstruction and Safety Equipment Certificates on behalf of the flag state, SOLAS Reg. II-2/18 will apply asa minimum requirement with respect to fire safety. The non-structural requirements given for the helicopterdeck notations are based on CAP 437 - Offshore helicopter landing areas - guidance on standards.

1.4 Class notations

1.4.1 Vessels built in compliance with the requirements as specified in Table 1 will be assigned the classnotations as follows:

Table 1 Optional class notations

Class notation Qualifier Purpose Application

<none> helicopter deck structure,see [1], [2], [3] and [4]

S vessel safety, see [5]

H helicopter safety, see [6]

F helicopter service facility,see [7]

HELDKMandatory:

No

Design requirements:

— this section

FiS survey requirements:

— Pt.7 Ch.1 Sec.6

CAA-Nrequirements specified bythe Norwegian Civil AviationAuthorities, see [8]

Part

6 C

hapt

er 5

Sec

tion

5


DNV GL AS

1.5 Definitions1.5.1 TermsFor terms, symbols and definitions not defined in this section, see Pt.3 Ch.1 Sec.4.

Table 2 Terms

Terms Definition

helideck purpose built helicopter landing area located on a ship including all structure,firefighting appliances and other equipment necessary for the safe operation ofhelicopters

helicopter facility helideck including any refuelling and hangar facilities

helicopter landing area an area on a ship designed for emergency landing of helicopters

RAST recovery, assist, secure and traverse

SHOLS ship helicopter operations limitations

1.6 Documentation requirements1.6.1 Class notation HELDKDocumentation shall be submitted as required by Table 3.

Table 3 Documentation requirements − class notation HELDK


H050 – Structural drawing deck, substructure and safety net supports includingreaction forces at the hull supports AP

H050 – Structural drawing tie-down points, including capacity (breaking load) AP

H050 – Structural drawing steel and aluminium connections, including specificationof insulation materials and bolts AP

H080 – Strength analyses including specification of helicopter type, overall lengthwith rotors running, maximum total mass and wheel loaddistribution

FI

Z030 – Arrangement plan including location of tie-down points AP

Z252 – Test procedure atmanufacturer

load test. For erected decks built up by unconventionalprofile AP

Helicopter deckarrangement

Z262 – Report from test atmanufacturer

load test. For erected decks built up by unconventionalprofiles AP

Z030 – Arrangement plan landing net/rope net APHelicopter decknets

Z030 – Arrangement plan safety net, including strength AP


Part

6 C

hapt

er 5

Sec

tion

5


DNV GL AS

1.6.2 Qualifier SDocumentation shall be submitted as required by Table 4.

Table 4 Documentation requirements − qualifier S


M020 – Material specification, firerelated properties

deck and insulation towards superstructure AP

Z030 – Arrangement plan escape routes, rescue equipment, firefighting equipment,hatches and drainage

AP


Z262 – Report from test atmanufacturer

fire test of aluminium deck AP

Aeronauticalcommunication

Z100 – Specification details of VHF installation AP

Helicopterdeck foam fireextinguishingsystem

G200 – Fixed fire extinguishingsystem documentation AP


1.6.3 Qualifier HDocumentation shall be submitted as required by Table 5.

Table 5 Documentation requirements − qualifier H


Helicopterobstacle-freesector

Z030 – Arrangement plan including height of all obstacles AP

Helicopter deckdaylight marks

Z030 – Arrangement plan including details and position of wind indicator AP

Z030 – Arrangement plan floodlights and perimeter lights APHelicopter decknight operationmarks

E170 – Electrical schematicdrawing

including power supply AP


1.6.4 Qualifier FDocumentation shall be submitted as required by Table 6.

Table 6 Documentation requirements − qualifier F



Z100 – Specification non-skid coating on deck between landing area andhangar and in the hangar

AP

Part

6 C

hapt

er 5

Sec

tion

5


DNV GL AS


Hangararrangement

Z030 – Arrangement plan including escape routes, location of equipment, drainagearrangement, rope nets and rapid securing or traversingsystem (recessed grid, rails and other arrangements)

AP

H050 – Structural drawing including hangar doors. Including functional loads/design information, e.g. the horizontal components ofthe helicopter down wash on the hangar

AP

H050 – Structural drawing tie down points, including capacity (breaking load) AP

Hangar

Z030 – Arrangement plan tie down points AP

Helicopter fuelsystem

Z030 – Arrangement plan refuelling area, including position relative toaccommodation and embarkation areas. Includingdrainage facilities

AP

Helicopter fuelstorage tanks

H050 – Structural drawing including inspection hatches, level indicators, ventilationand foundations

AP

Helicopter fuelpiping system

S010 – Piping diagram including filters, flow meters, delivery hoses, earthconnections and emergency shut-down arrangementfrom safe location

AP

Hazardous areaclassification

G080 – Hazardous areaclassification drawing

AP

Structural fireprotectionarrangements

G060 – Structural fire protectiondrawing

helicopter hangar and service area, including decks,bulkheads, doors and closing appliances

AP

I200 – Control and monitoringsystem documentation

APFire detection andalarm system

Z030 – Arrangement plan AP

Hangar waterspraying fireextinguishingsystem

G200 – Fixed fire extinguishingsystem documentation AP

S012 – Ducting diagram APVentilationsystems forhangars S030 – Capacity calculation AP


1.6.5 Qualifier CAA-NDocumentation shall be submitted as required by Table 7.

Table 7 Documentation requirements − qualifier CAA-N



Z300 – Declaration turbulence conditions FI


For general requirements for documentation, including definition of the info codes, see Pt.1 Ch.3 Sec.2.

Part

6 C

hapt

er 5

Sec

tion

5


DNV GL AS

For a full definition of the documentation types, see Pt.1 Ch.3 Sec.3.

1.7 Certification requirements

1.7.1 For products that shall be installed on board, the builder shall request the manufacturers to ordercertification as described in Table 8.


Object Certificatetype

Issued by Certificationstandard*

Additional description

Storage tanks andassociated equipmentfor flammable liquids

PC Society for qualifier F

Foam concentrate PC Society including physical properties and production date

Bimetallic connectionflats

PC Society approved manufacturer


1.7.2 For general certification requirements, see Pt.1 Ch.3 Sec.4.

1.7.3 For a definition of the certification types, see Pt.1 Ch.3 Sec.5.

1.8 Testing requirements1.8.1 Load test for erected helidecks built up of unconventional profilesFor erected helidecks built up of unconventional profiles, the capacity of the profiles shall be documentedthrough a load test which shall be witnessed by a surveyor. A load test procedure shall be submitted forapproval prior to the load test being carried out, and the results shall be documented in a test report whichshall be approved by the Society. Requirements to the load test are given in [1.8.2] to [1.8.5].

1.8.2 The beams shall be load tested without any permanent deflections for a load of 3 times the fraction ofthe maximum take-off mass of helicopter acting on the wheel(s)/part of tubular skid having the highest load.

1.8.3 The length between the supports shall be equal to or bigger than the maximum span that is used inthe applicable design.

1.8.4 The support of the beams shall reflect the worst possible situations in the applicable design.

1.8.5 The test load shall be distributed over an area equal to the contact area during landing, as specifiedby the helicopter manufacturer. When simulating the contact area for the helicopter wheels, rubber padsequivalent in size to the contact area shall be fitted on the steel plate onto which the force is applied.

1.8.6 Testing of landing area and hangar deckThe helicopter deck shall be hose tested for watertightness.

1.8.7 Drainage in the landing and hangar deck area shall be tested for functionality with all fire extinguishingsystems in operation.

1.8.8 The coating on the landing area and in the hangar (qualifier F) shall be tested in order to check thatthe required coefficient of friction or more is obtained.

Part

6 C

hapt

er 5

Sec

tion

5


DNV GL AS

1.8.9 Testing of visual landing aidsThe visual landing aids shall be tested for correct functionality.

1.8.10 Testing of fire protectionThe fire protection system shall in accordance with approved test procedures be functionality tested.The test shall cover:

— remote control functions of foam monitor(s)— validity of batch certificate for the foam concentrate— correct mixing ratio of foam proportioner— helicopter deck foam system (by means of monitors) if installed, shall include throw length of monitors

(75% of throw length credited in still air) with sea water— helicopter deck foam system (by means of pop up sprinklers) if installed, shall include function test of

pop-up nozzles and their distribution pattern in accordance with system manuals with sea water— hangar fixed fire extinguishing system complying with SOLAS 2000 II-2/10.5 shall be tested as required

for water based spray/mist/foam systems for machinery category A spaces.

1.8.11 Testing of fire integrity of aluminium structureThese rules consider aluminium helicopter decks as being equivalent to steel with respect to fire integritywhen tested as outlined below.Test procedure:

— size of prototype helicopter deck 5×5 m— a static load simulating actual helicopter weight to be present on the deck— helicopter fuel shall be continuously supplied to the deck for 10 minutes, so that the deck is filled with

fuel at all times during the test. At all times during the test should fuel be dripping from drainagearrangements while there is a fire on the deck.

Acceptance criteria (visual observations of the deck and sealing):

— the helicopter deck shall not collapse or be deformed— no fuel leakage or flames shall be observed under the deck.

The test shall be witnessed by a recognized society.Guidance note 1:This test does not consider other aspects, for example rotor damage caused by an overturned helicopter. For qualifier S, aluminiumhelicopter decks are required to be tested as outlined above.


Guidance note 2:For notation HELDK, SOLAS Ch. II-2 Reg. 18.3.2 will be used when the Society is delegated to issue SOLAS safety certificates.


1.9 Materials

1.9.1 The grades of steel and aluminium materials shall be in compliance with the requirements for hullmaterials given in Pt.3 Ch.3 Sec.1.

1.9.2 The extent of press weld testing as outlined in Pt.2 Ch.2 Sec.10 [1.10] need not be complied with forprofiles in erected aluminium helicopter decks. For such profiles, press weld testing can be carried out on onesample per heat and batch.

1.9.3 In welded zones of rolled or extruded aluminium products (heat affected zones) the mechanicalproperties given for extruded products may in general be used as basis for the scantling requirements asoutlined in Pt.3 Ch.3 Sec.1 [4].

Part

6 C

hapt

er 5

Sec

tion

5


DNV GL AS

1.10 Steel and aluminium connections

1.10.1 In sea exposed areas, to prevent galvanic corrosion, a non-hygroscopic insulation material shall beapplied between steel and aluminium. Bolts with nuts and washers shall be of stainless steel.

Guidance note:Stainless steel shim is considered applicable non-hygroscopic material.


1.10.2 Horizontal inertia forces in bolted connections may be required to be taken up by metal to metalstoppers with insulation tape in the gap.

1.10.3 Aluminium superstructures, which are provided with insulating material between aluminium and steel,shall be earthed to the hull. See Pt.4 Ch.8 Sec.2 [9.7].

1.10.4 For welded connections, any bimetallic connection flats shall be delivered from approvedmanufacturer and with the Society’s product certificate. The bimetallic connection flats shall be approved foruse in sea exposed environment.Maximum allowable stresses in the bimetallic connection shall be included in the documentation.Aluminium-steel transition joints (bi-metallic connections) shall not be used when exposed to tensile loads.

2 Design loads and load combinations

2.1 General

2.1.1 The scantlings of each structural element shall be based on the most unfavourable of the followingloading conditions:

— landing condition— stowed condition (helicopter lashed onboard at sea).

Guidance note:In the stowed condition, the helicopter deck strength and its supporting structure may be checked using Pt.3 Ch.6 and the wheelloading requirements given in Pt.3 Ch.10 Sec.5.


2.1.2 Both the normal operational conditions and any identifiable accidental conditions shall be considered.The following loads are in general to be considered:

— landing impact forces— gravity and inertia forces of the helicopter in stowed position— hull still water loads (applicable for use of weather decks as helicopter deck)— sea pressure.

Guidance note:Wind loads on the helicopter in stowed condition may generally be neglected.


2.1.3 For landing platforms erected as separate structure the following loads are also to be considered:

— gravity and inertia forces of the structure with equipment— wind forces (for erected structures)— ice loads.

Part

6 C

hapt

er 5

Sec

tion

5


DNV GL AS

2.1.4 In the landing condition, the landing impact force shall be combined with associated environmentalloads. Heel and trim need not be considered.

2.1.5 The loads in [2.2] to [2.5] shall be combined as follows:Operational conditions:

1) Landing condition

— landing force— gravity forces of the structure with equipment.

2) Stowed condition (helicopter lashed onboard)

— gravity and inertia of the helicopter— gravity and inertia of the structure with equipment— hull bending loads (only applicable for integrated helicopter decks)— sea pressure, minimum sea pressure/wind load— ice loads on erected helicopter deck and supporting structure— green sea on pillars supporting erected helicopter decks.

3) Wind lift forces on erected structures (no helicopter on deck).

2.2 Landing forces

2.2.1 The total vertical force from the helicopter during landing shall be taken not less than:

Pv = 3·g0·MH

where:

MH = maximum take-off mass, in t, of helicopter.

The total force Pv shall be considered as distributed on the helicopter's landing gear in the same manner aswhen the helicopter is resting on a horizontal surface and the helicopter's centre of gravity is in its normalposition in relation to the landing gear.

2.3 Gravity and inertia forces - due to vessel motions and accelerations

2.3.1 The dynamic design forces caused by the platform structure itself and, if applicable, by the helicopterin its stowed position are preferably to be taken either from direct calculations or model tests.

2.3.2 Worst case realistic load combinations for the static plus dynamic (S+D) design load scenarios of staticand dynamic design forces shall be considered.For ships in world-wide operation, inertia forces can be based on envelope accelerations determined fromPt.3 Ch.4 Sec.3 [3.3], and combined according to Table 9 for operational conditions.

2.4 Minimum environmental loads

2.4.1 The environmental load in kN/m2 on helideck shall not be taken less than:

Pe = 3.5 for erected helideck pancake located more than 1.7 CW m above WL at scantling draughtPe = PD for other helidecksPD = Green sea pressure on exposed decks in N/mm2, in accordance with Pt.3 Ch.4 Sec.5 [2.2]

Part

6 C

hapt

er 5

Sec

tion

5


DNV GL AS

CW = Wave load coefficient, see Pt.3 Ch.4 Sec.4

2.4.2 Loads from green sea on members supporting erected helicopter decks shall be included for helicopterdeck positioned in the fore ship. The horizontal pressure, in kN/m2, caused by green sea is given by thefollowing equation:

P = 4.1 CD a (1.79 CW – h0)

where:

CD = drag coefficient= 1.0 for circular cross section= 2.0 for non-circular sections

a = 2 + L/120, maximum 4.5h0 = vertical distance in m from the waterline at draught T to the load pointCW = wave load coefficient, see Pt.3 Ch.4 Sec.4.

This is a horizontal load acting in the direction of the ship longitudinal axis. It shall be used on the supportingstructures, and shall be combined with acceleration loads as specified in Pt.3 Ch.6 Sec.5 [2.3].

2.4.3 For structures where wind suction forces may be of importance, e.g. bolted platforms, wind lift forcesPwd in kN, shall be taken into account by:

where:

AD = deck area in m2.

2.4.4 Ice thickness for erected structures shall be taken into account in the stowed condition as follows:

— in the North Sea 5 cm on exposed surfaces— in Arctic waters 15 cm on exposed surfaces— or by designers specification of maximum ice thickness.

2.4.5 The helicopter deck shall be checked for other loads as applicable.

Guidance note:Such loads should be presented to the Society.


Part

6 C

hapt

er 5

Sec

tion

5


DNV GL AS

Table 9 Load combinations for erected helicopter installations

Load combinations

Stowed helicopter+ ice + verticaland transverseaccelerations

Stowed helicopter+ ice + verticaland longitudinal

accelerations

Helicopter landing Wind suction

Load cases A B C D

Mass of structure X X X

Mass of equipment X X X

Mass of helicopter X X

Landing loads according to [2.2.1]2) X

Ice mass, acc. to [2.4.4], on both sidesof helideck pancake X X

Ice mass, acc. to [2.4.4], on thesupporting structure: 100 % of thesurface that get green sea loading,50% of the surface that not get greensea loading

X X

Minimum environmental load onhelideck acc. to [2.4.1] X X

Green sea load on supporting structurein longitudinal direction acc. to [2.4.2] X 1)

Wind suction acc. to [2.4.3] X

Vertical accelerations times mass mU·g mU(g+ aZ) mU·g mU·g

Transverse accelerations times mass ±mU·aY

Longitudinal accelerations times mass ±mU·aX

1) For global strength, the green sea impact pressure need not to be taken larger than 37.5% of the impact pressureon each individual member. For local check of individual member, 10% green sea impact pressure as specified in[2.4.2] shall be used.

2) The landing locations for the helicopter landings shall cover the worst situations for all members and elements of thehelideck and supporting structure.

where:

mU = mass of the unit, in taX = longitudinal envelope acceleration, in m/s2, at the centre of gravity of the unit for the considered

load case, to be obtained according to Pt.3 Ch.4 Sec.3 [3.3.1]aY = transverse envelope acceleration, in m/s2, at the centre of gravity of the unit for the considered

load case, to be obtained according to Pt.3 Ch.4 Sec.3 [3.3.2]aZ = vertical envelope acceleration, in m/s2, at the centre of gravity of the unit for the considered load

case, to be obtained according to Pt.3 Ch.4 Sec.3 [3.3.3].

Part

6 C

hapt

er 5

Sec

tion

5


DNV GL AS

3 Structural strength

3.1 General

3.1.1 Decks for helicopters supported on wheels with pneumatic tyres shall have scantlings in accordancewith the requirements given in [3.2] to [3.3].

3.2 Deck plating and stiffeners

3.2.1 The net thickness, in mm, of steel plating shall not be less than:

The gross thickness, in mm, of aluminium plating shall not be less than:

where:

k1 = 0.5 in separate platforms= 0.55 in weather decks general= 0.6 in longitudinal framed strength deck and in weather deck hatch covers= 0.75 in transversely framed strength deck

b = breadth of plate panel, in mm, as defined in Pt.3 Ch.3 Sec.7 [2.1]PW = fraction of total landing force Pv acting on the wheel(s) considered, in kN.

The net section modulus, in cm3, of stiffeners for the static plus dynamic (S+D) design load scenarios shallnot be less than:

where:

M = bending moment, in kNm, from the most unfavourable location of landing forces point loads. Inmost cases half fixed beam ends will be a reasonable assumption

fu = factor for unsymmetrical profiles, to be taken as:= 1.00 for flatbars and symmetrical profiles (T-profiles)= 1.03 for bulb profiles= 1.15 for unsymmetrical profiles (L-profiles)

Cs = permissible bending stress coefficient for supporting members not subject to hull girder stresses, tobe taken as:Cs = 1.0 in general (acceptance criteria AC-II)Cs = 0.75 for class notation Offshore service vessel(+) (acceptance criteria AC-I).

Part

6 C

hapt

er 5

Sec

tion

5


DNV GL AS

For supporting members subject to hull girder stresses the permissible bending stress coefficient Cs shall bein accordance with Pt.3 Ch.6 Sec.5 Table 3, applying:

— acceptance criteria AC-II in general— acceptance criteria AC-I for class notation Offshore service vessel(+).

Intersection of stiffeners and primary supporting members (PSM) shall have a net shear area, in cm2, of notless than:

3.2.2 Decks for helicopters supported on tubular skids shall have scantlings in accordance with the following.

The net thickness, in mm, of steel plating shall be:

where:

k1 = 1.1 in separate platforms= 1.2 in weatherdeck general= 1.3 in longitudinal framed strength deck and in weather deck hatch covers= 1.7 in transversely framed strength deck

PW = fraction of total landing force Pv acting on the skid or saddle joint considered, in kNε = a1/ba1 = length of tubular line load, usually taken as 0.6 m (twice the distance from saddle joint to skid end)b = breadth of plate panel, in mm, as defined in Pt.3 Ch.3 Sec.7 [2.1].

The gross thickness, in mm, of aluminium plating shall be:

where:

k1 = 1.2 for separate platforms= 1.35 for weather deck hatch covers.

PW and ε as above.

The net section modulus of stiffeners as for wheel helicopters.

3.2.3 In cases where the deck is proposed to be built from sections, the connections between them will haveto be documented to give the same strength as required for an intact deck and also the necessary oil andfuel (including burning fuel) tightness.

3.2.4 Unconventional deck profiles in erected helidecks shall be load tested in accordance with [1.8.1].

Part

6 C

hapt

er 5

Sec

tion

5


DNV GL AS

3.3 Primary supporting members and supporting structures of erectedseparate platforms3.3.1 Yield criteria for beam analysisThe scantlings shall be based on direct stress analysis.

The calculated stresses, in N/mm2, for the static plus dynamic (S+D) design load scenarios shall comply withthe following criteria:

where:

τ = average shear stress in member, in N/mm2, at the considered positionQ = shear force, in kN, at the considered positionAshr-n50 = net shear area, in cm2, at the considered positionσb = bending normal stress, in N/mm2, at the considered positionM = bending moment, in kNm, at the considered positionZn50 = net section modulus, in cm3, at the considered position.

Part

6 C

hapt

er 5

Sec

tion

5


DNV GL AS

Table 10 Beam analysis of primary supporting members, definition of Cs and Ct

Acceptancecriteria

Description Structural member Cs Ct

AC-IApplicable for:vessels with class notation Offshoreservice vessel(+)

all primary supporting members 0.75 0.70

AC-II In general all primary supporting members 0.90 0.85

AC-III Landing all primary supporting members 1.0 0.95

3.3.2 Buckling criteria for beam analysisColumn and beam-column buckling capacity calculations of supporting members shall be in accordance withDNVGL-CG-0128 Sec.3.

The structural member is considered to have an acceptable buckling strength if it satisfies the followingcriterion for the static plus dynamic (S+D) design load scenarios:

η = maximum buckling utilisation factor based on the applied stress, as defined in DNVGL-CG-0128Sec.3

ηall = allowable buckling utilisation factor, as defined in Table 11.

Table 11 Allowable buckling utilisation factor ηall

Acceptancecriteria

Description Structural member ηall

AC-I Applicable for:vessels with class notationOffshore servicevessel(+)

all supporting members 0.65

AC-II In general all supporting members 0.75

Landing:for notation Offshoreservice vessel(+)

all supporting members 0.75AC-III

Landing:in general

all supporting members 0.85

3.3.3 Buckling criteria for supporting bulkheadsBulkheads supporting decks and which are exposed to compressive forces from impact landing loads and/orgravity and inertia loads from the helicopter deck shall be checked for buckling strength. Buckling strengthof bulkhead stiffeners and adjoining plates shall be checked. Compressive forces shall be based on beamanalysis.

Simplified method of finding compressive axial stress, in N/mm2, based on pillar force Fpill, for the static plusdynamic (S+D) design load scenarios to be taken as:

Part

6 C

hapt

er 5

Sec

tion

5


DNV GL AS

where:

Fpill = compressive axial load acting on the bulkhead stiffener taken from beam analysis, in kN= Pw as defined in [3.2.1], in kN

t = net thickness of bulkhead plating, in mms = stiffener spacing, in mmAs = net sectional area of the stiffener without attached plating, in mm2.

The product t·s may have to be considered by the Society on a case-by-case basis in way of cut outs in thebulkhead.

The structural member is considered to have an acceptable buckling strength if it satisfies the followingcriterion for the static plus dynamic (S+D) design load scenarios:

where:

ηstiffener, ηplate = maximum buckling utilisation factor based on the applied stress, as defined in DNVGL-CG-0128 Sec.3 [3.2.2] for plates and [3.2.3] for stiffeners

ηall = allowable buckling utilisation factor, as defined in Table 12.

Stresses taken from the strength assessment which are based on beam analysis and applied for bucklingcapacity calculation of plate panels shall be corrected as given in DNVGL-CG-0128 Sec.3 [3.2.2].

Table 12 Allowable buckling utilisation factor ηall

Acceptancecriteria

Description Structural member ηall

AC-I Applicable for:vessels with class notation Offshoreservice vessel(+)

plates and stiffeners/stiffened panels 0.8

AC-II In general plates and stiffeners/stiffened panels 1.0

AC-III Emergency landing plates and stiffeners/stiffened panels 1.0

Tripping brackets and local stiffening of plating shall be provided where necessary.

3.4 Miscellaneous

3.4.1 In case of landing on a hatch cover section that is underlying in the packing joint, the strength andspacing of cleats shall be sufficient to keep the connection intact and tight.

Part

6 C

hapt

er 5

Sec

tion

5


DNV GL AS

4 Miscellaneous

4.1 Personnel safety

4.1.1 The landing area shall be surrounded by a safety net of not less than 1.5 m width. The safety net shallhave an upward and outboard slope of about 10° from slightly below to slightly above the level of the landingarea but not more than 250 mm.

Guidance note:The safety net may further facilitate:

— that it can be safely secured in the upright position

— that it can be secured in the lowered position, in order to avoid being blown upright by rotor downdraft

— that it is flush with helicopter deck in the lowered position

— that the safety net webbing is installed with slack in order to contain personnel who fall over the deck edge (avoid rebounding)

— that the safety net webbing is made of flame resistant materials

— that the safety net webbing is made of material resistant to seawater

— that it can be lowered and raised in a manner that minimises the risk for personnel falling overboard during operations.


4.1.2 The flexibility and tightening shall be chosen to avoid rebounding. The number and shape of rails andbrackets shall be chosen to minimise injuries.

4.1.3 The test load for safety net and safety net supporting structure surrounding a helicopter deck shall notbe taken less than 100 kg dropped from 1 m.

Guidance note 1:Approximate calculations may be based on a static load of 0.2 tons/m run of net. For soft, hammock type nets this load may beconverted into 0.2 g0 kN/m acting along inner and outer rails in an inward plane 30° below the net plane, see Figure 1.


Guidance note 2:In rails, brackets and other details supporting safety nets, allowable stresses in approximate static calculations may be taken asgiven in [3.3.1].


Figure 1 Safety net

4.1.4 A 5 cm high steel coaming shall border landing platforms and landing areas in exposed positions,to assist in minimising the probability of personnel or equipment from sliding off the helicopter deck. Thecoaming shall not impede good drainage of water and or spilt fuel.

Part

6 C

hapt

er 5

Sec

tion

5


DNV GL AS

4.2 Tie-down points

4.2.1 Helicopter decks shall have recessed tie-down points for lashing of the helicopter. The housing of thetie down point shall be sufficiently flush fitted and shall not exceed a total height of 25 mm above the landingarea, in order to avoid hazards to helicopter operations and tripping incidents. Helicopter operators canadvise on the best configuration of the tie down points on the helicopter deck.

4.2.2 The breaking load of the tie-down points for helicopters calling at the vessel should be confirmed fromhelicopter operator or manufacturer. Unless otherwise provided a force F, in kN, per tie-down where MH inkNm, is given in [2.2] may be used.

where:

n = the number of active tie-down points acting in same direction.

4.3 Surface friction of helicopter deck

4.3.1 The surface of helicopter decks and landing areas shall be of such a nature or so equipped thatthe static coefficient of friction between the helicopter's landing gear and the surface will be satisfactory(recommended value 0.6) in any weather condition. To prevent sliding in cold weather when there is dangerfor icing, the surface is either to have a grid of ribs (for wheel helicopters) or shall be arranged for fitting arope net/ landing net, which shall be kept on board.

4.3.2 The helicopter rope net mentioned in [4.3.1] shall have a size as given in Table 13.

Table 13 Minimum rope net size

Deck diameter D according to [6.1] Net size

Less than 13 m 6 × 9 m

13 to 14 m 9 × 9 m

14 to 20 m 12 × 12 m

More than 20 m 15 × 15 m

Note:The rope net shall be secured every 1.5 m. Mesh size and tightening shall be such as to avoid hooking of helicoptersubstructure.

5 Requirements for vessel safety − qualifier S

5.1 Fire-fighting - general

5.1.1 The requirements in this subsection is considered to cover the requirements in SOLAS Reg.II-2/18.1-5.

Part

6 C

hapt

er 5

Sec

tion

5


DNV GL AS

5.2 Structural fire integrity

5.2.1 Escape routes from the helicopter deck shall be arranged on opposite sides. Minimum two escaperoutes shall be provided.

5.2.2 In general, the construction of the helicopter decks shall be of steel or other equivalent material,see also [1.8.11]. If the helicopter deck forms the deckhead of a deckhouse or superstructure, it shall beinsulated to A-60 class standard.

5.2.3 Enclosed piping used in drainage systems should be made of steel, open scupper arrangement mayhowever be made of aluminium. The drainage arrangement shall be lead directly overboard independent ofany other system and shall be designed such that drainage does not fall onto any part of the ship. Drainageshall be provided at the perimeter of the helicopter decks. The deck shall be constructed so that water/fluidswill not accumulate on the deck.

Guidance note:Drainage of helicopter decks landing area can for example be achieved by cambering or slope (minimum 1:100) or by perforatedsurface for collecting drained fluid over board to prevent water/fluids from collecting on the deck surface.


5.3 Firefighting equipment

5.3.1 A fixed foam application system consisting of either monitors or pop up nozzles with a minimumcapacity of at least 6 l/m2/min shall be provided. The system shall be able to cover the whole of thehelicopter landing area, and with sufficient foam medium to enable the foam application rate to bemaintained for at least 5 minutes.

5.3.2 In addition to the fixed foam system, two hand held foam applicators with a capacity of at least 250 l/min each shall be provided. The fire hose connection shall be suitable for both foam equipment and fire waternozzle, see [5.3.4] 3).

5.3.3 The foam shall be of an approved medium suitable for the helicopter fuel used and for use with saltwater.

5.3.4 The following firefighting appliances shall be provided and stored near the means of access to thehelideck:

1) At least two dry powder extinguishers having a total capacity of 45 kg.2) CO2 extinguishers of a total capacity of not less than 18 kg or equivalent.3) Two fire hoses and two nozzles of an approved dual purpose type (jet/spray) sufficient to reach any part

of the helicopter deck.4) Two fire-fighter’s outfits dedicated for the helicopter deck. The fire-fighter’s outfit shall comply with

Ch.3.2.1 of the FSS Code.5) The following rescue equipment:

— adjustable wrench— rescue axe, large (non wedge or aircraft type)— cutters, bolt, 60 cm— crowbar, large— hook, grab or salving— hacksaw, heavy duty c/w 6 spare blades— blanket, fire resistant— ladder (two-piece)

Part

6 C

hapt

er 5

Sec

tion

5


DNV GL AS

— life line, 5 mm, 15 m in length plus rescue harness— pliers, side cutting (tin snips)— set of assorted screwdrivers— harness knife c/w sheath— gloves, fire resistant— power cutting tool.

5.4 Communication between helicopter and vessel

5.4.1 Helicopter and vessel shall communicate through a VHF installation, maritime or aeromobile.Guidance note 1:For helicopter decks with frequent landings an aeromobile VHF should be installed and licensed by the aviation authority of thecoastal state.


Guidance note 2:For passenger ships, the communication requirements should be in accordance with SOLAS Chapter IV, Regulation 7.5.


Guidance note 3:For naval craft, helicopter communications should be thorough HF, V/UHF normal and VHF/UHF.


A portable VHF apparatus with earphones shall be available. Three-way communication between helicopter,helicopter deck and bridge shall be possible.

6 Requirements for helicopter safety − qualifier H

6.1 Size of helicopter deck

6.1.1 The diameter D of the helicopter deck or landing area shall be according to Table 14.

Table 14 D-value and helicopter type criteria

Type D-value(m)

Perimeter“D”

marking

Rotordiameter

(m)

Max. weight(kg)

“t”value

Bolkow Bo 105D 12.00 12 9.90 2 400 2.4t

Bolkow 117 13.00 13 11.00 3 200 3.2t

Agusta A109 13.05 13 11.00 2 600 2.6t

Dauphin SA 365N2 13.68 14 11.93 4 250 4.3t

EC 155B1 14.30 14 12.60 4 850 4.9t

Sikorsky S76 16.00 16 13.40 5 307 5.3t

Agusta/Bell 139 16.66 17 13.80 6 400 6.4t

Bell 212 17.46 17 14.63 5 080 5.1 t

Super Puma AS332L 18.70 19 15.00 8 599 8.6t

Part

6 C

hapt

er 5

Sec

tion

5


DNV GL AS

Type D-value(m)

Perimeter“D”

marking

Rotordiameter

(m)

Max. weight(kg)

“t”value

Bell 214ST 18.95 19 15.85 7 936 8.0t

Super Puma AS332L2 19.50 20 16.20 9 300 9.3t

EC 225 19.50 20 16.20 11 000 11.0t

Sikorsky S92 20.88 21 17.17 11 861 11.9t

Sikorsky S61 N 22.20 22 18.90 9 298 9.3t

EH101/AH101 22.80 23 18.60 14 600 14.6t

Boeing BV234LRChinook

30.18 30 18.29 21 315 21.3t

6.2 Location

6.2.1 For location at ship's ends a free approach and take-off sector of 210° is required. The whole deck orlanding area shall be located within this sector.

Guidance note:The ship end location is recommended.


6.2.2 For helicopter landing areas located amidships, across ship obstacle free sectors shall be provided.These sectors shall originate at the most forward and aft points on the periphery of the D reference circle anddiverge at 15° forward and 15° aft relative to straight transverse lines.

6.2.3 For any helicopter landing areas amidships located adjacent to the ships side with one-sided approach,the obstacle free sector shall originate at the most forward and aft points on the periphery of the D referencecircle and diverge to achieve 1.5 D at the ship’s side.

6.2.4 For erected helicopter decks there shall be sufficient separation between helicopter deck andunderlying superstructure to ensure that air may flow freely between the deck and the underlying structure.This distance shall be minimum 1 m.

6.2.5 For naval craft, the requirements in [6.2.1] to [6.2.4] may be deviated from if so required by the navy.Guidance note:Vertical component of airflow from horizontal wind velocities up to 25 m/s should not exceed 0.9 m/s over the landing area at mainrotor height.Some helicopter operators may require turbulence conditions for different wind directions above the helicopter deck andinformation of possible exhaust emission from the ship that may have effect on the landing conditions.Such environmental conditions are not covered by the HELDK(S, H) notation, and are considered the operators responsibility toprovide as applicable.


6.3 Height of obstacles

6.3.1 The landing area should be as flush as possible to avoid hazards to helicopter operations and trippingincidents. Objects whose function requires that they are located on the helicopter deck, typically tie-down

Part

6 C

hapt

er 5

Sec

tion

5


DNV GL AS

points, landing net (where required) and marking lights, shall not exceed a height of 25 mm above thelanding area.

6.3.2 Steel or other solid construction at perimeter may extend 50 mm above deck level.

6.3.3 In the approach sector, on and outside of perimeter, only aids essential to helicopter operations areallowed to extend up to a maximum height of 250 mm, e.g. landing lights, floodlights, foam monitors, outeredge of safety net and similar arrangements.

6.3.4 In bow or stern located helicopter landing areas, outside the obstacle free sector, obstacle heights shallbe limited to 0.05 D to a distance 0.62 D from the centre of the landing area and thence are required to bebelow a rising plane of 1:2 to a distance of 0.83 D from the centre of the landing area.

6.3.5 Forward and aft of the approach sector of a flight channel across the ship, within a length equal tohelicopter overall length forward and aft of sector, obstacles are required to be below a plane with 1:5longitudinal inclination.

6.3.6 For helicopter landing areas located adjacent to the ship’s side, outside the obstacle free sector,obstacles shall be limited to a height of 0.05 D for a distance of 0.25 D from the edge of the obstacle freesector and the landing area.

6.3.7 For naval craft, the requirements in [6.3.4] to [6.3.6] may be deviated from if so required by the navy.

6.3.8 No loose gear that can create foreign object damage shall be stored on or in the vicinity of thehelicopter deck.

6.4 Daylight marking

6.4.1 Obstacles, which the helicopter operator should be especially aware of, shall be painted in diagonalstripes of contrasting colours.

6.4.2 Wind direction indicator (windsock) shall be provided so as to indicate the clear area wind conditionrepresentative for the helicopter deck.

6.4.3 The perimeter of the helicopter deck shall be marked with a 300 mm white line. The preferred colour ofdeck within perimeter line is dark grey or dark green.

6.4.4 The name of the vessel shall be marked on the helicopter deck surface between the origin of theobstacle-free sector and the aiming circle in symbols not less than 1200 mm high and in a colour whichcontrasts to the helicopter deck surface.

6.4.5 Obstacle-free sector shall be marked on the helicopter deck by a black chevron, each leg being 790mm long and 100 mm wide. The chevron shall delineate the separation of the 210º obstacle-free sector andthe 150º limited obstacle sector.

6.4.6 The actual D-value of the helicopter deck shall be painted on the helicopter deck inboard of thechevron in alphanumeric symbols of 100 mm height and around the perimeter of the helicopter deck directlyopposite and in 90º to each side of the chevron in with symbol of 600 mm height and rounded down to thenearest whole number.

6.4.7 The maximum allowable mass shall be marked on the helicopter deck in a position that is readablefrom the preferred final approach direction and consist of a two-or three-digit number expressed to onedecimal place rounded to the nearest 100 kg and followed by the letter t. The height of the numbers shall be900 mm with a line width of 120 mm.

Part

6 C

hapt

er 5

Sec

tion

5


DNV GL AS

6.4.8 An aiming circle, which shall be a 1000 mm yellow line with inner diameter 0.5 D. Its centre should bedisplaced 0.1 D from the centre of the D-circle towards the outboard edge, except for decks with a midshipcross flight channel.

6.4.9 A letter H shall be painted 4 x 3 m of 750 mm white lines located in the centre of the aiming circle withthe mid-bar of the H located along the midline of the approach sector.

6.4.10 A signal flag to alert approaching helicopters that landing is prohibited in case the helicopter deck fortechnical reasons cannot be used shall be carried on board. This shall be a red flag 4 000 x 4 000 mm withyellow diagonal cross that can be laid above the "H" inside of the aiming circle.

6.4.11 For naval crafts, marking shall be in accordance with naval requirements.Guidance note:A signal or light that shows Helicopter operations are going on should be installed. The indicator should be displayed on this ship'sbridge and another made clearly visible for the pilot. The indicator should be able to be switched from a go to no go mark.


6.5 Night operation marking

6.5.1 Green lights shall be fitted on the perimeter line, maximum 3 m apart. The intensity of lighting shallbe 30 candela. The lighting shall not be visible below the helicopter deck level.

Guidance note:Details of perimeter-lights should follow the recommendations given by ICAO's Regulation Annex 14 (ICAO = International CivilAviation Organisation).


6.5.2 At least 16 discrete, yellow lighting segments shall be fitted on the touchdown/positioning markingcircle, minimum 0,5 m apart, and of such a length as to provide between 50% to 75% coverage of thecircumference. The light intensity of each segment shall be between 7,5 and 60 candela depending onsegment length. If a segment is made up of a number of individual lighting elements, each element shall beof same nominal performance and spaced 3-10 cm apart.

Guidance note:Details of touchdown/positioning marking circle lighting should follow the recommendations given by ICAO's Regulation Annex 14.


6.5.3 Green lighting sub-sections shall be fitted outlining the heliport identification marking (letter H),maximum 10 cm apart. The intensity of the lighting along the edge of the outline of the letter H shall bebetween 3,5 and 60 candela. If a lighting sub-section is made up of a number of individual lighting elements,each element shall be of same nominal performance and spaced 3-10 cm apart.

Guidance note:Details of heliport identification marking lighting should follow the recommendations given by ICAO's Regulation Annex 14.


6.5.4 The design of the perimeter lights, touchdown/positioning marking circle lights and helideckidentification marking lights shall be such that the luminance of the perimeter lights is equal to or greaterthan that of the touchdown/position marking circle segments, and the luminance of the touchdown/positionmarking circle segments is equal to or greater than that of the letter H.

Guidance note:Floodlights, if any, should be arranged for illumination of the total landing area, with care not to dazzle the pilot.


Part

6 C

hapt

er 5

Sec

tion

5


DNV GL AS

6.5.5 A helideck status light system shall be arranged to provide visual warning if a condition exist whichmay be hazardous for the helicopter or its occupants. The status light shall be flashing red and visible to thepilot from any direction of approach and on any landing heading.

Guidance note:Details of the helideck status light system should follow the recommendations given by ICAO's Regulation Annex 14.


6.5.6 The wind indicator shall be illuminated.

6.5.7 All obstacles, which may obstruct the landing approach shall be indicated by red obstruction lightsvisible from all directions, or floodlighting or a combination of both.

6.5.8 Perimeter lights, touchdown/position marking circle lights, heliport identification marking lights,helideck status lights, wind indicator lights and obstruction lights shall have electric power fed fromemergency and transitional source of power. UPS'es shall comply with the requirements given in Pt.4 Ch.8Sec.7. The transitional power shall last for at least 30 min. The system shall also have a supply circuit frommain power so that a single failure in either the main electric power distribution system or the emergencypower distribution system shall not render the helicopter deck lighting inoperable. Individual protecteddistribution circuits shall be arranged for:

— perimeter lights— touchdown/position marking circle lights— heliport identification marking lights— wind indicator lights— obstruction lights— helideck status lights.

6.5.9 For naval craft light marking shall be in accordance with naval requirements.

6.6 Instrumentation

6.6.1 Wind velocity and direction, barometric pressure, vessel's roll and pitch shall be recorded andcommunicated to helicopter before landing. Simple instruments for this purpose shall be available.

Guidance note:For use in connection with ship helicopter operations limitations (SHOLS), the roll and pitch information should be true values.


7 Requirements for helicopter refuelling and hangar facilities −qualifier F

7.1 Classification and application

7.1.1 The requirements in [7] apply to vessels equipped to support helicopter operations. The rulesconcerning refuelling is limited to handling of fuel with flame point above 60ºC.For fuel with lower flame point, special considerations are required and the storage tank/systems shallcomply with the relevant regulations as given in Sec.9 concerning transport of low flashpoint liquids.

7.1.2 A refuelling area, a hangar, or both, complying with the requirements in [7] is sufficient to qualify forthe qualifier F.

Part

6 C

hapt

er 5

Sec

tion

5


DNV GL AS

7.1.3 The requirement in [7] cover permanent shipboard installations for refuelling and maintenance hangarfor helicopters. The requirements in this subsection are also considered to cover the requirements in SOLASReg. II-2/18.7.

7.2 Helicopter refuelling area

7.2.1 The helicopter fuel storage tanks shall be constructed to suitable standards and material that iscompatible with helicopter fuel and secured to the vessels structure. The tank shall have inspection hatch,level indicator and ventilation arrangement.

7.2.2 The pumping unit shall be arranged with flow meter and emergency shutdown system from safelocation.

7.2.3 Drainage facilities in way of the refuelling area to be arranged with drainage to collection tank ordirectly overboard.

7.2.4 One 25 kg powder extinguisher and one foam applicator shall be arranged for protection of thehelicopter refuelling station.

7.2.5 No smoking signboard and clear refuelling instruction shall be provided at the refuelling station.

7.3 Hangar

7.3.1 The hangar shall be designed in accordance with the requirements given for superstructures as givenin Pt.3 Ch.6.

7.3.2 The deck in the hangar area shall be designed in accordance with load requirements provided for wheelloading and car deck structure.

Guidance note:Requirements are given in Pt.3 Ch.10 Sec.5, as appropriate.


7.3.3 The hangar door shall be weathertight and be able to withstand the horizontal component of thehelicopter down wash.

7.3.4 The hangar door shall be equipped with suitable opening and closing mechanisms of adequatestrength.

7.3.5 The hangar door or the immediate surround shall be fitted with a viewing port, which permitspersonnel to observe operations on the flight deck. The viewing port shall be fabricated from hardenedarmour plate safety glass. The viewing port shall have a minimum diameter of 150 mm and be equipped witha blackout cover.

7.3.6 There shall be a minimum clearance between hangar door and the appropriate helicopter according tothe traversing system.

Guidance note:The clearance should be ≥ 0.5 m each side for rail guided traversing systems and ≥ 0.6 m each side for non-rail guided systems.


7.3.7 The hangar shall be equipped with a general access, in addition to the main hangar door, betweenthe flight deck and the hangar area. The door shall open onto the flight deck area and maintain weathertightness and fire resistance of the hangar area.

Part

6 C

hapt

er 5

Sec

tion

5


DNV GL AS

7.3.8 The hangar shall be treated as a category A machinery space with regard to structural fire protection,ref SOLAS Ch. II-2.

7.3.9 The hangar shall be provided with mechanical ventilation of non-sparking type having a capacity of atleast 6 air changes per hour.

7.3.10 The hangar shall be provided with fixed fire detection system.

7.3.11 The hangar shall be protected by a fixed water based fire extinguishing system with application rateof not less than 10 l/min/m2 and with possibilities for injection of foam liquid for not less than 20 minutes.

7.3.12 The hangar shall be provided with drainage sufficient to handle the water spray system and also toensure safe drainage in case of spill from the helicopter.Drainage shall be lead directly overboard at safe location.

7.3.13 Electrical equipment within the height of 450 mm above the deck shall be of ex proof certified type.

7.3.14 Personnel safety equipmentThe support facility shall be equipped with:Fire-fighters outfits:

— firefighter’s equipment as required in [5].

Other personnel safety equipment including:

— goggles— helmets— gloves.

7.3.15 The deck within the hangar shall be provided with tie-down points in a pattern to ensure safemooring of the helicopter when parked. The strength of the tie down points shall comply with [4.1.4].

8 Requirements specified by the Norwegian Civil AviationAuthorities − qualifier CAA-N

8.1 Helicopter deck dimension

8.1.1 The helicopter deck shall have a dimension corresponding to a circle with a diameter not less than 1.25x D.

8.2 Loads

8.2.1 The dimensions of the helideck shall be based on the presumption that any point on the deck maybe subjected to a single impact load of 75% of the total weight of the heaviest helicopter used. The singleimpact load shall be evenly distributed across the contact area. The contact area between the undercarriageof the helicopter and the helideck shall be calculated in accordance with the specifications from the helicoptermanufacturer.

8.2.2 The load bearing structures beneath the helideck shall be dimensioned to carry a static load up to3.0 times the take-off weight of the heaviest helicopter used, with the normal weight distribution on theundercarriage for this type of helicopter. The helicopter shall be placed in the most adverse position on thedeck.

Part

6 C

hapt

er 5

Sec

tion

5


DNV GL AS

8.3 Allowable stresses

8.3.1 With the loads of the helicopter as stated in [8.2.1] and [8.2.2], plus the mass of the structure and thewind forces, the allowable stresses shall not exceed the yield stress, ReH, of the material, and not exceeding2/3 of the specified minimum tensile strength of the material, RM.

8.4 Rescue equipment

8.4.1 The rescue equipment shall in addition to [5.3.4](5) include:

— total of two 2 fire axes— total of 3 stainless steel knives— two explosion proof hand torches— hammer— jack with minimum 0.5 tonne capacity.

8.5 Marking

8.5.1 The number indicating maximum allowable mass shall be 1 000 mm height and 500 mm wide. Theletter t shall be 800 mm height and 300 mm wide. Line width shall be 150 mm for both.

8.6 Location

8.6.1 Effects from turbulence shall be documented by testing in wind tunnel or simulation model.

Part

6 C

hapt

er 5

Sec

tion

6


DNV GL AS

SECTION 6 DAMAGE STABILITY FOR OFFSHORE SERVICE VESSELS -SF

1 General

1.1 IntroductionThe additional class notation SF sets requirements for vessels with length of 24 m and above complying withthe requirements for intact stability and damage stability.

1.2 ScopeThe scope for additional class notation SF provides requirements for intact and damage stability where thestability manual, approved by the national authorities, shall be submitted as documentation of compliancewith the rule requirements. Cargo ships not complying with the definition of "Offshore supply vessel", inaccordance with IMO guidelines, may not use compliance with additional class notation SF, for exclusion ofcompliance with application of SOLAS Ch. II-1, as amended, Part B-1.

1.3 ApplicationThe additional class notation SF applies to vessels with length of 24 m and above complying with therequirements for intact stability given in Pt.5 Ch.9 Sec.2 [5], and damage stability given in this section,may be given the additional class notation SF. Examination and approval of stability documents carriedout by national authorities, having equivalent intact and damage stability requirements (i.e. Guidelines forthe Design and Construction of Offshore Supply Vessels, 2006, IMO Res.MSC.235(82), alternatively withrespect to damage stability as amended by Amendments to the Guidelines for the Design and Constructionof Offshore Supply Vessels, 2006, IMO Res. MSC.335(90)), may be accepted as a basis for assigning theadditional class notation SF.

1.4 Documentation

1.4.1 Documentation shall be submitted as required by Table 1


Object Document type Additional description Info

B070 - Preliminary damage stabilitycalculations AP

Damage stabilityB130 - Final damage stabilitycalculations

Not required in case of approved limit curves,or if approved lightweight data are not lessfavourable than estimated lightweight data

AP

Internal watertightintegrity

B030 - Internal watertightintegrity plan

FI


For general requirements for documentation, including definition of the info codes, see Pt.1 Ch.3 Sec.2.For a full definition of the documentation types, see Pt.1 Ch.3 Sec.3.

1.4.2 Detailed description of stability documentation is given in DNVGL-CG-0156 Sec.6.

Part

6 C

hapt

er 5

Sec

tion

6


DNV GL AS

2 Damage stability


2.1.1 The damage stability calculations shall contain GM or VCG limit curves for damage conditions showingthe permissible area of operation.

2.1.2 The vessel shall comply with the damage stability requirements of IMO Res. MSC.235(82) (Guidelinesfor the Design and Construction of Offshore Supply Vessels, 2006), alternatively as amended by IMO Res.MSC.335(90) (Amendments to the Guidelines for the Design and Construction of Offshore Supply Vessels,2006).

Part

6 C

hapt

er 5

Sec

tion

7


DNV GL AS

SECTION 7 SPECIAL PURPOSE SHIPS - SPS

1 General

1.1 IntroductionThe additional class notation SPS sets requirements for ships that by virtue of their specialized nature ofservice are carrying special personnel who are neither crew members nor passengers as defined in the 1974SOLAS Convention.

1.2 ScopeThe scope for additional class notation SPS adds an additional level of safety in providing reference to designcriteria, construction standards and other safety measures concerning special purpose ships. A passenger orcargo ship, which is converted to a special purpose ship, will be treated as a special purpose ship constructedon the date on which the contract for conversion is signed. A memo to owners should be issued stating thenumber of persons for which the ships complies with the SPS Code. For flag administrations that have notaccepted the use of the SPS Code, their requirements will prevail whilst under that flag, only.

1.3 ApplicationThe additional class notation SPS applies to ships that fall into the category of a passenger vessel as definedin the Code of Safety for Special Purpose Ships, 2008 (2008 SPS Code), as adopted by the Maritime SafetyCommittee as resolution MSC.266(84) on 13 May 2008. References to the applicable rules and SOLAS aregiven regarding requirements for: Stability and sub-division, fire protection, lifesaving appliances, electricalinstallations, dangerous goods [IMDG Code], radio communications and safety of navigation. All shipsshall also comply with the additional class notation E0. The provisions of this section may upon specialconsideration by the Society be applied to ships of less than 500 GT.

1.4 Definitions

1.4.1 For the purpose of this section, the definitions given in Table 1 and in the SPS Code apply.

Table 1 Definitions

Term Definition

crew

all persons carried onboard the ship to provide navigationand maintenance of the ship, its machinery, systems, andarrangements essential for propulsion and safe navigationor to provide services for other persons on board

IMDG Code

International Maritime Dangerous Goods Code, adoptedby the Maritime Safety Committee of the InternationalMaritime Organization IMO as resolution MSC.122(75), asamended

length length as defined in the International Convention of LoadLines, 1966

LSA CodeInternational Life-Saving Appliance Code, adopted by theMaritime Safety Committee by resolution MSC.48(66), asamended

Part

6 C

hapt

er 5

Sec

tion

7


DNV GL AS

passenger

means every person other than:

— the master and the members of the crew or otherpersons employed or engaged in any capacity on boarda ship on the business of that ship; and

— a child under one year of age.

SOLAS International Convention on Safety of Lives at Sea currentlyin force

special personnel

all persons who are not passengers or members of thecrew or children of less than one year of age and who arecarried on board in connection with the special purposeof that ship or because of special work being carried outaboard that ship. Wherever in this section the number ofspecial personnel appears as a parameter it shall includethe number of passengers carried on board

SPS CodeCode of Safety for Special Purpose Ships, 2008 (2008 SPScode), as adopted by the Maritime Safety Committee asresolution MSC.266(84) on 13 May 2008

1.5 Documentation

1.5.1 Documentation shall be submitted as specified in [1.5.2], [1.5.3] and [1.5.4].

Stability and subdivision1.5.2 Documentation shall be submitted as required by Table 2.



B030 - Internal watertight integrity plan FI

B060 - Floodable length calculation / subdivision indexcalculation AP

B150 - Damage control plan AP

B160 - Damage control booklet AP

B070 - Preliminary damage stability calculation AP

Stability

B130 - Final damage stability calculation AP


For general requirements to documentation, including definition of the info codes, see Pt.1 Ch.3 Sec.2.For a full definition of the documentation types, see Pt.1 Ch.3 Sec.3.

1.5.3 Fire protectionFor ships operating as defined under [2.7], documentation shall be submitted as given in relevant tables inthe Society's statutory interpretations (SOLAS Ch. II-2).

Part

6 C

hapt

er 5

Sec

tion

7


DNV GL AS

1.5.4 Life-saving appliancesFor ships operating as defined under [2.9], documentation shall be submitted as given in relevant tables inthe Society’s statutory interpretations (SOLAS Ch. III).

2 Requirements

2.1 General

2.1.1 The ship shall comply with the 2008 SPS code.

2.2 Stability and subdivision

2.2.1 The intact stability requirements of Pt.3 Ch.15 shall be complied with.

2.2.2 The stability documentation shall include calculations of the most unfavourable loading conditionsanticipated for each intended service mode.

2.2.3 For ships carrying 240 persons or more, the supplementary intact stability requirements of Pt.5 Ch.4Sec.4 [1.2] shall be complied with as though the ship is a passenger ship and the special personnel areconsidered passengers.

Guidance note:Unless required by the flag state a SPS ship need not be considered a passenger ship for application of SOLAS regulation II-1/5.5on periodical lightweight surveys.


2.2.4 The subdivision and damage stability shall in general be in accordance with SOLAS II-1 as amendedwhere the ship is considered a passenger ship and special personnel are considered passengers, with an R-value calculated in accordance with SOLAS regulation II-1/6.2.3 as follows:

— for ships carrying 240 persons or more, the R-value is assigned as 1.0 R— for ships carrying not more than 60 persons, the R-value is assigned as 0.8 R; and— for ships carrying more than 60 persons, but less than 240 persons, the R-value shall be determined by

linear interpolation between the R-values given above.

2.2.5 For ships carrying 240 persons or more, the requirements of SOLAS regulations II-1/8 and II-1/8-1and of SOLAS chapter II-1, parts B-2, B-3 and B-4 shall be applied as though the ship is a passengership and the special personnel are passengers. However, SOLAS regulations II-1/14 and II-1/18 are notapplicable.

2.2.6 Except as provided in [2.2.7] for ships carrying less than 240 persons the provisions of SOLAS chapterII-1, parts B-2, B-3 and B-4 shall be applied as though the ship is a cargo ship and the special personnel arecrew. SOLAS regulations II-1/8, II-1/8-1, II-1/14 and II-1/18 are not applicable.

2.2.7 All ships shall comply with SOLAS regulations II-1/9, II-1/13, II-1/19, II-1/20 and II-1/21 as thoughthe ship is a passenger ship.

Guidance note:In general the interpretations in the explanatory notes to SOLAS chapter II-1 subdivision and damage stability regulations,adopted by IMO as Resolution MSC.281(85) shall be used for the application of SOLAS chapter II-1. The recommendations inresolution MSC.245(83) should be applied if cross-flooding systems are utilised.


Part

6 C

hapt

er 5

Sec

tion

7


DNV GL AS

2.3 Machinery installations

2.3.1 All ships shall comply with Pt.5 Ch.4 as though the ship is a passenger ship

2.3.2 All steering gear installations in special purpose ships carrying more than 240 persons shall complywith Pt.4 Ch.10 Sec.1 [2.6.2] as though the ship is a passenger ship.

2.4 Electrical installations

2.4.1 Electrical distribution systems in ships carrying more than 60 persons shall comply with Pt.5 Ch.4Sec.3.

2.5 Emergency source of power

2.5.1 The emergency source of electrical power in special purpose ships carrying not more than 60 personsand which are more than 50 m in length shall be capable, having regard to starting currents and thetransitory nature of certain loads, of supplying simultaneously at least the following services for a period ofhalf an hour if they depend on an electrical source for their operation:

1) any watertight doors required by SOLAS Reg. II-1/13 to be power operated together with their indicatorsand warning signals

2) the emergency arrangements to bring the lift cars to deck level for the escape of persons.

2.5.2 Installations in special purpose ships carrying more than 60 persons shall comply with: Pt.5 Ch.4 Sec.3as if the ship is a passenger ship.

2.6 Periodically unattended machinery spaces

2.6.1 All ships shall comply with the requirements contained in Ch.2 as applicable for the additional classnotation E0.

2.7 Fire protection

2.7.1 For ships carrying more than 240 persons on board, the requirements of Chapter II-2 of SOLAS forpassenger ships carrying more than 36 passengers shall be applied.

2.7.2 For ships carrying more than 60, but not more than 240 persons on board, the requirements ofChapter II-2 of SOLAS for passenger ships carrying not more than 36 passengers shall be applied, exceptthat Reg. II-2/21 and 22 shall not apply.

2.7.3 For ships carrying not more than 60 persons on board, the requirements of chapter II-2 of SOLAS forcargo ships shall be applied.

Guidance note:For further details and clarification of the basic SOLAS requirements implemented in this section please see statutoryinterpretations DNVGL-SI-0364 Sec.3.


Part

6 C

hapt

er 5

Sec

tion

7


DNV GL AS

2.8 Dangerous goods

2.8.1 Dangerous goods that are carried on board for shipment as cargo and are not used on board aresubject to the provisions of the IMDG Code.

2.8.2 Spaces used for the carriage of any significant amount of dangerous goods as ships’ stores andintended for use on board shall comply with the provisions of the IMDG Code as far as reasonable andpracticable.

2.9 Life-saving appliances

2.9.1 The requirements of chapter III of SOLAS shall be applied with the specifications given in [2.9.2]through [2.9.6].

2.9.2 Ships carrying more than 60 persons shall comply with the requirements contained in Chapter III ofSOLAS for passenger ships engaged in international voyages that are not short international voyages.

2.9.3 Notwithstanding the provisions of [2.9.2], a ship carrying more than 60 persons but not more than 200persons may in lieu of meeting the requirements of regulations 21.1.1 of Chapter III of SOLAS comply withthe requirements of regulation 21.1.5 of Chapter III of SOLAS, including the provision of at least two rescueboat(s) in accordance with regulation 21.2.1 of Chapter III.

Guidance note:The Society considers item [2.9.3] to apply only for ships with a gross tonnage of less than 500 and with a total number of personson board less than 200.


2.9.4 Ships carrying not more than 60 persons shall comply with the requirements contained in ChapterIII of SOLAS for cargo ships other than tankers. Such ships may, however, carry life-saving appliances inaccordance with the passenger ship requirements in [2.9.2] if they comply with the subdivision requirementsin [2.2.4] as though the ship is carrying 60 persons.

2.9.5 Regulations 2, 19.2.3, 21.1.2, 21.1.3, 31.1.6 and 31.1.7 of Chapter III of SOLAS and the requirementsof paragraphs 4.8 and 4.9 of the LSA Code are not applicable to special purpose ships.

2.9.6 Where in Chapter III of SOLAS the term “passenger” is used; it should be read to mean “specialpersonnel”.

2.10 Radio communications

2.10.1 All special purpose ships shall carry a valid Cargo Ship Safety Radio Certificate in compliance withChapter IV of SOLAS.

2.11 Safety of navigation

2.11.1 All special purpose ships shall comply with the requirements of Chapter V of SOLAS. Ships carryingnot more than 240 persons on board should comply with the provisions relating to cargo ships and shipscarrying more than 240 persons on board should comply with the provisions relating to passenger shipsaccording to the gross tonnage.

Part

6 C

hapt

er 5

Sec

tion

8


DNV GL AS

SECTION 8 INERT GAS SYSTEMS - INERT

1 General

1.1 IntroductionThe additional class notation Inert sets requirements for inert gas systems for tanks and void spaces withinthe cargo area. Inert gas systems are used to reduce the likelihood of fire and explosions on-board ships thatcarry crude oil, hydrocarbon gases or refined oil products.

1.2 ScopeThe scope for additional class notation Inert adds additional safety requirements for oil tankers intendedfor the carriage of oil cargoes; all ships with crude oil washing arrangement regardless of size shall be fittedwith a permanently installed inert gas systems. The inert gas system shall be designed in such a way so as toprevent hydrocarbon gases from reaching non-hazardous spaces, and prevent interconnection between tanksand spaces within the cargo area. Stored carbon dioxide systems will be the subject of special consideration,related to the risk of ignition. Inert gas systems based on other means than combustion of hydrocarbonsshall comply with the requirements of the main class rules for ship types.

1.3 Application

1.3.1 The requirements in this section apply to inert gas systems for inerting of tanks and void spaces withinthe cargo area.

1.3.2 Oil carriers (Tanker for oil or Tanker for oil products) of 8000 dwt and above intended for thecarriage of oil cargoes having a flashpoint not exceeding 60°C (closed cup test) and all ships with crudeoil washing arrangement regardless of size shall be fitted with a permanently installed inert gas systemcomplying with the rules in this section.Oil carriers (Tanker for oil or Tanker for oil products) and chemical carriers less than 8000 dwt fittedwith inert gas system complying with the requirements in this section may be assigned the special featuresnotation Inert.

Guidance note:The requirements in this section are considered to meet the FSS code Ch. 15 and SOLAS Reg. II-2/4.5.5 and II-2/11.6.3.4 andas amended by IMO Res. MSC.367(93). For ships above 8000 dwt main class will cover requirements for oil carriers and chemicalcarriers.


1.3.3 Oil carriers of 8000 dwt and above constructed on or after 1 january 2016 shall be fitted with a fixedinert gas system, complying with the requirements in this section.

Guidance note:Oxygen alarm setting will from the date 01.01.2016 be reduced from 8% to 5%.See also IMO Res. MSC.365(93)


1.4 Documentation

1.4.1 Documentation shall be submitted as per Pt.5 Ch.5 for inert gas plants based on flue gas and inert gasgenerators.

Part

6 C

hapt

er 5

Sec

tion

8


DNV GL AS

1.4.2 Documentation shall be submitted as per Pt.5 Ch.6 for inert gas systems based on nitrogen separation.

1.5 Arrangements and systems

1.5.1 To be designed as per Pt.5 Ch.5 for inert gas plants based on flue gas and inert gas generators.

1.5.2 To be designed as per Pt.5 Ch.6 for inert gas systems based on nitrogen separation.

1.5.3 The inert gas system shall be capable of supplying a gas or mixture of gases with an oxygen content ofnot more than 5% at a capacity to satisfy the intended use under all normal operating conditions.

Part

6 C

hapt

er 5

Sec

tion

9


DNV GL AS

SECTION 9 OFFSHORE SERVICE VESSELS FOR TRANSPORTATION OFLOW FLASHPOINT LIQUIDS - LFL

1 General

1.1 IntroductionThe additional class notation LFL sets requirements for vessels intended for transportation of liquids withflashpoint below 60°C in bulk, to and from offshore installations.

1.2 ScopeThe scope for additional class notation LFL establishes requirements for the arrangement and locationof tanks and spaces with low flashpoint, and includes related piping installations, and entrances to suchspaces. Piping systems in cargo area, ventilation of cargo tanks, fire protection and extinction, electricalinstallations in hazardous areas and instrumentation and control systems all form part of the specification forthis notation.

1.3 ApplicationThe additional class notation LFL is mandatory for vessels intended for transportation of liquids withflashpoint below 60°C in bulk to and from offshore installations, which have not been assigned the classnotations Tanker for oil or Tanker for chemicals. Vessels built and equipped in compliance with therequirements of this section for carriage of liquids with flashpoint not lower than 43°C will be given theclass notation LFL(1) . If the requirements for carriage of liquids with flashpoint below 43°C have beencomplied with, then the notation LFL(2) may be given. Cargoes intended to be carried in vessels built forclass notations LFL(1) or LFL(2) shall be specified for approval by the Society. The cargoes which may becarried will be stated in the Appendix to the Classification Certificate. Vessels built to class notation LFL(1)or LFL(2) shall comply with the requirements in Pt.5 Ch.9 Sec.2 [5] and Sec.6.

1.4 Assumptions

1.4.1 The classification of the vessel is based on the assumption that cargo handling operations are carriedout in accordance with the approved operational instruction manual, see [11].

1.4.2 It is assumed that dry cargo and low flashpoint liquid cargo are not carried simultaneously unless oneof the following conditions is satisfied:

— the cargo has a flashpoint of not less than 43°C and is only carried within areas where it is known forcertain that the ambient air temperature cannot rise to more than 10°C below the flashpoint of the cargo

— dry cargo is carried aft and low flashpoint liquid cargo forward of the superstructure, or vice versa— the cargo tanks are kept filled with inert gas and the gas-concentration in the cofferdams is monitored by

an automatic gas detection arrangement while the vessel is solely carrying dry cargo— the cargo tanks are kept filled with inert gas and the cofferdams are filled with water while the vessel is

solely carrying dry cargo— the cargo tanks are kept filled with inert gas and the cofferdams are kept filled with inert gas and

monitored by a leakage detection system while the vessel is solely carrying dry cargo.

Operational assumptions corresponding to the above will be stated in the “Appendix to the classificationcertificate”.

Part

6 C

hapt

er 5

Sec

tion

9


DNV GL AS

1.5 Definitions

1.5.1 A hazardous area is an area in which an explosive gas atmosphere is or may be expected to bepresent, in such quantities that it will require special precautions for:

— the construction,— installation and— use of electrical apparatus.

Hazardous areas shall be defined in compliance with [8].

1.5.2 The term cargo refers generally to liquids having flashpoint below 60°C.

1.5.3 Cargo area is that part of the offshore support vessel where cargo and cargo vapours are likely to bepresent, (see [8]).





S010 - Piping system (PD) APCargo piping system

Z161 - Operational manual See [11] AP

S010 - Piping system (PD) AP

Inert gas system I200 - Control and monitoring systemdocumentation AP

Cargo heating system S010 - Piping system (PD) AP

Hazardous areaclassifications

G080 - Hazardous area classificationdrawing AP

S012 - Ducting diagram (DD) In cargo area, including capacity AP

Ventilation systemsC030 - Detailed drawing Rotating parts and casings for fans and

portable ventilators AP

Cargo tanks pressure-vacuum valves or highvelocity vent valves

Z110 - Data sheet FI

Z030 - Arrangement plan

Electrical equipment in hazardous areas.Where relevant, based on an approved'Hazardous area classification drawing'where location of electric equipment inhazardous area is added (except batteryroom, paint stores and gas bottle store)

APExplosion (Ex) protection

Cargo tanks levelmonitoring system

E250 - Maintenance manual AP

Part

6 C

hapt

er 5

Sec

tion

9


DNV GL AS


E170 - Electrical schematic drawing

Single line diagrams for all intrinsicallysafe circuits, for each circuit includingdata for verification of the compatibilitybetween the barrier and the fieldcomponents

AP

I200 - Control and monitoring systemdocumentation AP

Cargo tanks overflowprotection system


Cargo valves and pumpscontrol and monitoringsystem


I200 - Control and monitoring systemdocumentation APHydrocarbon gas

detection and alarmsystem, fixed Z030 - Arrangement plan AP

Z030 - Arrangement plan APCargo area leakagedetection system I200 - Control and monitoring system

documentation

In cofferdamsAP


G200 - Fixed fire extinguishing systemdocumentation AP

Exhaust systems Z030 - Arrangement plan Including spark arrestors FI

Internal access Z030 - Arrangement plan See [2.1.2] AP




1.6.4 When flag administrations survey the vessel in accordance with the current requirements of theInternational Convention on Safety of Life at Sea (SOLAS), copies of the Cargo Ship Safety ConstructionCertificate and the Cargo Ship Safety Equipment Certificate shall be submitted by the customer or builder.This documentation shall be considered as equivalent to a survey carried out by the Society.


1.7.1 Components shall be certified as required by Table 2.


Object Certificatetype Issued by Certification

standard* Additional description

Inert gas control and monitoringsystem PC Society

Part

6 C

hapt

er 5

Sec

tion

9


DNV GL AS

Object Certificatetype Issued by Certification

standard* Additional description

Hydrocarbon gas detection and alarmsystem PC Society Only for fixed systems

Cargo tanks level monitoring system PC Society

Cargo tanks overflow protectionsystem PC Society

Cargo valves and pumps control andmonitoring system PC Society

* Unless otherwise specified the certification standard is the rules

1.8 Materials

1.8.1 Structural materials used for tank construction, together with associated piping, valves, vents and theirjointing materials, shall be suitable at the carriage temperature and pressure for the cargo to be carried.Materials used shall be presented to the Society for acceptance.

1.9 Surveys and testing

1.9.1 Before assignment of class all systems covered by this section shall be function tested. This shallinclude testing of the nitrogen system capacity to verify that it is in accordance with [4.2.4].

2 Vessel arrangement

2.1 Tank arrangement

2.1.1 Cargo tanks shall not be located within the accommodation or engine room area. Engine room andaccommodation shall not be located above tanks or cofferdams.

2.1.2 Where not bounded by bottom shell plating or pump room, the cargo tanks shall be surrounded bycofferdams.For safe access to and within tanks for low flashpoint liquids and adjacent cofferdams, horizontal hatchesor openings to or within cargo tanks or cofferdams surrounding tanks for low flashpoint liquids shall havea minimum clear opening of 600 × 600mm that also facilitates the hoisting of an injured person from thebottom of the tank/cofferdam. For access through vertical openings providing main passage through thelength and breadth within cargo tanks and cofferdams surrounding tanks for low flashpoint liquids, theminimum clear opening shall not be less than 600×800 mm at a height of not more than 600 mm frombottom plating unless gratings or footholds are provided. Smaller openings may be accepted providedevacuation of an injured person from the bottom of the tank/cofferdam can be demonstrated.Minimum horizontal distance between the tank side or pipes leading from the tank and the ship's shell shallbe 760 mm.

2.1.3 Cargo tanks situated forward of the superstructure may extend to the deck plating, provided dry cargois not handled in this area.

2.1.4 Cargo tanks for liquids with a flashpoint of not less than 43°C may extend to the ship's shell and thedeck plating.

Part

6 C

hapt

er 5

Sec

tion

9


DNV GL AS

Tanks for other purposes (except freshwater and lubricating oil tanks) shall be accepted as cofferdams forthese tanks.

2.1.5 The spaces forward of the collision bulkhead (forepeak) and aft of the aftermost bulkhead (afterpeak)shall not be arranged as cargo tanks nor as cofferdams.

2.1.6 Cofferdams shall be arranged for water filling. The filling system shall not be permanently connected tothe cofferdams.

2.1.7 Tanks on open deck may be approved after special considerations in each particular case.

2.1.8 Cargoes, which react in a hazardous manner with other cargoes or fuel oils, shall be segregated fromsuch by means of a cofferdam, pump room or tank containing a mutually compatible cargo.

2.2 Access and openings general

2.2.1 No accommodation, service spaces, control stations or machinery spaces shall be located within thecargo area.

2.3 Access and openings to accommodation

2.3.1 Entrances, air inlets and openings to accommodation, service and machinery spaces and controlstations shall, in general, not face the cargo area.For vessels with cargo tanks aft of the superstructure, entrances, air inlets and openings facing the cargoarea may be accepted provided they are situated at least 10 m from the nearest hazardous area.The following provisions apply for such boundaries:

a) Doors shall be kept closed during loading/discharge operations. Signboards shall be fitted.b) Port lights or windows shall be of a non-opening type. Inside covers of steel or equivalent material shall

be fitted in the first tier on main deck.c) Ventilation inlets shall be installed as far as practicable from the nearest hazardous area (in no case less

than 10 m).

2.4 Access and openings to pump room and cargo tanks

2.4.1 Cargo tanks and cofferdams surrounding cargo tanks shall have suitable access from open deck forcleaning and gas-freeing. Where cofferdams are provided over cargo tanks, small trunks shall be arranged topenetrate the cofferdam. The trunks shall be arranged for water filling.

2.4.2 Access openings shall not be arranged from cargo tanks or cofferdams to other spaces.

2.4.3 Pump room entrances shall be from open deck.

2.4.4 Access entrances and passages shall have a clear opening of at least 600 × 600 mm.

2.5 Chain locker and windlass

2.5.1 The chain locker shall be arranged as a non-hazardous space.

2.5.2 Windlass cable lifters and chain pipes shall be situated outside hazardous areas.

Part

6 C

hapt

er 5

Sec

tion

9


DNV GL AS

2.6 Miscellaneous

2.6.1 Exhaust outlets from combustion equipment shall have spark arrestors.

2.6.2 Surface temperatures of equipment and piping in hazardous areas shall not exceed 220°C.

3 Piping system in cargo area

3.1 General

3.1.1 Cargo piping systems shall comply with the requirements in Pt.5 Ch.6.

3.1.2 There shall be no permanent connection between piping systems in the cargo area and piping systemsin the remainder of the vessel. For exemption see [3.3].

3.1.3 Where non-permanent connections between piping systems in the cargo area and piping systems inthe remainder of the vessel are accepted, this separation may be achieved by the use of one of the followingarrangements:

— removing spool pieces or valves and blanking the pipe ends— blind flange valves.

Such arrangements shall not be located within a cargo tank or cofferdam.For filling and drainage of cofferdams surrounding cargo tanks, non-permanent hose connections shall beaccepted.

3.1.4 The cofferdam boundaries shall not be penetrated at a level below the top of the cargo tanks.Guidance note:Typically hydraulics for pumps and valves, cables for instrumentation.


3.1.5 Bulkhead penetrations shall not utilise flanges bolted through the bulkhead.

3.1.6 Deck spills shall be kept away from accommodation and service areas through suitable precautionarymeans, such as a permanent coaming of suitable height extending from side to side or around loading anddischarge stations.

3.1.7 Cargo pump room, pipe tunnels and cofferdams shall have a separate drainage system connected topumps or bilge ejectors situated entirely within the cargo area.

3.1.8 Bilge ejectors serving hazardous areas shall not be permanently connected to the drive water system.

3.1.9 Cofferdams shall be provided with sounding pipes and with air pipes led to the atmosphere. The airpipes shall be fitted with flame screens at their outlets.

3.2 Cargo piping system

3.2.1 The complete cargo piping system shall be located within the cargo area and shall be entirely separatefrom all other piping systems on board.

Part

6 C

hapt

er 5

Sec

tion

9


DNV GL AS

3.2.2 Cargoes, which react in a hazardous manner with other cargoes, shall have separate pumping andpiping systems. They shall not pass through other cargo tanks containing such cargoes unless encased in atunnel.

3.2.3 Cargo piping shall not penetrate cargo tank boundaries below the top of the tank. However,penetrations below the top of the tank may be accepted provided that a remotely operated stop valve isfitted within the cargo tank served. Where a cargo tank is adjacent to a pump room, the remotely operatedstop valve may be fitted on the cargo tank bulkhead on the pump room side.

3.2.4 Filling lines to cargo tanks shall be so arranged such that the generation of static electricity is reduced,e.g. by reducing the free fall into the tank to a minimum.

3.2.5 Hydraulically powered pumps, submerged in cargo tanks (e.g. deep well pumps), shall be arrangedwith double barriers, preventing the hydraulic system serving the pumps from being directly exposed to thecargo. The double barrier shall be arranged for detection and drainage of possible cargo leakages.

Guidance note:Due precautions shall be taken in order to avoid cargo release on deck due to too low location of leakage check point. E.g.Expansion tank, air blow connections.


3.2.6 Displacement pumps shall have relief valves with discharge to the suction line.

3.2.7 Means shall be provided such that pumps can be stopped the bridge or a similar position facing thecargo area.

3.2.8 The connecting coupling for the transfer hose shall be of a type which automatically closes atdisconnection (self-sealing type).Means of quick-release of the transfer hose shall be provided, e.g. by installation of a weak link assembly orby installation of a remotely controlled coupling.Quick-release shall be capable of being effectuated from the bridge.

3.3 Cargo heating system

3.3.1 The heating medium shall be compatible with the cargo and the temperature of the heating mediumshall not exceed 220°C.

3.3.2 The cargo heating system shall be arranged as a secondary system independent of other ship'sservices and not enter the engine room.

3.3.3 Heating or cooling systems shall be provided with valves to isolate the system for each tank.

3.3.4 For any heating system, means shall be provided to ensure that, when in any other but the emptycondition, a higher pressure than the maximum pressure head exerted by the cargo tank content on thesystem is maintained within the system.The heating circuit expansion tank shall be fitted with a gas detector or low level alarm and be vented toopen air.

3.3.5 Cargo heating pipes shall not penetrate the cargo tank boundaries other than on the top of the tank.Guidance note:If low flashpoint liquid tanks are used as tanks for recovered oil, see also Sec.11 [5.6.3].


Part

6 C

hapt

er 5

Sec

tion

9


DNV GL AS

4 Gas-freeing, inerting and venting of cargo tanks

4.1 Gas-freeing of cargo tanks

4.1.1 Gas freeing operations shall be carried out such that vapour is initially discharged in one of thefollowing ways:

1) through outlets at least 2 m above the cargo tank deck level with a vertical efflux velocity of at least 30m/s maintained during the gas freeing operation; or

2) through outlets at least 2 m above the cargo tank deck level with a vertical efflux velocity of at least 20m/s which are protected by suitable devices to prevent the passage of flame.

Guidance note 1:When the flammable vapour concentration at the outlets has been reduced to 30% of the lower flammable limit, gas freeing maythereafter be continued at cargo tank deck level.


Guidance note 2:Procedures to be included in the operation manual are given in [9].


4.2 Inerting of cargo tanks

4.2.1 Inerting of cargo tanks is required as per [1.4.2].

4.2.2 To prevent the return of cargo vapour to any gas safe spaces, the inert gas supply line shall be fittedwith two shut-off valves in series with a venting valve in between (double block and bleed valves). Inaddition a closable non-return valve shall be installed between the double block and bleed arrangement andthe cargo tank.These valves shall be located outside non-hazardous spaces and shall function under all normal conditions oftrim, list and ship motions.The following conditions shall apply:

a) The operation of the valves shall be automatically executed. Signals for opening and closing shall betaken from the process directly, e.g. inert gas flow or differential pressure.

b) An alarm for faulty operation of the valves shall be provided.

4.2.3 Where the connections to the hold spaces or to the cargo piping are non-permanent, two non-returnvalves may substitute the non-return devices required in [4.2.2].

Guidance note:Cargo tank connections for inert gas padding are considered as permanent for the purpose of this requirement.


4.2.4 If the cofferdams are arranged for inert gas filling, the supply lines shall be protected from the returnof cargo vapour via the tank padding supply lines with a double block and bleed arrangement.

4.2.5 The cargo discharge rate from tanks being protected shall be restricted to 80% of the inert gascapacity.

4.2.6 Low-pressure alarm shall be provided in the nitrogen supply line on the cargo tank side of any doubleblock and bleed valves and pressure reduction units.

Part

6 C

hapt

er 5

Sec

tion

9


DNV GL AS

If pressure/vacuum alarms are fitted in each cargo tank as means to comply with redundant ventingrequirements, a separate low-pressure alarm is not required.

4.2.7 A high oxygen content alarm shall be provided at the cargo operation console. The alarm shall beactivated when the oxygen content in the inert gas supply exceeds 8%.

4.2.8 Where a nitrogen generator or nitrogen storage facilities are installed in a separate compartment,outside of the engine room, the separate compartment shall be fitted with an independent mechanicalextraction ventilation system, providing 6 air changes per hour. A low oxygen alarm shall be fitted.Such separate compartments shall be treated as one of other machinery spaces, with respect to fireprotection.

4.3 Cargo tank venting system

4.3.1 The cargo tanks shall have a breathing system for relief of pressure and vacuum. Such breathing shallbe through P/V-valves (pressure/vacuum relief valves). The system shall comply with the requirements givenin Pt.5 Ch.6 Sec.9 [2.3] except that the height specified in Pt.5 Ch.6 Sec.9 [2.3.8] may be reduced to 2 m.

4.3.2 Cargoes, which react in a hazardous manner with other cargoes, shall have separate tank ventingsystems.

5 Ventilation system within the cargo area

5.1 General

5.1.1 The ventilation system shall comply with the requirements given in Pt.5 Ch.6 Sec.10. The followingrequirements in Pt.5 Ch.6 Sec.10 [2.3.3] may be relaxed after special consideration in each case:

— the height of the exhaust outlets from cargo handling spaces— the horizontal distance between exhaust outlets from cargo handling spaces and the ventilation inlets to

non-hazardous spaces other than accommodation.

6 Fire protection and extinction

6.1 Fire protection

6.1.1 The vessel is in general to comply with the current requirements of the International convention forthe safety of life at sea (SOLAS) for tankers. For vessels with cargo tanks aft of the superstructure and wherethe superstructure is situated at least 10 m from nearest hazardous area, compliance with the provisions ofSOLAS for cargo ships shall be acceptable.

6.2 Fire extinction

6.2.1 The vessel shall have a fixed foam fire extinguishing system for protection of the cargo deck area.Deck area to be simultaneously protected:

— within 3 m radius from tank openings, cargo pipe flanges and cargo valves— within 5 m radius from cargo breathing valves— within 10 m radius from cargo load/unload connection(s).

Part

6 C

hapt

er 5

Sec

tion

9


DNV GL AS

The deck area defined above shall be protected by either foam monitor(s) or nozzles or a combinationof both. In case of monitors, nominal length of throw for coverage of the farthest extremity of the areaprotected by monitors shall be used.Application rate shall be not less than:

a) 5 litres/minute/m2 with sufficient supply for at least 20 minutes, applicable for return mud or oil productsfor which the class notation LFL(1) shall apply.

b) 10 litres/minute/m2 with sufficient supply for at least 20 minutes, applicable for products covered by theIBC Code or methanol or oil products for which the class notation LFL(2) shall apply.Water supply to the fixed foam fire extinguishing system shall be in addition to the water supply requiredfor the vessels fire main.The foam concentrates shall be compatible with the cargo carried.

6.2.2 In addition, the vessel should carry in a readily available position, at cargo deck level, four portablefoam applicator units with at least 8 portable 20 litre containers with foam concentrate, for use with watersupplied by the vessels fire main.

6.2.3 Two fire fighter's outfits shall be provided in addition to those required by SOLAS Reg. II-2/10.10.

6.2.4 Cargo pump rooms shall be protected by an approved fire extinguishing system.Fixed pressure water-spraying system and high expansion foam system may also be considered.

6.2.5 The deck foam system shall be capable of simple and rapid operation. The main control station forthe system shall be suitably located outside of the cargo area, adjacent to the accommodation spaces andreadily accessible and operable in the event of fires in the areas protected. Start of the system should besupported by automatic sequential start of the system by activation of one single button. Foam monitorsrequiring manual operation shall be positioned outside of the protected area and be readily available in caseof fire in the protected area. For pumps that also support other services such as ballast water; valves andpumps shall be in fire mode during transport of LFL(2) and in addition have remote control for switch-overto fire mode from the same position as the deck foam system operation controls in accommodation.

7 Electrical installations in hazardous areas

7.1 General

7.1.1 Electrical installations in hazardous areas shall comply with the requirements given in Pt.5 Ch.6Sec.12.

7.1.2 In hazardous areas only electrical equipment suitable for the relevant zone shall be installed. Electricalequipment not suitable for the relevant zone with arrangements for disconnection shall not be accepted.

8 Area classification

8.1 General

8.1.1 In order to facilitate the selection of appropriate electrical apparatus and the design of suitableelectrical installations, hazardous areas are divided into zones 0, 1 and 2.

8.2 Definitions

8.2.1 Hazardous areas zone 0.

Part

6 C

hapt

er 5

Sec

tion

9


DNV GL AS

The interiors of cargo tanks, slop tanks, any pipework of pressure-relief or other venting systems for cargoand slop tanks, pipes and equipment containing the cargo or developing flammable gases or vapours.

8.2.2 Hazardous area zone 1

1) cofferdams adjacent to cargo tanks2) hold spaces containing independent cargo tanks3) cargo pump rooms4) enclosed spaces above or adjacent to cargo tanks5) areas on open deck, or semi- enclosed spaces on deck, within 3 m of any cargo tank outlet, gas or

vapour outlet, cargo manifold valve, cargo valve, cargo pipe flange, cargo pump-room ventilation outletsand cargo tank openings for pressure release provided to permit the flow of small volumes of gas orvapour mixtures caused by thermal variation

6) areas on open deck, or semi-enclosed spaces on open deck above and in the vicinity of any cargo gasoutlet intended for the passage of large volumes of gas or vapour mixture during cargo loading, within avertical cylinder of unlimited height and 6 m radius cantered upon the centre of the outlet, and within ahemisphere of 6 m radius below the outlet

7) areas on open deck, or semi-enclosed spaces on deck, within 1.5 m of cargo pump room entrances,cargo pump room ventilation inlet, openings into cofferdams or other zone 1 spaces

8) areas on the open deck within spillage coamings surrounding cargo manifold valves and 3 m beyondthese, up to a height of 2.4 m above the deck

9) compartments for cargo hoses10) enclosed or semi-enclosed spaces in which pipes containing cargoes are located.

Guidance note 1:A cargo rail that is not open from above and with at least two sides may be considered as a semi-enclosed space. If gas tight doorsare installed in the cargo rail this may be considered when analysing and classifying the space.


Guidance note 2:Areas on open deck within 3 m of cargo tank access openings for vessels with cofferdams towards deck are not defined ashazardous zones. Safety precautions related to the use of such access openings in connection with gas freeing should be coveredin the operation manual.


8.2.3 Hazardous areas zone 2

1) Areas within 1.5 m surrounding open or semi-enclosed spaces of zone 1 as specified in [8.2.2], if nototherwise specified.

2) Spaces 4 m beyond the cylinder and 4 m beyond the sphere defined in [8.2.2] 6).3) The spaces forming an air-lock as defined in Pt.5 Ch.6 Sec.1 Table 6.4) Areas on open deck over all cargo tanks and to the full breadth of the vessel plus 3 m fore and aft of the

forward-most and aft-most cargo tank bulkhead, up to a height of 2.4 m above the deck (the open deckover the cargo area shall not be defined as a hazardous area when cofferdams are fitted above the cargotanks).

8.2.4 Spaces with access or opening located in hazardous area shall have the same zone classification as thehazardous area.

Part

6 C

hapt

er 5

Sec

tion

9


DNV GL AS

9 Instrumentation and control system

9.1 General

9.1.1 Control systems for cargo valves and pumps shall comply with the requirements given in Pt.5 Ch.5Sec.9 [2].

9.2 Level gauging and level alarm

9.2.1 Each cargo tank shall be fitted with at least one level gauging device.Where only one gauging device is fitted, it shall be arranged so that any necessary maintenance can becarried out while the cargo tank is in service. If this is not possible, means for manual sounding shall beprovided.

9.2.2 Each cargo tank shall be fitted with a high level alarm giving alarm at 95 % filling by volume. Thealarm shall be activated by a level sensing device independent of the gauging device.

9.2.3 Cofferdams surrounding cargo tanks shall be fitted with leakage detection unless they are water filledwhen carrying low flashpoint liquids or fitted with gas detection. Alarms shall be provided at a mannedcontrol station.

9.3 Gas detection

9.3.1 The vessel shall have portable gas measuring equipment consisting of at least two apparatus eachmeasuring:

— oxygen— hydrocarbon content in the range 1 to 100 % hydrocarbon gas by volume— low hydrocarbon gas contents (0 to 100 % LEL).

9.3.2 Cofferdams surrounding cargo tanks shall be fitted with gas detection unless they are water filled whencarrying low flashpoint liquids or fitted with leakage detection. Alarm shall be provided at a manned controlstation.

9.3.3 Arrangements shall be made to facilitate measurement of the gas concentration in all tanks and othercompartments within the cargo area.Easily accessible sampling points shall be provided for closed gas detection of cargo tanks and inertedcofferdams from open deck. Where the atmosphere in the bottom part of cofferdams cannot be reliablymeasured using flexible gas sampling hoses, such spaces shall be fitted with permanent gas sampling lines.

9.3.4 The cargo pump room shall be provided with a system for continuous monitoring of the concentrationof hydrocarbon gases in accordance with SOLAS II-2 Reg.4.5.10.1.3.

9.3.5 Sequential sampling is acceptable as long as it is dedicated for the pump room only, including exhaustducts, and the sampling time is reasonably short.

Part

6 C

hapt

er 5

Sec

tion

9


DNV GL AS

10 Signboards

10.1 General

10.1.1 Doors to accommodation and service spaces facing the cargo area shall be provided with signboardswith the following text:TO BE KEPT CLOSED DURING HANDLING OF FLAMMABLE CARGO

10.1.2 For signboards regarding electrical installations, see Pt.5 Ch.5 Sec.8.

11 Operational Instructions

11.1 General

11.1.1 An operation manual describing all essential procedures for handling of flammable cargoes shall beprepared. The manual is subject to approval and shall be kept on board.

11.1.2 The operation manual shall, in general, include the following items:

1) ship particulars2) cargo system particulars

— tank capacities— cargo handling system— inert gas N2— cargo tank venting— cargo tank heating— pump room safety if applicable— cargo tank instrumentation— fire safety— gas detection.

3) Operations

— assumptions— loading— voyage— discharging— cleaning and gas freeing (tank entry)— cofferdam safety— cargo area access plan— gas detection— pump room safety.

4) Reference documents

— general arrangement— capacity plan— methanol/special product cargo system— pressure/vacuum valves flow curves— nitrogen system— cargo venting

Part

6 C

hapt

er 5

Sec

tion

9


DNV GL AS

— mechanical ventilation cargo area— hazardous zones— fire extinguishing— P&A manual (if applicable)— bilge cargo area.

11.1.3 The following instructions shall be included in the operation manual as applicable:

— hydrocarbon gas measurements shall be carried out regularly— doors to accommodation and service spaces facing the cargo area shall be kept closed during cargo

handling— dry cargo shall not be handled in cargo area forward of the superstructure.

For vessels not satisfying the conditions in [1.4.2], in addition:

— dry cargo and low flashpoint liquid cargoes shall not be carried simultaneously— before the vessel enters dry cargo service, all cargo piping, tanks and compartments in the cargo area

shall be cleaned and ventilated to the extent that the hydrocarbon gas content is less than 4% of LEL.

For vessels satisfying the requirements in [4.2.1] and [8.2.2], in addition:During carriage of dry cargo the following items shall be complied with:

— the cargo tanks and piping shall be filled with inert gas and the O2-content in the tanks shall not exceed8% by volume

— the gas detection system in cofferdams surrounding the cargo tanks shall be function tested, oralternatively

— the cofferdams surrounding the cargo tanks shall be filled with inert gas and the O2-content shall notexceed 8% by volume and the leakage detection system shall be function tested, or alternatively

— the cofferdams surrounding the cargo tanks shall be filled with water.

Part

6 C

hapt

er 5

Sec

tion

10


DNV GL AS

SECTION 10 CARRIAGE OF DANGEROUS GOODS IN PACKAGEDFORM AND SOLID BULK CARGOES – DG AND DBC

1 General

1.1 IntroductionThe additional class notations DG and DBC set requirements for additional measures in providing anincreased level of safety for ships carrying dangerous goods in packaged form and/or solid bulk cargoes.

1.2 ScopeThe scope for additional class notation DG and DBC includes two distinct sets of requirements: one forpackaged goods and one for solid bulk cargoes. The rules in [2] are considered to satisfy the requirementsof SOLAS regulation II-2/19 in respect of carriage of dangerous goods in packaged form. The requirementsare not applicable if such goods are transported in limited or excepted quantities according to chapter 3.4and 3.5 of the IMDG Code. Furthermore the requirements do not apply to ships' stores and equipment.For the carriage of limited amounts of hazardous and noxious liquid substances on offshore service vesselsIMO Res.A.673(16), as amended shall be considered. Whereas, the rules in [3] are considered to satisfythe requirements of SOLAS regulation II-2/19 and the technical provisions of the IMSBC Code in respectof carriage of solid bulk cargoes other than grain. For the carriage of grain the requirements of the IMOInternational Code for the Safe Carriage of Grain in Bulk shall be observed.

1.3 ApplicationThe additional class notations DG and DBC applies to ships complying with requirements of this sectionand may be given the class notation DG(B), DG(P), DG(B, P) and/or DBC as described in Table 1. Therequirements depend upon the type of cargo space and class of dangerous goods.

1.4 Class notationsShips complying with requirements of this section may be given the class notation DG(B), DG(P), DG(B, P)and/or DBC as described in Table 1.

Table 1 Notations


B

Arranged for carriage ofdangerous goods in solidform in bulk in compliancewith SOLAS regulationII-2/19

DG

P

Arranged for carriageof dangerous goodsin packaged form incompliance with SOLASregulation II-2/19

Part

6 C

hapt

er 5

Sec

tion

10


DNV GL AS


DBC <None>

Arranged for carriageof solid bulk cargoesin compliance with thetechnical provisions of theIMSBC Code

1.5 Certification1.5.1 Packaged goodsOn request and when authorized by the flag administration the Document of Compliance for the Carriageof Dangerous Goods according to SOLAS regulation II-2/19.4 may be issued after approval and successfulsurvey.

1.5.2 Solid bulk cargoesOn request the following certificates may be issued after successful survey:

— When authorized by the flag administration the Document of Compliance for the Carriage of DangerousGoods according to SOLAS regulation II-2/19.4.

— When authorized or not by the flag administration the Statement of Compliance for the Carriage of SolidBulk Cargoes certifying ship’s compliance with the technical provisions of the IMSBC Code.

1.6 Definitions and abbreviations1.6.1 Definitions

Table 2 Definitions

Term Definition

bulk cargo shipping nameThe bulk cargo shipping name (BCSN) identifies a solid bulk cargo. The BCSN issupplemented with the United Nations (UN) number when the cargo is dangerous goodsaccording to the IMDG Code. (IMSBC Code 1.7)

cargo spaces Cargo spaces are all spaces used for cargo and trunks to such spaces. (SOLAS regulationII-2/3.8)

closed freight containerCargo transport unit which totally encloses the contents by permanent structures withcomplete and rigid surfaces. Cargo transport units with fabric sides or tops are notconsidered closed freight containers. (IMDG Code 1.2.1)

closed ro-ro spaces Closed ro-ro spaces are ro-ro spaces which are neither open ro-ro spaces nor weatherdecks. (SOLAS regulation II-2/3.12)

container cargo spaces Purpose-built container cargo spaces are cargo spaces fitted with cell guides for stowagesecuring of containers. (MSC/Circ.1120 and IACS UI SC84 Rev.2)

extended hazardous areaArea (comparable with zone 2) in which an explosive atmosphere is not likely to occur innormal operation and, if it does occur, is likely to do so only infrequently and will exist fora short period only. (IEC 60092-506 3.2)

group A Solid bulk cargoes which may liquefy if shipped with a moisture content in excess of theirtransportable moisture limit. (IMSBC Code 1.7)

Part

6 C

hapt

er 5

Sec

tion

10


DNV GL AS

Term Definition

group B Solid bulk cargoes which possess a chemical hazard which could give rise to a dangeroussituation on a ship. For classification of these cargoes see [3.1.2]. (IMSBC Code 1.7)

group C Solid bulk cargoes that consist of cargoes which are neither liable to liquefy (group A) norto possess chemical hazards (group B). (IMSBC Code 1.7)

hazardous areaArea (comparable with zone 1) in which an explosive atmosphere is likely to occur innormal operation. The explosive atmosphere may exist due to gas and or dust. (IEC60092-506 3.1)

machinery spaces ofcategory A

Machinery spaces of category A are those spaces and trunks to such spaces whichcontain internal combustion machinery used for main propulsion; or internal combustionmachinery used for purposes other than main propulsion where such machinery has inthe aggregate a total power output of not less than 375 kW; or any oil-fired boiler oroil fuel unit, or any oil-fired equipment other than boilers, such as inert gas generators,incinerators, etc. (SOLAS regulation II-2/3.31)

not specifically designedcargo spaces

Cargo spaces not specifically designed for the carriage of freight containers, but intendedfor the carriage of dangerous goods in packaged form including goods in freight containersand portable tanks. (SOLAS regulation II-2/19.2.2.1)

open ro-ro spaces

Open ro-ro spaces are ro-ro spaces either open at both ends or open at one end, andprovided with adequate natural ventilation effective over their entire length throughpermanent openings distributed in the side plating or deckhead or from above, havinga total area of at least 10% of the total area of the space sides. (SOLAS regulationII-2/3.35)

portable tank Portable tank means a multimodal tank as defined in the IMDG Code 6.7.2.1.

ro-ro spaces

Ro-ro spaces are spaces not normally subdivided in any way and extending to either asubstantial length or the entire length of the ship in which goods (packaged or in bulk, inor on rail or road cars, vehicles, trailers, containers, pallets, demountable tanks or in oron similar stowage units or other receptacles) can be loaded and unloaded normally in ahorizontal direction. (SOLAS regulation II-2/3.41)Ro-ro spaces include special category spaces and vehicle spaces. (MSC/Circ.1120 andIACS UI SC85 Rev.1)

shipborne bargesShipborne barge means an independent, non-self-propelled vessel, specially designedand equipped to be lifted in a loaded condition and stowed aboard a barge-carrying ship.(IMDG Code 1.2.1)

weather deck

Weather deck is a deck which is completely exposed to the weather from above and fromat least two sides. (SOLAS regulation II-2/3.50)For the purposes of SOLAS regulation II-2/19 a ro-ro space fully open above and with fullopenings in both ends may be treated as a weather deck. (IACS UI SC86 Rev.1)

Part

6 C

hapt

er 5

Sec

tion

10


DNV GL AS

1.6.2 Definition of hazardous areas

Table 3 Hazardous areas (IEC 60092-506 Annex B and IACS UI SC79 Rev.4)

Class Typical example Description

Closed cargo spaces including open ro-ro spaces andpermanently fixed magazines.

Packaged form:1.1 to 1.6 except 1.4S,

2.1,

2.3 flammable,

3 FP < 23°C,

4.3 liquids FP < 23°C

6.1 liquids FP < 23°C,

8 liquids FP < 23°C, and

9 evolving flammablevapour

Solid form in bulk:

4.1,

4.2,

4.3,

5.1,

9 if applicable, and

MHB capable of creatingexplosive dust and/or explosive gasatmosphere

Pipes having open ends (e.g. ventilation ducts and bilgepipes, etc.) in a hazardous area.

Part

6 C

hapt

er 5

Sec

tion

10


DNV GL AS


Enclosed or semi-enclosed space with direct opening toclosed cargo space.

Enclosed or semi-enclosed space with direct openingto closed cargo space with gastight door and naturalventilation.

Where a space has an opening into an adjacenthazardous space or area, it may be made into a non-hazardous space in accordance with the followingrequirements:

— A minimum overpressure of 25 Pa (0.25 mbar) withrespect to the adjacent hazardous space or areais provided at all points inside the space and itsassociated ducts at which leaks are liable to occur, alldoors and windows being closed.

— Visual and acoustic alarm is provided at a mannedposition in case of loss of pressure.

Enclosed or semi-enclosed space with direct opening toclosed cargo space with air lock and natural ventilation.

Packaged form:2.1,

2.3 flammable,

3 FP < 23°C,



8 liquids FP < 23°C, and

9 evolving flammablevapour

Solid form in bulk:

4.2, capable ofcreating explosive gasatmosphere

4.3, and

MHB, capable ofcreating explosive gasatmosphere

Areas on open deck, or semi-enclosed spaces on opendeck, in the indicated distance from ventilation in- andoutlets of hazardous areas.(The distance shall be measured from the outer edge ofthe in- and outlets.)

Part

6 C

hapt

er 5

Sec

tion

10


DNV GL AS


Packaged form:3 FP < 23°C,



8 liquids FP < 23°C

Pipe tunnels and bilge pump roomscontaining bilge pipes with flanges,valves pumps etc. dedicated for thecarriage of flammable liquids witha flashpoint of less than 23°C areclassified as extended hazardousareas unless these spaces fulfill thefollowing requirements:

The spaces are provided with continuous mechanicalventilation with a capacity of at least six air changes perhour.

Except where the space is protected with a redundantmechanical ventilation system capable of starting thestand-by fan automatically, equipment not certifiedfor extended hazardous areas shall be automaticallydisconnected from the power supply following loss ofventilation while essential systems such as bilge andballast systems shall be certified for extended hazardousareas.

Where a redundant mechanical ventilation system isprovided, equipment and essential systems not certifiedfor extended hazardous areas shall be interlocked so asto prevent inadvertent operation if the ventilation is notoperational. Audible and visual alarms shall be providedat a manned station if failure occurs.

Hazardous area Extendedhazardous area

Non-hazardous space

Gastight self-closing door

1.6.3 Abbreviations

Table 4 Abbreviations

Term Definition

EmS Guide Emergency Response Procedures for Ships Carrying Dangerous Goods, as amended

FP Flashpoint (closed-cup test) (IMDG Code 1.2.1)

IEC International Electrotechnical Commission

IMDG Code International Maritime Dangerous Goods Code, as amended

IMSBC Code International Maritime Solid Bulk Cargoes Code, as amended

MFAG Medical First Aid Guide for Use in Accidents Involving Dangerous Goods, as amended


1.7.1 Documentation shall be submitted as required by Table 5 and/or Table 6.

Part

6 C

hapt

er 5

Sec

tion

10


DNV GL AS

Table 5 Documentation requirement for class notation DG and DBC


Structural fireprotection

G060 – Structural fireprotection drawing

Bulkheads and decks separating cargo spaces frommachinery spaces of category A. AP

S010 – Piping diagram AP

S030 – Capacity analysis APFire water supply anddistribution system


Fixed fire extinguishingsystem in cargo holds

G200 – Fixed fireextinguishing systemdocumentation

AP

Cargo handlingarrangement Z330 - Cargo list FI

Ventilation system S012 – Ducting diagram For cargo holds, cargo handling spaces and spaceshaving openings into those spaces. AP

Hazardous areaclassification

G080 - Hazardous areaclassification drawing AP

E090 - Table of Ex-installation

E170 - Electrical schematicdrawing

Single line diagrams for all intrinsically safe circuits,for each circuit including data for verification ofthe compatibility between the barrier and the fieldcomponents.

AP

E250 - Explosion protectedequipment maintenancemanual

AP

Explosion (Ex)protection


Electrical equipment in hazardous areas. Whererelevant, based on an approved hazardous areaclassification drawing where location of electricequipment in hazardous area is added (except batteryroom, paint stores and gas bottle store).

FI

Bilge pumpingarrangement or cargospaces

S010 - Piping diagram

Piping diagram showing the isolating valve in themachinery space and the additional bilge systemor separate bilge system for the cargo spaces, ifapplicable.

AP


Table 6 Additional documentation requirement for class notation DG with qualifier P


I200 Control andmonitoring systemdocumentation

APFire detection and alarmsystem

Z030 Arrangement Plan AP

Part

6 C

hapt

er 5

Sec

tion

10


DNV GL AS


Fixed extinguishingsystem in vehicle,special category and ro-ro spaces

G200 Fixed fireextinguishing systemdocumentation

AP

Cargo cooling waterspraying system

G200 Fixed fireextinguishing systemdocumentation

Applicable for vessels carrying goods of class 1.1 to1.6 except 1.4S. AP




1.8 References to other rules1.8.1

— SOLAS regulation II-2/19, Carriage of dangerous goods— SOLAS chapter VI, part A, General provisions— SOLAS chapter VI, part B, Special provisions for bulk cargoes other than grain— SOLAS chapter VII, part A, Carriage of dangerous goods in packaged form— SOLAS chapter VII, part A-1, Carriage of dangerous goods in solid form in bulk— ICLL, annex B, annex I, chapter II, regulation 19, Ventilators, (3)— EmS— IMDG Code— IMSBC Code— MFAG— IMO Res.A.673(16), Limited amounts of hazardous and noxious liquid substances in bulk on offshore

service vessels— MSC/Circ.608/Rev.1, Interim Guidelines for Open Top Containerships— MSC/Circ.1120, Unified interpretations of SOLAS chapter II-2, the FSS Code, the FTP Code and related fire

test procedures— IMO MSC.1/Circ.1351, Interpretation of stowage and segregation requirements for BROWN COAL and

COAL related to "hot areas" in the IMSBC Code— MSC.1/Circ.1395/Rev.3, List of solid bulk cargoes for which a fixed gas fire extinguishing system may be

exempted or for which a fixed gas fire-extinguishing system is ineffective— IACS UI SC52 Rev.1, Special requirements for ships carrying dangerous goods— IACS UI SC79 Rev.4, Certified Safe Type Electrical Equipment for Ships Carrying Dangerous Goods— IACS UI SC84 Rev.1, Purpose Built Container Space— IACS UI SC85 Rev.1, Ro-Ro Space— IACS UI SC86 Rev.1, Weather Decks— IACS UI SC89 Rev.3, Ventilation of Cargo Spaces— IACS UI SC90 Rev.1, Bilge Drainage— IACS UI SC91 Rev.1, Personal Protection – Protective Clothing— IACS UI SC92 Rev.1, Personal Protection – Self-Contained Breathing Apparatus— IACS UI SC103 Rev.1, Insulation of machinery space boundaries— IACS UI SC109 Rev.1, Open top container holds – Water supplies— IACS UI SC110 Rev.1, Open top container holds – Ventilation

Part

6 C

hapt

er 5

Sec

tion

10


DNV GL AS

— IACS UI SC111 Rev.1, Open top container holds – Bilge pumping— IACS UI SC168, Hydrants for dangerous goods— IACS UR F29 Rev.6, Non-sparking fans— IEC 60092 Electrical installations in ships - Part 506: Special features – Ships carrying specific dangerous

goods and materials hazardous only in bulk.

2 Requirements for the carriage of dangerous goods in packagedform

2.1 General2.1.1 Requirements for various types of cargo spaceThe requirements depend on the type of cargo space, the dangerous goods class and the special propertiesof the goods to be carried. The requirements for the different types of cargo spaces are shown in thefollowing tables:

— Table 7 for not specifically designed cargo spaces— Table 8 for container cargo spaces— Table 9 for closed ro-ro spaces— Table 10 for open ro-ro spaces— Table 11 for shipborne barges— Table 12 for weather decks.

2.1.2 ClassificationThe following classes are specified for goods in packaged form in the appendix of the Document ofCompliance for the Carriage of Dangerous Goods:Class 1.1 to 1.6:Explosives.Division 1.1: Substances and articles which have a mass explosion hazard.Division 1.2: Substances and articles which have a projection hazard but not a mass explosion hazard.Division 1.3: Substances and articles which have a fire hazard and either a minor blast hazard or a minorprojection hazard or both, but not a mass explosion hazard.Division 1.4: Substances and articles which present no significant hazard.Division 1.5: Very insensitive substances and articles which have a mass explosion hazard.Division 1.6: Extremely insensitive articles which do not have a mass explosion hazard.Class 1.4S:ExplosivesDivision 1.4, compatibility group S: Substances or articles so packaged or designed that any hazardouseffects arising from accidental functioning are confined within the package unless the package has beendegraded by fire, in which case all blast or projection effects are limited to the extent that they do notsignificantly hinder or prohibit fire-fighting or other emergency response efforts in the immediate vicinity ofthe package.Class 2.1 hydrogen and hydrogen mixtures exclusively:Hydrogen and hydrogen mixtures.Class 2.1 other than hydrogen and hydrogen mixtures:Flammable gases other than hydrogen and mixtures of hydrogen.Class 2.2:Non-flammable, non-toxic gases.

Part

6 C

hapt

er 5

Sec

tion

10


DNV GL AS

Class 2.3 flammable:Toxic gases with a subsidiary risk class 2.1.Class 2.3 non-flammable:Toxic gases without a subsidiary risk class 2.1.Class 3 FP < 23°C:Flammable liquids having a flashpoint below 23°C closed-cup test.Class 3 23°C ≤ FP ≤ 60°C:Flammable liquids having a flashpoint between 23°C and 60°C closed-cup test.Class 4.1:Flammable solids, self-reactive substances and solid desensitized explosives.Class 4.2:Substances liable to spontaneous combustions.Class 4.3 liquids:Liquids which, in contact with water, emit flammable gases.Class 4.3 solids:Solids which, in contact with water, emit flammable gases.Class 5.1:Oxidizing substances.Class 5.2:Organic peroxides.Class 6.1 liquids FP < 23°C:Toxic liquids having a flashpoint below 23°C closed-cup test.Class 6.1 liquids 23°C ≤ FP ≤ 60°C:Toxic liquids having a flashpoint between 23°C and 60°C closed-cup test.Class 6.1 liquids FP > 60°C:Toxic liquids having a flashpoint above 60°C closed-cup test.Class 6.1 solids:Toxic solids.Class 8 liquids FP < 23°C:Corrosive liquids having a flashpoint below 23°C closed-cup test.Class 8 liquids 23°C ≤ FP ≤ 60°C:Corrosive liquids having a flashpoint between 23°C and 60°C closed-cup test.Class 8 liquids FP > 60°C:Corrosive liquids having a flashpoint above 60°C closed-cup test.Class 8 solids:Corrosive solids.Class 9 goods evolving flammable vapour exclusively:Miscellaneous dangerous substances and articles and environmentally hazardous substances evolvingflammable vapour.Class 9 other than goods evolving flammable vapour:Miscellaneous dangerous substances and articles and environmentally hazardous substances, not evolvingflammable vapour.

Part

6 C

hapt

er 5

Sec

tion

10


DNV GL AS

Guidance note:The carriage of dangerous goods of classes 6.2 (infectious substances) and 7 (radioactive materials) is not covered by theDocument of Compliance of Dangerous Goods. For the carriage of class 6.2 the IMDG Code and for the carriage of class 7 theIMDG Code and the INF Code shall be observed.


2.2 Fire-extinguishing system2.2.1 Fixed gas fire-extinguishing systemCargo holds shall be equipped with a fixed CO2 fire extinguishing system.(SOLAS regulation II-2/10.7.2)

Guidance note:Open top container cargo spaces should be provided with a fixed water-spraying system according to MSC/Circ.608/Rev.1.


2.2.2 Fixed pressure water-spraying systemOpen ro-ro spaces having a deck above it, ro-ro spaces not capable of being sealed and special categoryspaces shall be equipped with a pressure water-spraying system for manual operation which shall protectall parts of any deck and vehicle platform in such space. The capacity of the system shall be sufficiently forproviding at least 5 l/min/m2 of the horizontal area of decks and platforms.(SOLAS regulation II-2/19.3.9)Drainage and pumping arrangements shall be designed in compliance with Pt.4 Ch.6, as applicable.

2.2.3 Stowage on weather deckThe requirements of [2.2.1] and [2.2.2] apply even if the dangerous goods shall be stowed exclusively on theweather deck.(MSC/Circ.1120)

Part

6 C

hapt

er 5

Sec

tion

10


DNV GL AS

2.3 Fire water supplies2.3.1 Immediate supply of waterImmediate supply of water from the fire main shall be provided by remote starting arrangement for the mainfire pumps from the navigation bridge or from other permanently manned control station or by permanentpressurization of the fire main and by automatic start-up of the main fire pumps.(SOLAS regulation II-2/19.3.1.1)If fire water supply pumps arranged for remote starting also serve other purposes, the arrangement shall besuch that the pump selected is connected to the fire water system, e.g. by automatic change-over of valvesor visual signals for valves' positions at the remote starting position.

2.3.2 Quantity of water and arrangement of hydrantsThe capacity of the main fire pumps shall be sufficient for supplying four jets of water at the pressure asprescribed in SOLAS regulation II-2/10.2.1.6.The number and position of hydrants shall be such that at least two of the required four jets of water, whensupplied by single lengths of hose, may reach any part of the cargo space when empty; and all four jets ofwater, each supplied by single lengths of hose may reach any part of ro-ro spaces.(SOLAS regulation II-2/19.3.1.2, MSC/Circ.1120 and IACS UI SC168 Rev.1)

Guidance note:The length of the water jet is generally not to be taken more than 7 m.


Three additional hoses and nozzles shall be provided.(SOLAS regulation II-2/10.2.3.2.3.1)

2.4 Water cooling

2.4.1 Cargo spaces shall be fitted with arrangements for the application of water spray (deluge system).The flow rate of water required shall be determined on the basis of 5 l/min/m2 of the largest horizontal crosssection of the cargo space or a dedicated section of it.

2.4.2 The water may be supplied by means of the main fire pumps. The water supply shall provide forsimultaneous operation of the nozzles specified in [2.3.2] and the deluge system for the largest designatedcargo space.

2.4.3 The required water shall be distributed evenly over the cargo space area from above via a fixed pipingsystem and full bore nozzles. The piping and nozzle system may be divided into sections and be integratedinto the hatch covers. Connection may be via hoses with quick acting couplings. Additional hydrants shall beprovided on deck for this purpose.

2.4.4 Drainage and pumping arrangements shall be such as to prevent the build-up of free surfaces:

— the drainage system shall have a capacity of not less than 1.25 times of the capacity discharged duringthe simultaneous operation of the water spraying system and four fire hose nozzles,

— the valves of the drainage arrangement shall be operable from outside the protected space, and— the bilge wells shall be of sufficient holding capacity and shall be arranged at both sides of the ship at a

distance from each other of not more than 40 m in each watertight compartment.

If this is not possible, the additional weight of water and the influence of the free surfaces shall be taken intoaccount in the ship's stability information.(SOLAS regulation II-2/19.3.1.3 and II-2/19.3.1.5)

Part

6 C

hapt

er 5

Sec

tion

10


DNV GL AS

Guidance note:The water spraying system required for open top container cargo holds in paragraphs 9.2, 9.3 and 9.4 of MSC/Circ.608/Rev.1 alsosatisfies the requirement for dangerous goods. The water supply should provide the simultaneous operation of the four fire nozzlesand the water spraying system for the largest designated cargo space.


(MSC/Circ.1120 and IACS UI SC109 Rev.1)

2.5 Sources of ignition related to electrical equipment

2.5.1 The apparatus group, temperature class and degree of protection required for the individual classes isspecified in column "Sources of ignition" of Table 7 to Table 11.If any apparatus group or temperature class is given, explosion protection is required, and the followingconditions related to electrical equipment shall be complied with.

2.5.2 Electrical equipment and wiring shall not be fitted in hazardous areas unless it is essential for thesafety and operation of the ship.(IEC 60092-506 5.1)

2.5.3 All electrical equipment in the hazardous area and being essential for the ship's operation shall be ofcertified safe type suitable for installation in zone 1 for apparatus group and temperature class as shown inTable 7 to Table 11.(SOLAS regulation II-2/19.3.2 and IEC 60092-506)

2.5.4 Electrical equipment not being essential for ship's operation need not to be of certified safe typeprovided it can be electrically disconnected from the power source, by appropriate means other than fuses(e.g. by removal of links, lockable switches), at a point external to the space and to be secured againstunintentional re-connection.

2.5.5 The electrical equipment in extended hazardous areas shall either:

— comply with [2.5.3]; or— be suitable for zone 2 for apparatus group and temperature class as shown in Table 7 to Table 11, see Pt.4

Ch.8 Sec.11 [3.2].

2.5.6 The hazardous area and extended hazardous areas shall be categorised in accordance with Table 3.

2.5.7 Cables shall be either

— protected by electrically continuous metal sheathing or metallic wire armour braid or tape, or— enclosed in screwed heavy gauge steel drawn or seam-welded and galvanized conduit.

2.5.8 All metallic protective coverings of power and lighting cables passing through a hazardous area orconnected to equipment in such an area, shall be earthed at least at each end. The metallic covering of allother cables shall be earthed at least at one end.

2.5.9 Cable penetrations of decks and bulkheads shall be gas tight, and of a recognised make.

2.5.10 Cable joints in cargo spaces shall be avoided where possible. Where joints are unavoidable, they shallbe enclosed in metal-clad or impact strength plastic junction boxes of certified safe type, or heat shrink orencapsulated crimp sleeve cable joints.

Part

6 C

hapt

er 5

Sec

tion

10


DNV GL AS

2.6 Sources of ignition related to safety of fans

2.6.1 The fans being essential for the ship's operation shall be of a type (non-sparking type) that preventsthe possibility of the ignition of flammable gas air mixtures and shall comply with Pt.5 Ch.5 Sec.6 [1.2].Otherwise the fans shall be capable of being disconnected from the power source, see [2.5.4].(SOLAS regulation II-2/19.3.4.2, IACS UI SC52.1 Rev.1 and IACS UR F29)

2.6.2 The fan openings on deck shall be fitted with fixed wire mesh guards with a mesh size not exceeding13 mm.The purpose of the wire mesh guards is to prevent foreign objects from entering into the fan casing.(SOLAS regulation II-2/19.3.4.2, IACS UI SC52.2 Rev.1 and MSC/Circ.1120)

2.6.3 The air inlets and outlets shall be placed at a safe distance from possible ignition sources. A sphericalradius of 3 m around the air outlets, within which ignition sources are prohibited, is required.

2.7 Other sources of ignition

2.7.1 Other sources of ignition shall not be installed in hazardous areas and extended hazardous areas, e.g.steam or thermal oil lines.

Guidance note:According to the IMDG Code 7.1.2 potential sources of ignition means, but is not limited to, open fires, machinery exhausts, galleyuptakes, electrical outlets and electrical equipment including those on refrigerated or heated cargo transport units unless they areof certified safe type.


2.8 Detection system

2.8.1 The cargo spaces shall be equipped with a fixed fire detection and alarm system or sample extractionsmoke detection and alarm system.(SOLAS regulation II-2/19.3.3)

Guidance note:If a cargo space or the weather deck is intended for the carriage of class 1 goods it is recommended to monitor adjacent cargospaces, with the exception of open ro-ro spaces, by a fixed fire detection and alarm system.


2.9 Ventilation2.9.1 GeneralCargo hold ventilation systems shall be separated from the ventilation systems serving other spaces.(SOLAS regulation II-2/9.7.2.1)If cargo holds are subdivided for reasons of stability, freeboard or fire protection (e.g. separate flooding withCO2) this has to be taken into account for the design of the ventilation systems.Air ducts and components of ventilation systems shall be so installed that they are protected from damage.If adjacent spaces are not separated from cargo spaces by gastight bulkheads or decks, then they areconsidered as part of the enclosed cargo space and the ventilation requirements shall apply to the adjacentspace as for the enclosed cargo space itself.

Part

6 C

hapt

er 5

Sec

tion

10


DNV GL AS

(MSC/Circ.1120 and IACS UI SC89 Rev.3)

2.9.2 DuctingThe ducting shall be arranged for removal of gases and vapours from the upper and lower part of the cargohold. This requirement is considered to be met if the ducting is arranged such that approximately 1/3 of theair volume is removed from the upper part and 2/3 from the lower part. The position of air inlets and airoutlets shall be such as to prevent short circuiting of the air.(SOLAS regulation II-2/19.3.4.1)For open top container holds the mechanical ventilation is interpreted to be required only for the lower partof the cargo hold for which purpose ducting is required.(MSC/Circ.1120 and IACS UI SC110 Rev.1)

Guidance note:For the carriage of goods evolving toxic gases or vapour the ventilation outlets should be located at a minimum of 3 m away fromaccommodation, air intakes, machinery spaces and other enclosed work areas.


2.9.3 Mechanical ventilation (six air changes/h)A ventilation system which incorporates powered fans with a capacity of at least six air changes per hourbased on the empty cargo hold shall be provided.(SOLAS regulation II-2/19.3.4.1)

2.9.4 Mechanical ventilation (two air changes/h)The ventilation rate according to [2.9.3] may be reduced to not less than two air changes per hour, providedthe goods are carried in container cargo spaces in closed freight containers or portable tanks.(SOLAS regulation II-2/19, table 19.1, note 1)

2.10 Bilge pumping2.10.1 Inadvertent pumpingThe bilge system shall be designed so as to prevent inadvertent pumping of flammable and toxic liquidsthrough pumps and pipelines in the machinery space.(SOLAS regulation II-2/19.3.5.1)

2.10.2 Isolating valvesThe cargo hold bilge lines shall be provided with isolating valves outside the machinery space or at the pointof exit from the machinery space located close to the bulkhead.The valves shall be capable of being secured in closed position (e.g. safety locking device).Remote controlled valves shall be capable of being secured in closed position. In case a computer-basedsystem is provided, this system shall contain a corresponding safety query on the display.(SOLAS regulation II-2/19.3.5.3)

2.10.3 Warning signsWarning signs shall be displayed at the isolating valve or control positions, e.g. “This valve to be kept securedin closed position during the carriage of dangerous goods in cargo hold nos. __ and may be operated with thepermission of the master only”.

2.11 Additional bilge system

2.11.1 An additional fixed bilge system with a capacity of at least 10 m3/h per cargo hold shall be provided.If more than two cargo holds are connected to a common system, the capacity need not exceed 25 m3/h.

Part

6 C

hapt

er 5

Sec

tion

10


DNV GL AS

(SOLAS regulation II-2/19.3.5.2)

2.11.2 The additional bilge system has to enable any leaked dangerous liquids to be removed from all bilgewells in the cargo space.

2.11.3 Pumps and pipelines shall not be installed in machinery spaces.

2.11.4 Spaces containing additional bilge pumps shall be provided with independent mechanical ventilationgiving at least 6 air changes per hour. If this space has access from another enclosed space, the door shall beof self-closing type. For the design of the electrical equipment, see [2.5].(SOLAS regulation II-2/19.3.5.4)

2.11.5 Pt.4 Ch.6 Sec.4 applies analogously.

2.11.6 Water driven ejectors shall be equipped on the suction side with a means of reverse flow protection.If bilge ejectors are used driving water may be taken from a pump in the engine room provided a non-returnvalve is fitted in the supply line.

2.11.7 If the bilge drainage of the cargo space is arranged by gravity drainage, the drainage shall be eitherled directly overboard or to a closed drain tank located outside the machinery spaces, having a minimumvolume sufficient to accumulate 1/3 of the drainage capacity per hour of the largest cargo space according toPt.4 Ch.6 Sec.4 [4].Drainage from a cargo space into bilge wells in a lower space is only permitted if that space fulfils the samerequirements as the cargo space above.(SOLAS regulation II-2/19.3.5.5)

2.11.8 Collecting tankWhere tanks are provided for collecting and storage of dangerous goods spillage, their vent pipes shall be ledto a safe position on open deck.

Guidance note:The bilge pumps for open top container cargo holds in paragraph 8.2, of MSC/Circ.608/Rev.1 can also be used for dangerous goodsprovided the arrangement satisfies the requirements under [2.10] and [2.11].


(IACS UI SC111 Rev.1)

2.12 Personnel protection2.12.1 Full protective clothingFour sets of full protective clothing appropriate to the properties of the cargo shall be provided.(SOLAS regulation II-2/19.3.6.1)The protective clothing shall satisfy the equipment requirements specified in the EmS Guide for the individualsubstances.The required protective clothing is for emergency purposes.(MSC/Circ.1120 and IACS UI SC91 Rev.1)

2.12.2 Self-contained breathing apparatusesAdditional two sets of self-contained breathing apparatuses with spare air cylinders for at least two refills foreach set shall be provided.(SOLAS regulation II-2/19.3.6.2 and IACS UI SC92 Rev.1)

Part

6 C

hapt

er 5

Sec

tion

10


DNV GL AS

2.13 Portable fire extinguishersTwo additional portable fire extinguishers, each having a capacity of not less than 6 kg of dry powder orequivalent, shall be provided.(SOLAS regulation II-2/19.3.7 and MSC.1/Circ.1275)

Guidance note:Equivalent to dry powder may be either CO2 or foam. 1 kg of dry powder is equal to either 1 kg CO2 or 1.8 litre foam.


2.14 Machinery space boundaries2.14.1 BulkheadsBulkheads between cargo spaces and machinery spaces of category A shall be provided with a fire insulationto “A-60” class standard. Otherwise the cargoes shall be stowed at least 3 m away from the machinery spacebulkhead.(SOLAS regulation II-2/19.3.8)

2.14.2 DecksDecks between cargo and machinery spaces of category A shall be insulated to “A-60” class standard.(SOLAS regulation II-2/19.3.8)In case that a cargo space is located partly above a machinery space of category A and the deck above themachinery space is not insulated to “A-60” class standard, the goods are prohibited in the whole of that cargospace. If the uninsulated deck above the machinery space is a weather deck, the goods are prohibited onlyfor the portion of the deck located above the machinery space.(IACS UI SC103 Rev.1)

2.14.3 Insulation for goods of class 1For goods of class 1, with the exception of class 1.4S, both, the fire insulation of “A-60” class standard for thebulkhead between cargo space and machinery space of category A and stowage at least 3 m away from thisbulkhead, is required. Stowage above machinery space of category A is not permitted in any case.(SOLAS regulation II-2/19, table 19.3, note 12)

2.15 Separation of ro-ro spaces

2.15.1 A separation, suitable to minimise the passage of dangerous vapours and liquids, shall be providedbetween a closed ro-ro space and an adjacent open ro-ro space. Where such separation is not provided thero-ro space is considered to be a closed ro-ro space over its entire length and the special requirements forclosed ro-ro spaces apply.(SOLAS regulation II-2/19.3.10.1)

2.15.2 A separation, suitable to minimise the passage of dangerous vapours and liquids, shall be providedbetween a closed ro-ro space and an adjacent weather deck. Where such separation is not provided thearrangements of the closed ro-ro space shall be in accordance with those required for the dangerous goodscarried on the adjacent weather deck.(SOLAS regulation II-2/19.3.10.2)

Rules for classification: S

hips — D

NVG

L-RU

-SH

IP Pt.6 Ch.5. Edition July 2018

Equipm

ent and design features

DN

V G

L AS

Part 6 Chapter 5 Section 10

Table 7 Requirements for the carriage of dangerous goods in packaged form in not specifically designed cargo spaces

Requirements

Sources of ignition 2.5-2.7

Class

Fixe

d ga

s fir

e-ex

tingu

ishi

ng s

yste

m

Wat

er s

uppl

ies

Wat

er c

oolin

g

App

arat

us g

roup

Tem

pera

ture

cla

ss

Deg

ree

of p

rote

ctio

n

Det

ectio

n sy

stem

Ven

tilat

ion

Bilg

e pu

mpi

ng

Pers

onne

l pro

tect

ion

Port

able

fire-

extin

guis

hers

Mac

hine

ry s

pace

bou

ndar

ies

1.1 to 1.6 2.2.1 2.3 2.4 IIA T5 IP65 2.8 2.14.3

1.4S 2.2.1 2.3 2.8

2.1 hydrogen andhydrogen mixturesexclusively

2.2.1 2.3 IIC T4 2.82.9.22.9.3

2.122.14.12.14.2

2.1 other thanhydrogen andhydrogen mixtures

2.2.1 2.3 IIB T4 2.82.9.22.9.3

2.122.14.12.14.2

2.2 2.2.1 2.3 2.8 2.122.14.12.14.2

2.3 flammable 1)

2.3 non-flammable 1)

3 FP < 23°C 2.2.1 2.3 IIB T4 2.82.9.22.9.3

2.102.11

2.12 2.132.14.12.14.2

3 23°C ≤ FP ≤ 60°C 2.2.1 2.3 2.8 2.12 2.132.14.12.14.2

4.1 2.2.1 2.3 2.82.9.2

2.9.3 2) 2.12 2.132.14.12.14.2

4.2 2.2.1 2.3 2.82.9.2

2.9.3 2) 2.12 2.132.14.12.14.2


hips — D

NVG

L-RU

-SH


Equipm


DN

V G

L AS


Requirements


Class

Fixe

d ga

s fir

e-ex

tingu

ishi

ng s

yste

m

Wat

er s

uppl

ies

Wat

er c

oolin

g

App

arat

us g

roup

Tem

pera

ture

cla

ss

Deg

ree

of p

rote

ctio

n

Det

ectio

n sy

stem

Ven

tilat

ion

Bilg

e pu

mpi

ng

Pers

onne

l pro

tect

ion

Port

able

fire-

extin

guis

hers

Mac

hine

ry s

pace

bou

ndar

ies

4.3 liquids 1) 2.2.1 2.3 2.82.9.22.9.3

2.12 2.132.14.12.14.2

4.3 solids 2.2.1 2.3 2.82.9.22.9.3

2.12 2.132.14.12.14.2

5.1 2.2.1 2.3 2.82.9.2

2.9.32) 2.12 2.132.14.1

2.14.2 4)

5.2 1)

6.1 liquids FP < 23°C 2.2.1 2.3 IIB T4 2.82.9.22.9.3

2.102.11

2.12 2.132.14.12.14.2

6.1 liquids23°C ≤ FP ≤ 60°C

2.2.1 2.3 2.82.9.22.9.3

2.102.11

2.12 2.132.14.12.14.2

6.1 liquids FP > 60°C 2.2.1 2.3 2.82.102.11

2.12

6.1 solids 2.2.1 2.3 2.82.9.2

2.9.3 2) 2.12

8 liquids FP < 23°C 2.2.1 2.3 IIB T4 2.82.9.22.9.3

2.102.11

2.12 2.132.14.12.14.2

8 liquids23°C ≤ FP ≤ 60°C

2.2.1 2.3 2.82.9.22.9.3

2.102.11

3)2.12 2.13

2.14.12.14.2

8 liquids FP > 60°C 2.2.1 2.3 2.82.102.11

3)2.12


hips — D

NVG

L-RU

-SH


Equipm


DN

V G

L AS


Requirements


Class

Fixe

d ga

s fir

e-ex

tingu

ishi

ng s

yste

m

Wat

er s

uppl

ies

Wat

er c

oolin

g

App

arat

us g

roup

Tem

pera

ture

cla

ss

Deg

ree

of p

rote

ctio

n

Det

ectio

n sy

stem

Ven

tilat

ion

Bilg

e pu

mpi

ng

Pers

onne

l pro

tect

ion

Port

able

fire-

extin

guis

hers

Mac

hine

ry s

pace

bou

ndar

ies

8 solids 2.2.1 2.3 2.8 2.12

9 goods evolvingflammable vapourexclusively

2.2.1 2.3 IIB T42.9.22.9.3

2.12

9 other than goodsevolving flammablevapour

2.2.1 2.32.9.2

2.9.3 2) 2.12

1) Under the provisions of the IMDG Code stowage of class 2.3, class 4.3 liquids having a flashpoint less than 23°C as listed in the IMDG Code andclass 5.2 under deck is prohibited.

2) When "mechanically-ventilated spaces" are required by the IMDG Code.3) Only applicable to dangerous goods having a subsidiary risk class 6.1.4) When "protected from sources of heat" is required by the IMDG Code.


hips — D

NVG

L-RU

-SH


Equipm


DN

V G

L AS


Table 8 Requirements for the carriage of dangerous goods in packaged form in container cargo spaces

Requirements

Sources ofIgnition 2.5-2.7

Class

Fixe

d ga

s fir

e-ex

tingu

ishi

ng s

yste

m

Wat

er s

uppl

ies

Wat

er c

oolin

g

App

arat

us g

roup

Tem

pera

ture

cla

ss

Deg

ree

of p

rote

ctio

n

Det

ectio

nsys

tem

Ven

tilat

ion

Bilg

e pu

mpi

ng

Pers

onne

l pro

tect

ion

Port

able

fire-

extin

guis

hers

Mac

hine

ry s

pace

bou

ndar

ies

1.1 to 1.6 2.2.1 2.3 2.4 IIA T5 IP65 2.8 2.14.3

1.4S 2.2.1 2.3 2.8


2.2.1 2.3 IIC T4 2.82.9.22.9.4

2.12 2.14.2

2.1 other than hydrogenand hydrogen mixtures 2.2.1 2.3 IIB T4 2.8

2.9.22.9.4

2.12 2.14.2

2.2 2.2.1 2.3 2.8 2.12 2.14.2

2.3 flammable 1)


3 FP < 23°C 2.2.1 2.3 IIB T4 2.82.9.22.9.4

2.102.11

2.12 2.13 2.14.2

3 23°C ≤ FP ≤ 60°C 2.2.1 2.3 2.8 2.12 2.13 2.14.2

4.1 2.2.1 2.3 2.82.9.22.9.42)3)

2.12 2.13 2.14.2

4.2 2.2.1 2.3 2.82.9.22.9.42)3)

2.12 2.13 2.14.2

4.3 liquids 1) 2.2.1 2.3 2.82.9.22.9.4

2.12 2.13 2.14.2


hips — D

NVG

L-RU

-SH


Equipm


DN

V G

L AS


Requirements


Class

Fixe

d ga

s fir

e-ex

tingu

ishi

ng s

yste

m

Wat

er s

uppl

ies

Wat

er c

oolin

g

App

arat

us g

roup

Tem

pera

ture

cla

ss

Deg

ree

of p

rote

ctio

n

Det

ectio

nsys

tem

Ven

tilat

ion

Bilg

e pu

mpi

ng

Pers

onne

l pro

tect

ion

Port

able

fire-

extin

guis

hers

Mac

hine

ry s

pace

bou

ndar

ies

4.3 solids 2.2.1 2.3 2.82.9.22.9.4

3)2.12 2.13 2.14.2

5.1 2.2.1 2.3 2.82.9.22.9.42)3)

2.12 2.13 2.14.2 5)

5.2 1)

6.1 liquids FP < 23°C 2.2.1 2.3 IIB T4 2.82.9.22.9.4

2.102.11

2.12 2.13 2.14.2

6.1 liquids 23°C ≤ FP ≤60°C 2.2.1 2.3 2.8

2.9.22.9.4

2.102.11

2.12 2.13 2.14.2

6.1 liquids FP > 60°C 2.2.1 2.3 2.82.102.11

2.12

6.1 solids 2.2.1 2.3 2.82.9.22.9.4

2)2.12

8 liquids FP < 23°C 2.2.1 2.3 IIB T4 2.82.9.22.9.4

2.102.11

2.12 2.13 2.14.2

8 liquids 23°C ≤ FP ≤60°C 2.2.1 2.3 2.8

2.9.22.9.4

2.102.11 4) 2.12 2.13 2.14.2

8 liquids FP > 60°C 2.2.1 2.3 2.82.10

2.11 4) 2.12

8 solids 2.2.1 2.3 2.8 2.12


hips — D

NVG

L-RU

-SH


Equipm


DN

V G

L AS


Requirements


Class

Fixe

d ga

s fir

e-ex

tingu

ishi

ng s

yste

m

Wat

er s

uppl

ies

Wat

er c

oolin

g

App

arat

us g

roup

Tem

pera

ture

cla

ss

Deg

ree

of p

rote

ctio

n

Det

ectio

nsys

tem

Ven

tilat

ion

Bilg

e pu

mpi

ng

Pers

onne

l pro

tect

ion

Port

able

fire-

extin

guis

hers

Mac

hine

ry s

pace

bou

ndar

ies


2.2.1 2.3 IIB T42.9.22.9.4

2.12


2.2.1 2.32.9.22.9.4

2)2.12


2) When "mechanically-ventilated spaces" are required by the IMDG Code.3) For solids not applicable to closed freight containers.4) Only applicable to dangerous goods having a subsidiary risk class 6.1.5) When "protected from sources of heat" is required by the IMDG Code.


hips — D

NVG

L-RU

-SH


Equipm


DN

V G

L AS


Table 9 Requirements for the carriage of dangerous goods in packaged form in closed ro-ro spaces

Requirements

Sources ofignition 2.5-2.7

Class

Fire

-ext

ingu

ishi

ng s

yste

m

Wat

er s

uppl

ies

Wat

er c

oolin

g

App

arat

us g

roup

Tem

pera

ture

cla

ss

Deg

ree

of p

rote

ctio

n

Det

ectio

n sy

stem

Ven

tilat

ion

Bilg

e pu

mpi

ng

Pers

onne

l pro

tect

ion

Port

able

fire-

extin

guis

hers

Mac

hine

ry s

pace

bou

ndar

ies

Sep

arat

ion

of r

o-ro

spa

ces

5)

1.1 to 1.6 2.2 2.3 2.4 IIA T5 IP65 2.8 2.14.3 2.15

1.4S 2.2 2.3 2.8 2.15


2.2 2.3 IIC T4 2.82.9.22.9.3

2.122.14.12.14.2

2.15

2.1 other than hydrogenand hydrogen mixtures 2.2 2.3 IIB T4 2.8

2.9.22.9.3

2.122.14.12.14.2

2.15

2.2 2.2 2.3 2.8 2.122.14.12.14.2

2.15

2.3 flammable 1)


3 FP < 23°C 2.2 2.3 IIB T4 2.82.9.22.9.3

2.102.11

2.12 2.132.14.12.14.2

2.15

3 23°C ≤ FP ≤ 60°C 2.2 2.3 2.8 2.12 2.132.14.12.14.2

2.15

4.1 2.2 2.3 2.82.9.2

2.9.3 2) 2.12 2.132.14.12.14.2

2.15

4.2 2.2 2.3 2.82.9.2

2.9.3 2) 2.12 2.132.14.12.14.2

2.15


hips — D

NVG

L-RU

-SH


Equipm


DN

V G

L AS


Requirements


Class

Fire

-ext

ingu

ishi

ng s

yste

m

Wat

er s

uppl

ies

Wat

er c

oolin

g

App

arat

us g

roup

Tem

pera

ture

cla

ss

Deg

ree

of p

rote

ctio

n

Det

ectio

n sy

stem

Ven

tilat

ion

Bilg

e pu

mpi

ng

Pers

onne

l pro

tect

ion

Port

able

fire-

extin

guis

hers

Mac

hine

ry s

pace

bou

ndar

ies

Sep

arat

ion

of r

o-ro

spa

ces

5)

4.3 liquids 1) 2.2 2.3 2.82.9.22.9.3

2.12 2.132.14.12.14.2

2.15

4.3 solids 2.2 2.3 2.82.9.22.9.3

2.12 2.132.14.12.14.2

2.15

5.1 2.2 2.3 2.82.9.2

2.9.3 2) 2.12 2.132.14.1

2.14.2 4) 2.15

5.2 1)

6.1 liquids FP < 23°C 2.2 2.3 IIB T4 2.82.9.22.9.3

2.102.11

2.12 2.132.14.12.14.2

2.15

6.1 liquids 23°C ≤ FP ≤60°C 2.2 2.3 2.8

2.9.22.9.3

2.102.11

2.12 2.132.14.12.14.2

2.15

6.1 liquids FP > 60°C 2.2 2.3 2.82.102.11

2.12 2.15

6.1 solids 2.2 2.3 2.82.9.2

2.9.3 2) 2.12 2.15

8 liquids FP < 23°C 2.2 2.3 IIB T4 2.82.9.22.9.3

2.102.11

2.12 2.132.14.12.14.2

2.15

8 liquids 23°C ≤ FP ≤60°C 2.2 2.3 2.8

2.9.22.9.3

2.102.11

3)2.12 2.13

2.14.12.14.2

2.15


hips — D

NVG

L-RU

-SH


Equipm


DN

V G

L AS


Requirements


Class

Fire

-ext

ingu

ishi

ng s

yste

m

Wat

er s

uppl

ies

Wat

er c

oolin

g

App

arat

us g

roup

Tem

pera

ture

cla

ss

Deg

ree

of p

rote

ctio

n

Det

ectio

n sy

stem

Ven

tilat

ion

Bilg

e pu

mpi

ng

Pers

onne

l pro

tect

ion

Port

able

fire-

extin

guis

hers

Mac

hine

ry s

pace

bou

ndar

ies

Sep

arat

ion

of r

o-ro

spa

ces

5)

8 liquids FP > 60°C 2.2 2.3 2.82.102.11

3)2.12 2.15

8 solids 2.2 2.3 2.8 2.12 2.15


2.2 2.3 IIB T42.9.22.9.3

2.12 2.15


2.2 2.32.9.2

2.9.3 2) 2.12 2.15


2) When "mechanically-ventilated spaces" are required by the IMDG Code.3) Only applicable to dangerous goods having a subsidiary risk class 6.1.4) When "protected from sources of heat" is required by the IMDG Code.


hips — D

NVG

L-RU

-SH


Equipm


DN

V G

L AS


Table 10 Requirements for the carriage of dangerous goods in packaged form in open ro-ro spaces

Requirements

Sources of ignition 2.5-2.7Class

Fixedpressure

water fire-extinguishing

system

Watersupplies

Watercooling Apparatus

groupTemperature

class

Degreeof

protection

Personnelprotection

Portablefire

extinguishers

Machineryspace

boundaries

1.1 to 1.6 2.2.2 2.3 2.4 IIA T5 IP65 2.14.3

1.4S 2.2.2 2.3


2.2.2 2.3 IIC T4 2.122.14.12.14.2

2.1 other than hydrogenand hydrogen mixtures 2.2.2 2.3 IIB T4 2.12

2.14.12.14.2

2.2 2.2.2 2.3 2.122.14.12.14.2

2.3 flammable 3 2.2.2 2.3 IIB T4 2.122.14.12.14.2

2.3 non-flammable 3 2.2.2 2.3 2.122.14.12.14.2

3 FP < 23°C 2.2.2 2.3 IIB T4 2.12 2.132.14.12.14.2

3 23°C ≤ FP ≤ 60°C 2.2.2 2.3 2.12 2.132.14.12.14.2

4.1 2.2.2 2.3 2.12 2.132.14.12.14.2

4.2 2.2.2 2.3 2.12 2.132.14.12.14.2

4.3 liquids 3 2.2.2 2.3 IIC 2) T4 2) 2.12 2.132.14.12.14.2

4.3 solids 2.2.2 2.3 2.12 2.132.14.12.14.2


hips — D

NVG

L-RU

-SH


Equipm


DN

V G

L AS


Requirements


Fixedpressure

water fire-extinguishing

system

Watersupplies


groupTemperature

class

Degreeof

protection

Personnelprotection

Portablefire

extinguishers

Machineryspace

boundaries

5.1 2.2.2 2.3 2.12 2.132.14.1

2.14.2 1)

5.2 3 2.2.2 2.3 2.122.14.12.14.2

6.1 liquids FP < 23°C 2.2.2 2.3 IIB T4 2.12 2.132.14.12.14.2

6.1 liquids 23°C ≤ FP ≤60°C 2.2.2 2.3 2.12 2.13

2.14.12.14.2

6.1 liquids FP > 60°C 2.2.2 2.3 2.12

6.1 solids 2.2.2 2.3 2.12

8 liquids FP < 23°C 2.2.2 2.3 IIB T4 2.12 2.132.14.12.14.2

8 liquids 23°C ≤ FP ≤60°C 2.2.2 2.3 2.12 2.13

2.14.12.14.2

8 liquids FP > 60°C 2.2.2 2.3 2.12

8 solids 2.2.2 2.3 2.12


2.2.2 2.3 IIB T4 2.12


2.2.2 2.3 2.12

1) When "protected from sources of heat" is required by the IMDG Code.2) Applicable to goods having a flashpoint less than 23°C as listed in the IMDG Code.3) Under the provisions of the IMDG Code stowage of class 2.3, class 4.3 liquids having a flashpoint less than 23°C as listed in the IMDG Code and

class 5.2 may only be carried in open ro-ro spaces when authorized by the flag administration according to IMDG Code 7.5.2.6.


hips — D

NVG

L-RU

-SH


Equipm


DN

V G

L AS


Table 11 Requirements for the carriage of dangerous goods in packaged form in shipborne barges

Requirements


Fixedgas fire-

extinguishingsystem

Watersupplies


groupTemperature

classDegree ofprotection

Detectionsystem 2)

Ventilation2)

1.1 to 1.6 2.2.1 2.3 2.4 IIA T5 IP65 2.8

1.4S 2.2.1 2.3 2.8

2.1 hydrogen and hydrogen mixturesexclusively 2.2.1 2.3 IIC T4 2.8

2.9.22.9.3

2.1 other than hydrogen andhydrogen mixtures

2.2.1 2.3 IIB T4 2.82.9.22.9.3

2.2 2.2.1 2.3 2.8

2.3 flammable 1)


3 FP < 23°C 2.2.1 2.3 IIB T4 2.82.9.22.9.3

3 23°C ≤ FP ≤ 60°C 2.2.1 2.3 2.8

4.1 2.2.1 2.3 2.82.9.2

2.9.3 3)

4.2 2.2.1 2.3 2.82.9.2

2.9.3 3)

4.3 liquids 1) 2.2.1 2.3 2.82.9.22.9.3

4.3 solids 2.2.1 2.3 2.82.9.22.9.3

5.1 2.2.1 2.3 2.82.9.2

2.9.3 3)

5.2 1)

6.1 liquids FP < 23°C 2.2.1 2.3 IIB T4 2.82.9.22.9.3


hips — D

NVG

L-RU

-SH


Equipm


DN

V G

L AS


Requirements


Fixedgas fire-

extinguishingsystem

Watersupplies


groupTemperature

classDegree ofprotection

Detectionsystem 2)

Ventilation2)

6.1 liquids 23°C ≤ FP ≤ 60°C 2.2.1 2.3 2.82.9.22.9.3

6.1 liquids FP > 60°C 2.2.1 2.3 2.8

6.1 solids 2.2.1 2.3 2.82.9.2

2.9.3 3)

8 liquids FP < 23°C 2.2.1 2.3 IIB T4 2.82.9.22.9.3

8 liquids 23°C ≤ FP ≤ 60°C 2.2.1 2.3 2.82.9.22.9.3

8 liquids FP > 60°C 2.2.1 2.3 2.8

8 solids 2.2.1 2.3 2.8

9 goods evolving flammable vapourexclusively 2.2.1 2.3 IIB T4

2.9.22.9.3

9 other than goods evolving flammablevapour 2.2.1 2.3

2.9.22.9.3 3)

1) Under the provisions of the IMDG Code stowage of class 2.3, class 4.3 liquids having a flashpoint less than 23°C listed in the IMDG Code andclass 5.2 under deck is prohibited.

2) In the special case where the barges are capable of containing flammable vapours or alternatively if they are capable of discharging flammablevapours to a safe outside the barge carrier compartment by means of ventilation ducts connected to the barges, these requirements may bereduced or waived to the satisfaction of the administration.

3) When “mechanically-ventilated spaces” are required by the IMDG Code.


hips — D

NVG

L-RU

-SH


Equipm


DN

V G

L AS


Table 12 Requirements for the carriage of dangerous goods in packaged form on the weather deck

Requirements

Class Fixed fire-extinguishing

systemWater supplies Personnel

protectionPortable fire-extinguishers

Machinery spaceboundaries

1.1 to 1.6 2.2.3 2.3 2.14.3

1.4S 2.2.3 2.3

2.1 hydrogen and hydrogen mixtures exclusively 2.2.3 2.3 2.122.14.12.14.2

2.1 other than hydrogen and hydrogen mixtures 2.2.3 2.3 2.122.14.12.14.2

2.2 2.2.3 2.3 2.122.14.12.14.2

2.3 flammable 2.2.3 2.3 2.122.14.12.14.2

2.3 non-flammable 2.2.3 2.3 2.122.14.12.14.2

3 FP < 23°C 2.2.3 2.3 2.12 2.132.14.12.14.2

3 23°C ≤ FP ≤ 60°C 2.2.3 2.3 2.12 2.132.14.12.14.2

4.1 2.2.3 2.3 2.12 2.132.14.12.14.2

4.2 2.2.3 2.3 2.12 2.132.14.12.14.2

4.3 liquids 2.2.3 2.3 2.12 2.132.14.12.14.2

4.3 solids 2.2.3 2.3 2.12 2.132.14.12.14.2

5.1 2.2.3 2.3 2.12 2.132.14.1

2.14.2 1)

5.2 2.2.3 2.3 2.122.14.12.14.2


hips — D

NVG

L-RU

-SH


Equipm


DN

V G

L AS


Requirements

Class Fixed fire-extinguishing

systemWater supplies Personnel

protectionPortable fire-extinguishers

Machinery spaceboundaries

6.1 liquids FP < 23°C 2.2.3 2.3 2.12 2.132.14.12.14.2

6.1 liquids 23°C ≤ FP ≤ 60°C 2.2.3 2.3 2.12 2.132.14.12.14.2

6.1 liquids FP > 60°C 2.2.3 2.3 2.12

6.1 solids 2.2.3 2.3 2.12

8 liquids FP < 23°C 2.2.3 2.3 2.12 2.132.14.12.14.2

8 liquids 23°C ≤ FP ≤ 60°C 2.2.3 2.3 2.12 2.132.14.12.14.2

8 liquids FP > 60°C 2.2.3 2.3 2.12

8 solids 2.2.3 2.3 2.12

9 goods evolving flammable vapour exclusively 2.2.3 2.3 2.12

9 other than goods evolving flammable vapour 2.2.3 2.3 2.12

1) When “protected from sources of heat” is required by the IMDG Code.

Part

6 C

hapt

er 5

Sec

tion

10


DNV GL AS

3 Requirements for the carriage of solid bulk cargoes

3.1 General3.1.1 RequirementsThe requirements depend on the dangerous goods class and special properties of the cargoes to be carried.The cargoes of group B and the applicable provisions are shown in Table 13. For cargoes of group A and C therequirements of [3.1.3] shall be observed.

3.1.2 ClassificationDangerous goods in solid form in bulk are being classified in accordance with the IMDG Code.Class 4.1: Flammable solidsReadily combustible solids and solids which may cause fire through friction.Class 4.2: Substances liable to spontaneous combustionMaterials, other than pyrophoric materials, which, in contact with air without energy supply, are liable to self-heating.Class 4.3: Substances which, in contact with water, emit flammable gasesSolids which, by interaction with water, are liable to become spontaneously flammable or to give offflammable gases in dangerous quantities.Class 5.1: Oxidizing substancesMaterials that, while in themselves not necessarily combustible, may, generally by yielding oxygen, cause, orcontribute to, the combustion of other material.Class 7: Radioactive materialMaterials containing radionuclides where both the activity concentration and the total activity in theconsignment exceed the values specified in 2.7.2.2.1 to 2.7.2.2.6 of the IMDG Code.Class 9: Miscellaneous dangerous substancesMaterials which, during transport, present a danger not covered by other classes.Class MHB: Materials hazardous only in bulkMaterials which may possess chemical hazards when transported in bulk other than materials classified asdangerous goods in the IMDG Code.The class "MHB" is supplemented with one or more notational reference(s) in brackets as listed below whenthe material possesses recognized chemical hazard(s) according to the IMSBC Code 9.2.3:

— Combustible solid: MHB (CB)— Self-heating solids: MHB (SH)— Solids that evolve flammable gas when wet: MHB (WF)— Solids that evolve toxic gas when wet: MHB (WT)— Toxic solids: MHB (TX)— Corrosive solids: MHB (CR)— Other hazards: MHB (OH).

3.1.3 DocumentationAll ships intended for the carriage of solid bulk cargoes shall be provided with following documentation:

— IMSBC Code, as amended— Approved loading manual— Approved stability information— Bulk cargo booklet according to SOLAS regulation VI/7.2— MFAG (to be provided for cargoes of group B only)

Part

6 C

hapt

er 5

Sec

tion

10


DNV GL AS

(IMSBC Code 3.1.2)

3.2 Fire-extinguishing system3.2.1 Fixed gas fire-extinguishing systemAll cargo holds of the following ships shall be equipped with a fixed CO2 fire extinguishing system:

— ships intended for the carriage of dangerous goods in solid form in compliance with SOLAS regulationII-2/19

— ships of 2000 GT and above intended for the carriage of cargoes of class MHB and cargoes of group A andC.

(SOLAS regulation II-2/10.7.1.3 and II-2/10.7.2)Guidance note:For ships of less than 500 GT the requirement may be dispensed with subject to acceptance by the flag administration.


3.2.2 Exemption certificateA ship may be exempted from the requirement of a fixed gas fire extinguishing system if constructed andsolely intended for the carriage of cargoes as specified in MSC.1/Circ.1395/Rev.3. Such exemption may begranted only if the ship is fitted with steel hatch covers and effective means of closing all ventilators andother openings leading to the cargo spaces.(SOLAS regulation II-2/10.7.1.4)For cargoes according to MSC.1/Circ.1395/Rev.3, table 2 a fire-extinguishing system giving equivalentprotection shall be provided.For fire-extinguishing systems giving equivalent protection, see [3.3.2].(MSC/Circ.1120)

3.3 Fire water supplies3.3.1 Immediate supply of waterImmediate supply of water from the fire main shall be provided by remote starting arrangement for the mainfire pumps from the navigation bridge or from other continuously manned control station or by permanentpressurization of the fire main and by automatic start-up of the main fire pumps.(SOLAS regulation II-2/19.3.1.1)If fire water supply pumps arranged for remote starting also serve other purposes, the pump selected shallbe connected to the fire water system, e.g. by automatic change-over of valves or visual signals for valves'correct positions at the remote starting position.

3.3.2 Quantity of water and arrangement of hydrantsThe capacity of the main fire pumps shall be sufficient for supplying four jets of water at the pressure asprescribed in SOLAS regulation II-2/10.2.1.6).The number and position of hydrants shall be such that at least two of the required four jets of water, whensupplied by single lengths of hose, may reach any part of the cargo space when empty; and all four jets ofwater, each supplied by single lengths of hose may reach any part of ro-ro spaces.(SOLAS regulation II-2/19.3.1.2, MSC/Circ.1120 and IACS UI SC168 Rev.1)

Guidance note:The length of the water jet is generally not to be taken more than 7 m.


Three additional hoses and nozzles shall be provided.(SOLAS regulation II-2/10.2.3.2.3.1)

Part

6 C

hapt

er 5

Sec

tion

10


DNV GL AS

3.4 Sources of ignition related to electrical equipment

3.4.1 The apparatus group, temperature class and degree of protection required for the individual cargoesis specified in column "Sources of ignition" of Table 13. If explosion protection is required the followingconditions shall be complied with.

3.4.2 Electrical equipment and wiring shall not be fitted in hazardous areas unless it is essential for thesafety and operation of the ship.(IEC 60092-506 5.1)

3.4.3 All electrical equipment in the hazardous area and being essential for the ship's operation shall be ofcertified safe type corresponding to the degree of explosion protection as shown in Table 13.(SOLAS regulation II-2/19.3.2)

3.4.4 Electrical equipment that are not essential to ship's operation need not to be of certified safe typeprovided it can be electrically disconnected from the power source, by appropriate means other than fuses(e.g. by removal of links, lockable switches), at a point external to the space and to be secured againstunintentional re-connection.

3.4.5 The electrical equipment in extended hazardous areas shall either:

— be appropriate for use in the adjacent space in accordance with Table 13; or— be suitable for zone 2, see Pt.4 Ch.8 Sec.11 [3.2].

3.4.6 The hazardous areas and extended hazardous areas shall be categorised in accordance with Table 3.

3.4.7 Cables shall be either

— protected by electrically continuous metal sheathing or metallic wire armour braid or tape; or— enclosed in screwed heavy gauge steel drawn or seam-welded and galvanized conduit.

3.4.8 All metallic protective coverings of power and lighting cables passing through a hazardous area orconnected to equipment in such an area shall be earthed at least at each end. The metallic covering of allother cables shall be earthed at least at one end.

3.4.9 Cable penetrations of decks and bulkheads shall be gas tight, and of a recognised make.

3.4.10 Cable joints in cargo spaces shall be avoided where possible. Where joints are unavoidable, they shallbe enclosed in metal-clad or impact strength plastic junction boxes of certified safe type, or heat shrink orencapsulated crimp sleeve cable joints.

3.5 Sources of ignition related to safety of fans

3.5.1 The fans being essential for the ship's operation shall be of a type (non-sparking type) that preventsthe possibility of the ignition of flammable gas air mixtures and shall comply with Pt.5 Ch.5 Sec.6 [1.2].Otherwise the fans shall be capable of being disconnected from the power source, see [3.4.4].(SOLAS regulation II-2/19.3.4.2, IACS UI SC52.1 Rev.1 and IACS UR F29)

3.5.2 The fan openings on deck shall be fitted with fixed wire mesh guards with a mesh size not exceeding13 mm.The purpose of the wire mesh guards is to prevent foreign objects from entering into the fan casing.(SOLAS regulation II-2/19.3.4.2, IACS UI SC52.2 Rev.1 and MSC/Circ.1120)

Part

6 C

hapt

er 5

Sec

tion

10


DNV GL AS

3.5.3 The air inlets and outlets shall be placed at a safe distance from possible ignition sources. A sphericalradius of 3 m around the air outlets, within which ignition sources are prohibited, is required.

3.6 Other sources of ignitionOther sources of ignition shall not be installed in hazardous areas and extended hazardous areas, e.g. steamor thermal oil lines.

Guidance note:According to the IMSBC Code 1.7 potential sources of ignition means, but is not limited to, open fires, machinery exhausts, galleyuptakes, electrical outlets and electrical equipment unless they are of certified safe type.


3.7 Measurement equipment

3.7.1 Portable equipment required for the carriage of individual cargoes shall be available on board prior toloading.

3.7.2 Surface temperatureMeans shall be provided for measuring the surface temperature of the cargo. In case of portable temperaturesensors, the arrangement shall enable the measurement without entering the hold.

3.7.3 Cargo temperatureMeans shall be provided for measuring the temperature inside the cargo. In case of portable temperaturesensors, the arrangement shall enable the measurement without entering the hold.

Guidance note:Detailed requirements on temperature measurement for the individual cargoes should be agreed with the shipper.


3.7.4 Gas measurementFor the quantitative measurements of the following gases in the cargo spaces and adjacent enclosed spacessuitable detectors for each gas or combination of gases shall be provided:

a) acetyleneb) ammoniac) arsined) carbon dioxidee) carbon monoxidef) hydrogeng) hydrogen cyanideh) hydrogen sulphidei) methanej) oxygen (0 - 21% by volume)k) phosphinel) silanem) sulphur dioxiden) toxic gases that may be given off from the particular cargo according to shipper’s instructions/material

safety data sheet(SOLAS regulation VI/3.1, IMSBC Code 3.2.5 and IMSBC Code appendix 1)Suitable personal gas detection equipment for crew entering cargo spaces and adjacent enclosed spacesfor following gases shall be provided:

o) carbon monoxide meters

Part

6 C

hapt

er 5

Sec

tion

10


DNV GL AS

p) oxygen meters.(IMSBC Code appendix 1)

3.7.5 Acidity of bilge waterMeans shall be provided for testing the acidity of the water in the bilge wells.

3.8 Ventilation3.8.1 GeneralCargo hold ventilation systems shall be separated from the ventilation systems serving other spaces.If cargo holds are subdivided for reasons of stability, freeboard or fire protection (e.g. separate flooding withCO2) this has to be taken into account for the design of the ventilation systems.Air ducts and components of ventilation systems shall be so installed that they are protected from damage.If adjacent spaces are not separated from cargo spaces by gastight bulkheads or decks, then they shall beconsidered as part of the enclosed cargo space and the ventilation requirements shall apply to the adjacentspace as for the enclosed cargo space itself.(MSC/Circ.1120 and IACS UI SC89 Rev.3)

3.8.2 DuctingThe ducting shall be arranged such that the space above the cargo can be ventilated and that exchange ofair from outside to inside the entire cargo space is provided. The position of air inlets and air outlets shall besuch as to prevent short circuiting of the air.

3.8.3 Natural ventilationA ventilation system which does not incorporate mechanical fans is sufficient.

3.8.4 Mechanical ventilationA ventilation system which incorporates powered fans with an unspecified capacity shall be provided.

3.8.5 Mechanical ventilation (six air changes/h)A ventilation system which incorporates powered fans with a capacity of at least 6 air changes per hourbased on the empty cargo hold shall be provided.

3.8.6 Continuous mechanical ventilationA ventilation system which incorporates at least two powered fans with a capacity of at least three airchanges per hour each (six air changes/h in total) based on the empty cargo hold shall be provided.(IACS UI SC89 Rev.3)

3.8.7 Portable fansIf ventilation fans are required portable fans may be used instead of fixed ones. If so, suitable arrangementsfor securing the fans safely shall be provided. Electrical connections shall be fixed and expertly laid for theduration of the installation. Details shall be submitted for approval.

3.9 Additional provisions on ventilation3.9.1 Spark arresting screensAll ventilation openings on deck shall be fitted with suitable spark arresting screens prior to loading. Sparkarresting screens are considered portable equipment shall be available on board prior to loading.(IMSBC Code appendix 1)

Part

6 C

hapt

er 5

Sec

tion

10


DNV GL AS

3.9.2 Openings for continuous mechanical ventilationThe ventilation openings shall comply with the requirements of the Load Line Convention, for openings notfitted with means of closure. According to ICLL, regulation 19(3) the openings shall be arranged at least 4.50m above deck in position 1 and at least 2.30 m above deck in position 2.(IMSBC Code 3.5.4 and IACS UI SC89 Rev.3)

Guidance note:This does not prohibit ventilators from being fitted with a means of closure as required for fire protection purposes under SOLASregulation II-2/5.2.1.1.


(IACS UI SC89 Rev.3)

3.9.3 Escaping gasesThe ventilation outlets shall be arranged at least 10 m away from living quarters on or under deck.

3.10 Bilge pumping3.10.1 Inadvertent pumpingThe bilge system shall be designed so as to prevent inadvertent pumping of flammable and toxic liquidsthrough pumps and pipelines in the machinery space.(SOLAS regulation II-2/19.3.5.1)

3.10.2 Isolating valvesThe cargo hold bilge lines shall be provided with isolating valves outside the machinery space or at the pointof exit from the machinery space located close to the bulkhead.The valves shall be capable of being secured in closed position (e.g. safety locking device).Remote controlled valves shall be capable of being secured in closed position. In case a computer-basedsystem is provided, this system shall contain a corresponding safety query on the display.(SOLAS regulation II-2/19.3.5.3)

3.10.3 Warning signsWarning signs shall be displayed at the isolating valve or control positions, e.g. “This valve to be kept securedin closed position during the carriage of dangerous goods in cargo hold nos. __ and may be operated with thepermission of the master only”.

3.10.4 Inspection of bilge pumping arrangementsPrior to loading, the safety of the bilge pumping arrangements for cargo holds shall be approved by the flagadministration.(IMSBC Code appendix 1)

3.11 Personnel protection – full protective clothing

3.11.1 The protective clothing shall satisfy the equipment requirements specified in the EmS Guide for theindividual substances.The required protective clothing is for emergency purposes.(MSC/Circ.1120 and IACS UI SC91 Rev.1)

3.11.2 Two sets of full protective clothing appropriate to the properties of the cargo shall be provided.(IMSBC Code appendix 1 Emergency procedures)

3.11.3 Four sets of full protective clothing appropriate to the properties of the cargo shall be provided.

Part

6 C

hapt

er 5

Sec

tion

10


DNV GL AS

(SOLAS regulation II-2/19.3.6.1)

3.12 Personnel protection - self-contained breathing apparatuses

3.12.1 Two sets of self-contained breathing apparatuses with spare air cylinders for at least two refills foreach set shall be provided.(IMSBC Code appendix 1 Emergency procedures)

3.12.2 Additional two sets of self-contained breathing apparatuses with spare air cylinders for at least tworefills for each set shall be provided.(SOLAS regulation II-2/19.3.6.2 and IACS UI SC92 Rev.1)

3.13 No smoking signs“NO SMOKING” signs shall be posted in the vicinity of cargo holds and in areas adjacent to cargo holds.

3.14 Machinery space boundaries3.14.1 A-60 insulationBulkheads between cargo spaces and machinery spaces of category A shall be provided with a fire insulationto “A-60” class standard. Otherwise the cargoes shall be stowed at least 3 m away from the machinery spacebulkhead.

Guidance note:The 3 m distance can be provided by a grain bulkhead, big bags or by other means of separation.


Decks between cargo and machinery spaces of category A shall be insulated to “A-60” class standard.(SOLAS regulation II-2/19.3.8)

3.14.2 Gas-tightnessAll boundaries between the cargo hold and the machinery space shall be gastight. Cable penetrations are notpermitted.Interconnection of cargo hold ventilation trunks with other cargo holds, accommodation or work areas is notpermitted.

3.14.3 Inspection of engine room bulkheadPrior to loading, the bulkheads to the engine room shall be inspected and approved by the flag administrationas gastight.

3.15 Other boundariesAll boundaries of the cargo holds shall be resistant to fire and passage of water (at least “A-0” standard).

3.16 Gas sampling pointsTwo gas sampling points per cargo hold shall be arranged in the hatch cover or hatch coaming preferably oneon each side, provided with threaded stubs and sealing caps according to Figure 1. The sampling points shallbe located as high as possible, e.g. upper part of hatch. Fore and aft location may also be accepted if this isdeemed more advantageous.

Part

6 C

hapt

er 5

Sec

tion

10


DNV GL AS

Figure 1 Gas sampling points

3.17 Weather tightnessHatch covers, closures for all ventilators and other closures for openings leading to the cargo holds shall beweathertight.

Guidance note:Weathertighness is to be verified by a surveyor (hose test or equivalent) during the periodical surveys.


3.18 Fuel tanks3.18.1 TightnessPrior to loading, fuel tanks situated under the cargo spaces shall be pressure tested to verify that there is noleakage of manholes and piping systems leading to the tanks.

3.18.2 Sources of heatStowage adjacent to sources of heat, including fuel tanks which may require heating is not permitted.

Guidance note:For AMMONIUM NITRATE UN 1942 heating arrangements for fuel tanks should be disconnected and shall remain disconnectedduring the entire voyage.


(IMSBC Code appendix 1)

3.18.3 Sources of heatStowage adjacent to sources of heat and to fuel tanks heated to more than 55°C is not permitted.

Guidance note:For BROWN COAL BRIQUETTES and COAL this requirement is considered to be met if the fuel oil temperature is controlled atless than 55°C. This temperature should not exceed for periods greater than 12 hours in any 24-hour period and the maximumtemperature reached should not exceed 65°C.


(MSC.1/Circ.1351)

Part

6 C

hapt

er 5

Sec

tion

10


DNV GL AS

3.18.4 Sources of heatStowage to sources of heat and to tanks, double bottoms or pipes containing fuel oil heated to more than50°C is not permitted.Means shall be provided to monitor and to control the temperature so that it does not exceed 50°C(IMSBC Code appendix 1)

3.19 Self-unloading system

3.19.1 Types of self-unloading systems:

— Closed: The part of the system located outside the cargo hold is fully enclosed, e.g. pneumatic systems orfully enclosed chain conveyors.

— Open: Open type systems, e.g. belt conveyors and bucket conveyors.

For some cargoes the use of self-unloading systems are not permitted due to hazards involved. For othercargoes only closed systems are permitted.

3.19.2 Spaces containing self-unloading systems shall be provided with a water flushing system enablingeasy cleaning/removal of dust deposits.

3.19.3 Self-unloading systems of the open type shall be arranged for emergency stop from convenientlocations within the cargo handling spaces and on open deck.

3.19.4 Spaces containing self-unloading systems shall be fitted with mechanical ventilation giving at least 6air changes per hour.

Guidance note:For COAL see the IMSBC Code appendix 1.


3.19.5 Electrical equipment in spaces containing self-unloading systems shall comply with the requirementsunder [3.4] and [3.5].Conveyor belts shall be made from materials not liable to accumulate static electricity.

3.19.6 Depending on the properties of the cargoes the spaces containing self-unloading systems shall beequipped either with:

a) a fixed CO2 fire extinguishing system; orb) a fixed water spaying system with a of at least 5 l/min/m2 of the largest horizontal area.

Drainage and pumping arrangements shall be designed in compliance with Pt.4 Ch.6, as applicable.Guidance note:According to the IMSBC Code 3.1.2 regular fire safety risk assessments shall be carried out for cargo handling areas on self-unloading bulk carriers featuring internally installed conveyor systems within the ships structure. Due consideration shall be givento the fire prevention and the effective operation of fire detection systems, containment and suppression under all anticipatedoperating conditions and cargoes.



hips — D

NVG

L-RU

-SH


Equipm


DN

V G

L AS


Table 13 Requirements for solid bulk cargoes

Cargo Requirements

Sourcesof ignition3.4-3.6

Self-unloadingsystem 3.19

Bulk CargoShipping

Name

Cla

ss

Fire

-ext

ingu

ishi

ng s

yste

m

Wat

er s

uppl

ies

App

arat

us g

roup

Tem

pera

ture

cla

ss

Deg

ree

of p

rote

ctio

n

Tem

pera

ture

mea

sure

men

t

Gas

mea

sure

men

t

Aci

dity

of bi

lge

wat

er

Ven

tilat

ion

Add

ition

al p

rovi

sion

on v

entil

atio

n

Bilg

e pu

mpi

ng

Pers

onne

l pro

tect

ion

No

smok

ing

sign

s

Mac

hine

ry s

pace

bou

ndar

ies

Oth

er b

ound

arie

s

Gas

sam

plin

g po

ints

Wea

ther

tig

htne

ss

Fuel

tan

ks

Type Fi

re e

xtin

guis

hing

sys

tem

ALUMINIAHYDRATE MHB 3.2.2

3.11.23.12.1

Closed/Open

ALUMINIUMFERROSILICONPOWDER UN1395

4.3 3.2.2 IIC T23.7.4

c) f) k)

l)

3.8.23.8.6

3.9.23.9.3

3.11.33.12.2

3.13 3.14Closed/Open

3.19.6a)

ALUMINIUMNITRATE UN1438

5.1 3.2.2 3.33.8.23.8.3

3.11.33.12.2

Closed/Open

3.19.6b)

ALUMINIUMSILICONPOWDER,UNCOATED UN1398

4.3 3.2.2 IIC T23.7.4

c) f) k)

l)

3.8.23.8.6

3.9.23.9.3

3.11.33.12.2

3.13 3.14Closed/Open

3.19.6a)

ALUMINIUMSMELTING BY-PRODUCTS orALUMINIUMREMELTINGBY-PRODUCTSUN 3170

4.3 3.2.2 IIC T23.7.4

a) b) f)3.8.23.8.6

3.9.23.9.3

3.10.13.10.2

3.10.3

3.11.33.12.2

3.133.14.13.14.2

Closed/Open

3.19.6a)


hips — D

NVG

L-RU

-SH


Equipm


DN

V G

L AS


Cargo Requirements



Bulk CargoShipping

NameCla

ss

Fire

-ext

ingu

ishi

ng s

yste

m

Wat

er s

uppl

ies

App

arat

us g

roup

Tem

pera

ture

cla

ss

Deg

ree

of p

rote

ctio

n

Tem

pera

ture

mea

sure

men

t

Gas

mea

sure

men

t

Aci

dity

of bi

lge

wat

er

Ven

tilat

ion

Add

ition

al p

rovi

sion

on v

entil

atio

n

Bilg

e pu

mpi

ng

Pers

onne

l pro

tect

ion

No

smok

ing

sign

s

Mac

hine

ry s

pace

bou

ndar

ies

Oth

er b

ound

arie

s

Gas

sam

plin

g po

ints

Wea

ther

tig

htne

ss

Fuel

tan

ks

Type Fi

re e

xtin

guis

hing

sys

tem

ALUMINIUMSMELTING/REMELTINGBY-PRODUCTS,PROCESSED

MHB 3.2.1 IIC T13.7.4

a) b) f)3.8.23.8.6

3.9.23.9.3

3.10.13.10.2

3.10.33.13 3.14.2

Closed/Open

3.19.6a)

AMMONIUMNITRATE UN1942

5.1 3.2.2 3.3 T31) 3.7.3

3.8.23.8.3

3.11.33.12.2

3.13 3.14.1 3.173.18.13.18.2

Notper-mitted

AMMONIUMNITRATEBASEDFERTILIZERUN 2067

5.1 3.2.2 3.3 T31) 3.7.3

3.8.23.8.3

3.11.33.12.2

3.13 3.14.1 3.173.18.13.18.4

Notper-mitted

AMMONIUMNITRATEBASEDFERTILIZERUN 2071

9 3.2.2 3.3 T31) 3.7.3

3.8.23.8.3

3.11.33.12.2

3.13 3.14.1 3.17 3.18.4Not

per-mitted

AMORPHOUSSODIUMSILICATELUMPS

MHB(CR) 3.2.2

Closed/Open


hips — D

NVG

L-RU

-SH


Equipm


DN

V G

L AS


Cargo Requirements



Bulk CargoShipping

NameCla

ss

Fire

-ext

ingu

ishi

ng s

yste

m

Wat

er s

uppl

ies

App

arat

us g

roup

Tem

pera

ture

cla

ss

Deg

ree

of p

rote

ctio

n

Tem

pera

ture

mea

sure

men

t

Gas

mea

sure

men

t

Aci

dity

of bi

lge

wat

er

Ven

tilat

ion

Add

ition

al p

rovi

sion

on v

entil

atio

n

Bilg

e pu

mpi

ng

Pers

onne

l pro

tect

ion

No

smok

ing

sign

s

Mac

hine

ry s

pace

bou

ndar

ies

Oth

er b

ound

arie

s

Gas

sam

plin

g po

ints

Wea

ther

tig

htne

ss

Fuel

tan

ks

Type Fi

re e

xtin

guis

hing

sys

tem

BARIUMNITRATE UN1446

5.1 3.2.2 3.33.8.23.8.3

3.11.33.12.2

Closed/Open

3.19.6b)

BORIC ACID MHB(TX) 3.2.2

Closed/Open

BROWN COALBRIQUETTES MHB 3.2.2 IIA T4 IP55 3.7.3

3.7.4e) i) j)

3.7.5 3.12.1 3.13 3.15 3.16 3.17 3.18.3Closed/Open

3.19.6a)

CALCIUMNITRATE UN1454

5.1 3.2.2 3.33.8.23.8.3

3.11.33.12.2

Closed/Open

CASTORBEANS orCASTOR MEALor CASTORPOMACEor CASTORFLAKE UN2969

9 3.2.1 3.33.8.23.8.3

3.11.33.12.2

Closed3.19.6a) orb)

CHARCOAL MHB 3.2.13.7.4

j)Closed/Open

3.19.6a) orb)


hips — D

NVG

L-RU

-SH


Equipm


DN

V G

L AS


Cargo Requirements



Bulk CargoShipping

NameCla

ss

Fire

-ext

ingu

ishi

ng s

yste

m

Wat

er s

uppl

ies

App

arat

us g

roup

Tem

pera

ture

cla

ss

Deg

ree

of p

rote

ctio

n

Tem

pera

ture

mea

sure

men

t

Gas

mea

sure

men

t

Aci

dity

of bi

lge

wat

er

Ven

tilat

ion

Add

ition

al p

rovi

sion

on v

entil

atio

n

Bilg

e pu

mpi

ng

Pers

onne

l pro

tect

ion

No

smok

ing

sign

s

Mac

hine

ry s

pace

bou

ndar

ies

Oth

er b

ound

arie

s

Gas

sam

plin

g po

ints

Wea

ther

tig

htne

ss

Fuel

tan

ks

Type Fi

re e

xtin

guis

hing

sys

tem

CLINKER ASH,WET MHB 3.2.2 3.11.2

Closed/Open

COAL MHB 3.2.2 IIA T4 IP55 3.7.33.7.4d) e)i) j)

3.7.53.8.23.8.3

3.12.1 3.13 3.15 3.16 3.17 3.18.3Closed/Open

3.19.6a)

COAL TARPITCH MHB 3.2.2 3.11.2

Closed/Open

3.19.6a) orb)

COPRA (dry)UN 1363 4.2 3.2.1 3.3 3.7.3

3.7.4j)

3.8.23.8.3

3.11.33.12.2

3.13 3.14.1 3.18.2Closed/Open

3.19.6a) orb)

DIRECTREDUCEDIRON (A)Briquettes, hotmoulded

MHB 3.2.2 IIC T2 3.7.33.7.4f) j)

3.8.23.8.3

3.13 3.15 3.17Notper-

mitted

DIRECTREDUCEDIRON (B)Lumps,pellets, cold-mouldedbriquettes 2)

MHB 3.2.1 IIC T2 3.7.33.7.4f) j)

3.13 3.15 3.17Not

per-mitted


hips — D

NVG

L-RU

-SH


Equipm


DN

V G

L AS


Cargo Requirements



Bulk CargoShipping

NameCla

ss

Fire

-ext

ingu

ishi

ng s

yste

m

Wat

er s

uppl

ies

App

arat

us g

roup

Tem

pera

ture

cla

ss

Deg

ree

of p

rote

ctio

n

Tem

pera

ture

mea

sure

men

t

Gas

mea

sure

men

t

Aci

dity

of bi

lge

wat

er

Ven

tilat

ion

Add

ition

al p

rovi

sion

on v

entil

atio

n

Bilg

e pu

mpi

ng

Pers

onne

l pro

tect

ion

No

smok

ing

sign

s

Mac

hine

ry s

pace

bou

ndar

ies

Oth

er b

ound

arie

s

Gas

sam

plin

g po

ints

Wea

ther

tig

htne

ss

Fuel

tan

ks

Type Fi

re e

xtin

guis

hing

sys

tem

DIRECTREDUCEDIRON (C) By-product fines2)

MHB 3.2.1 IIC T2 3.7.33.7.4f) j)

3.13 3.15 3.17Not

per-mitted

FERROPHOSPHORUSMHB 3.2.2 IIC T13.7.4k) n)

3.8.23.8.6

3.9.23.9.3

3.12.1 3.13Closed/Open

3.19.6a)

FERROSILICONUN 1408 4.3 3.2.2 IIC T1

3.7.4c) f) k)

3.8.23.8.6

3.9.23.9.3

3.103.11.33.12.2

3.13 3.14 Closed3.19.6

a)

FERROSILICON MHB 3.2.2 IIC T13.7.4

c) f) k)3.8.23.8.6

3.9.23.9.3

3.10 3.12.2 3.133.14.23.14.3

Closed3.19.6

a)

FERROUSMETALBORINGS,SHAVINGS,TURNINGS orCUTTINGS UN2793

4.2 3.2.1 3.3 3.7.23.7.4

j)3.8.23.8.3

3.11.33.12.2

3.13 3.14.1Closed/Open

3.19.6a)

FISHMEAL(FISHSCRAP),STABILIZEDUN 2216

9 3.2.1 3.3 3.7.33.7.4

j)3.8.23.8.3

3.11.33.12.2

Closed/Open

3.19.6a) orb)


hips — D

NVG

L-RU

-SH


Equipm


DN

V G

L AS


Cargo Requirements



Bulk CargoShipping

NameCla

ss

Fire

-ext

ingu

ishi

ng s

yste

m

Wat

er s

uppl

ies

App

arat

us g

roup

Tem

pera

ture

cla

ss

Deg

ree

of p

rote

ctio

n

Tem

pera

ture

mea

sure

men

t

Gas

mea

sure

men

t

Aci

dity

of bi

lge

wat

er

Ven

tilat

ion

Add

ition

al p

rovi

sion

on v

entil

atio

n

Bilg

e pu

mpi

ng

Pers

onne

l pro

tect

ion

No

smok

ing

sign

s

Mac

hine

ry s

pace

bou

ndar

ies

Oth

er b

ound

arie

s

Gas

sam

plin

g po

ints

Wea

ther

tig

htne

ss

Fuel

tan

ks

Type Fi

re e

xtin

guis

hing

sys

tem

FLUORSPAR MHB 3.2.2 Closed

GRANULATEDNICKEL MATTE(LESS THAN2% MOISTURECONTENT)

MHB 3.2.23.11.23.12.1

Closed/Open

IRON OXIDE,SPENTor IRONSPONGE,SPENT UN1376

4.2 3.2.1 3.3 IIA T2 IP553.7.4g) h)j) m)

3.8.23.8.3

3.11.33.12.2

3.13 3.14.1Closed/Open

LEAD NITRATEUN 1469 5.1 3.2.2 3.3

3.8.23.8.3

3.11.33.12.2

Closed3.19.6

b)

LIME(UNSLAKED) MHB 3.2.2 Closed

LINTEDCOTTON SEED MHB 3.2.1

3.7.4j)

3.12.1 3.17Closed/Open

3.19.6a) orb)

MAGNESIA(UNSLAKED) MHB 3.2.2 Closed

3.19.6a)


hips — D

NVG

L-RU

-SH


Equipm


DN

V G

L AS


Cargo Requirements



Bulk CargoShipping

NameCla

ss

Fire

-ext

ingu

ishi

ng s

yste

m

Wat

er s

uppl

ies

App

arat

us g

roup

Tem

pera

ture

cla

ss

Deg

ree

of p

rote

ctio

n

Tem

pera

ture

mea

sure

men

t

Gas

mea

sure

men

t

Aci

dity

of bi

lge

wat

er

Ven

tilat

ion

Add

ition

al p

rovi

sion

on v

entil

atio

n

Bilg

e pu

mpi

ng

Pers

onne

l pro

tect

ion

No

smok

ing

sign

s

Mac

hine

ry s

pace

bou

ndar

ies

Oth

er b

ound

arie

s

Gas

sam

plin

g po

ints

Wea

ther

tig

htne

ss

Fuel

tan

ks

Type Fi

re e

xtin

guis

hing

sys

tem

MAGNESIUMNITRATE UN1474

5.1 3.2.2 3.33.8.23.8.3

3.11.33.12.2

Closed/Open

3.19.6b)

METALSULPHIDECONCENTRATES

MHB 3.2.13)

3.7.4j) n)

3.12.1 Closed3.19.6

a)

METALSULPHIDECONCENTRATES,CORROSIVEUN 1759

8 3.2.13)

3.7.4j) n)

3.8.23.8.3

3.11.33.12.2

Closed3.19.6

a)

MONOAMMONIUMPHOSPHATE(M.A.P.),MINERALENRICHEDCOATING

MHB(CR) 3.2.2

3.11.23.12.1

Closed3.19.6

a)

MONOCALCIUMPHOSPHATE(MCP)

MHB(CR) 3.2.2

3.11.23.12.1

Closed3.19.6

a)

PEAT MOSS MHB 3.2.23.7.4d) j)

3.8.23.8.3

Closed/Open

3.19.6a) orb)


hips — D

NVG

L-RU

-SH


Equipm


DN

V G

L AS


Cargo Requirements



Bulk CargoShipping

NameCla

ss

Fire

-ext

ingu

ishi

ng s

yste

m

Wat

er s

uppl

ies

App

arat

us g

roup

Tem

pera

ture

cla

ss

Deg

ree

of p

rote

ctio

n

Tem

pera

ture

mea

sure

men

t

Gas

mea

sure

men

t

Aci

dity

of bi

lge

wat

er

Ven

tilat

ion

Add

ition

al p

rovi

sion

on v

entil

atio

n

Bilg

e pu

mpi

ng

Pers

onne

l pro

tect

ion

No

smok

ing

sign

s

Mac

hine

ry s

pace

bou

ndar

ies

Oth

er b

ound

arie

s

Gas

sam

plin

g po

ints

Wea

ther

tig

htne

ss

Fuel

tan

ks

Type Fi

re e

xtin

guis

hing

sys

tem

PETROLEUMCOKE(calcined oruncalcined)

MHB 3.2.23.11.23.12.1

Closed/Open

3.19.6a) orb)

PITCH PRILL MHB 3.2.23.8.23.8.3

3.11.23.12.1

3.18.2 Closed3.19.6a) orb)

POTASSIUMNITRATE UN1486

5.1 3.2.2 3.33.8.23.8.3

3.11.33.12.2

Closed/Open

3.19.6b)

PYRITES,CALCINED MHB 3.2.2

Closed/Open

RADIOACTIVEMATERIAL,LOW SPECIFICACTIVITY(LSA-1), non-fissile or fissile- expected UN2912

7 3.2.23.11.23.12.1

Closed3.19.6a) orb)


hips — D

NVG

L-RU

-SH


Equipm


DN

V G

L AS


Cargo Requirements



Bulk CargoShipping

NameCla

ss

Fire

-ext

ingu

ishi

ng s

yste

m

Wat

er s

uppl

ies

App

arat

us g

roup

Tem

pera

ture

cla

ss

Deg

ree

of p

rote

ctio

n

Tem

pera

ture

mea

sure

men

t

Gas

mea

sure

men

t

Aci

dity

of bi

lge

wat

er

Ven

tilat

ion

Add

ition

al p

rovi

sion

on v

entil

atio

n

Bilg

e pu

mpi

ng

Pers

onne

l pro

tect

ion

No

smok

ing

sign

s

Mac

hine

ry s

pace

bou

ndar

ies

Oth

er b

ound

arie

s

Gas

sam

plin

g po

ints

Wea

ther

tig

htne

ss

Fuel

tan

ks

Type Fi

re e

xtin

guis

hing

sys

tem

RADIOACTIVEMATERIAL,SURFACECONTAMINATEDOBJECTS(SCO-1), non-fissile or fissile- expected UN2913

7 3.2.23.11.23.12.1

Closed3.19.6a) orb)

SAND,MINERALCONCENTRATE,RADIOACTIVEMATERIAL,LOW SPECIFICACTIVITY(LSA-I) UN2912

7 3.2.23.11.23.12.1

Closed3.19.6a) orb)

SAWDUST MHB 3.2.13.7.4

j)3.8.23.8.3

Closed/Open

3.19.6a) orb)


hips — D

NVG

L-RU

-SH


Equipm


DN

V G

L AS


Cargo Requirements



Bulk CargoShipping

NameCla

ss

Fire

-ext

ingu

ishi

ng s

yste

m

Wat

er s

uppl

ies

App

arat

us g

roup

Tem

pera

ture

cla

ss

Deg

ree

of p

rote

ctio

n

Tem

pera

ture

mea

sure

men

t

Gas

mea

sure

men

t

Aci

dity

of bi

lge

wat

er

Ven

tilat

ion

Add

ition

al p

rovi

sion

on v

entil

atio

n

Bilg

e pu

mpi

ng

Pers

onne

l pro

tect

ion

No

smok

ing

sign

s

Mac

hine

ry s

pace

bou

ndar

ies

Oth

er b

ound

arie

s

Gas

sam

plin

g po

ints

Wea

ther

tig

htne

ss

Fuel

tan

ks

Type Fi

re e

xtin

guis

hing

sys

tem

SEED CAKE,containingvegetable oilUN 1386 (a)

4.2 3.2.1 3.3 3.7.33.7.4

j)3.8.23.8.3

3.11.33.12.2

3.13 3.14.1 Closed/Open

3.19.6a)

SEED CAKE,containingvegetable oilUN 1386 (b)mechanicallyexpelled seeds

4.2 3.2.1 3.3 IIA T3 3.7.33.7.4

j)3.8.23.8.3

3.9.13.11.33.12.2


3.19.6a)

SEED CAKE,containingvegetableoil UN 1386(b) solventextractedseeds

4.2 3.2.1 3.3 IIA T3 3.7.33.7.4

j)3.8.23.8.5

3.9.13.11.33.12.2


3.19.6a)

SEED CAKEUN 2217 4.2 3.2.1 3.3 IIA T3 3.7.3

3.7.4j)

3.8.23.8.5

3.9.13.11.33.12.2


3.19.6a)

SILICO-MANGANESE(low carbon)

MHB 3.2.2 IIC T13.7.4c) f)j) k)

3.8.23.8.4

3.12.1 3.13 3.17 Closed/Open

3.19.6a)


hips — D

NVG

L-RU

-SH


Equipm


DN

V G

L AS


Cargo Requirements



Bulk CargoShipping

NameCla

ss

Fire

-ext

ingu

ishi

ng s

yste

m

Wat

er s

uppl

ies

App

arat

us g

roup

Tem

pera

ture

cla

ss

Deg

ree

of p

rote

ctio

n

Tem

pera

ture

mea

sure

men

t

Gas

mea

sure

men

t

Aci

dity

of bi

lge

wat

er

Ven

tilat

ion

Add

ition

al p

rovi

sion

on v

entil

atio

n

Bilg

e pu

mpi

ng

Pers

onne

l pro

tect

ion

No

smok

ing

sign

s

Mac

hine

ry s

pace

bou

ndar

ies

Oth

er b

ound

arie

s

Gas

sam

plin

g po

ints

Wea

ther

tig

htne

ss

Fuel

tan

ks

Type Fi

re e

xtin

guis

hing

sys

tem

SODIUMNITRATE UN1498

5.1 3.2.2 3.33.8.23.8.3

3.11.33.12.2

Closed/Open

3.19.6b)

SODIUMNITRATE ANDPOTASSIUMNITRATEMIXTURE UN1499

5.1 3.2.2 3.33.8.23.8.3

3.11.33.12.2

Closed/Open

3.19.6b)

SOLIDIFIEDFUELSRECYCLEDFROM PAPERAND PLASTICS

MHB 3.2.1 T3 IP553.7.4

j)3.11.2 3.13 Closed/

Open3.19.6

b)

SUGARCANEBIOMASSPELLETS

MHB(CB,WT,WFandOH)

3.2.1 IIA T3 IP553.7.4

d) e) j)o) p)

3.12.1 3.17 Closed3.19.6

a)

SULPHUR UN1350 4.1 3.2.2 3.3 T4 IP55

3.8.23.8.3

3.9.13.11.33.12.2

3.13 3.14.1 Notpermitted


hips — D

NVG

L-RU

-SH


Equipm


DN

V G

L AS


Cargo Requirements



Bulk CargoShipping

NameCla

ss

Fire

-ext

ingu

ishi

ng s

yste

m

Wat

er s

uppl

ies

App

arat

us g

roup

Tem

pera

ture

cla

ss

Deg

ree

of p

rote

ctio

n

Tem

pera

ture

mea

sure

men

t

Gas

mea

sure

men

t

Aci

dity

of bi

lge

wat

er

Ven

tilat

ion

Add

ition

al p

rovi

sion

on v

entil

atio

n

Bilg

e pu

mpi

ng

Pers

onne

l pro

tect

ion

No

smok

ing

sign

s

Mac

hine

ry s

pace

bou

ndar

ies

Oth

er b

ound

arie

s

Gas

sam

plin

g po

ints

Wea

ther

tig

htne

ss

Fuel

tan

ks

Type Fi

re e

xtin

guis

hing

sys

tem

TANKAGE MHB 3.2.1 3.7.33.11.23.12.1

Closed/Open

3.19.6a) orb)

VANADIUMORE MHB 3.2.2 3.12.1 Closed

3.19.6a) orb)

WOODSHIPShaving amoisturecontent of 15% or more

MHB 3.2.23.7.4

d) j) p)3.8.23.8.3

3.12.1 Closed/Open

3.19.6a) orb)

WOODSHIPShaving amoisturecontent of lessthan 15 %

MHB 3.2.13.7.4

d) j) p)3.8.23.8.3

3.12.1 Closed/Open

3.19.6a) orb)

WOODPELLETSCONTAININGADDITIVESAND/ORBINDERS

MHB(WF) 3.2.1 IIB T4 IP55

3.7.4e) j)

o) p)

3.8.23.8.3

3.12.1 Closed/Open

3.19.6a) orb)


hips — D

NVG

L-RU

-SH


Equipm


DN

V G

L AS


Cargo Requirements



Bulk CargoShipping

NameCla

ss

Fire

-ext

ingu

ishi

ng s

yste

m

Wat

er s

uppl

ies

App

arat

us g

roup

Tem

pera

ture

cla

ss

Deg

ree

of p

rote

ctio

n

Tem

pera

ture

mea

sure

men

t

Gas

mea

sure

men

t

Aci

dity

of bi

lge

wat

er

Ven

tilat

ion

Add

ition

al p

rovi

sion

on v

entil

atio

n

Bilg

e pu

mpi

ng

Pers

onne

l pro

tect

ion

No

smok

ing

sign

s

Mac

hine

ry s

pace

bou

ndar

ies

Oth

er b

ound

arie

s

Gas

sam

plin

g po

ints

Wea

ther

tig

htne

ss

Fuel

tan

ks

Type Fi

re e

xtin

guis

hing

sys

tem

WOODPELLETS NOTCONTAININGANYADDITIVESAND/ORBINDERS

MHB(OH) 3.2.2 T3 IP55

3.7.4e) j)

o) p)

3.8.23.8.3

3.12.1 Closed/Open

3.19.6a) orb)

WOODPRODUCTS -GENERAL

MHB 3.2.23.7.4

d) j) p)3.8.23.8.3

3.12.1 Closed/Open

3.19.6a) orb)

WOODTORREFIED MHB 3.2.1 T3 IP55

3.7.4d) e) j)

o) p)3.12.1 Closed/

Open

3.19.6a) orb)

ZINC ASHESUN 1435 4.3 3.2.2 IIC T2

3.7.4f) n)

3.8.23.8.6

3.9.23.11.33.12.2


3.19.6a)

1) All electrical equipment, other than that of approved intrinsically safe type, shall be disconnected according to [3.4.4].2) Additional requirements for DIRECT REDUCED IRON (B) and (C) shall be agreed upon with the Society.3) A ship may be exempted from the requirement of a fixed gas fire extinguishing system when the metal sulphide concentrate do not exhibit any

self-heating, flammability or water-reactive flammability hazards in accordance with the MHB tests and classification criteria contained in theIMSBC Code and subject to the flag administration's authorization as provided by SOLAS regulation II-2/10.7.1.4.

Part

6 C

hapt

er 5

Sec

tion

11


DNV GL AS

SECTION 11 RECOVERED OIL RECEPTION AND TRANSPORTATION -OILREC

1 General

1.1 IntroductionThe additional class notation OILREC sets requirements for shipboard systems and arrangements inperforming occasional handling, storage and transportation of recovered oil with flash point below 60°C;hence, providing assistance in limiting environmental consequences from an oil spill at sea.

1.2 ScopeThe scope for additional class notation OILREC establishes an increased level of safety concerning therequirements for the arrangement, safety and operation of a vessel, equipped and arranged for oil recovery,at sea. Safety issues covered by this class notation include: fire and explosion during handling, storage andtransportation of oil recovered from an oil spill at sea, supporting structures for equipment employed duringoil recovery operations, stability and floatability and available power to equipment used during oil recoveryoperations.

1.3 ApplicationThe additional class notation OILREC applies to vessels equipped for the recovery of oil from an oil spill atsea. The oil recovery system covered by this class notation includes the system for transfer and pumping ofrecovered oil; from the oil skimmer's connection flange up to and including the discharge delivery flange.It is assumed that the operation of the vessel during oil recovery operations will be in accordance with theapproved operation manual, see [6.1]. Vessels found to be in compliance with these rules may be given theadditional class notation OILREC.

1.4 Class notations

1.4.1 Vessels built and equipped in compliance with the requirements given in this section may be given theclass notation OILREC.

2 Documentation and testing

2.1 Documentation




S010 - Piping diagram APOil recoverypiping system Z160 - Operation manual See [6.1]. AP

S010 - Piping diagram AP

Heating systemZ030 - Arrangement plan Including steam nozzle arrangements with tank

penetrations. AP

Part

6 C

hapt

er 5

Sec

tion

11


DNV GL AS


Hazardous areas G080 - Hazardous area classificationdrawing AP


Electrical equipment in hazardous areas. Whererelevant, based on an approved 'Hazardous areaclassification drawing' where location of electricequipment in hazardous area is added (except batteryroom, paint stores and gas bottle store).

FI

E090 - Table of Ex-installation AP

Z163 - Maintenance manual Electrical equipment in hazardous areas, see Pt.5 Ch.5Sec.8 [5.1]. FI

E170 - Electrical schematic drawing

Single line diagrams for all intrinsically safe circuits,for each circuit including data for verification ofthe compatibility between the barrier and the fieldcomponents

AP

Electricalinstallations inhazardous areas

E040 - Electrical load balance For oil recovery operations, if applicable. AP

Exhaust system Z030 - Arrangement plan Including spark arrestors. FI


G060 - Structural fire protectiondrawing See however [1.3.4]. AP

Fire extinguishingequipment,mobile

Z030 - Arrangement plan At working deck, see however [1.3.4]. AP

Oil recoveryequipment H050 - Structural drawing Supporting structures and fastening arrangements,

including reaction forces. AP

Operationalmanual Z160 - Operation manual See [6.1]. AP




2.1.4 If fire extinguishing equipment and structural fire protection and/or stability and floatability have beenapproved by a flag administration applying requirements which may be considered equivalent to those of therules, such approval, satisfactorily documented, may be accepted as evidence of compliance with the rulerequirements.

2.2 Testing

2.2.1 Upon completion, the procedure of changing to the vessel’s oil recovery mode shall be demonstratedand such an operation shall be simulated to verify that the vessel will be able to operate as intended anddescribed in the operation manual.The test need not include oil recovery equipment that will be put on board during mobilization.

Part

6 C

hapt

er 5

Sec

tion

11


DNV GL AS

3 Basic requirements

3.1 General

3.1.1 The vessel shall be provided with:

— a suitable working deck for use in oil recovery operations— storage tanks for recovered oil— permanently installed pumping and piping arrangement for transfer and discharge of recovered oil.

3.1.2 The vessel shall have adequate stability and floatability in all relevant operational conditions. Thestability and floatability properties will be considered in each particular case.

3.1.3 The visibility from the manoeuvring station shall be such that the master can easily monitor oilrecovery operations both on deck and in the water.

3.1.4 The oil tanks and the deck area, from where the operation is performed, shall be as far away from theaccommodation as possible.

3.1.5 Deck spills shall be kept away from accommodation and service areas through suitable precautionarymeans, such as a permanent coaming of suitable height extending from side to side or around loading anddischarge stations.

3.1.6 Exhaust outlets from machinery shall be located as high as practicable above the deck and shall befitted with spark arresters.

3.2 Fire protection and extinction

3.2.1 For vessels with cargo tanks forward of the superstructure, the exterior boundaries of superstructuresand deckhouses enclosing the accommodation, including any overhanging decks which support suchaccommodation, shall be constructed of steel and insulated to A-60 fire integrity.The whole portion which face the cargo area (up to bridge windows) and on the outward sides for a distanceof 3 m from the end boundary facing the cargo area shall be protected. The distance of 3 m shall bemeasured horizontally and parallel to the middle line of the ship from the boundary which faces the cargoarea at each deck level.The sides of these superstructures and deckhouses, A-60 insulation shall be carried up to the underside ofthe bridge navigation deck.In lieu of A-60 fire integrity, construction to A-0 fire integrity with a permanently installed water-sprayingsystem in compliance with [2.2.4] may be accepted.

Guidance note:The external boundaries of service spaces used as deck stores need not to be insulated provided there is no direct or indirectaccess to any other spaces and that they are insulated to A-60 standard towards adjacent spaces.


3.2.2 The requirement in [2.2.1] is also applicable to vessels with cargo tanks aft of the superstructure,provided the exterior boundaries of superstructures and deckhouses enclosing accommodation, including anyoverhanging decks which support such accommodation, are situated within 10 m of the nearest hazardousarea seen in profile, see Figure 1.

Part

6 C

hapt

er 5

Sec

tion

11


DNV GL AS

Figure 1 Distance from hazardous area

3.2.3 The requirement in [2.2.1] is also applicable for access doors, windows and portholes fitted in suchboundaries.Windows and portholes fitted with permanently hinged inside deadlights of steel having a thickness not lessthan 3 mm will be accepted in lieu A-0 standard, provided the oil recovery operation (ORO) manual specifiesthat these deadlights are closed during oil recovery operations.Water-/weathertight doors constructed of steel will be accepted in lieu of A-0 standard. If they are fitted withwindows/portholes, deadlights as mentioned above shall be fitted.

3.2.4 The water-spraying system referred to in [2.2.1] shall have a capacity of at least 10 litres/minute/m2.The system shall be fully activated from bridge.

3.2.5 For protection of the working deck area two semi-portable 25 kg dry powder fire extinguishers shall beprovided. They shall be stored in readily available spaces adjacent to the working deck.In addition, the vessel should carry two portable foam applicator units with at least 4 portable 20 litrecontainers with foam concentrate, for use with water supplied by the vessels fire main.


3.3.1 Recovered oil shall not be stored in tanks within the accommodation and/or machinery spaces ofcategory A.

3.3.2 Tanks intended for storage of recovered oil shall be separated from machinery spaces of category Aand accommodation by means of:

— cofferdams or— tanks for other purposes (fuel oil, ballast, etc.) or— dry compartments other than accommodation.

For easy access to all parts, the cofferdams shall have a minimum width of 600 mm.

3.3.3 Where cofferdams are impractical to arrange, tanks adjacent to the engine room may be accepted forstorage of recovered oil provided the tank bulkhead is:

— accessible for inspection— carried continuously through abutting plate panels, except that full penetration welding may be used at

the top of the tank

Part

6 C

hapt

er 5

Sec

tion

11


DNV GL AS

— pressure tested at every complete periodical survey.

3.3.4 All openings to the tanks for recovered oil shall be located on open deck.

3.3.5 Tanks for recovered oil shall have suitable access hatches with minimum clear opening of 600 ×600mm from open deck for cleaning and gas-freeing. Long tanks shall have access in both ends.

3.3.6 Tanks exceeding a breadth of 0.56 B or a length of 0.1 L or 12 m whichever is the greater shall beprovided with wash bulkheads or similar arrangement to reduce liquid sloshing in partially filled tanks.

3.3.7 The height of tanks for recovered oil shall not be less than 1.5 m. Internal obstructions in tanks forrecovered oil shall be provided with adequate openings to allow a full flow of oil. The area of one singleopening shall for that purpose not to be less than twice the sectional area of the discharge pipe.The openings shall be so arranged that the tanks can be effectively drained.

3.3.8 Any coating in tanks for recovered oil shall be of an oil and dispersion resistant type.

3.4 Support of heavy components

3.4.1 The strength of the supporting structures for equipment applied during oil recovery operations can bebased on the assumption that the oil recovery operations will take place in moderate sea conditions.

3.4.2 For cranes intended for use during oil recovery operations, dynamic loads due to the vessel's motionsshall be taken into account. In general the cranes and their supporting structures shall have scantlings basedon at least twice the working load of the crane.

4 Hazardous and non-hazardous areas

4.1 Area classification

4.1.1 In order to facilitate the selection of appropriate electrical apparatus and the design of suitableelectrical installations, hazardous areas are divided into zones 0, 1 and 2.

4.1.2 Hazardous areas zone 0:The interiors of cargo tanks, any pipe work of pressure-relief or other venting systems for cargo tanks, pipesand equipment containing the cargo or developing flammable gases or vapours.

4.1.3 Hazardous areas zone 1:

1) Cargo pump room.2) Enclosed or semi-enclosed spaces in which recovered oil pipe flanges and or valves are located.3) Enclosed or semi-enclosed spaces in which oil contaminated equipment for handling of recovered oil are

located.4) Areas on the open deck or semi-enclosed spaces on the deck within a distance of 3 m from oil skimmer

equipment, hoses and valves used for recovered oil handling, openings and air pipes from tanks forrecovered oil and openings and ventilation outlets from hazardous areas.

Guidance note:A cargo rail that is not open from above and with at least two sides will be considered as a semi-enclosed space. If gas tight doorsare installed in the cargo rail this may be considered when analysing and classifying the space.


Part

6 C

hapt

er 5

Sec

tion

11


DNV GL AS

4.1.4 Hazardous areas zone 2:

1) Cofferdams and spaces adjacent to tanks intended for storage of recovered oil, not containing pipeflanges or valves.

2) Open deck over tanks intended for storage of recovered oil and 3 m forward and aft of this area, to thefull width of the ship, on the open deck up to a height of 2.4 m above the deck.

4.1.5 A space with access doors or other openings into a hazardous area shall be considered to have thesame hazardous zone classification as the adjacent hazardous area. See however [3.2.1].

4.1.6 Non-hazardous areas are areas which are not defined as hazardous in the above.

4.2 Access openings between non-hazardous spaces and hazardous area

4.2.1 A non-hazardous space with access doors to hazardous area may be accepted as non-hazardous on thefollowing conditions:

1) The non-hazardous room shall have overpressure ventilation with 20 air changes per hour in relation tothe hazardous area.

2) The doors shall be gastight.3) The doors shall be self-closing and preferably arranged to swing into the non-hazardous space so that

they are kept closed by the overpressure.4) If a door cannot be made self-closing, a second self-closing door in accordance with 2) and 3) above

shall be arranged. The doors shall be arranged with sufficient spacing to allow for safe passage.5) Self-closing doors may be used for passage, but shall not remain open during oil recovery operations.

Signboards shall be fitted to this effect.6) Emergency escape hatches to open deck that cannot be made self-closing need not be arranged with

an air lock, but during oil recovery operations they can only be used for emergency escape purpose.Signboards shall be fitted to this effect.

Guidance note:A watertight sliding door is not accepted as a self-closing door as the self-closing mode is considered too hazardous. Hence, asecond self-closing door in accordance with 2) and 3) above shall be arranged. The doors shall be arranged with sufficient spacingto allow for safe passage.


4.2.2 Access doors to non-hazardous spaces not normally entered may be accepted without thearrangements in [3.2.1] 3) and 4) provided it is locked closed during oil recovery operations and fitted withsignboards to that effect.

5 Arrangement and equipment

5.1 General

5.1.1 Systems and safety arrangements for handling of recovered oil shall be permanently installed in orderto minimize the time needed to make the vessel operational for oil recovery tasks.

5.1.2 Systems and arrangements shall be such that procedures for and practical execution of filling, venting,discharge, sounding, etc. will be simple to perform.

5.1.3 All electrical and mechanical equipment for use in hazardous areas during oil recovery operations shallbe certified for operation in gas contaminated atmosphere.

Part

6 C

hapt

er 5

Sec

tion

11


DNV GL AS

5.2 Ventilation system

5.2.1 Hazardous and non-hazardous spaces shall be independently ventilated.

5.2.2 Non-hazardous spaces adjacent to hazardous areas shall have mechanical ventilation withoverpressure relative to hazardous areas. The inlet air shall be taken from a non-hazardous area at least 1.5m from the boundaries of any hazardous area. The outlet air shall be led to a non-hazardous area on opendeck.

5.2.3 Hazardous spaces shall have mechanical ventilation of extraction type, with 8 air changes per hour.The inlet air for hazardous enclosed spaces shall be taken from non-hazardous areas. The outlet air shall beled to an open area, which, in the absence of the considered outlet, would be of the same or lesser hazardthan the ventilated space.

5.2.4 Small hazardous spaces located on or above cargo deck level (e.g. deck stores) may be accepted withnatural ventilation only.

5.2.5 Spaces which normally would be regarded as zone 2 according to [3.1.4] 1) above may be acceptedas non-hazardous on the condition that the following special requirements to ventilation in addition to thosegiven in [4.2.2] above are complied with:

— the ventilation capacity shall be at least 20 changes of air per hour— the arrangement of ventilation inlet and outlet openings in the room shall be such that the entire room is

efficiently ventilated, taking special consideration to locations where gas may be released or accumulated.

5.2.6 Fans serving hazardous spaces shall be in compliance with Pt.5 Ch.5 Sec.6 [1.2].

5.2.7 For hazardous spaces or when the space is dependent on ventilation for its area classification, thefollowing requirements apply:

1) Operation of the ventilation shall be monitored.2) In the event of failure of ventilation, the following requirements apply;

— an audible and visual alarm shall be given at a manned location— immediate action shall be taken to restore ventilation.

5.3 Tank venting system

5.3.1 Ventilation outlets from the tanks shall be led to open deck.The outlets shall have a minimum height of 2.4 m above deck and be located at a minimum horizontaldistance of 5 m away from openings to accommodation and other non-hazardous spaces, ventilation intakesfor accommodation and engine room and non-certified safe electrical equipment.

5.3.2 Portable ventilation outlet pipes intended for use during oil spill recovery operations only, may beaccepted.

5.3.3 The venting arrangement shall in general comply with the requirements given for the main class.

5.4 Arrangement of piping systems

5.4.1 There shall be no permanent connection between hazardous piping systems and other piping systemsin the vessel, unless specified in this section.

Part

6 C

hapt

er 5

Sec

tion

11


DNV GL AS

5.4.2 The system for pumping and transfer of recovered oil shall be permanently installed and shall belocated outside machinery spaces, accommodation and other non-hazardous areas.Flexible hoses shall not be used in the system for pumping and transfer of recovered oil.

5.4.3 Oil recovery piping systems shall be of pipe class II defined in Pt.4 Ch.6 irrespective of design pressureand temperature.

5.4.4 The transfer system shall be arranged such that simultaneous filling and discharge will be possible.

5.4.5 For coupling of portable skimming equipment one filling connection with branch pipes to all tanks forrecovered oil shall be arranged on deck close to the skimming equipment.

5.4.6 The filling line shall be provided with means for injection of emulsion-breaking chemicals.For tanks provided with heating the requirements may be dispensed with.

5.4.7 Piping systems for recovered oil shall be segregated from all other piping systems with blind flangevalves.Any part of a piping system not segregated from the oil recovery tanks or piping systems by blind flangevalves are considered to be part of the oil recovery system. Such systems shall also be covered by thecleaning procedures in the operation manual required in [6.1.1].

5.4.8 Correct positions (open or closed) of blind flange valves shall be identified by colour marking orsignboards.

5.4.9 Parts of existing cargo piping may be used for pumping and transfer of recovered oil. However, for suchsystems the design pressure shall be taken as the highest design pressure of any interconnected system.

Guidance note:Temporary manipulation of displacement pump safety valves is not accepted as a means for reducing the design pressure.


5.4.10 The internal diameter of sounding pipes from tanks for recovered oil shall not be less than 50 mm.The sounding pipes shall be located on open deck.

5.4.11 Bilge drainage of the pump room and other hazardous spaces shall be independent of the bilgesystem in the remainder of the vessel.

5.5 Tank heating - general

5.5.1 For closed heating systems, see Pt.5 Ch.5 Sec.4 [4.1] and Pt.5 Ch.6 Sec.7 [1.1.3] to Pt.5 Ch.6 Sec.7[1.1.5].

5.5.2 To prevent the return of oil or vapour to any part of the system located in non-hazardous spaces, thesteam supply line shall be fitted with two shut-off valves in series with a venting valve in between (doubleblock and bleed valves).These valves shall be located outside non-hazardous spaces and shall function under all normal conditions oftrim, list and motion of the ship. The bleed pipe for the automatic double block and bleed system shall be ledto open air and in an area away from where personnel may be located. It is recommended that the outlet islocated or protected to prevent water ingress.The following conditions apply:

a) The operation of the valves shall be automatically executed. Signals for opening and closing shall betaken from the process directly, e.g. pressure sensor on steam delivery side of the double block andbleed.

Part

6 C

hapt

er 5

Sec

tion

11


DNV GL AS

b) An alarm for faulty operation of the valves shall be provided.Manual drain valves or air blowing connections may be accepted into enclosed spaces provided these aredefined as hazardous zone 1.

5.5.3 Threaded connections will not be accepted for attaching the nozzles to the cargo tanks, nor as methodof pipe/valve joining. I.e. flange connections are required.

5.6 Steam nozzle arrangement - Penetrations below top of tank

5.6.1 Flexible hoses shall not be incorporated in the steam system if steam nozzle penetrations are fittedbelow the top of the tank. Non-permanent pipe connections to steam nozzles shall be made of steel piping.Blind covers shall be fitted when steam nozzles are not permanently installed.

5.6.2 Each tank penetration below top of tank shall be fitted with a closable non-return valve or a non-returnvalve and a closable valve in series. Non-return valves integrated in nozzles will be specially considered.

5.6.3 If steam nozzles penetrate below top of tank in tanks otherwise used for low flashpoint liquids(LFL(1)/LFL(2)) the following apply:

— [5.6.2] applies— the steam piping, non-return valves and isolation valves shall be located in cofferdams— the steam piping shall be led from top of cofferdam with spool piece or blind flange valve in open air at

deck level— the arrangement is not to require access in the cofferdam for installation or operation of the system, i.e.

isolation valves need to be remote operated.

5.7 Steam nozzle arrangement - penetrations from top of tank

5.7.1 Steam lances fitted on deck shall be configured with hatch raised 760 mm above deck (a load linerequirement.)

5.7.2 Steam nozzles shall be fixed to the tank during oil recovery operation. This implies that at least onenozzle is required per tank.The penetration shall be gastight and compatible with steam, oil and seawater. An arrangement bolting thesealing to the hatch and the nozzle is required.

5.7.3 The steam supply system shall be permanently installed. However flexible hoses of short and rigid typemay be accepted for connecting nozzles to the steam supply system. Flexible hoses and couplings shall betype approved for the relevant steam temperature.

5.8 Power supply and electrical equipment

5.8.1 Electrical installations in hazardous areas shall comply with the requirements given in Pt.4 Ch.8Sec.11.

5.8.2 Means to disconnect the electrical supply to non-certified electrical equipment in hazardous spacesshall be arranged for. Signboards shall be fitted at the respective switches and such equipment shall be listedin the operation manual referred to in [6.1].Electrical cables led through these spaces and electrical equipment in the machinery spaces are exempted.Systems or components supporting main functions or safety systems will not be accepted disconnectedduring oil recovery operations.

Part

6 C

hapt

er 5

Sec

tion

11


DNV GL AS

5.8.3 Non-certified safe electrical equipment located in hazardous areas on open deck shall be disconnectedduring oil recovery operation.

5.8.4 The arrangement of power supply to non-permanent oil skimming and pumping equipment shall as faras practicable be permanently installed.For circuits with higher rating, the outlet shall be arranged from a connection box, provided with a door whichis interlocked with a switch.The supply from the main switchboard to the connection box or socket-outlet shall be permanently installed,and provided with separate switchgear with short-circuit and over current protection in each insulated phase.

5.8.5 Non-permanent oil skimming and pumping equipment and independent power-packages shall becertified as safe for operation in gas-contaminated atmosphere.

5.8.6 The socket-outlet and connection boxes mentioned in [5.8.4] shall be located at easily accessibleplaces and in such a way that flexible cables are not carried through doors or port lights leading from workingdeck to machinery or accommodation spaces.

5.9 Miscellaneous requirements

5.9.1 A portable hydrocarbon gas-measuring instrument of approved type shall be provided on board.

5.9.2 The deck area where handling of hoses and equipment for recovered oil takes place shall be providedwith adequate lighting.

5.9.3 If sea water cooling is provided for machinery, low sea suction shall be arranged.

5.9.4 Exhaust pipes or any other pipes with surface temperature exceeding 220°C shall not pass throughhazardous areas.

5.9.5 Signboards shall be fixed by screws, rivets or equal.

6 Operational instructions

6.1 General

6.1.1 The vessel shall have an approved operation manual on board. The manual shall give informationregarding the safe use of the vessel during oil recovery operations and shall have references to encloseddrawings.

6.1.2 The operation manual shall give information regarding the following:

1) Arrangement and equipment:

— tank arrangement— transfer system— gas measuring instrument— various equipment.

2) Mobilisation:

— checking of all equipment taken onboard to ascertain that it is certified for use in gas-contaminatedatmospheres

— mounting and fastening of non-permanent equipment— blanking-off of pipes

Part

6 C

hapt

er 5

Sec

tion

11


DNV GL AS

— assembling of air pipes— disconnection of electrical power supply— closing of openings between non-hazardous and hazardous areas— start of additional ventilation equipment— change-over to low suction for cooling water pumps— fitting of signboards regarding the use of open flame, non-certified electrical equipment, etc.

3) Operation:

— guidelines regarding safe distance from an oil spill source. If gases are traced on open deck, thevessel shall be withdrawn immediately

— gas measurements during operation (on open deck and in spaces where gas might accumulate)— actions to be taken if gases are traced in enclosed spaces (cleaning, ventilation, emptying of adjacent

tanks, etc.)— precautions against overfilling of tanks— discharging.

4) Cleaning and gas-freeing of tanks and pipes.

5) Reference drawings.The operations manual shall as a minimum refer to the valid stability documentation.

Guidance note:Relevant additional loading conditions and/or stability instructions to be included in the stability manual.


Part

6 C

hapt

er 5

Sec

tion

12


DNV GL AS

SECTION 12 SINGLE POINT MOORINGS - SPM

1 General

1.1 IntroductionThe additional class notation SPM sets requirements for tankers being moored to single point moorings.

1.2 ScopeThe scope for additional class notation SPM establishes requirements for tankers being moored to singlepoint moorings. Consideration will be given to the special bow loading and mooring arrangements foroffshore loading, and as such will be included in the Appendix to the Classification Certificate. The suitabilityof bow mooring arrangements on shuttle tankers will be taken on a case-by-case basis.

1.3 ApplicationThe additional class notation SPM applies to ships fitted with equipment enabling them to be moored tosingle point moorings. These requirements cover the parts of OCIMF's (Oil Companies' International MarineForum) "Recommendations for Equipment Employed in the Bow Mooring of Conventional Tankers at SinglePoint Moorings" Fourth Edition May 2007 applicable for the vessel, and are supplementary to those for theship type notation Tanker for oil. The class notation SPM may be given in combination with Bow loading.Ships built in compliance with the requirements as specified in table 1 will be assigned the additional notationSPM.

1.4 Class notations1.4.1 Additional class notation related to equipment and design features - SPMShips built in compliance with the requirements as specified in Table 1 will be assigned the additional notationSPM:

Table 1 Class notation

Class Notation Qualifier Purpose Application

SPMMandatory:

Yes


[4]FiS requirements:

Pt.7 Ch.1 Sec.2, Pt.7Ch.1 Sec.3, and Pt.7 Ch.1Sec.4

<None> Single point mooring Mandatory for Tanker for oil when installed 1)

1) Oil carriers having a mooring and loading system in the bow for transfer of crude oil from offshore loading terminals tothe ship, i.e. notation Bow loading, are not necessarily specially equipped to be moored at single point mooring buoys.In such cases, the class notation SPM is not mandatory.

1.4.2 SPM in combination with bow loadingThe class notation SPM may be given in combination with Bow loading.

Part

6 C

hapt

er 5

Sec

tion

12


DNV GL AS

Guidance note 1:Due to the special bow loading and mooring arrangements for offshore loadings, requirements in [4] may be subject to specialconsiderations. The special considerations, with assumptions, shall be clearly stated in the ship’s appendix to classificationcertificate.


Guidance note 2:Tanker customer/operators should check with the SPM terminal operators the suitability of bow mooring arrangements on shuttletankers on a case-by-case basis.


2 Procedural requirements

2.1 Certification requirements2.1.1 GeneralFor a definition of the certificate types see Pt.1 Ch.3 Sec.4 and Pt.1 Ch.3 Sec.5.

2.1.2 Class notation SPMFor products that shall be installed on board, the builder shall request the manufacturers to order certificationas described in Table 2.

Table 2 Certification requirements - SPM

Object Certificatetype Issued by Certification standard* Additional description

PC Society SWL**Chain stopper

MC Society

PC Society SWL**Bow fairlead

MC Manufacturer

PC Manufacturer SWL**Winch or capstan

MC Manufacturer

PC Manufacturer SWL**Pedestal roller (if fitted)

MC Manufacturer

* Unless otherwise specified the certification standard is the rules.** The maximum safe working load shall be specified and objects shall be marked accordingly.

2.2 Documentation requirements2.2.1 Class notation SPMDocumentation shall be submitted as required by Table 3.

Part

6 C

hapt

er 5

Sec

tion

12


DNV GL AS

Table 3 Documentation requirements - SPM


Single point mooringarrangement Z030 – Arrangement plan

Fairleads, bow chainstoppers, winches, capstans,pedestal rollers and winchstorage drums

FI

Single point mooringfairleads C030 – Detailed drawing AP

Single point mooringequipment supportingstructures

H050 – Structural drawing AP




3 Materials

3.1 General

3.1.1 The materials used in bow fairleads shall comply with the requirements specified in Pt.2 Ch.2.

3.1.2 The materials used for bow chain stopper shall comply with the requirements specified in Pt.3 Ch.11Sec.1 [6.2].

4 Arrangement and general design

4.1 Bow chain stoppers

4.1.1 The arrangement and capacity of bow chain stoppers shall be in accordance with Table 4.Guidance note:Some terminals may have different requirement than those given in Table 4 due to their location and operational practices, i.e.some terminals may require ships of less than 150 000 tonnes DWT to moor using two bow chain stoppers and some terminalsmay elect to moor ships of more than 150 000 tonnes DWT on a single bow chain stopper.


4.1.2 A standard 76 mm stud-link chain shall be secured when the chain engaging pawl or bar is in closedposition. When in open position, the chain and associated fittings shall be allowed to pass freely.

4.1.3 The structural strength of the stopper, bow fairlead and supporting structure shall be based on a safetyfactor of 2.0 against the yield criterion when applying a load equal to SWL.

4.1.4 Stoppers shall be located between 2.7 and 3.7 m inboard from the bow fairlead.

4.1.5 When positioning, due consideration shall be given to the correct alignment of stoppers relative to thedirect lead between bow fairlead and pedestal roller or the drum end of the winch or capstan.

Part

6 C

hapt

er 5

Sec

tion

12


DNV GL AS

4.1.6 Stoppers shall be fitted as close as possible to the deck structure, however, taking due consideration topossible obstacles in order to obtain a free lead through the fairleads.

4.1.7 Upon installation bow stoppers shall be load tested to the equivalent SWL and a test certificate shall beissued. The test certificate shall be available for inspection on board the ship.

Guidance note:The installation test required by [4.1.7] may be omitted if the actual bow stopper has been type approved, and proof load testingto the equivalent SWL was carried out for type approval. Applicable strength of the supporting structure should be documented byadequate analyses. the Society will issue a declaration confirming that evaluation of the support strength has been carried out withacceptable results. A document issued by the Society should in such cases be available onboard.


Table 4 Arrangement and capacity for single point mooring

Ship size(tonnes DW)

Chafe chainsize (mm) Grade Number of

bow fairleads

Numberof bow

stoppersSWL (tonnes) Minimum breaking

load (tonnes)

100 000 or less 76 K3 1 1 200 438

Over 100 000 but notgreater than 150 000 76 R3 1 1 250 498

Over 150 000 76 R4 2 2 350 612

Note: tonnes DW refers to the deadweight at maximum summer draught

4.2 Bow fairleads

4.2.1 Bow fairleads shall measure at least 600 × 450 mm.

4.2.2 For ships fitted with two fairleads: When practicable the fairleads shall be spaced 2.0 m apart, fromcentre to centre. In any event, the fairleads shall not be spaced more than 3.0 m apart.

4.2.3 For ships fitted with one fairlead: The fairlead shall be positioned on the centre line.

4.2.4 Leads shall be oval or round in shape and adequately faired when fitted in order to prevent chafechains from fouling on the lower lip when heaving inboard. Square leads are not suitable.

Guidance note:Adequately faired will be achieved if 3 links of chain have contact with the fairlead simultaneously at the design conditions.The design force should be established at an angle of 90° to the sides and 30° up or downwards. The same allowable design stressas for the stoppers applies.


4.3 Position of pedestal rollers

4.3.1 Winches or capstans shall be positioned to enable a direct pull to be achieved on the continuation ofthe direct lead line between the bow fairleads and bow stoppers. Alternatively, if found required, a pedestalroller shall be positioned between the stopper and the winch or the capstan, in order to achieve direct pull.

Guidance note:The use of more than one pedestal roller or a too acute change of direction of the mooring line is not recommended.


Part

6 C

hapt

er 5

Sec

tion

12


DNV GL AS

4.3.2 The distance between the bow stoppers and pedestal roller shall be considered so that an unrestrictedline pull is achieved from the bow fairlead and through the bow stopper.

4.4 Winches or capstans

4.4.1 Winches or capstans shall be capable of lifting at least 15 tonnes.

4.5 Winch storage drum

4.5.1 If a winch storage drum is used to stow the pick-up rope, it shall be of sufficient size to accommodate150 m rope with 80 mm in diameter.

Part

6 C

hapt

er 5

Sec

tion

13


DNV GL AS

SECTION 13 ENHANCED SYSTEM VERIFICATION - ESV

1 General

1.1 IntroductionThe additional class notation ESV is a design standard that provides the framework for earlier, deeper, andbroader testing and verification of selected systems by using various verification methods.

1.2 ScopeThe scope for additional class notation ESV specifies the requirements for obtaining the class notation ESV.These requirements apply to marine and offshore systems and cover test and verification methods thatmay be utilized to assist in verification of the functionality and performance of selected systems in order toprovide objective evidence of acceptable functionality and quality according to stated requirements. Theseverification methods are aligned with certification activities, for example; type approval, manufacturingsurvey, on board testing, and sea trials, in order to provide additional evidence of expected and requiredfunctionality.

1.3 ApplicationThe additional class notation ESV applies to vessels where specified on board systems have undergoneenhanced system verification (ESV). A class notation as specified in these rules may be assigned when one ormore methods have been used for enhanced system verification. Application of such methods aims to provideadditional objective evidence of functionality and quality during normal, abnormal and degraded systemstatus. Application of ESV verification provides an additional broader, deeper and earlier verification of theapplicable requirements, when compared to main class test activities.In addition to the generic requirements given in these rules, functional requirements and any qualityrequirements for the stated system(s) shall be specified. In this context all main and additional classrequirements applicable for the system(s) in question, applies.Upon special agreement other rules and requirements may be applicable when relevant. Where rules andrequirements have conflicting requirements, such conflicts should be clarified, concluded, and documented ineach case.

1.4 Class notations

1.4.1 Vessels built and tested in compliance with the requirements of these rules may be assigned classnotation ESV.In addition at least one qualifier describing the target control and monitoring (TCM) system shall be selectedfrom Table 1. For each TCM qualifier, one qualifier describing the verification method (VM) shall be selectedfrom Table 2.Resulting syntax: ESV(TCM1[VM1], ... TCMn[VMn])

Guidance note:Example of the class notation for more than one TCM is ESV(DP[HIL-IS], PMS[HIL-DS]). The vessel having undergoneenhanced verification of the dynamic positioning control system by use of the verification method Hardware-in-the-loop withindependent test package and enhanced verification of the main electric power control and monitoring system by use of theverification method Hardware-in-the-loop with independent test program and test package report, and test simulator packageprovided by the supplier.


Part

6 C

hapt

er 5

Sec

tion

13


DNV GL AS

1.4.2 The scope of target control and monitoring systems TCM defined in the table below applies for the ESVclass notation unless otherwise agreed by customer and the Society.

Table 1 Control and monitoring systems having undergone enhanced verification

Qualifierfor TCM TCM system Typical sub-systems and components Rule reference

DP

Dynamicpositioningautomatic controlsystem

DP control systemPart of the DP control system as defined by the rules istypical not included in the target system, e.g. referencesystem and sensors

Ch.3 Sec.2Ch.3 Sec.1

TAMThruster assistedmooring controlSystem

Thruster assisted control systemPart of the thruster assisted control system as defined bythe rules is typical not included in the target system, e.g.reference system and sensors

DNVGL-OS-E301

PMSMain electricpower control andmonitoring system

— remote control and monitoring of power generation— remote control and monitoring of power distribution— load dependent start/stop— load sharing— blackout prevention and load reduction— blackout recovery.

Pt.4 Ch.8

SPT

Steering, propulsionand thruster controland monitoringsystem

— steering control and monitoring system— propulsion control and monitoring system— thruster control and monitoring system.

Pt.4 Ch.10Pt.4 Ch.5

ICSIntegrated controland monitoringsystem

— control and monitoring of vessel main function— control and monitoring of valves and pumps— main alarm system.

Pt.4 Ch.9

DRILLDrilling andwell control andmonitoring system

— zone management/anti-collision system— rotation system— hoisting system— hydraulic power unit— equipment handling

— vertical pipe handler— horizontal pipe handler— cranes and winches

— heave compensation and tensioning system

— marine riser tensioners— active compensation systems— passive compensation systems

— drilling fluid circulation and cementing

— mud circulation system— cementing system.

DNVGL-OS-E101

Part

6 C

hapt

er 5

Sec

tion

13


DNV GL AS

Qualifierfor TCM TCM system Typical sub-systems and components Rule reference

BOPBlowoutprevention controlarrangement

— operator panels— choke and kill— diverter— emergency disconnect system— acoustic control system— hydraulic power unit— stack control.

DNVGL-OS-E101

CRANE Crane control andmonitoring system

— control and monitoring— safety functions.

Pt.5 Ch.10 Sec.2

DNVGL-ST-0377

DNVGL-ST-0378

Guidance note:For each system in Table 1 a reference to the relevant rules or offshore standards (OS) are listed. The rules or standards identifiedwill provide more specific requirements of the systems. Pt.4 Ch.9 or DNVGL-OS-D202 provides generic common requirements to,and is applicable for, all systems listed above.


1.4.3 The verification method signifying the method of verification is defined in Table 2.

Table 2 Verification method signifying the method of verification

Qualifier forverification

method (VM)Description

HIL-IS HIL test package provided by independent HIL supplier

HIL-DSHIL test program package and HIL test package report provided by independent HIL supplier.HIL test simulator package provided by the organization delivering the HIL target system.

1.5 Definitions and abbreviations

1.5.1 General definitions can be found in the rules. Specific definitions can be found for control systems inPt.4 Ch.9 and in the target system's specific rule reference listed in Table 1.

Table 3 Definitions and abbreviation


abnormal mode unusual or exceptional

closed loop a control system with an active feedback loop

Part

6 C

hapt

er 5

Sec

tion

13


DNV GL AS


control computersystem

a system consisting of at least one computer or processor with CPU processing and I/Ocapacity, and one or several operator stations. The control computer system also includes thenetwork, interface, and cabling for signal communication, and the HW/SW platform with thecontrollers containing both basic software and application specific software

Guidance note 1:A control computer system also includes control and management networks and interface used forintegration with other control systems and decentralized command and/monitoring terminals.


Guidance note 2:An operator stations constitute the command and monitoring functionality of the control system,consisting usually of human-machine interfaces (HMI’s), visual display unit’s (VDU’s), alarm panels,joysticks, switches, printers and alike.


degraded mode/condition reduced in quality or value

ESV enhanced system verification

failure [IEEE610.12-1990] the inability of a system or component to perform its required functionswithin specified performance requirements

failure mode[IEEE 610.12-1990] the physical or functional manifestation of a failure. For example, asystem in failure mode may be characterized by slow operation, incorrect outputs, or completetermination of execution

failure testing

to test the functions of a target system by inducing relevant failures in the system in order toverify compliance with the stated requirements

Guidance note:This may be done by inducing relevant failures in the system or components connected to it, eithersimulated or real, and observing and reporting the effects of these failures on the behaviour of thetarget system .


function [IEEE 610.12-1990] a defined objective or characteristic action of a system or component

functional requirements a requirement that specifies a function that a system or system component shall be able toperform [IEEE 610.12:1990]

functional testingTesting functions of a system to verify compliance with the stated functional specification andrequirements. The main objective is to reveal failures occurring in design, implementation,integration, and configuration

HIL testing by “Hardware-In-the-Loop” simulation

HIL simulator

a real-time simulator constructed by hardware and software, which is configured for thecontrol system under consideration and interfaced to the target system or component throughappropriate I/O. During testing with an HIL simulator the target system or component will notexperience significant difference from being connected to the real system

HW hardware (computer hardware)

SW software (computer hardware)

repeatability a test case is repeatable if the outcome of the specified test case for several test runs isunchanged

Part

6 C

hapt

er 5

Sec

tion

13


DNV GL AS


target system an identified set of equipment with hardware and software that is subject to analysis, testingand verification

testability

the extent to which a test objective and feasible test can be designed to determine whether arequirement is metTestability of a function in a system requires controllability and observability of that function:

Controllability: A function in a system is controllable if for each possible behaviour of thefunction, i.e. each possible output data value, condition, or state, there exists a set of actionsthat can be applied to the inputs of the system such that the corresponding behaviour isachieved.

Observability: A function in a system is observable if any arbitrary behaviour of the functioncan be determined from the outputs of the system.

replica hardware the replica hardware is an identical copy of the target system hardware installed on board thevessel

test activity

an activity for testing a specified target system according to a defined test scope and testprogram in order to partly or fully meet the overall objective of ESV. Test activities may rangefrom testing of isolated modules or subsystems in laboratory conditions, testing of integratedmodules, integration testing of complex systems consisting of equipment from many makers,to full-scale testing of an integrated control system

Guidance note:A test activity may be divided into one or several test sessions due to practical considerations ofthe availability of the target system. Typically, each test activity has a documented Test Program tobe carried out in one or several test sessions.


test package

a test package consists of the following elements:

— one or several tool(s) for the specific testing or analysis to be carried out— all documentation required for planning and approval of the specified testing to be carried

out— all documentation required for execution and reporting— all analysis and test results including findings and conclusions.

Guidance note:An HIL simulator may be the testing tool referred above.


validation [ISO 9001] confirmation, through the provision of objective evidence, that the requirements fora specific intended use or application have been fulfilled

verification [ISO 9001] confirmation, through the provision of objective evidence, that specifiedrequirements have been fulfilled

1.6 Documentation requirements1.6.1 General documentation related to enhanced system verification (ESV)Documentation requirements are given in the specific sections describing the different ESV methods.In addition, systems subject to enhanced system verification shall be documented as for main class, relevantclass notations and standards.

Part

6 C

hapt

er 5

Sec

tion

13


DNV GL AS

2 Hardware-in-the-loop testing

2.1 Objectives

2.1.1 The objective of a hardware-in-the-loop (HIL) test is to test the specified target system by means ofa hardware-in-the-loop simulator in order to provide objective evidence of acceptable functionality (duringnormal, abnormal and degraded condition) according to stated or implied requirements.

2.2 Class notations

2.2.1 Ships which have undergone HIL testing in compliance with requirements in this section may beassigned the class notations as described in [1.4].

2.3 HIL test requirements

2.3.1 Functional requirements for the target system shall be referred and form the basis for the tests in theHIL test package.

2.3.2 In order to obtain an ESV notation based on HIL testing, the tests shall comprise a minimum set ofspecified hardware components, software programs, and system functions. Typically, this shall include, butnot be limited to the sub-systems as specified in Table 1.

Guidance note:Other system that those listed in Table 1 may be granted HIL test certificate in compliance with DNVGL-ST-0373 Hardware in theloop testing (HIL)


2.3.3 The HIL test package consists of the following elements:

— HIL test program package including all documents required for planning and executing the specified teststo be carried out as specified in Table 5.

— HIL test simulator package including the HIL simulator and supporting documentation as specified in Table6.

— HIL test package report including all analysis and test results including findings and conclusion asspecified in Table 7.

See also [5] HIL test package.

2.4 Requirements for the maker of the HIL test package

2.4.1 For VM qualifier HIL-IS the company that makes the complete HIL test package shall be independentfrom the company delivering the target system.In general the following issues should be addressed, in order to verify the organisational independency of theHIL test package maker:

— the company should have testing and verification as one of its main activities— involvement in the design and development process, in terms of delivering design propositions and

solutions for the target system to be HIL tested— independency with respect to personnel and technology— ownership and other business relationships.

Part

6 C

hapt

er 5

Sec

tion

13


DNV GL AS

2.4.2 For VM qualifier HIL-DS the company that makes the HIL test program package and the HIL testpackage report shall be independent from the company delivering the target system. The company thatmakes the HIL test simulator package may be dependent upon the company delivering the target system.

Guidance note:In general the following issues should be addressed, in order to verify the organisational independency of the maker of the HIL testprogram package and HIL test package report.

— the company should have testing and verification as one of its main activities

— involvement in the design and development process, in terms of delivering design propositions and solutions for the targetsystem to be HIL tested

— independency with respect to personnel and technology

— ownership and other business relationships.


2.4.3 The HIL test simulator technology shall be based on other (diverse) technology than the target systemtechnology. This means that:

— the HIL simulator shall be implemented by means of a separate hardware unit— the HIL simulator application software shall be sufficiently diverse from the target system application

software.

2.4.4 For VM qualifier HIL-IS the HIL simulator application software shall be sufficiently diverse from thetarget system testing tools used in design and development of the target system.

2.4.5 The maker(s) of HIL test package shall have a documented quality management system.Guidance note:This may be a recognized system such as e.g. ISO 9001 or equivalent.


2.4.6 The quality management system to the maker(s) of the HIL test package, shall have documentedprocedures for:

— operation as an independent maker of HIL test packages where independency is required— verification and validation— preparation of HIL test packages including a statement of the intended use of the test packages— preparation of the HIL test interface to the target system— software development and software quality assurance— maintaining competence in the target system domain— identification of hazards and risks related to HIL testing— preparation of instructions for risk control measures to other involved parties— execution of test activities including connection and disconnection of the HIL simulator— preparation of reports, results evaluation, and retesting— archiving of HIL test packages including reports with version control of tests carried out for specific

vessels and systems during the system life cycle— competence requirements and training for personnel involved in all phases of HIL testing— requirements verification— design and version control.

2.4.7 Upon request the maker(s) of the HIL test package shall demonstrate and document that theprocedures in the quality management system are applied in its HIL test package deliveries.

2.4.8 The Society shall be informed about organisational and technical dependencies. The Society mayrequest documentation to verify independency.

Part

6 C

hapt

er 5

Sec

tion

13


DNV GL AS

2.5 HIL type approval

2.5.1 The target system can be HIL type approved.

2.5.2 For an HIL type approval to be valid, the delivered hardware and software shall be covered by the HILtype approval certificate.

Guidance note:This means that the HIL type approval certificate should specify the hardware components and the software versions. Note that theHIL type approval certificate does not imply that the hardware in itself is type approved and tested according to DNVGL-CG-0339or other standards stating environmental requirements. However, relevant environmental requirements should always apply.


3 Documentation


3.1.1 Each target control and monitoring system subject to HIL testing, documentation shall be submitted asrequired by Table 4:

Table 4 Documentation requirement


I240 - HIL test program package See Table 5 AP

I241 - HIL test simulator package See Table 6 APTarget control andmonitoring system

I250 - HIL test package report See Table 7 AP

AP = For approval

3.1.2 For qualifier HIL-DS the following documentation shall, in addition, be submitted to the maker of theHIL test program package for information:

— I241 – HIL test simulator package.

3.1.3 For general requirements concerning documentation, see Pt.1 Ch.3 Sec.3.

Table 5 Content of I240 - HIL test program package

Applicable system Description of documentation

Vessel Vessel system design intention and philosophy (e.g. redundant thrusters, power generation, andcontrol systems).

Control system Operational vessel system intention and philosophy (e.g. related to operational modes, redundancy,operational boundaries, and limitations).

Part

6 C

hapt

er 5

Sec

tion

13


DNV GL AS


Control system

Upon request, a failure mode description describing relevant failures in sub-systems and theirsinterfaces and how it will affect the target system(s).

The following aspects shall as a minimum be covered:

— identification of relevant failures and their potential cause(s)— description of the system expected response to each of the above failures— comments to the consequence of each of these failure— reference to the relevant HIL test case.

Guidance note:In addition to the target system it selves, this description should also identify and describe relevantfailures in sub-systems and other relevant systems. As an example, reference system and sensors ofthe DP Control System, power systems and thruster systems will typical be part of the failure modedescription for DP-HIL.


Control system

Test Plan.Test project overview.

Test Package objective and intended use.

Overview of target system hardware, software and functions to be tested.

Specification or reference to functional requirements (e.g. reference to classification rules,configuration and technical specifications for the vessel, end user requirements, etc.).

Test activity schedule.

Risk assessment of planned testing including emergency procedures for handling critical situationsduring testing.

Responsibilities, resources and approvals:

— list of involved companies, name of contact person/title, contact information— identification of test package and test activity— references to other test plans and reports.

Procedures for the testing, verification, validation and for handling of findings.

If use of replica hardware; procedures for handling of software changes and transfer of softwarefrom target system hardware to replica hardware and return.

Control system

Test programs (one for each test activity) including listing of functions and failure modes to betested and corresponding test cases.Based upon the functional description, each test case shall be described specifying:

— test purpose— test setup— test method— expected results and acceptance criteria— space for notes and conclusions— signature from the tester— space for additional signature(s).

Table 6 Content of I241 - HIL test simulator package


Vessel Vessel system design intention and philosophy (e.g. redundant thrusters, power generation, andcontrol systems).

Part

6 C

hapt

er 5

Sec

tion

13


DNV GL AS


Control system Operational vessel system intention and philosophy (e.g. related to operational modes, redundancy,operational boundaries, and limitations).

HIL simulator

HIL simulator configuration report (one for each HIL simulator to be used) including:

— identification of HIL simulator hardware and software versions— specification of the HIL simulator functionality— HIL simulator configuration— HIL simulator verification results.

HIL simulator

HIL simulator operator manual (one for each HIL simulator to be used) including:

— user interface functionality— operation modes— operation instruction— presentation of trends and test log

HIL simulator

Procedures for HIL simulator interfacing, test start-up, and test closure (one for each test activity)Description of test system configuration and test simulation methods.

Specification of test interface of HIL simulator.

Identification of HIL simulator hardware components and software versions.

Identification of target system hardware components and software versions.

Table 7 Content of I250 - HIL test package report


Control system

Test report (one for each test activity) shall include recorded results of each test case withsignatures by tester and attending Society surveyor.The finding shall be described in a template containing the following information elements:

— reference to the approved test package/plan and specific item (system, ship, version, date, testactivity)

— description of the finding, including an explanation of why it is a finding— recommended action or follow up— responsible party for following up corrective action— deadline for completion of the action.

Control system

Test summary report including:

— a summary of test activities, test results, and findings— validation results of test package with respect to intended use of the test package.

Control system

HIL test notation document.When testing is completed and all findings are concluded an HIL test notation document shall beprepared.

This shall contain a specification of:

— the target system identification (hardware and software components, parts, serial numbers andsoftware versions

— reference to the functional requirements applied.

Part

6 C

hapt

er 5

Sec

tion

13


DNV GL AS

4 Tests

4.1 General

4.1.1 HIL testing shall be carried out at the manufacturer’s works. The HIL testing shall assure that thetarget system has been configured and completed according to relevant functional specifications andrequirements.

Guidance note:HIL testing at the manufacturer’s works is the main site where witnessing of the tests are assumed. However, upon agreement,other sites may be accepted. This implies that e.g. tests planned at the manufacturers works could upon agreement be carried outat the dock, on board or at a dedicated test laboratory.


4.1.2 All tests shall be according to test programs approved by the Society upfront the HIL test.

4.1.3 Before the HIL test session commences, an opening meeting shall be arranged between theresponsible parties. The following items should be clarified:

— responsibilities related to the HIL test session— emergency procedures and responsibilities for potential hazardous situations during the HIL test session— the test setup and objectives of the HIL tests to be carried out— the schedule and sequence for carrying out the HIL testing.

4.1.4 The tests shall be performed according to the approved test programs in the HIL test package. The testresults for each test shall be recorded. The conclusion of each single test shall be documented in the HIL testreport.

4.1.5 Testing, as described in [4.1.4], shall be witnessed by a surveyor. Upon special agreement, parts of thetesting may be carried out without present or available surveyor. Each single test outcome shall be presentedto the surveyor, if requested. The surveyor may request any test to be repeated. Due to this, the HIL testsimulator shall not be disconnected before the surveyor has confirmed that no more testing will be requestedto be witnessed in the current test session.

Guidance note 1:To provide support, to ensure that the system under test is performing properly and to clarify issues, it is recommended that arepresentative of the manufacturer is present during testing.


Guidance note 2:To gain knowledge of the system under test and to clarify issues, it is recommended that a representative of the end user ispresent during testing.


4.1.6 After an HIL test activity is completed, the complete set of results shall be documented in the HIL testreport package. Each test and each conclusion shall be documented and signed. In the case where sometests have become not applicable or are not possible to carry out or it has been decided to postpone the teststo a later HIL test activity, then such conclusions shall also be documented.

4.1.7 After the HIL test activity, a closing meeting shall be arranged between the responsible parties. Thepurpose of the meeting is to agree upon the findings from the testing. For each finding a responsible partyfor follow up within a set deadline shall be agreed, documented, and signed as applicable.

Part

6 C

hapt

er 5

Sec

tion

13


DNV GL AS

4.1.8 The finding shall as a minimum be categorised into class-related and non-class related. Thecategorization shall be approved by the Society.

Guidance note:Class-related findings may be given as comments and/or conditions as found necessary.Non-class-related findings may be required to be finally concluded before the ESV notation is issued. These conclusions may e.g.be void, or no action. However, in case the conclusions imply changes to the system, these changes should be approved.


4.1.9 The conclusions from the closing meeting shall be documented in an HIL test summary report asdescribed in Table 7. The HIL test summary report shall be distributed to all parties involved in the HIL testactivity and the agreed actions shall be followed up.

4.1.10 After completion of an HIL test activity, the HIL test report shall be prepared by the maker of the HILtest package report. The HIL test report shall be submitted to the Society.

4.1.11 The personnel responsible for performing the HIL testing shall be qualified according to the qualityrequirements in [2.4.6]. Documentation of completed training shall be available on the Society’s request.

Guidance note:The HIL testing may be carried out by personnel from e.g. the maker of the HIL test package, the system manufacturer, the yard,the vessel customer, or a marine consultant.


4.1.12 The HIL test shall as a minimum consist of two HIL test activities:

— test at manufacturing— test upon completion.

Guidance note:The HIL test activities may, upon agreement, consist of more than two activities.


4.1.13 The HIL testing may be limited in test scope or omitted when the target system is HIL TypeApproved.

Guidance note 1:The requirement to the scope of the HIL testing may be based on the total system functionality and the degree of configurationand customisation for the specific target system delivery.


Guidance note 2:The certification requirements according to main class and other class notations may not be omitted based on HIL Type Approval.


4.2 Test at manufacture’s works

4.2.1 HIL testing at the manufacturer’s works shall be carried out based on an approved HIL test package.

4.2.2 The HIL testing at the manufacturer’s works shall verify closed loop functionality and response of thetarget system when connected to the HIL simulator. Normal, degraded and abnormal operation shall besimulated.

Part

6 C

hapt

er 5

Sec

tion

13


DNV GL AS

4.2.3 The HIL testing at the manufacture works shall be done before delivery from manufacture.Guidance note:The HIL testing at the manufacturer’s works may, upon agreement, be combined with other certification activities.


4.2.4 The HIL testing at the manufacture’s works may be carried out on replica hardware.

4.3 Test upon completion

4.3.1 HIL testing upon completion shall be carried out based on an approved HIL test package.

4.3.2 The HIL testing upon completion shall include retest of findings from the test at the manufacture’sworks. In addition, a verification of what was done after the test, including modification, adjustments andparameterization.

4.3.3 The HIL testing upon completion shall be done after commissioning and before the ESV notation isassigned.

Guidance note:The HIL testing upon completion may, upon agreement, be combined with other activities.


4.3.4 The HIL testing upon completion can be carried out on board or on replica hardware.

4.4 Onboard test

4.4.1 Testing on board the vessel shall be carried out based on an approved test package in order to assurethat the target system has been configured, and installed according to relevant functional specifications andrequirements for the vessel.

Guidance note:The on board test may be omitted upon agreement.


4.4.2 The on board testing shall verify normal closed loop functionality and response of the total systemupon normal, degraded and abnormal operation.

4.4.3 The target system and other possible influenced systems shall be reinstated and set back to normaloperational mode after completion of the testing. Successfully reinstatement of the systems shall be verified.

4.4.4 For the notations ESV(DP[HIL-IS]) and ESV(DP[HIL-DS]), onboard test shall be carried out.

Part

6 C

hapt

er 5

Sec

tion

13


DNV GL AS

5 HIL test package

5.1 General

5.1.1 A HIL test package is a test package including HIL simulator(s) as testing tools and all documentationrequired for description and reporting of the HIL testing.

Guidance note:The required documentation for the HIL test package can be found in Table 5, Table 6 and Table 7.


5.1.2 The HIL test package shall refer to the specific functional requirements related to the target systemwhich has formed the basis for the HIL test scope. Reference to these functional requirements shall be statedin the HIL test notation document.

5.1.3 The applicable parts of the HIL test package documentation shall be prepared for serving as workingdocuments during the HIL tests.

5.1.4 The intended use of the HIL test package shall also be stated. The intended use statement shall givedirections for the HIL test scope.

Guidance note:The intended use of the HIL test package may be to verify specific functional requirements for a specified type of future vesseloperation. The intended use may also include statements of methods for selection of the verification and test scope.


5.1.5 The HIL test package shall describe the target system and possible interfaced systems as necessary.

5.1.6 The package shall contain test cases related to the normal, degraded and abnormal operation of thetarget and simulated systems. Normally single and common failure modes and common components shouldbe extensively analysed and tested. Multiple failures should be tested if found relevant.

Guidance note 1:Operation in all normal modes and transfer between operational modes and the corresponding functional requirements, should bethe basis for establishing the HIL test scope. In addition, failure testing is also to be included in the test scope. General types offailures to be simulated could be, but not limited to:

— sensors or input devices failure modes (dropout, noise, calibration errors, drift, bias, signal freeze, wild point,…)

— failure mode of actuators, drives, power system components or other electro-mechanical components

— feedback from sensors on actuator failure modes

— failure modes in computer networks

— failure modes related to overload of networks

— failures affecting weighting and voting mechanisms

— failures affecting protective safety functions

— failures affecting alarms, monitoring, and analysis functions

— failures causing and/or otherwise affecting switch-over in redundant systems

— common mode failures affecting several components and/or signals

— emergency handling (special emergency functions required during emergency handling could be tested)

— reconstruction of relevant reported failures/incidents related to the system and/or operation.


Part

6 C

hapt

er 5

Sec

tion

13


DNV GL AS

Guidance note 2:When establishing the HIL test scope, verification planned to be carried out by other methods (e.g. FMEA), should be considered.The purpose should be to give input to the HIL test scope and to align the execution of the tests in an efficient manner.


5.1.7 Testing shall be performed for all relevant operational modes of the target system. The need for testingin different operational modes of relevant equipment and systems connected to the target systems shall alsobe evaluated.

5.1.8 The Society shall approve the relevant parts of the HIL test package upfront each HIL test activity. Inaddition to these rules, the approval will also be based on the specified functional requirements for the targetsystem.

5.2 Risk assessment

5.2.1 A risk assessment for each test activity shall be a part of the HIL test package.Guidance note:The intention is to ensure that the responsible parties have identified possible hazards and risks related to HIL testing and thatsufficient overall actions for emergency handling have been planned and agreed. Items which typically should be considered ifappropriate:

— specification of equipment to be tested

— specification of personnel required for the HIL testing

— specification of required environmental conditions during the HIL test

— hazard identification for the equipment during the HIL test operation

— hazard identification (personnel safety) for the personnel during HIL testing

— hazard identification for the vessel and the vessel environment

— availability of an emergency procedure for handling possible hazardous situation.


5.3 Verification and validation

5.3.1 The HIL test package shall contain procedures for verification and validation of the configured HILsimulator. The scope of verification and validation shall be based on the specific intended use of the HILtesting.

5.3.2 Functional suitability and accuracy of the simulator shall be documented according to procedures[5.3.1] in order to ensure sufficiently accurate and valid test results. This shall as a minimum include:

— verification tests to document that the simulator functions are correct and sufficiently accurate— validation tests to document that the functional suitability of the simulator is according to the intended

use of the HIL testing.

Verification and validation activities and/or assessments shall be documented as required in [3].

Part

6 C

hapt

er 5

Sec

tion

13


DNV GL AS

Guidance note:The key element for planning the validation activities is to analyse the intended use statement and identify possible critical factors/elements in the simulator/test package which may leave the test results not representative. A set of relevant validation activitiesfor the HIL simulator and HIL test package should be identified and measures for limiting possible inaccuracies and uncertaintiesshould be described.In case the objective of the HIL testing is to test the qualitative behaviour of functions and failure handling, it should be validatedthat the accuracy of the simulator is sufficient to obtain testability of the target functions.If, on the other hand, the objective of the HIL testing is to test both the qualitative and quantitative behaviour of functions inthe target system, it should be validated that the performance of the simulator is sufficiently accurate and realistic to assess thetarget system performance. It is recognized that some validation tests can only be carried out by full-scale trials. In order to collectinformation supporting the correctness of the simulator, such validation tests are advised.


Part

6 C

hapt

er 5

Sec

tion

14


DNV GL AS

SECTION 14 GAS BUNKER VESSELS - GAS BUNKER

1 General

1.1 Introduction1.1.1 ObjectiveThe objective of this section is to outline requirements for carriers and barges intended for the transport ofliquefied gas with dedicated gas fuel transfer equipment for supply of bunker for gas fuelled ships on regularbasis.

1.1.2 ScopeThis section covers safety of the gas bunker vessel, its gas bunker related equipment and installations on-board. It outlines requirements for design, construction and required operational procedures with regard toconnection and disconnection of transfer arrangements, bunker transfer and vapour return.

1.1.3 ApplicationThis section applies to the vessels built in compliance with Pt.5 Ch.7.This section provides requirements for features that are relevant for a bunkering vessel due to its particularoperations and which are not covered by Pt.5 Ch.7. Arrangement and equipment of vessels operating inrestricted areas or vessels for inland waterways not in compliance with Pt.5 Ch.7 and Pt.5 Ch.11 will beassessed on a case to case basis.

1.1.4 Class notationA ship complying with relevant parts of this section may be given the additional class notation Gas bunker,with qualifiers as given in [1.1.5] below may be added to the notation.

1.1.5 Special features

1.1.5.1 A ship equipped for handling of excess vapour return from the receiving ship in compliance with[7.1.1] may have the qualifier VR x (vapour recovery with capacity x kW) added to the notation.

1.1.5.2 A ship equipped for enhanced positioning by means of controllable thrust vectors (fixed or directioncontrolled thrusters) in compliance with [7.1.2] may have qualifier EPC (enhanced positioning control) addedto the class notation.

1.1.5.3 A ship equipped with enhanced transfer control system in compliance with [7.1.3] may have thequalifier TC added to the class notation.

Guidance note:An example of a class notation for a bunkering vessel with qualifiers for vapour return and for enhanced transfer control can be asfollows: 1A Tanker for liquefied gas (-163˚C, 500 kg/m3, 0.7 bar) Gas bunker (VR 500, TC).


1.1.6 Terms and definitionsExcept where expressly provided otherwise, the following definitions apply to this section:

Table 1 Terms and definitions

Terms Definition

automatic identification system (AIS) an automatic tracking system used on ships and by vessel traffic services(VTS) for identifying and locating vessels by electronically exchangingdata with other nearby ships, AIS base stations, and satellites

Part

6 C

hapt

er 5

Sec

tion

14


DNV GL AS

Terms Definition

boiling point the temperature at which a product exhibits a vapour pressure equal tothe atmospheric pressure

bunker (transfer) connections liquid and vapour connections between ships used for liquid producttransfer to receiving ship and product vapour return to the bunker vessel

bunker operation control position position where continuous watch is maintained during bunker transfer,such position may be a cargo (bunker) control room or a station in thecargo area

cargo (bunker) control room (station) a space used in the control of cargo (bunker) handling operations

compressed natural gas tank (CNG tank) this term describes cargo containment system for natural gas where thecargo is carried in gaseous form under high pressure with or withoutrefrigeration

emergency shutdown (ESD) complex of measures that safely and effectively stops all cargo relatedoperations and equipment, terminates the transfer and brings cargosystem in safe state

emergency release coupling (ERC) device to provide a means of quick release of the transfer connections byexcessive force applied to the coupling when such action is required asan emergency measureMay be also referred to as a “MBC” – marine breakaway coupling

emergency release system (ERS) ERC system that provides a positive means of quick release of transferconnections and safe isolation of bunker vessel and receiving ship gasfuel systems

flammability limits the conditions defining the state of fuel-oxidant mixture at whichapplication of an adequately strong external ignition source is only justcapable of producing flammability in a given test apparatus

inert gas a gas or mixture of gases containing insufficient oxygen to supportcombustion

manifold the flanged pipe assembly mounted onboard ship to which thepresentation flange of the transfer arm or spool piece connects

manifold valve presentation valve or valves fitted at the manifold

operational envelope room in which the presentation flanges of bunker vessel and receivingship can operate safely without applying excessive strain, compression,bending or shear forces to the bunker connections

pendant a hand held portable unit for controlling a specified function

presentation flange flange at the manifold assembly or spool piece adapter used for bunkerconnections

pressure surge in the context of this rule section effect of strong, wavelike, cyclicincrease of pressure in the pipeline transporting liquid due to sudden flowinterruption or rapid change in flow rate or direction

powered emergency release coupling (PERC) type of ERC where a stored energy is used for release to ensure breakoutthrough any ice build-up

purging (inerting) process of displacement of air or product gas with inert atmosphere

Part

6 C

hapt

er 5

Sec

tion

14


DNV GL AS

Terms Definition

quick connect/disconnect coupler (QC/DC) manual or hydraulic mechanical device used to clamp the transferarrangement presentation flange to manifold of receiving ship withoutuse of bolted connectionsQC/DC is used in context of this rule section for routine connect anddisconnect operations

quick release coupling group of couplings for emergency disconnection of the line, parting it totwo sections in predictable, safe mannerUnlike QC/DC the quick release coupling is emergency device notintended for regular duty.

redundancy the ability of a component or system to maintain its function when onefailure has occurredRedundancy can be achieved, for instance, by installation of multiplecomponents, systems or alternative means of performing a function

safe working load (SWL) static load which can be safely applied to the accessory without risk ofdamage or breaking itSWL is typically 80% of the design load

ship shore link (SSL) means of communicating shut-down signals, data and voicecommunications between ship and shore

1.2 Documentation1.2.1 Documentation requirements

1.2.1.1 Documentation shall be submitted as required by Table 2.


Object Documentation type Additional description Qualifiers Info


Single line diagrams for allintrinsically safe circuits, foreach circuit including data forverification of the compatibilitybetween the barrier and the fieldcomponents

AP

Z030 – Arrangement plan Electrical equipment in hazardousareas. Where relevant, basedon an approved 'Hazardous areaclassification drawing' wherelocation of electric equipment inhazardous area is added (exceptbattery room, paint stores and gasbottle store)

AP


E250 – Explosion protectedequipment maintenancemanual

AP

Part

6 C

hapt

er 5

Sec

tion

14


DNV GL AS


I200 – Control andmonitoring systemdocumentation

APEmergencyshutdown system

G130 – Cause and effectdiagram

Including interconnection withother systems that gives alarm andtrigger automatic shutdown

AP


For the bunkering installationAPFire and gas

detection and alarmsystems

Z030 – Arrangement plan Location of gas detector, lines,valves and sampling points onboard

AP

S011 – Piping andinstrumentation diagram(P&ID)

Bunker transfer system AP

H080 – Strength analysis Supporting structures andfoundations for transfer arm

AP


For the bunker transfer system AP

Z030 – Arrangement planBunker manifold includingprotection against low-temperaturecargo leaks

AP

Z030 – Arrangement planTransfer arms, transfer hosesincluding hose supports andsuspension systems as applicable

FI

Z030 – Arrangement plan Working envelope diagram for thetransfer arm FI

Z100 – Specification Transfer arms and transfer hoses FI

Z141 – Commissioningprocedure Bunker equipment AP

Z160 – Operation manual Bunker operations AP

Z100 – Specification ERC, ERS FI

Z100 – Specification QC/DC FI

Cargo piping system

Z100 – SpecificationPermissible manifold loads for thenominal diameter of the transferarm connection.

FI

Z100 – Specification FIVapour handlingCargo system

S030 – Capacity analysis Capacity calculations for additionalvapour management system

FI

Part

6 C

hapt

er 5

Sec

tion

14


DNV GL AS


S011 – Piping andinstrumentation diagram(P&ID)

AP

Z030 – Arrangement plan FI

Z100 – Specification Quick release hooks/quick mooringrelease device FI

Mooringarrangement

Z030 – Arrangement plan Fenders FI

H080 – Strength analysis Supporting structure for hosehandling cranes AP

Z030 – Arrangement plan Hose handling cranes includingsuspension system FI

Offshore cranes

Z100 – Specification Suspension system for cargotransfer hoses FI

I020 − Control systemfunctional description EPC AP

I030 − System block diagram(topology) EPC AP

I040 − User interfacedocumentation EPC AP

I050 − Power supplyarrangement EPC AP

I070 − Instrument andequipment list EPC FI

I080 − Data sheet withenvironmental specifications EPC AP

I140 − Software quality plan EPC FI

Z252 − Test procedure atmanufacturer EPC AP

Z253 − Test procedure forquay and sea trial EPC AP

Independent joystickcontrol system

Z160 − Operation manual EPC FI

Thrusters Z110 – Data sheet EPC FI

I020 – Control systemfunctional description EPC AP

I030 – System block diagram(topology) EPC AP

I040 – User interfacedocumentation EPC AP

Thruster controlmode selectionsystem

I050 – Power supplyarrangement EPC AP

Part

6 C

hapt

er 5

Sec

tion

14


DNV GL AS


I070 – Instrument andequipment list EPC FI

I080 – Data sheet withenvironmental specifications EPC AP

I140 – Software quality plan EPC FI

I150 – Circuit diagram EPC AP

Z252 − Test procedure atmanufacturer EPC AP

Z253 − Test procedure forquay and sea trial EPC AP

Z161 – Operation manual EPC FI

I200 – Control andmonitoringsystem documentation

VRAP

Z100 – Specification VR AP

S010 – Piping diagram (PD) VR AP

Vapour handlingsystem

VR AP

I200 – Control andmonitoringsystem documentation

VRAP

S010 – Piping diagram (PD) VR AP

Reliquefactionsystem

Z100 – Specification VR FI


VRAPCargo pressure

alarm system

I260 – Field instrumentsperiodic test plan TC FI

Cargo pumps controland monitoringsystem


TCAP

1.2.1.2 For general documentation requirements, including definition of the info codes, see Pt.1 Ch.3 Sec.2.

1.2.1.3 For a full definition of the documentation types, see Pt.1 Ch.3 Sec.3.

1.3 Certification1.3.1 Certification requirements

1.3.1.1 Components shall be certified according to requirements given in Pt.5 Ch.7. In addition, the followingcomponents shall be certified as given in Table 3.

Part

6 C

hapt

er 5

Sec

tion

14


DNV GL AS


Additional descriptionObject Certificate

type Issued by Certificationstandard* Parameter Rule requirements

Quick release mooringarrangement PC Manufacturer [3.1.9]

Hose Crane PC Society [3.1.7]

Bunker (transfer) hoses PC Society EN1474-2 [3.1.6] and Pt.5 Ch.7Sec.5 [11.6]

Bunker (transfer) arms PC Society ISO 16904 [3.1.8]

ERC PC Society [3.1.4]

ERS PC Society [3.1.4]

QCDC coupling PC Society [3.1.3]

Transfer control and safetysystems

PC Society [7] and Pt.4 Ch.9

Nitrogen system, control andmonitoring system

PC Society Pt.4 Ch.9

Cargo pumps control andmonitoring system PC Society Pt.4 Ch.9

Gas combustion unit PC Manufacturer DNVGL-CG-0042

Cargo valves controlandmonitoring system

PC Society [5.1.2] and Pt.4 Ch.9

Hydrocarbon gas detection andalarm system, fixed

PC Society [5.1.1] and Pt.5 Ch.7Sec.13

Vapour handling system PC Society Pt.5 Ch.7 Sec.13

*Unless otherwise specified the certification standard is DNV GL rules.

NotesPC: Product certificate

1.3.1.2 For general certification requirements, see Pt.1 Ch.3 Sec.4.

1.3.1.3 For a definition of the certification types, see Pt.1 Ch.3 Sec.5

1.3.2 Standards

1.3.2.1 Recognized standards given in Table 4 that can be used and will be considered in each case.

Table 4 Typical standards/codes suitable for assessment of components

Standard Description

AGA Report 3 AGA: American Gas Association:Orifice Metering of Natural Gas Part 1: General Equations and Uncertainty Guidelines

Part

6 C

hapt

er 5

Sec

tion

14


DNV GL AS

Standard Description

ISO 16904 Petroleum and natural gas industries -Design and testing of LNG marine transfer arms for conventional onshore terminals

EN 1474-2 Installation and equipment for liquefied natural gas –Design and testing of marine transfer systems –

Part 2: Design and testing of transfer hoses

ISO 28460 Petroleum and natural gas industries –Installation and equipment for liquefied natural gas –

Ship-to-shore interface and port operations

ISO/TS 18683 Guidelines for systems and installations for supply of LNG as fuel to ships

ISO 17357-1, ISO 17357-2 Floating pneumatic rubber fenders

OCIMF Design and Construction Specification for Marine Loading Arms

OCIMF Mooring Equipment Guidelines

OCIMF Information Paper - Marine Breakaway Couplings (MBC)

SIGTTO ESD Arrangements & Linked Ship/Shore Systems for Liquefied Gas Carriers

DNVGL-RP-G105 Development and operation of liquefied natural gas bunkering facilities

DNV Classification NotesNo.61.2 LNG Boil-off Re-Liquefaction Plants and Gas Combustion Units

1.4 Survey and testing1.4.1 Testing and commissioning

1.4.1.1 All indicators, alarms and safety functions related to the gas fuel transfer equipment shall be testedbefore the bunker vessel is taken in service.

1.4.1.2 Correct operation of ESD, ERS, their sequence of operation and interlock shall be tested. See [5.1.2].

1.4.1.3 Correct operation of gas detection system to be verified including measuring scale zero and spanreadings, alarm activation level and sampling sequence as stated in Pt.5 Ch.7 Sec.13 [6] and [5.1.1.2] and[5.1.1.3].

1.4.1.4 Vapour management system mentioned in [1.1.3.1] shall be tested. The initial testing shall be partof gas trials program to the scope of conventional re-liquefaction equipment test described in Pt.5 Ch.7 Sec.1[6.1.5]. The overall capacity and performance of such arrangements shall be verified for compliance withdesign parameters during actual gas fuel transfer with vapour return to bunker vessel.

1.4.1.5 Manoeuvring and positioning system described in [7.1.2] shall be tested including quick mooring linesrelease where fitted.

1.4.1.6 Equipment fitted for purging with inert gas including the supply system, connection to the cargosystem, instrumentation and back flow prevention arrangement to be tested to ensure correct installation,operation and where applicable - alarms.

1.4.1.7 Equipment installed for gas fuel transfer its instrumentation, control and alarm systems.

Part

6 C

hapt

er 5

Sec

tion

14


DNV GL AS

1.4.1.8 Where the gas fuel main component is liquefied natural gas, the class surveyor shall witness firstbunkering operation.

1.4.1.9 The fenders shall be manufactured, tested and maintained in accordance with ISO 17357. Numberand size of the fenders shall meet recommendations of OCIMF/SIGTTO/ICS Ship to ship transfer guide.

1.4.1.10 After completed installation on board, functional testing of the crane for hose support shall becarried out as specified in DNVGL-ST-0377 Standard for shipboard lifting appliances.

2 Materials

2.1 General2.1.1 Material requirements

2.1.1.1 Requirements for materials, documentation and testing are covered in Pt.5 Ch.7.Guidance note:Where mixtures of hydrocarbon gases are used as gas fuel, the material should be selected with following assumption: for a designtemperature of –165°C when methane is used as main component for the gas fuel, however for other hydrocarbon mixtures higherdesign temperature may be considered depend on intended gas fuel composition.


2.1.1.2 For CNG tanks, the use of materials not covered by Pt.5 Ch.7 shall be specially considered andapproved by the Society.

3 Arrangement and system design

3.1 General3.1.1 Bunker manifold area

3.1.1.1 Bunker manifold area and escape routes shall have safe access for crew engaged in operation. It shallhave unrestricted natural ventilation and be sufficiently illuminated.

Guidance note 1:Unrestricted natural ventilation presumes an open bunker station located above the open deck. Alternative arrangement may beaccepted on a case by case basis.


Guidance note 2:Two floodlights per bunker station will be considered as sufficient illumination when they are located wide apart to minimiseshadow areas on deck and high enough to minimise dazzle effect to personnel involved in handling of transfer connections.


3.1.1.2 Bunker manifold platforms arranged for access to bunker connection shall have sufficient strength toprovide support points for hoses where applicable, transfer arms and other bunker connection and manifoldarrangements.

3.1.1.3 Arrangement of work platforms in areas where liquid spill may occur shall exclude liquid spillaccumulation at the platform surface. Gratings used in this location shall be suitable for low temperaturesand correspond to boiling point of gas bunker. Area under the gratings shall be equipped with spill collecting

Part

6 C

hapt

er 5

Sec

tion

14


DNV GL AS

trays with drainage arrangements suitable for draining the accumulated spill overboard. The drain shall befitted with a valve.

Guidance note:The spill collecting tray, drain pipe and valve fitted to the drain has to be suitable for carried product. This valve is not consideredto be part of the cargo system therefore the manufacturer’s work certificate for material and work product certificate will beaccepted.


3.1.1.4 When bunker boiling point is lower than design temperature of the hull steel, the hull in the manifoldarea shall be effectively protected from low temperature in case of a major bunker spill. Where water curtainis used for hull protection, the pumps shall be arranged with redundancy.

3.1.1.5 The bunker connections shall be clearly visible from the navigation bridge and bunker operationcontrol position where continuous watch is kept during the transfer. CCTV can be accepted as substitute forthe direct view when it provides unobstructed view of the bunker connections.

3.1.1.6 The area shall be clear of obstructions which may interfere with quick release described in Pt.5 Ch.7Sec.13 [3.1.4].

3.1.2 Cargo tanks filling

3.1.2.1 Bunker vessel shall be able to abort bunkering operation at any stage in case of emergency. Cargotanks on bunker vessel therefore shall not have restrictions on intermediate filling. However, internal transferbetween cargo tanks within short period of time to leave dangerous sloshing zone may be accepted uponspecial considerations.

3.1.2.2 For assessment of membrane cargo tanks, reference is made to DNVGL-CG-0158.

3.1.3 Bunker transfer arrangement

3.1.3.1 Possibility to perform tightness test of the bunker connections between bunker vessel and receivingship prior to operation shall be provided. Such procedure shall be described in the operation manual asrequired in Sec.6.

3.1.3.2 Suitable arrangements for inerting of the lines before filling them with the bunker vapour and for safedisplacement of bunker liquid and vapour from bunker lines prior to disconnection shall be provided.

3.1.3.3 Sections of the line where liquid may remain after the bunker transfer shall be equipped withdrain system leading back to the cargo tanks. Means to ensure that section of the transfer line outboardof manifold valve is free of liquid shall be provided. Where such arrangement is a control valve with drainopened to atmosphere, this control valve bore has to be limited to maximum 1.5 mm.

3.1.3.4 The section of the line between cross-over valve and presentation flange shall be equipped withpressure gauge visible from the drain valve position.

3.1.3.5 Bunker transfer piping system for products with boiling point below -55°C shall be thermally insulatedto minimise heat leaks to transferred gas bunker and protect personnel from direct contact with coldsurfaces.

3.1.3.6 Arrangement for control of distance between the bunker vessel and receiving ship manifolds intransverse and longitudinal directions shall be fitted. Exceeding of permitted working distance shall triggeralarm followed by automatic stop of transfer and closing of manifold valves.

3.1.3.7 Where quick connect/disconnect couplings (QC/DC) are used they shall be equipped with mechanicallocking device to prevent inadvertent release. Powered QC/DC shall stay in “as is” position at loss of power.

Part

6 C

hapt

er 5

Sec

tion

14


DNV GL AS

3.1.4 Emergency release for bunker connection

3.1.4.1 The bunker vessel shall have arrangement for quick release of bunker connections in case ofemergency.

3.1.4.2 Emergency release couplings (ERC) used in bunker connection shall be of “dry-break” type andbe capable to self-disconnect upon application of force at any direction of vessel’s relative motion whichexceeds design loads and at pressure surge exceeding the coupling design pressure. ERC fitted in lines fortransfer of gas fuel at temperature below zero degrees Celsius shall be capable to break-away through theice accumulated on the coupling during the transfer.

3.1.4.3 In addition to ERC, the bunker connections shall be equipped with powered emergency releasesystem (ERS) operational in all conditions. The actuating ERS power shall have reserve storage of energysufficient for disconnection of all transfer lines in case the main source of actuating power becomesunavailable (for example in case of cargo area black-out). Where ERS is fitted outboard the insulating flangedescribed in [3.1.12], the insulation flange shall not be shorted by use of electrically continuous hydraulichoses.

Guidance note:Where the ERS is the dual-mode coupling and, in addition to positive means of quick release, can be parted by excessive forcesapplied to the coupling or disengage when the distance between the supplying and receiving vessels flanges exceeds safeoperational envelope, the ERC fitting required in [3.1.4.2] may be omitted.


3.1.4.4 The ERS shall not disconnect the coupling at accidental black-out.Guidance note:Requirements of [3.1.4.3] is referred to an actuator device which positively disconnects the coupling (for example a hydraulicservo motor), requirement [3.1.4.4] is referred to the control circuits which shall not trigger disconnection at accidental loss ofelectrical power to the ERS control circuits.


3.1.4.5 Activation of ERS or ERC shall not impose excessive pressure surge effect in the system. Pressuresurge effect for different flow rates and closing time of valves in transfer system shall be documented.Operational restrictions caused by closing time of valves on receiving ship shall be reflected in the vessel’scargo plant operation manual.

3.1.4.6 Where the bunker connections are supported by hose crane, the quick release couplings shallbe fitted at the receiving ship end (outward of the hose crane suspension point). Alternatively, the quickrelease couplings may be fitted at bunker vessel end when the hose suspension point has arrangements forautomatic release synchronized with the quick release coupling.

3.1.4.7 When ERS is activated it shall release in two steps: first the ESD shall be triggered to stop thetransfer and then release the ERS flanges.

3.1.4.8 Testing of ERS circuits shall be possible without disconnecting the ERS coupling.

3.1.4.9 Where hoses are used for transfer, release of ERC or ERS may potentially lead to hard impact of thehoses ends against the ships structures. Arrangements preventing the impact have to be provided. Release ofthe hoses shall not impose excessive stress to the manifold valves of the vessel.

3.1.4.10 Where rigid transfer arms are used for gas fuel transfer, the part of the transfer arm inboard of thequick release coupling shall retract automatically toward bunker vessel to avoid contact with other part andreceiving vessel due to vessels motion.

Part

6 C

hapt

er 5

Sec

tion

14


DNV GL AS

3.1.4.11 ERS shall be capable to be activated by manual controls situated in at least two remote locations onbunker vessel. One of these locations should be the bunker operation control position.

3.1.4.12 Excessive pressure in bunker connections shall activate alarm and automatic stop of transfer.Capability to adjust the activation set point has to be provided, but it shall not exceed design pressure of thetransfer lines.

3.1.5 Bunker manifold

3.1.5.1 The manifold for transfer of liquid shall be fitted with manually operated stop valve and a remotely/automatically operated valve (ESD valve) fitted in series.

Guidance note:The two valves requirements should be applicable irrespective of design pressure of cargo tanks fitted at the bunker vessel tomake the transfer connection suitable for operation with different MARVS setting at supply and receiving vessels.


3.1.5.2 The vapour return manifold shall be fitted with a remotely/automatically operated stop valve. Manuallocal operation of the valve shall be possible, e.g. by portable means.

3.1.5.3 Safe working load (SWL) of the manifold shall meet the recommendations of Recommendationsfor liquefied gas carrier manifolds (OCIMF, 2018) and be capable to accommodate forces occurring due tovessel’s relative motion, ERC self-release force and following it dynamic forces.

3.1.5.4 Information about maximum safe working load (SWL) of bunker connection shall be availableonboard and posted at the bunker station.

3.1.6 Bunker hoses

3.1.6.1 Hoses for gas fuel transfer shall be certified in accordance with requirements for cargo hose in Pt.5Ch.7 Sec.5 [11.6].

3.1.6.2 Hoses for transfer of liquid shall be protected by relief valves fitted outboard manifold valve.

3.1.6.3 Hoses used for liquid transfer shall be single length hoses from export manifold to import manifoldand provide sufficient allowance for vessel’s relative motion (including rolling) within operation envelope.

Guidance note:Combination of hoses connected in series may be accepted for gas fuel transfer when effective control of the connections integritycan be arranged and when such connections will not impose excessive stress to the hoses flexible part or change hose radiusbeyond acceptable limits.


3.1.6.4 Arrangements for support of the hoses at critical points such as: hose rails, handrails, hosesuspension points, etc. shall be provided to avoid excessive local stress and for maintaining of acceptablebending radius of the hoses. Such arrangements shall not constrain emergency release function described in[3.1.4].

3.1.6.5 Sufficient space for hose stowage after disconnection from receiving ship shall be available. Thestowage arrangement shall consider permitted bending radius for the hoses.

3.1.6.6 Where the stowed hoses may contain residues of liquid with boiling temperature below the hull steeldesign temperature, the ship hull structure shall be protected from the low temperature effect in the way ofthe bunker hoses stowage location.

Part

6 C

hapt

er 5

Sec

tion

14


DNV GL AS

3.1.6.7 The arrangement of the hoses when they are connected for the gas fuel transfer shall considerpossible direct contact or close proximity with hull structures. The hull in such locations shall be effectivelyprotected from the effect of low temperatures.

3.1.7 Hose handling cranes

3.1.7.1 Bunker vessel shall be fitted with deck crane or cranes for handling of transfer hoses, reducers, spoolpieces and other equipment used for transfer, including transfers at sea.

3.1.7.2 Where the crane is used for hose support during the transfer, it shall be delivered with DNV GLCertificate of compliance with DNVGL-ST-0377 and/or DNVGL-ST-0378. The crane certification by otherrecognized standard may be accepted based on special considerations.

3.1.7.3 Arrangements to maintain hose bend radius within limits shall be provided. Where cradles are usedfor support they have to be able to handle all hoses used for bunkering.

3.1.8 Rigid transfer arms

3.1.8.1 Rigid transfer arms and transfer systems based on foldable arms intended for use as gas fuel transferarrangement will be specially considered.

Guidance note:Acceptance criteria may be based on assessment of acceleration forces acting on the transfer arm, permissible manifold loads forthe nominal diameter of the transfer arm connection, transfer arm location on bunker vessel and working envelope consideringallowance for fenders, transfer arm support arrangements in operational and stowed positions, effect of the hull vibration on thetransfer arm, maintenance of the transfer arm and testing program.


3.1.8.2 Standard EN1474 for design and construction shall be applied.

3.1.9 Mooring equipment

3.1.9.1 Bunker vessel shall be equipped with sufficient number of closed type fairleads for safe mooring toreceiving ship. Mooring fittings and arrangements shall have their safe working load (SWL) correspondingto wind and current forces acting on the bunker vessel with allowance for dynamic forces occurring due tovessel’s relative movement.

Guidance note:Reference to is made to OCIMF Mooring equipment guidelines.


3.1.9.2 Steel mooring wires shall not be used unless the synthetic tails are fitted at the wire ends.

3.1.9.3 Provisions shall be made for emergency cast-off of mooring lines.Guidance note:Where fixed or portable quick release mooring hooks are used they should comply with a recognised standard.


3.1.9.4 Sufficient number of fittings shall be available for primary (parallel body length) and secondary (bowand stern quarters and superstructures) fenders.

3.1.9.5 The fenders shall be sized to provide sufficient energy absorption for the size of the vessel atapproach velocities and sea mooring conditions.

Part

6 C

hapt

er 5

Sec

tion

14


DNV GL AS

Guidance note:Number and size of the fenders should meet recommendations of OCIMF/SIGTTO/ICS Ship to ship transfer guide for petroleum,chemicals and liquefied gases.


3.1.10 Communication equipment

3.1.10.1 The bunker vessel shall be equipped with effective communication means for internal purpose(onboard communications), for communication between the bunker vessel and receiving vessel and forexternal communications.

3.1.10.2 Where portable radios are used for communication with receiving ship, they shall be of approvedtype suitable for gas-hazardous areas. The bunker vessel shall have sufficient set of spare radios with thesame operating frequencies table for the receiving vessel duty personnel. Minimum two portable radios shallbe available for receiving vessel. Where the ships have wired communication link the number of portableradios can be reduces to one.

3.1.10.3 To reduce risk of current induction in hose cranes or rigid transfer arms, high power transmittingequipment such as MF/HF radios shall be provided with capability to be earthed manually and equipmentwith low transmitting power such as VHF radios, AIS transceivers shall have low power operation mode withtransmission power not exceeding 1W.

3.1.11 Inert gas system/nitrogen supply

3.1.11.1 Bunker vessel shall have onboard source of suitable inert gas for inerting, purging of gas fueltransfer lines and for testing of the bunker connection for tightness prior to transfer.

3.1.11.2 Installed onboard inert gas production plant shall comply with requirements of Pt.5 Ch.7 Sec.9 [2].

3.1.11.3 The inert gas stored or produced on board for purging of gas fuel transfer lines shall have dewpointsufficiently low to eliminate risk of water condensate accumulation in the piping system.

3.1.11.4 Where boiling point of the gas fuel is below -55°C the vessel shall be equipped with nitrogen supplysystem for gas fuel transfer lines inerting/purging. For fuel gas with warmer boiling point, inert gas producedby combustion of fuel or gas may be used.

3.1.11.5 Suitable arrangement to prevent back-flow of hydrocarbons from cargo system into the inert gassystem shall be provided. When the source of inert gas is located outside the cargo area, the line shall beequipped with removable spool piece located on the open deck of cargo area.

3.1.11.6 When the back flow preventer consists of non-return valves installed in series, the spool piece[3.1.11.5] shall be removed after every inerting/purging operation. A warning sign shall be posted at thevalves location and corresponding instruction included into the cargo plant operation manual.

3.1.11.7 Where a double block and bleed device is fitted to prevent the back-flow, it shall be equipped withalarms prescribed with Sec.9 [4.2.2].

3.1.11.8 The inert gas supply connections to cargo system shall be equipped with shut off valves and havea branch connection to supply the inert gas to receiving ship through a flexible hose of sufficient length forcases when inert gas source is not available on the other ship.

3.1.12 Static electrical charge and galvanic currents

3.1.12.1 To reduce risk of high energy spark between bunker vessel and receiving ship due to hulls’ electricalpotential difference, electrical insulation between ships shall be maintained at any stage of gas fuel transfer.Each transfer connection including connection bunker vessel and receiving ship shall have insulation flange.

Part

6 C

hapt

er 5

Sec

tion

14


DNV GL AS

3.1.12.2 Bonding wires shall not be used between ships unless required by the national administration. Inthis case the connection shall be mechanically and electrically sound and be fitted with suitable for hazardousarea switch. Warning shall be posted stating that the switch shall be in “off” position before connecting anddisconnecting the bonding cable.

3.1.12.3 Insulation flange shall have resistance of at least 1 kΩ but less than 1 MΩ to dissipate static charge.

3.1.12.4 Insulated section of the bunker hose or rigid transfer arm shall have possibility to be stowed withoutelectrical contact with hull upon disconnection.

4 Fire safety

4.1 General4.1.1 Fire protection

4.1.1.1 Fire protection and fire extinction arrangements of gas bunker vessel shall meet requirements of Pt.5Ch.7 Sec.11.

4.1.1.2 Spark arresting arrangements shall be provided at exhaust outlets of internal combustion enginesand boilers using oil as fuel and at incinerators exhaust outlets. Spark arrestors fitted in the exhaust outletsshall meet a recognized standard

4.1.1.3 Use of vapour oxidising equipment not in compliance with [7.1.1.6] shall be restricted during bunkeroperations.

5 Safety, control and monitoring systems

5.1 General5.1.1 Gas detection

5.1.1.1 Installed onboard gas detection system shall be capable to measure gas concentration in themanifold connections area in addition to location described in Pt.5 Ch.7 Sec.13 [6.1.2] and have arrangementto provide a remote gas detection point for receiving ship.

Guidance note:This additional gas detector may be part of gas detection system required by Pt.5 Ch.7 Sec.13 [6] if requirements of [5.1.1.2] aremet.


5.1.1.2 Gas detecting equipment at the manifold connection shall provide continuous monitoring and activatealarm when concentration of hydrocarbons reaches 30% of lower flammable limit (LFL).

5.1.1.3 Audible and visible alarm from the permanently installed gas detection equipment shall be located onthe navigation bridge, in the bunkering operation control position and at the gas detector readout location.

5.1.2 Emergency shutdown system

5.1.2.1 An emergency shutdown system (ESD) pendant with manual activation button shall be available forreceiving ship.

Part

6 C

hapt

er 5

Sec

tion

14


DNV GL AS

Guidance note:If a bunker vessel has capability to connect own ESD system to receiving vessel ESD system this arrangement can replace thependant requirement.


5.1.2.2 In addition to Pt.5 Ch.7 requirements for ESD, the ESD function shall be initiated in followingcircumstances:

— automatically, if the distance of connection on receiving ship from the connection on bunker vesselexceeds safe operational envelope for transfer arrangement

— by activating manual ESD button on ESD pendant— automatically at ERS activation.

5.1.2.3 Opening of main transfer valves shall not be possible unless ERS is re-assembled.

6 Operations

6.1 General6.1.1 Operation manual

6.1.1.1 Operation manual shall be provided for crew and contain instructions and guidance for the following:

— preparation before the bunkering including restriction of activities/operations during gas fuel transfer— information to be exchanged between bunker vessel and receiving ship prior to operation— hose handling guidelines reflecting specific hose manufacturer instructions for the hose handling— procedures for connection including line inerting and tightness test— preparations for start of bunkering, i.e. preparedness of fire-fighting, tightness testing, establishing

communications, allocation of personnel/responsibilities— pre-cooling of transfer connection(s) and transfer procedures— draining of the pipeline, purging and disconnection on completion of the transfer— operational restrictions to prevent dangerous pressure surge effect in the pipes— fire safety during the transfer— procedures for raising alarms— procedures in case of communications failure— suspension of operation during emergencies— procedures for authorization of ERS activation— emergency procedures for: gas fuel leakage, termination of the bunkering and emergency disconnection,

response in case of unintentional disconnection of ERS, etc.

6.1.1.2 Cargo system piping diagram, function flowchart or cause and effect (C&E) diagram for ESD andrelated systems shall be available in the bunker/cargo control room where such room is established.

7 Special features/optional qualifiers

7.1 General7.1.1 Vapour management

7.1.1.1 Arrangements for handling excess vapour from receiving ship shall be provided with capacitysufficient to prevent venting of gas fuel vapour to the atmosphere.

Part

6 C

hapt

er 5

Sec

tion

14


DNV GL AS

7.1.1.2 Such additional arrangements and systems may be built on the following principles:

— re-liquefaction of vapours by means of mechanical refrigeration— thermal oxidation of excess vapours— a system allowing accumulation of the vapour in compressed state— by other means acceptable to the Society— a combination of the above.

7.1.1.3 Such arrangement and systems shall meet design conditions stated in Pt.5 Ch.7 Sec.7 unless otherambient conditions are specially agreed.

7.1.1.4 Redundancy requirements in Pt.5 Ch.7 Sec.7 are not applicable for this optional system.

7.1.1.5 Process piping for handling excess vapour from receiving ship shall be adequately separated to avoidover-pressurising cargo system on bunker vessel.

7.1.1.6 If vapour disposal is by means of oxidation, the installation shall comply with DNV Classification notesNo. 61.2 except that the exhaust gas shall have a maximum exit temperature of 250°C. Exhaust outlet forsuch system shall be located on the side opposite to receiving vessel and directed outward.

7.1.1.7 When the system is based on accumulation of compressed vapour on bunker vessel, dueconsiderations shall be made for safe operational margin. Additional pressure control systems with capacityto maintain cargo pressure/temperature within the limits shall be fitted.

7.1.1.8 Compressor installed for vapour extraction from receiving ship shall be fitted with automatic pressureand flow control, and be provided with surge protection and provisions for emergency stop.

7.1.2 Manoeuvring and positioning

7.1.2.1 The bunker vessel shall have longitudinal and transverse trust capabilities at approach and departurespeed and retain sufficient manoeuvrability at speed vector alterations.

7.1.2.2 Control positions locations shall provide unobstructed view in the approach sector.

7.1.2.3 Independent system shall be available to provide information about vessel heading, speed vectorand acceleration, rudder angle, vessel’s rate of turn, engine RPM and propeller pitch and thruster vectors atmooring control position. Failure of a sensor, system or equipment shall trigger alarm.

7.1.2.4 The vessel shall be equipped with independent joystick control system for positioning andmanoeuvring which shall comply with Ch.3 Sec.1 [6.2].

7.1.2.5 The instruments [7.1.2.3] readings shall be clearly visible from the control positions in any ambientlight conditions including bright Sun and do not constrain view due to scatter of own light at night.

7.1.3 Enhanced transfer control

7.1.3.1 The transfer control system shall have provisions of automatic control of flow rate and limitingpressure in the transfer system. Parameters of the control system critical for the safe transfer shall haveadjustable settings.

7.1.3.2 Deviations from set values mentioned in [7.1.3.1] shall activate audible and visual alarms at thebunker operations control position and on the navigation bridge.

7.1.3.3 The transfer control system for liquid shall automatically reduce the liquid transfer rate when setvalues for pressure in the vapour return/vapour recovery system is exceeded.

Part

6 C

hapt

er 5

Sec

tion

14


DNV GL AS

7.1.3.4 If the transfer rate exceeds a maximum value, alarm and automatic stop of transfer shall beactivated and manifold valves closed.

7.1.3.5 The receiving vessel shall have possibility to control transfer flow rate by means of a ship-to-ship link,e.g. flexible cable and pendant with means of control.

Part

6 C

hapt

er 5

Sec

tion

15


DNV GL AS

SECTION 15 TRANSPORTATION OF TOXIC CHEMICALS FOROFFSHORE SERVICE VESSELS - CHEM

1 IntroductionThe rules in this chapter are taking into account requirements proposed for the coming coming Internationalcode for the transport and handling of hazardous and noxious liquid substances in bulk in offshore supportvessels, (IOSVC code) for the carriage of cargoes which are required to meet the requirements for toxicproducts in section 15.12 of the international code for the construction and equipment of ships carryingdangerous chemicals in bulk (IBC code).

1.1 BackgroundThis rule chapter shall provide criteria for the arrangement and systems for the carriage of hazardous andnoxious substances subject to the IBC code but not covered by the existing IMO resolution A.673(16). Theserules are considered to provide an acceptable level of safety and pollution prevention compared to that whichcan be achieved on chemical tankers carrying the same substances in accordance with the IBC code andMARPOL annex II.

1.2 ScopeThis rule chapter includes requirements to the ship’s cargo handling system, covering all aspects of theinstallation, from the ship’s cargo containment system and up to and including the cargo loading manifold.The chapter has requirements for arrangement and location of cargo tanks, associated piping systems,including requirements to access to such spaces. Requirements to survival capability are included. Hazardousareas and spaces due to the cargo handling installation are defined in terms of crew safety hazards.Requirements for control, monitoring and safety systems for the cargo handling systems are included.

Guidance note:For cargoes deemed non-toxic and having flashpoint exceeding 60°C, IMO Res. A.673(16) should be applied.In addition, for safety hazard substances; entrances, air inlets and openings to accommodation, service and machinery spacesand control stations may be accepted in bulkheads facing the cargo deck area if they are spaced outside the cargo area defined inA.673(16).


1.2.1 The rules in this chapter apply to arrangements and systems for the carriage of hazardous and noxioussubstances in bulk, which are required to meet the requirements for toxic products in section 15.12 of theIBC code.The flag administration as well as the port state in which operation is intending to take place are responsiblefor accepting carriage of chemicals covered by these rules. Compliance with the requirements set forth in thischapter may be used as basis for such applications.

1.2.2 It is a pre-requisite that any cargo to be carried has been approved for carriage in accordance with theIBC code and MARPOL annex II.

1.2.3 These rules are intended for ships carrying the cargo to and from mobile offshore drilling units, fixedand floating platforms and other similar offshore installations.

1.2.4 These rules apply only in the case hazardous and noxious liquids are transferred to or from itscontainment system which forms part of the vessel or remains on board. The carriage of hazardous andnoxious liquids in portable tanks which are only lifted on and off the ship, is covered by the internationalmaritime dangerous goods (IMDG) code.

Part

6 C

hapt

er 5

Sec

tion

15


DNV GL AS

1.2.5 Other requirements for cargoes listed in “Specific and operational requirements (column o)” in the IBCcode, in addition to 15.12, shall be complied with.

1.2.6 The classification of the vessel is based on the assumption that cargo handling operations are carriedout in accordance with the approved instruction manual, see 15.

1.2.7 These rules are created to reflect the coming IOSVC code. This code may set forth stricterrequirements than stated in this rule chapter.

2 Application

2.1 General

2.1.1 These rules have been developed for the design, construction and operation of offshore support vesselswhich transport substances in bulk that have significant hazardous and noxious properties, for the servicingand resupplying of offshore platforms, mobile offshore drilling units and other offshore installations, includingthose employed in the search for and recovery of hydrocarbons from the sea-bed.

2.1.2 Ships built to carry hazardous and noxious liquid substances in accordance with the requirements inthis section will be given class notation: CHEM.

2.2 Relation to other DNV GL documents

2.2.1 Cargoes having LFL(1)/LFL(2) properties in addition to 15.12 requirements in the IBC code, shall alsofulfil Sec.9.

3 References

3.1 Terminology and definitions

3.1.1 Cargo handling spaces are pump rooms and other enclosed spaces which contain fixed cargo handlingequipment.

3.1.2 Cargo tank is the liquid tight shell designed to be the primary container of the cargo.

3.1.3 Cofferdam is the isolating space between two adjacent steel bulkheads or decks. This space may be avoid space or a ballast space.

3.1.4 Hose handling area is a designated area for where the loading/offloading hose shall rest during cargotransfer. See [8.1.6].An open deck is a deck which is either open at both ends or have an opening at one end, and is provided withadequate natural ventilation effective over the entire length through permanent openings distributed in theside plating or deckhead or from above, having a toala area of at least 10% of the total area of the spacesides.

3.1.5 Service spaces are spaces used for galleys, pantries containing cooking appliances, lockers, mail andspecie rooms, store rooms, workshops other than those forming part of the machinery spaces and similarspaces and trunks to such spaces.

Part

6 C

hapt

er 5

Sec

tion

15


DNV GL AS

3.1.6 Toxic hazardous area, also referred to as cargo area means an area in which a toxic gas is or maybe expected to be present in quantities such as to require special precautions in terms of crew safety. See[11.2.1].

4 Procedural requirements

4.1 Documentation requirementsDocumentation shall be submitted as required by Table 1.



Cargo handlingarrangements general Z030 – Arrangement plan

Including:

— Machinery and boiler spaces, accommodation,service and control station spaces

— Main deck lay-out with hose landing area— Bunkering stations with shore connections— Tank hatches, ventilation pipes and any other

openings to the cargo tanks and cofferdams— Ventilating pipes, doors and openings to

hazardous areas— Entrances, air inlets and openings to

accommodation, service and control stationspaces.

FI

S010 – Piping diagram (PD) APCargo piping system

Z160 – Operational manual AP

Cargo tank venting andgas freeing arrangements S010 – Piping diagram (PD) AP

Cargo compartmentcleaningsystem S010 – Piping diagram (PD) AP

Cargo heating system S010 – Piping diagram (PD) AP

Cargo area G080 – Hazardous areaclassification drawing AP

Ventilation systems incargo area

S012 – Ducting diagram(DD) Including capacity and location of fans AP

Cargo tanks pressure/vacuum valves or highvelocity vent valves

Z110 – Data sheet AP

Cargo tanks levelmonitoring system


AP

Cargo tanks overflowprotection system


AP

Part

6 C

hapt

er 5

Sec

tion

15


DNV GL AS


Cargo valves and pumpscontrol and monitoringsystem


AP


APGas detection and alarmsystem



Leakage detection system I200 – Control andmonitoring systemdocumentation

In cofferdamsAP


G200 – Fixed fireextinguishingsystem documentation

AP

Internal access Z030 – Arrangement plan AP



4.1.3 When national authorities survey the vessel in accordance with the current requirements of theinternational convention on safety of life at sea (SOLAS), copies of the cargo ship safety constructioncertificate and the cargo ship safety equipment certificate shall be submitted by the ship-owner or buildingyard. This documentation will be considered as equivalent to a survey carried out by the Society.

4.2 CertificationTable 2 Certification requirements

Object Certificate type Issued by Certification standard* Additional description

Gas detection andalarm system, fixed PC Society

Cargo tanks levelmonitoring system PC Society

Cargo tanks overflowprotection system PC Society

Cargo valves andpumps control andmonitoring system

PC Society


Part

6 C

hapt

er 5

Sec

tion

15


DNV GL AS

5 MaterialsStructural materials used for tank construction, together with associated piping, valves, vents and theirjointing materials, shall be suitable at the carriage temperature and pressure for the cargo to be carried, tothe satisfaction of the Society.

6 Vessel arrangement


6.1.1 Cargo tanks shall not be located within the accommodation or engine room area. Engine room andaccommodation shall not be located above tanks or cofferdams.

6.1.2 Where not bounded by bottom shell plating or pump room, the cargo tanks shall be surrounded bycofferdams.For safe access to and within the cargo tanks and adjacent cofferdams, horizontal hatches or openings toor within cargo tanks or cofferdams surrounding such tanks shall have a minimum clear opening of 600 ×600 mm that also facilitates the hoisting of an injured person from the bottom of the tank/cofferdam. Foraccess through vertical openings providing main passage through the length and breadth within cargo tanksand cofferdams surrounding such tanks, the minimum clear opening shall not be less than 600 × 800 mmat a height of not more than 600 mm from bottom plating unless gratings or footholds are provided. Smalleropenings may be accepted provided evacuation of an injured person from the bottom of the tank/cofferdamcan be demonstrated.

6.1.3 Tanks carrying ship type 3 cargoes shall have minimum horizontal distance between the tank side andthe ship's shell of minimum 760 mm. Other tanks shall have distances according to IBC code chapter 2.6.1

6.1.4 The spaces forward of the collision bulkhead (forepeak) and aft of the aftermost bulkhead (afterpeak)shall not be arranged as cargo tanks nor as cofferdams.

6.1.5 Cofferdams shall be arranged for possible water filling. The filling system shall not be permanentlyconnected to the cofferdams. Reactivity with the cargo shall always be considered.If cofferdams are not water filled, there shall be a leakage detection system installed.

6.1.6 Cargoes, which react in a hazardous manner with other cargoes or fuel oils, shall be segregated fromsuch other cargoes or oil fuel by means of a cofferdam, pump room or tank containing a mutually compatiblecargo.

7 Volumes to be carriedIt will be up to the flag state administration to define the maximum cargo volumes and stability requirementsthat will apply for the vessel.

7.1 Access and openings general

7.1.1 No accommodation, service spaces, control stations or machinery spaces shall be located within thecargo area.

Part

6 C

hapt

er 5

Sec

tion

15


DNV GL AS

7.2 Access and openings to accommodation

7.2.1 Entrances, air inlets and openings to accommodation, service and machinery spaces, control stationsand other non-toxic spaces are in general, not to face the cargo areaFor vessels with cargo tanks aft of the superstructure, entrances, air inlets and openings facing the cargoarea may be accepted provided they are situated at least 10 m away from the cargo area.The following provisions apply for such boundaries:

— Doors shall be kept closed during loading/discharge operations. Signboards shall be fitted.— Port lights or windows shall be of a non-opening type.— Ventilation inlets shall be fitted as far as practicable from the nearest cargo area (in no case less than 10

m).

7.3 Access and openings to pump room and cargo tanks

7.3.1 Cargo tanks and cofferdams surrounding cargo tanks shall have suitable access from open deck forcleaning and gas-freeing. Where cofferdams are provided over cargo tanks, small trunks shall be arranged topenetrate the cofferdam. The trunks shall be arranged for water filling.

7.3.2 Access openings are not to be arranged from cargo tanks or cofferdams to other spaces.

7.3.3 Pump rooms shall have access directly from open deck. No access shall be arranged between spaces inthe cargo area and other spaces.Access entrances and passages shall have a clear opening of at least 600 by 600 mm.

8 Piping system in cargo area

8.1 General

8.1.1 There shall be no permanent connection between piping systems in the cargo area and piping systemsin the remainder of the vessel.

8.1.2 Where non-permanent connections between piping systems in the cargo area and piping systems inthe remainder of the vessel are accepted, this separation may be achieved by the use of one of the followingarrangements:

— Removing spool pieces or valves and blanking the pipe ends— Blind flange valves.

Such arrangements shall not be located within a cargo tank or cofferdam.

8.1.3 The cofferdam boundaries shall not be penetrated at a level below the top of the cargo tanks.Guidance note:Hydraulic power supply to pumps/valve actuators, and cables for instrumentation would be acceptable cofferdam penetrationsabove the top of the cargo tanks.


8.1.4 Bulkhead penetrations shall not utilise flanges bolted through the bulkhead.

Part

6 C

hapt

er 5

Sec

tion

15


DNV GL AS

8.1.5 Deck spills shall be kept away from accommodation and service areas by suitable precautionarymeans, such as a permanent coaming of suitable height extending from side to side or around loading anddischarge stations.In addition, there shall be a designated hose landing area. The area shall be limited by spill coamings orgutter bars leading any major leakage overboard.

8.1.6 Cargo pump room, pipe tunnels and cofferdams shall have a separate drainage system connected topumps or bilge ejectors situated entirely within the cargo area.

8.1.7 Bilge ejectors serving cargo areas shall not be permanently connected to the drive water system.

8.1.8 Cofferdams shall be provided with sounding pipes lead to open deck.

8.1.9 Cofferdams shall be provided with air pipes lead to the open deck.

8.1.10 Bilge systemBilge pumping systems serving spaces within the cargo area shall be independent from systems servingspaces outside the cargo area subject to this chapter and shall be entirely situated within the cargo area.

8.2 Cargo piping system

8.2.1 The complete cargo piping system shall be located within the cargo area and shall be entirely separatefrom all other piping systems on board. The requirements in Pt.5 Ch.6 shall be followed for the pipingsystem.

8.2.2 Cargoes, which react in a hazardous manner with other cargoes, shall have separate pumping andpiping systems, which shall not pass through other cargo tanks containing such cargoes unless encased in atunnel.

8.2.3 Cargo piping shall not penetrate cargo tank boundaries below the top of the tank. Penetrations belowthe top of the tank may be accepted provided that a remotely operated stop valve is fitted within the cargotank served. Where a cargo tank is adjacent to a pump room, the remotely operated stop valve may be fittedon the cargo tank bulkhead on the pump room side.

8.2.4 Filling lines to cargo tanks shall be so arranged that the generation of static electricity is reduced, e.g.by reducing the free fall into the tank to a minimum.

8.2.5 Hydraulically powered pumps, submerged in cargo tanks (e.g. deep well pumps), shall be arrangedwith double barriers, preventing the hydraulic system serving the pumps from being directly exposed tothe cargo. The double barrier shall be arranged for detection and drainage of possible cargo leakages. Thedetection shall be of automatic type.

Guidance note:Due precautions shall be taken in order to avoid cargo release on deck due to too low location of leakage check point.


8.2.6 Displacement pumps shall have relief valves with discharge to the suction line.

8.2.7 Cargo pumps shall be provided with remote shut down devices capable of being activated from adedicated cargo control location which is manned at the time of cargo transfer. Remote shut down shallalso to be capable of being activated from at least one other location outside the cargo area and at a safedistance from it.

8.2.8 The connecting coupling for the transfer hose shall be of a type which automatically closes atdisconnection (self-sealing type).

Part

6 C

hapt

er 5

Sec

tion

15


DNV GL AS

Means of quick-release of the transfer hose shall be provided, e.g. by installation of a weak link assemblyor by installation of a remotely controlled coupling. If a remote controlled coupling is arranged, the quick-release shall be capable of being effectuated from the bridge.

8.2.9 The minimum distance in [6.1.3] is also in general to be complied with for cargo piping.Remotely controlled isolation valves may be used in order to accommodate routing of cargo pipes closer toship side. It will not be accepted for the vent pipes.

8.3 Cargo heating system

8.3.1 The heating medium shall be compatible with the cargo and the temperature of the heating mediumshall not exceed 220°C.

8.3.2 The cargo heating system shall be arranged as a secondary system independent of other ship'sservices and not enter the engine room.

8.3.3 Where provided, heating or cooling systems shall be provided with valves to isolate the system foreach tank.

8.3.4 For any heating system, means shall be provided to ensure that, when in any other but the emptycondition, a higher pressure is maintained within the system than the maximum pressure head exerted bythe cargo tank content on the system.The heating circuit expansion tank shall be fitted with a gas detector or low level alarm and be vented toopen air.

8.3.5 Cargo heating pipes shall not penetrate the cargo tank boundaries other than from top of the tank.Guidance note:If cargo tanks are used as tanks for recovered oil, see also Sec.11


8.4 Cargo tank washing

8.4.1 There shall be installed permanent tank washing arrangements so that personell need not be subjectedto cargo vapours during cleaning operations.

8.4.2 Slop tanks and associated systems shall fulfill the requirements to cargo tank and it’s associatedsystems, except for requirements to tank location.

8.5 Ballast tanks

8.5.1 Filling or discharge of tanks within cargo area with ballast shall be carried out from the cargo pumproom, a similar hazardous space or from inside ballast tanks, except as permitted by [8.5.2].

8.5.2 Pumps, ballast lines, vent lines and other similar equipment serving permanent ballast tanks shouldbe independent of similar equipment serving cargo tanks and from cargo tanks themselves. Dischargearrangements for permanent ballast tanks sited immediately adjacent to cargo tanks should be outsideengine room and accommodation spaces. Filling arrangements may be in the engine room provided that sucharrangements ensure filling from tank deck level and non-return valves are fitted.

8.5.3 Filling of ballast in cargo tanks may be arranged from deck level by pumps serving permanent ballasttanks, provided that the filling line has no permanent connection to cargo tanks or piping and that non-returnvalves are fitted.

Part

6 C

hapt

er 5

Sec

tion

15


DNV GL AS

8.5.4 Suction for seawater to permanent ballast tanks shall not be arranged in the same sea chest as usedfor discharge of ballast water from cargo tanks.

Guidance note:Seawater suction should be arranged at the opposite side from the discharge of ballast water from cargo tanks.


8.5.5 Lines from engine room to ballast tanks outside of cargo area shall be carried outside cargo tanks.

9 Gas-freeing, inerting and venting of cargo tanks

9.1 Gas-freeing of cargo tanks

9.1.1 Gas freeing operations shall be carried out such that vapour is initially discharged in one of thefollowing ways:

1) Through outlets at least 2 m above the cargo tank deck level with a vertical efflux velocity of at least 30m/s maintained during the gas freeing operation; or

2) Through outlets at least 2 m above the cargo tank deck level with a vertical efflux velocity of at least 20m/s through outlets at least 2 m above the cargo tank deck level with a vertical efflux velocity of at least20 m/s.which are protected by suitable devices to prevent the passage of flame

Guidance note:Procedures to be included in the operation manual in 15.


9.1.2 Fixed gas freeing pipes with approved gas-freeing covers shall be provided (using fixed or portablefans from deck level). Location of gas freeing outlets shall be arranged in accordance with requirements forP/V-valve outlets.

Guidance note:Cofferdams, ballast tanks adjacent to toxic cargo tanks shall be arranged for portable mechanical ventilation to open deck.


9.2 Cargo tank venting system

9.2.1 The cargo tanks shall have a breathing system for relief of pressure and vacuum. Such breathing shallbe through P/V-valves (pressure/vacuum relief valves). The system shall comply with the requirements givenin Pt.5 Ch.6 Sec.9 [2.3].

9.2.2 Cargoes, which react in a hazardous manner with other cargoes, shall have separate tank ventingsystems.

9.2.3 The set point of the pressure side of the P/V-valves shall be set at minimum 0.6 bar.

9.2.4 Cargo tanks shall be provided with a vapour return line to enable loading with vapour return to shore.

9.2.5 Pressure audible and visual alarms at cargo control station and cargo area shall be installed, and to beactivated at 70% of P/V-valve opening to warn crew of imminent vapor release.

9.2.6 P/V-valve outlets and gas freeing shall be located outlets min. 3 m above deck or gangway/access wayfor personnel. This implies that the cargo rail top cannot be used as gang way on the side where P/V valveoutlets are located.

Part

6 C

hapt

er 5

Sec

tion

15


DNV GL AS

9.3 Inerting

9.3.1 There shall be a possibility to connect inert gas to the cargo tanks. The requirements for the inert gassystem are given in Sec.9 [4]. The cofferdams need not have such a connection unless required by Sec.9.

10 Ventilation system within the cargo area

10.1 General

10.1.1 The ventilation system shall comply with the requirements given in Pt.5 Ch.6 Sec.10. The followingrequirements may be relaxed after special consideration in each case:

— the height of the ventilation exhaust outlets from cargo handling spaces— requirements for Ex-equipment and spark generation will only be applicable when required by LFL-class

notations.

10.1.2 The working deck shall be arranged for natural ventilation as follows:

— the stern of the ship shall have a bulwark with a height of no more than 1.5 m towards the sea.— deck cargo shall be located forward of cargo area (toxic hazardous area).

For ships having superstructure aft of the cargo area, arrangement will be considered on a case-by-casebasis.

11 Fire extinction

11.1 Fire extinction

11.1.1 If carrying flammable chemicals, the vessel shall have a fixed foam fire extinguishing system forprotection of the cargo deck area.

Part

6 C

hapt

er 5

Sec

tion

15


DNV GL AS

11.2 Cargo area definitions11.2.1 Toxic cargo areaThe interiors of cargo tanks, slop tanks, any pipework of pressure-relief or other venting systems for cargoand slop tanks, pipes and equipment containing the cargo or developing toxic vapours. In addition, thefollowing is also considered as toxic areas:

1) Cofferdams adjacent to cargo tanks.2) Hold spaces containing independent cargo tanks.3) Cargo handling spaces.4) Enclosed spaces above or adjacent to cargo tanks.5) Areas on open deck, or semi- enclosed spaces on deck, within 4.5 m of any cargo tank outlet, gas or

vapour outlet, cargo manifold valve, cargo valve, cargo pipe flange, cargo pump-room ventilation outletsand cargo tank openings for pressure release provided to permit the flow of small volumes of gas orvapour mixtures caused by thermal variation.

6) Areas on open deck, or semi-enclosed spaces on open deck above and in the vicinity of any cargo gasoutlet intended for the passage of large volumes of gas or vapour mixture during cargo loading, within avertical cylinder of unlimited height and 15 m radius cantered upon the centre of the outlet, and within ahemisphere of 15 m radius below the outlet.

7) Areas on open deck, or semi-enclosed spaces on deck, within 1.5 m of cargo pump room entrances,cargo pump room ventilation inlet, openings into cofferdams or other hazardous spaces.

8) Areas on the open deck within spillage coamings surrounding cargo manifold valves and 3 m beyondthese, up to a height of 2.4 m above the deck.

9) Compartments for cargo hoses.10) Designated hose landing area on deck, as described in [8.1.5].11) Enclosed or semi-enclosed spaces in which pipes containing cargoes are located.

Guidance note:Areas on open deck within 3 m of cargo tank access openings for ships with cofferdams towards deck are not defined as hazardouszones. Safety precautions related to the use of such access openings in connection with gas freeing shall be covered in theoperation manual.


11.2.2 Spaces with access or opening located in hazardous area shall be considered as hazardous area.

12 Instrumentation and control system

12.1 General

12.1.1 Control systems for cargo valves and pumps shall comply with the requirements given in Pt.5 Ch.5Sec.9 [2].

12.2 Level gauging and level alarm

12.2.1 Each cargo tank shall be fitted with at least one level gauging device.Where only one gauging device is fitted, it shall be arranged so that any necessary maintenance can becarried out while the cargo tank is in service. If this is not possible, means for manual sounding shall beprovided.All means of level gauging shall of closed type as described in Pt.5 Ch.6 Sec.13 [2].

Part

6 C

hapt

er 5

Sec

tion

15


DNV GL AS

12.2.2 In addition each cargo tank shall be fitted with a high level alarm giving alarm at 95% filling byvolume. The alarm shall be activated by a level sensing device independent of the gauging device.

12.2.3 Cofferdams surrounding cargo tanks shall be fitted with leakage detection unless they are water filledwhen carrying cargo or fitted with gas detection. Alarms shall be provided at a manned control station.

12.2.4 Independent 95% alarm and 98% alarm will be required for cargoes requiring compliance with IBCcode 15.19.7.

12.3 Gas detection

12.3.1 Cofferdams surrounding cargo tanks shall be fitted with gas detection unless they are water filled orfitted with leakage detection. Alarm shall be provided at a manned control station.

12.3.2 The ship shall be equipped with at least two instruments designed and calibrated for testing for thespecific vapours in question.

12.3.3 Vapour-detection instruments may be portable or fixed. If a fixed system is installed, at least oneportable instrument shall be provided.

12.3.4 When toxic-vapour-detection equipment is not available for some products which require suchdetection, as indicated in column k in the table of chapter 17 in the IBC code, the administration may exemptthe ship from the requirement, provided an appropriate entry is made on the international certificate offitness for the carriage of dangerous chemicals in bulk. When granting such an exemption, the administrationshall recognize the necessity for additional breathing-air supply and an entry shall be made on theinternational certificate of fitness for the carriage of dangerous chemicals in bulk drawing attention to theprovisions of 14.2.4 and 16.4.2.2 in the IBC code.

13 Personnel protection

13.1 Protective equipment

13.1.1 For the protection of crew members who are engaged in loading and discharging operations, theship shall have on board suitable protective equipment consisting of large aprons, special gloves with longsleeves, suitable footwear, coveralls of chemical-resistant material, and tight-fitting goggles or face shields orboth. The protective clothing and equipment shall cover all skin so that no part of the body is unprotected.

13.1.2 Work clothes and protective equipment shall be kept in easily accessible places and in speciallockers. Such equipment shall not be kept within accommodation spaces, with the exception of new, unusedequipment and equipment which has not been used since undergoing a thorough cleaning process. TheAdministration may, however, approve storage rooms for such equipment within accommodation spaces ifadequately segregated from living spaces such as cabins, passageways, dining rooms, bathrooms, etc.

13.1.3 Protective equipment shall be used in any operation, which may entail danger to personnel.

13.2 Safety equipment

13.2.1 There shall be available sufficient but not less than three complete sets of safety equipment, eachpermitting personnel to enter a gas-filled compartment and perform work there for at least 20 min. Suchequipment shall be in addition to that required by SOLAS regulation II-2/10.10.

Part

6 C

hapt

er 5

Sec

tion

15


DNV GL AS

13.2.2 One complete set of safety equipment shall consist of:

1) one self-contained air-breathing apparatus (not using stored oxygen),2) protective clothing, boots, gloves and tight-fitting goggles,3) fireproof lifeline with belt resistant to the cargoes carried; and4) explosion-proof lamp.

13.2.3 For the safety equipment required in [13.2.1], all ships shall carry either:

1) one set of fully charged spare air bottles for each breathing apparatus,2) a special air compressor suitable for the supply of high-pressure air of the required purity,3) a charging manifold capable of dealing with sufficient spare air bottles for the breathing apparatus; or4) fully charged spare air bottles with a total free air capacity of at least 6,000 l for each breathing

apparatus on board in excess of the requirements of SOLAS regulation II-2/10.10.

13.2.4 A cargo pump-room on ships carrying cargoes which are subject to the requirements of 15.18 orcargoes for which in column k in the table of the IBC code chapter 17 toxic-vapour-detection equipment isrequired but is not available shall have either:

1) a low-pressure line system with hose connections suitable for use with the breathing apparatus requiredby [13.2.1]. This system shall provide sufficient high pressure air capacity to supply, through pressure-reduction devices, enough low pressure air to enable two men to work in a gas-dangerous space for atleast 1 h without using the air bottles of the breathing apparatus. Means shall be provided for rechargingthe fixed air bottles and the breathing apparatus air bottles from a special air compressor suitable for thesupply of high-pressure air of the required purity; or

2) an equivalent quantity of spare bottled air in lieu of the low-pressure air line.

13.2.5 At least one set of safety equipment as required by [13.2.2] shall be kept in a suitable clearly markedlocker in a readily accessible place near the cargo pump-room. The other sets of safety equipment shall alsobe kept in suitable, clearly marked, easily accessible places.

13.2.6 The breathing apparatus shall be inspected at least once a month by a responsible officer, and theinspection recorded in the ship' s log-book. The equipment shall be inspected and tested by an expert atleast once a year.

13.3 Emergency equipment

13.3.1 Ships carrying cargoes, for which "Yes" is indicated in column n of chapter 17 of the IBC code, shallbe provided with suitable respiratory and eye protection sufficient for every person on board for emergencyescape purposes, subject to the following:

1) filter-type respiratory protection is unacceptable2) self-contained breathing apparatus shall have at least a duration of service of 15 min3) emergency escape respiratory protection shall not be used for fire-fighting or cargo handling purposes

and shall be marked to that effect.

13.3.2 The ship shall have on board medical first-aid equipment, including oxygen resuscitation equipmentand antidotes for cargoes to be carried, based on the guidelines developed by the IMO*.* Reference is made to the Medical First Aid Guide for use in accidents involving dangerous goods (MFAG)which provides advice on the treatment of casualties in accordance with the symptoms exhibited as well asequipment and antidotes that may be appropriate for treating the casualty.

13.3.3 A stretcher which is suitable for hoisting an injured person up from spaces such as the cargo pump-room shall be placed in a readily accessible location.

Part

6 C

hapt

er 5

Sec

tion

15


DNV GL AS

13.3.4 Suitably marked decontamination showers and an eyewash shall be available on deck in convenientlocations. The showers and eyewash shall be operable in all ambient conditions.

14 LifeboatIn general, SOLAS III requirements as for a chemical tanker shall be followed for the ship in question.

Guidance note:Other equivalent arrangements need to be agreed upon with applicable flag state.


15 Signboards

15.1 General

15.1.1 Doors to accommodation and service spaces facing the cargo area shall be provided with signboardswith the following text:TO BE KEPT CLOSED DURING HANDLING OF TOXIC CARGOES

16 Operational instructions

16.1 General

16.1.1 An operation manual describing all essential procedures for handling of chemical cargoes shall beprepared. The manual is subject to approval and shall be kept on board.

16.1.2 Ship particularsCargo system:

— tank capacities— cargo handling system— cargo tank venting— cargo tank heating— pump room safety if applicable— cargo tank instrumentation— fire safety— gas detection.

Operations:

— assumptions— loading— voyage— discharging— cleaning and gas freeing (tank entry)— cofferdam safety— cargo area access plan— gas detection— cargo handling spaces safety.

Part

6 C

hapt

er 5

Sec

tion

15


DNV GL AS

Reference documents:

— general arrangement— capacity plan— cargo system— pressure/vacuum valves flow curves— cargo venting— mechanical ventilation cargo area— hazardous zones— fire extinguishing— bilge cargo area.

16.1.3 The following instructions shall be included in the operation manual as applicable:

— gas measurements shall be carried out regularly— doors to accommodation and service spaces facing the cargo area shall be kept closed during cargo

handling— dry cargo shall not be handled in cargo area forward of the superstructure— no simultaneous handling of dry cargo or liquid cargo not covered by this section shall be performed while

loading/unloading of the chemicals covered by these rules.

Part

6 C

hapt

er 5

Sec

tion

16


DNV GL AS

SECTION 16 OFFSHORE GANGWAY INSTALLATIONS - WALK2WORK

1 General

1.1 IntroductionThe additional class notation Walk2work set out requirements for offshore gangways installed on vessels.

1.2 ScopeThe additional class notations Walk2work provides requirements for offshore gangway systems with respectto:.

— safety and functionality— device for:

— locking the gangway in a parked position (vessel at sea)— supporting the gangway structure.

The offshore gangway shall be identified in the appendix to the classification certificate.

1.3 ApplicationThe additional class notation Walk2work applies to a specific offshore gangway system permanentlyinstalled on a vessel. See Pt.3 regarding requirements for the supporting structure. Vessels found to be incompliance with the requirements in this section may be assigned the additional class notation Walk2work.Four different types of offshore gangways are defined in DNVGL-ST-0358 Sec.1. Notation Walk2work isrelevant for vessels with offshore gangways of type 1 and 2, while the notation is not feasible for vessels withoffshore gangways of types 3 and 4.


1.4.1 For offshore gangways covered by class notation Walk2work, the builder shall request themanufacturers to order certification as described in Table 1.


Object Certificate type Issued by Certification standard

Offshore gangway PC Society DNVGL-ST-0358

1.4.2 For definition of certification types, see Pt.1 Ch.3.



Part

6 C

hapt

er 5

Sec

tion

16


DNV GL AS




Including:

— main dimensions— limiting positions of movable parts— location onboard during operation and in

parked position— design loads during operation and in

parked position— operational limitations including

significant wave height (Hs), wind, etc.

FI

H050 - Structural drawing

Showing:

— support of gangway within the vessel— securing devices for the gangway when it

is in parked position— design loads.

AP

H080 - Strength analysisCalculations documenting acceptablestresses in the supporting structures and thesea fastening arrangement

FI

E050 - Single line diagrams/consumer lists forswitchboards

Description covering all switchboards andtheir consumers, providing information onswitchboard connections, consumer ratings,cable dimensions and settings of protectivedevices

AP

E170 - Electrical schematicdrawing

Showing the configuration of the electricalcircuits. Information on protection,interlocks, undervoltage trips, remotecontrol circuits etc. shall be included ifrelevant

AP

Offshore gangway

E220 - Electrical systemphilosophy

— configuration of the system in alloperating modes and subsequent powerdistribution philosophy for differentvessel systems

— interlocks— system behavior in relevant failure

modes.

AP


Guidance note:Documentation requirements to electrical power supply are covered in Pt.4 Ch.8.




Part

6 C

hapt

er 5

Sec

tion

16


DNV GL AS

2 Hull

2.1 Support within the vessel

2.1.1 The gangway shall be secured to the hull structures when in parked position during transit.

2.1.2 The supporting structures within the vessel shall be designed to withstand the load combinationsspecified in DNVGL-ST-0358 Table 4-4 and DNVGL-ST-0358 Table 4-5.

2.1.3 For the operational load combinations (LC 1 and LC 2 in DNVGL-ST-0358 Table 4-4 and DNVGL-ST-0358 Table 4-5) the acceptance criteria shall be as given in Pt.3 Ch.11 Sec.2 [4.6].

2.1.4 The maximum operational accelerations shall either be taken according to Pt.3 Ch.4 Sec.3 or, forrestricted sea conditions, to be agreed in advance (e.g. based on a wave load analysis).

2.1.5 For the emergency disconnection load combination (LC 3 in DNVGL-ST-0358 Table 4-4 and DNVGL-ST-0358 Table 4-5) acceptance criteria AC-III in Pt.3 Ch.6 Sec.6 shall be applied.

2.1.6 For the parked/transit load combination (LC 4 in DNVGL-ST-0358 Table 4-4 and DNVGL-ST-0358 Table4-5) acceptance criteria AC-II in Pt.3 Ch.6 Sec.6 shall be applied (provided the loads are at 10-8 probabilitylevel).

2.1.7 The maximum transit/parked accelerations (i.e. for unrestricted sea conditions) shall not be taken lessthan given in Pt.3 Ch.4 Sec.3.

2.1.8 Due concern shall be taken with respect to horizontal forces and uplift forces at the connectionbetween the gangway and the vessel. Doublers shall be avoided where uplift forces may occur.

3 Testing

3.1 GeneralAfter completed installation onboard, functional testing and load testing of the gangway and its supportingstructures shall be carried out as specified in DNVGL-ST-0358 in presence of DNV GL surveyor.

4 Stability

4.1 ApplicationThe intact and damage stability criteria applicable to the ship shall be complied with at all times when thegangway is in use. This includes the main class requirements in Pt.3 Ch.15, the statutory intact and damagestability requirements and optional class notations when applicable. The stability shall be assessed when thegangway is in the most unfavorable position with respect to transverse heeling moment.

5 Station keeping

5.1 GeneralThe vessels shall have station keeping ability by dynamic positioning systems or position mooring systems.For vessels with dynamic positioning system, class notation DPS(1) or higher is mandatory.

Part

6 C

hapt

er 5

Sec

tion

16


DNV GL AS

Guidance note:For relevant dynamic positioning class notations, see Ch.3. DPS(1) is equivalent to IMO MSC/Circ 645 Guidelines for vessels withdynamic positioning systems, equipment class 1.


5.2 CapabilityThe position keeping ability of the vessel shall be according to DNVGL-ST-0111 Assessment of stationkeeping capability of dynamic positioning vessels.

Part

6 C

hapt

er 5

Sec

tion

17


DNV GL AS

SECTION 17 ANCHORING IN DEEP AND UNSHELTERED WATER -ADW

1 General

1.1 ObjectiveThe purpose of the additional class notation ADW is to demonstrate the vessels capability for anchoring indeep and unsheltered waters.

1.2 ScopeThe scope of the additional class notation ADW is to provide requirements for the anchoring equipment forvessels intended to anchor in deep and unsheltered water.

1.3 ApplicationThe additional class notation ADW indicates that the vessel is designed to anchor in deep and unshelteredwater. Assumed conditions are as follows:

— water depth up to 120 m— current up to 1.54 m/s— wind up to 14 m/s— waves with significant height of up to 3 m— wind, current, and waves from ahead and acting in the same direction.Furthermore, these requirements are applicable to ships with a rule length of not less than 135 m.

Guidance note:For comparison, the minimum requirements to anchoring equipment, see Pt.3 Ch.11 Sec.1, assume by default an anchoring depthnot more than 82.5 m for the capacity of the windlass and anchoring depth limited by minimum scope of chain cable of 6 for theanchor holding power. In addition, the environmental conditions are less severe with current up to 1.54 m/s and a maximum windspeed of 11 m/s in combination with a maximum significant wave height of 2 m.


1.4 Class notations1.4.1 ADWShips built in compliance with the requirements as specified in Table 1 will be assigned the additional notationrelated to anchoring in deep water.

Part

6 C

hapt

er 5

Sec

tion

17


DNV GL AS

Table 1 Additional class notation related to deep water anchoring - ADW

Class Notation Qualifier Purpose Application

ADW

Mandatory:

No


[3]

FiS requirements:

N.A.

<None>

Ships intended foranchoring in deepand unshelteredwater

2 Documentation

2.1 Documentation requirements2.1.1 ADWDocumentation shall be submitted as required by Table 2.

Table 2 Documentation requirements for class notation ADW


Anchoring arrangement H100 – Equipment numbercalculation

Equipment number calculation fordeep and unsheltered waters inaccordance with [3]

AP

AP = For approval; FI = For information ACO = As carried out; L = Local handling; R = On request; TA = Covered bytype approval; VS = Vessel specific

For general requirements for documentation, including definition of the info codes, see Pt.1 Ch.3 Sec.1.For a full definition of the documentation types, see Pt.1 Ch.3 Sec.3.

3 Design requirements

3.1 Equipment Number for deep and unsheltered waterAnchors and chain cables shall be in accordance with Table 3 and based on the Equipment Number ENDWobtained from the following equation:

where:a = 1.83·10-9 L3 + 2.09·10-6 L2 - 6.21·10-4 L + 0.0866b = 0.156 L + 8.372

Part

6 C

hapt

er 5

Sec

tion

17


DNV GL AS

L = rule lengthEN = equipment number calculated according to Pt.3 Ch.11 Sec.1 [3.1].

Table 3 Anchoring equipment for ships with ADW notation

High holding powerstockless bower anchor Stud link chain cable for bower anchors

Min. diameterEquipmentnumber ENDW

NumberMass per anchor

(kg)Length

(m) VL K2(mm)

VL K3(mm)

up to 1789 2 14150 1017.5 105 84

1790 to 1929 2 14400 990 105 84

1930 to 2079 2 14800 990 105 84

2080 to 2229 2 15200 990 105 84

2230 to 2379 2 15600 990 105 84

2380 to 2529 2 16000 990 105 84

2530 to 2699 2 16300 990 105 84

2700 to 2869 2 16700 990 105 84

2870 to 3039 2 17000 990 105 84

3040 to 3209 2 17600 990 105 84

3210 to 3399 2 18000 990 105 84

3400 to 3599 2 18300 990 105 84

3600 to 3799 2 19000 990 107 87

3800 to 3999 2 19700 962.5 107 87

4000 to 4199 2 20300 962.5 111 90

4200 to 4399 2 21100 962.5 114 92

4400 to 4599 2 22000 962.5 117 95

4600 to 4799 2 22900 962.5 120 97

4800 to 4999 2 23500 962.5 124 99

5000 to 5199 2 24000 935 127 102

5200 to 5499 2 24500 907.5 132 107

5500 to 5799 2 25000 907.5 132 107

5800 to 6099 2 25400 880 137 111

6100 to 6499 2 25600 880 142 114

6500 to 6899 2 25900 852.5 142 117

6900 to 7399 2 26400 852.5 147 117

7400 to 7899 2 26900 825 152 122

Part

6 C

hapt

er 5

Sec

tion

17


DNV GL AS

High holding powerstockless bower anchor Stud link chain cable for bower anchors

Min. diameterEquipmentnumber ENDW

NumberMass per anchor

(kg)Length

(m) VL K2(mm)

VL K3(mm)

7900 to 8399 2 27400 825 127

8400 to 8899 2 27900 797.5 127

8900 to 9399 2 28900 770 132

9400 to 9999 2 29300 770 137

10000 to 10699 2 29900 770 142

10700 to 11499 2 30600 770 142

11500 to 12399 2 31500 770 147

12400 to 13399 2 33100 770 152

13400 to 14600 2 35000 770 157

above 14600 2 38000 770 162

3.2 Anchors

3.2.1 The bower anchors shall be connected to their chain cables and positioned on board ready for use.

3.2.2 Anchors shall be of the stockless high holding power (H.H.P.) type.

3.2.3 The mass of the head of a stockless anchor, including pins and fittings, shall not be less than 60% ofthe total mass of the anchor. The requirements for H.H.P. anchors are given in Pt.3 Ch.11 Sec.1 [4.1].The mass, per anchor, of bower anchors given in Table 3 is for anchors of equal mass. The mass of individualanchors may vary to 7% of the tabular mass, but the total mass of anchors shall not be less than thatrecommended for anchors of equal mass.

3.2.4 For manufacture of anchors, see Pt.3 Ch.11 Sec.1 [4.4].

3.2.5 Proof testing of the anchors shall be in accordance with Pt.3 Ch.11 Sec.1 [4.5] and Pt.3 Ch.11 Sec.1[4.6].

3.3 Chain cables for bower anchors

3.3.1 Bower anchors shall be accompanied with stud link chain cables of VL K2 or VL K3 quality. The totallength of chain cable, as given in Table 3, shall be reasonably divided between the two bower anchors. Theproof and breaking loads of stud link chain cables shall be in accordance with Pt.3 Ch.11 Sec.1 Table 6.

3.3.2 For manufacture of anchor chain cables, see Pt.3 Ch.11 Sec.1 [5.2].

3.3.3 For the installation of the chain cables on board, Pt.3 Ch.11 Sec.1 [2.1] shall be applied.

Part

6 C

hapt

er 5

Sec

tion

17


DNV GL AS

3.4 Anchor windlass and chain stopper

3.4.1 Anchor windlass design and testing and the chain stopper design shall be in accordance with Pt.3Ch.11 Sec.1 [6].

3.4.2 In addition to these requirements, the windlass unit prime mover shall be able to supply for at least 30minutes a continuous duty pull Zcont, in N, given by:Zcont = 35 d2 + 13.4 mA

where:d = chain diameter, in mm, as per Table 3mA = H.H.P. anchor mass, in kg, as per Table 3.

3.4.3 In addition to the requirements according to Pt.3 Ch.11 Sec.1 [6], as far as practicable, for testingpurpose the speed of the chain cable during hoisting of the anchor and cableshall be measured over 37.5m of chain cable and initially with at least 120 m of chain and the anchor submerged and hanging free. Themean speed of the chain cable during hoisting of the anchor from the depth of 120 m to the depth of 82.5 mis to be at least 4.5 m/min.

3.4.4 Hull supporting structure of anchor windlass and chain stopper shall be in accordance with Pt.3 Ch.11Sec.2 [2].

Part

6 C

hapt

er 5

Sec

tion

18


DNV GL AS

SECTION 18 SPECIALLY CONSTRUCTED CARGO SHIPS FOR BULKCARGO LIQUEFACTION - BCLIQ

1 Introduction

1.1 Objective

1.1.1 The additional class notation BCLIQ is intended for vessel which carry solid bulk cargo that mayliquefy during a voyage if shipped at a moisture level exceeding the transportable moisture limit of the cargo.

1.2 Scope

1.2.1 The scope for the additional class notation BCLIQ provides requirements for stability and hullstrength.

1.3 Application

1.3.1 The additional class notation BCLIQ is applicable to ships designed for carrying solid bulk cargo thatmay liquefy during a voyage if shipped at a moisture content in excess of their transportable moisture limit.

Guidance note:It is subject to the Flag Administration's decision for compliance with the requirements to specially constructed cargo shipsaccording to the IMSBC Code. The Society will issue a certificate accordingly, if authorised by the Administration.


1.4 Class notations

1.4.1 Ships complying with the requirements given in this section will be assigned the additional classnotation BCLIQ, with the qualifier either Cat1 or Cat2, as specified in Table 1.

Table 1 Additional class notation - BCLIQ


Cat1Ships strengthened forliquefaction in designcategory 1 group A cargo.

BCLIQ

Mandatory:

Yes


[3] , [4] , [5]

FiS requirements:

NA

Cat2Ships strengthened forliquefaction in designcategory 2 group A cargo.

BCLIQ with one ofqualifiers, either Cat1 orCat2, is mandatory for shipsintended for the carriageof solid bulk cargo shippedat a moisture content inexcess of its transportablemoisture limit which mayliquefy during a voyage.

1.5 Definitions and symbolsDefinitions1.5.1 Definitions used specially in this section are given in Table 2.

Part

6 C

hapt

er 5

Sec

tion

18


DNV GL AS

Table 2 Definitions

solid bulk cargoany cargo, other than a liquid or a gas, consisting of a combination of particles, granules orany larger pieces of material generally uniform in composition which is loaded directly intothe cargo spaces of a ship without any intermediate form of containment

group A cargo any solid bulk cargo which may liquefy if shipped at a moisture content in excess of theirtransportable moisture limit, as defined in the IMSBC Code

moisture content the portion of a representative sample consisting of water, ice or other liquid expressed asa percentage of the total wet mass of that sample

transportable moisture limit the maximum moisture content of the cargo which is considered safe for carriage in ships

category 1 group A cargo in the context of these rules, a category 1 cargo is a group A cargo which will resettle in astable state after a liquefaction incident

category 2 group A cargo in the context of these rules, a category 2 cargo is a group A cargo which will not resettlein a stable state after a liquefaction incident

Guidance note:The category 1 group A cargo is a group A cargo with mixture of fine and large particles. Liquefaction for this cargo is due to theincreased pore water pressure between the particles, when the cargo is compacted and the pore pressure is large enough to pressthe particles apart and consequently the shear strength of the material is lost. Liquefaction is most likely to occur shortly afterdeparture. Usually only parts of the cargo will be liquefied at the same time, leading in most cases to partial liquefaction. Theliquefied state is a transient state that normally lasts for a limited time. After a while the cargo settles into a more compact state,with less possibility for liquefaction again.The category 2 group A cargo is a group A cargo with very fine, clay-like material. Liquefaction for this cargo can be seen as"fatigue" of the material, when the cohesion and the strength of the material are suddenly significantly reduced after a numberof stress cycles due to ship motions, wave impacts and other vibrations. Liquefaction may occur several days or weeks afterdeparture. Liquefaction may happen for all the cargo on board simultaneously. It is also very difficult to stabilize the cargo afterliquefaction.


1.5.2 SymbolsFor symbols not defined in this section, see Pt.3 Ch.1 Sec.4 [2].ρBCLIQ = density of design group A cargo, in t/m3.VFULL = as defined in Pt.5 Ch.1 Sec.2.

2 Documentation





B050 - Preliminary stabilitymanual

Preliminary, additional loading conditions to documentcompliance with the requirements given in[4] AP

Stability

B120 - Final stability manual Final, additional loading conditions to documentcompliance with the requirements given in[4]

AP,VS

Part

6 C

hapt

er 5

Sec

tion

18


DNV GL AS


I270 - Test conditionsPreliminary, additional loading conditions to documentfunctionality in the software for the evaluation of therequirements given in[4]

AP

Loading computer

I270 - Test conditionsFinal, additional loading conditions to documentfunctionality in the software for the evaluation of therequirements given in[4]

AP,VS

AP = For approval; FI = For information; ACO = As carried out; L = Local handling; R = On request; TA = Covered bytype approval; VS = Vessel specific

For general requirements for documentation, including definition of the info codes, see Pt.1 Ch.3 Sec.1. For afull definition of the documentation types, see Pt.1 Ch.3 Sec.3.

3 General requirements

3.1 General

3.1.1 The requirements in this section for liquefied design group A cargo shall be complied with, in additionto requirements for such cargo as solid bulk cargo given in Pt.3, Pt.5 and Pt.6 as applicable.

3.1.2 For the design group A cargo, the categorisation into category 1 group A cargo and category 2 groupA cargo shall be agreed with the Society.

Guidance note:Iron ore fines is a typical example for category 1 group A cargo.Nickel ore and Bauxite fines are typical examples for category 2 group A cargo.


3.2 Design scenario

3.2.1 The ships shall be designed with consideration to liquefied design group A cargo for the following twoscenarios, for which the detailed requirements are further given in this section,

1) liquefaction, where the cargo acts as a dense, viscous fluid2) shifting, where the cargo slides during heavy rolling.

Part

6 C

hapt

er 5

Sec

tion

18


DNV GL AS

Figure 1 Liquefaction (left) and shifting (right)

4 Stability

4.1 Design cargo characteristics4.1.1 Stability manualIn the stability manual, the cargo characteristics for each design group A cargo, including the cargo names aslisted in the IMSBC Code and the design cargo density, shall be stated.In addition, in the stability manual, the following sentence shall be included: "Any group A cargo as listed inthe IMSBC Code, other than design group A cargo for this ship, shall not be shipped at a moisture content inexcess of its transportable moisture limit."

Guidance note:The cargo characteristics for each design group A cargo, including the cargo names as listed in the IMSBC Code and the designcargo density, will be stated in the appendix to the classification certificate.


4.2 Loading conditions4.2.1 Stability manualFor the liquefied design group A cargo, the loading conditions for the design scenarios in [3.2] shall beincluded in the stability manual and shall be in compliance with the additional requirements as given in [4.3]and [4.4], as applicable.

4.2.2 Loading computerThe ship shall be equipped with a loading computer capable of verifying the design scenarios and additionalrequirements as given in [4.3] and [4.4], as applicable.

4.3 Intact stability4.3.1 Liquefaction scenarioIn the liquefaction scenario, each design group A cargo shall be assumed to be a liquid and full free surfaceof the cargo shall be considered. The stability for this scenario shall be in compliance with the IMO IntactStability Code Part A Ch. 2.

Part

6 C

hapt

er 5

Sec

tion

18


DNV GL AS

4.3.2 Shifting scenarioIn the shifting scenario, each design group A cargo shall be assumed to shift at an angle of 25 degrees,creating a fixed heeling moment. The stability for this scenario shall be in compliance with the requirementsof Section 7 of IMO Resolution MSC.23(59), International Code for the Safe Carriage of Grain in Bulk.


4.4.1 For ships with class notation BCLIQ(Cat1), damage stability is not required for the additional loadingconditions with liquefied design group A cargoes.

4.4.2 Ships with class notation BCLIQ(Cat2) shall, assuming each design category 2 group A cargo inliquefied state with free surface of all loaded cargo holds, comply with a GM limit curve calculated basedon the damage stability requirements of SOLAS (2009) Reg. II-1/6 to 7-3, Reg. II-1/9.8 and Reg. XII/4 asapplicable.For ships with reduced freeboard, the GM limit curve shall be based on the above listed requirements ofSOLAS with deepest subdivision draught assumed at the assigned reduced freeboard. The GM used todemonstrate compliance with the damage stability requirements of Regulation 27 of the InternationalConvention on Load Lines shall be the same as that applied at the deepest subdivision draught in the limitcurve calculation.

5 Hull strength

5.1 Cargo pressure

5.1.1 The cargo pressure due to liquefied design group A cargo for hull strength assessment shall becalculated according to [5.1.2] or [5.1.3] as applicable.

5.1.2 For ships with class notation BCLIQ(Cat1), the liquefied design group A cargo pressure shall becalculated according to partially filled hold as given in Pt.5 Ch.1 Sec.2 [3], Pt.5 Ch.1 Sec.4 [3] and Ch.1Sec.5 [3] as applicable, based on following inputs:

— The angle of repose is taken as 0 degrees.— The design density ρBCLIQ is used.

In cases where ships are designed to carry more than one design group A cargo, the design density ρBCLIQshall be taken as the minimum of all design group A cargo that shall be loaded to maximum cargo massaccording to hold mass curves.

Guidance note:The design density, ρBCLIQ, in t/m3, will be given in the appendix to the classification certificate.


Guidance note:If design group A cargo is loaded to in any hold to the maximum cargo mass according to the hold mass curves, a smaller cargodensity results in larger loading height and more lateral loads on non-horizontal structures, e.g., bulkhead, and is therefore moreconservative for hull strength assessment.


5.1.3 For ships with class notation BCLIQ(Cat2), the liquefied design group A cargo pressure shall becalculated according to Pt.3 Ch.4 Sec.6 [1], based on the following input:

— The cargo holds are considered as cargo tanks.— Highest point of cargo tanks is taken to the main deck level at ship's centre line.— The design density ρBCLIQ is used.

Part

6 C

hapt

er 5

Sec

tion

18


DNV GL AS

— Static liquid pressure is calculated as for other cases, with P0=0.— Reference point is considered excluding the space enclosed by hatch coaming.

The design density ρBCLIQ shall be taken as:

(1)

Where:M= maximum cargo mass at TSC , in t, according to hold mass curves for each hold.

Guidance note:The design density, ρBCLIQ, in t/m3, for each cargo hold, will be given in the appendix to the classification certificate.


5.2 Hull local scantling

5.2.1 Additional design load sets for liquefied design group A cargo shall be taken according to Pt.5 Ch.1Sec.2 [5.1] as follows:

— partially filled or fully filled loading condition for plating and stiffeners,— full load condition, and loading/unloading in harbour, for primary supporting members.

5.2.2 For hull structures subject to lateral pressure induced by liquefied design group A cargo, followingrequirements shall be complied with for additional design load sets given in [5.2.1]:

— Pt.3 Ch.6 Sec.4 [1] for plating,— Pt.3 Ch.6 Sec.5 [1] for stiffeners,— Pt.3 Ch.6 Sec.6 [2] for primary supporting members, if not assessed in accordance with requirements for

finite element analysis,— Pt.3 Ch.6 Sec.7 for stiffener connections,— Pt.3 Ch.13 Sec.1 for welding.

5.3 Hull Girder Buckling5.3.1 Prescriptive requirementThe hull girder buckling requirements given in Pt.3 Ch.8 Sec.3 shall be complied with for additional designload sets given in [5.2.1], for plating, stiffeners and overall stiffened panels.The partial safety factor S shall be selected as if solid bulk cargo is loaded in cargo holds.

5.4 Finite element analysis5.4.1 Strength assessmentThe finite element analysis shall be carried out according to Pt.3 Ch.7, Pt.5 Ch.1 and Ch.1 as applicable,including additional load combinations for liquefied design group A cargo. These additional load combinationscontain all cargo load combinations where liquefied design group A cargo are loaded in lieu of solid bulkcargo. The yielding and buckling assessment shall be carried out in accordance with Pt.3 Ch.7 Sec.3 [4] andPt.3 Ch.8 Sec.4.

5.4.2 Corrugated bulkheadThe yielding and buckling assessment for corrugation of corrugated bulkhead, as a part of the strengthassessment given in [5.4.1], shall be carried out complying with the criteria as under lateral pressure fromliquid loads, see Pt.3 Ch.7 Sec.3 [4] and Pt.3 Ch.8 Sec.1 [3.4].

Part

6 C

hapt

er 5

Sec

tion

19


DNV GL AS

SECTION 19 TRANSPORTATION OF VEHICLES LOADED AS RO-ROCARGO- RO-RO

1 General

1.1 ObjectiveThe additional class notation RO/RO provides a design standard for vessels designed and arranged for roll-onand roll-off cargo handling and transportation of rolling vehicles, in addition to other main purpose.Typical RO/RO cargo is cars, trucks, dumpers, containers, road trailers and MAFI trailers. The vessel isloaded either by use of the cargo's own engine power or by use of special loading and un-loading vehicles.

1.2 ScopeThe scope for additional class notation RO/RO includes requirements to internal decks, RO/RO equipment(such as internal and external ramps, ramp covers and movable car decks, if fitted), racking strength (ULSand FLS) and securing points for lashing.

1.3 ApplicationThe additional class notation RO/RO is applicable to ships designed and arranged for roll-on and roll-offcargo handling and transportation of rolling vehicles, other than RO/RO ships and car carriers, and will beassigned the notation RO/RO when the vessel is found to be in compliance with the requirements in thissection.

Guidance note:For combination vessels with the purpose of loading and unloading roll-on and roll-off cargo in part of the vessel in addition tocontainers, normally referred to as ConRo ships, the assigned class notation may be Container ship RO/RO


1.4 Class notation1.4.1 Additional notation - design and survey requirementsShips built in compliance with the requirements as specified in Sec.1 Table 1 will be assigned the additionalclass notation as follows:

Table 1 Additional class notation RO/RO

Class notation Description Application Design and surveyrequirements

RO/RO Designed and arranged for roll-on and roll-off cargo

Ships with class notationother than RO/RO shipand Car carrier

Design: [2.1.1], Sec.1[5.1.1] and Sec.2Survey: NA

1.5 Documentation1.5.1 Documentation requirementsDocumentation shall be submitted as required by Pt.5 Ch.3 Sec.1 Table 4 .

Part

6 C

hapt

er 5

Sec

tion

19


DNV GL AS

1.6 Certification1.6.1 Certification requirementsProducts shall be certified as required by Pt.5 Ch.3 Sec.1 Table 5.

2 Racking

2.1 GeneralThe required scope for racking analysis will be basd on a case-by-case consideration depending on the shiptype, the design and extent of the cargo hold for RO/RO cargo.

2.2 ScopeSee Pt.5 Ch.3 Sec.2 [1.2].A simplified 2D racking analysis of a web frame section may be sufficient for designs falling into category Idefined in Pt.5 Ch.3 Sec.2 [1.2.1], as the web frames will be self-supporting with respect to racking.

3 Primary supporting members

3.1 StrengthThe primary supporting members in RO/RO cargo area shall be designed based on loads and load patternsgiven in Pt.5 Ch.3 Sec.2 [3.3], with the acceptance criteria given in Pt.5 Ch.3 Sec.2 [5.2] and Pt.5 Ch.3 Sec.2[6.2] for beam analysis and FE analysis, respectively.

3.2 Local scantlingsLocal scantling requirements for the primary supporting members are given in Pt.5 Ch.3 Sec.2 [4.1].

4 BucklingBuckling shall be assessed according to Pt.5 Ch.3 Sec.2 [7].

5 Strengthening for wheel loadingStrengthening for wheel loading shall be assessed according to Pt.3 Ch.10 Sec.5.

6 Special strength considerationsFor special strength considerations, see Pt.5 Ch.3 Sec.2 [4.3].

7 RO/RO equipmentThe RO/RO equipment shall be designed according to Pt.5 Ch.3 Sec.2 [9].

8 Securing points for lashingSecuring points for lashing shall be designed according to the requirements given in Pt.5 Ch.3 Sec.2 [4.2].

Part

6 C

hapt

er 5

Sec

tion

20


DNV GL AS

SECTION 20 GAS POWER PLANTS

1 General

1.1 Objective

1.1.1 These rules provide requirements for vessels arranged with a gas fired power plant for the productionof and export of electrical energy. The objective of these rules is to give relevant requirements for the safetyof the total power plant installation.

1.2 Scope

1.2.1 The scope of these rules is to give safety requirements related to the total power plant installationonboard. The total gas system/installation, from gas bunkering to an end gas consumer onboard. The totalelectrical system/installation, from electrical power generation to the power export/transfer system onboard.The monitoring, control and safety systems for both gas and electrical systems/ installations are an integralpart of the rules. The scope when adding the qualifier Performance is additionally to provide performancerequirements for the rated electrical power delivered from the power plant.The bunkering processes and crew training are not part of the scope for this section of the rules.

1.3 Application

1.3.1 The additional class notation Gas power plant applies to vessels equipped with gas fired power plantsfor production and export of electrical energy. Such installations may differ in arrangements and equipmentand may be subject to adjustments to suit the installation.The requirements in this section are additional to the requirements given in following rules:

— Pt.5 Ch.7 Tanker for liquefied Gas or,— Pt.5 Ch.11 Non-Self propelled vessels or— DNVGL-RU-OU-0103 Rules for Classification of Offshore units Floating LNG/LPG production, storage and

loading units.

This section provides requirements for features that are relevant for a gas power plant vessel due to theiroperation and which are not covered by the above notations. It applies to installations using gas as fuel.This includes internal combustion engines, boilers and gas turbines. The installations may run on gas onlyor be dual fuel installations. Gas may be stored in a gaseous or liquefied state. The rules are applicable forinstallations where natural gas is used as fuel. If other gases are used as fuel, special considerations will bemade, and additional requirements may be relevant.

Guidance note:Gas power plant vessels are not covered by international conventions, and may need additional acceptance by flag authorities.The power export arrangements may need additional agreement with the port administration.


1.4 Class notations1.4.1 Gas power plantVessels having gas power plants shall comply with relevant requirements given in [1] to [7], and will beassigned the mandatory class notation Gas power plant and optional qualifiers as defined in Table 1.

Part

6 C

hapt

er 5

Sec

tion

20


DNV GL AS

Table 1 Gas power plant


<None> Vessels arranged with a gasfired power plant for theproduction and export ofelectrical energy

Performance Additional performancerequirements related tothe rated electrical powerdelivered from the powerplant

Optional qualifier for Gaspower plant

P Rated electrical power(P[MW]) delivered from thepower plant

Optional qualifier whenPerformance is assigned

V Supply voltage (V[kV])delivered from the powerplant


Gas power plant

Mandatory:

Yes

Design Requirements:

Pt.6 Ch.5 Sec 20

FiS survey requirements:Pt.7 Ch.1 Sec.2, 3, and 4

f Supply frequency (f[Hz])delivered from the powerplant


Guidance note:An example of a class notation for a vessel with qualifiers for enhanced performance will be as follows: 1A Gas powerplant(Performance, 2 MW, 3 kV, 50 Hz).


1.5 Terms and definitions

1.5.1 Reference is made to definitions in rules for gas fuelled installations Ch.2 Sec.5 Table 1Except where explicitly provided otherwise, the following additional definitions apply to this section:

Table 2 Terms and Definitions

Term Definitions

accommodationspaces

those spaces used for public spaces, corridors, lavatories, cabins, offices, hospitals, cinemas,game and hobby rooms barber shops, pantries containing no cooking appliances and similarspaces

bunkering the transfer of liquefied or gaseous fuel from land based or floating facilities into a ships'permanent tanks or connection of portable tanks to the fuel supply system

connection point the point at which the power plant is connected to the grid of the grid operator (generally thepoint where the circuit breaker, meter and protection relays are installed)

control station those spaces defined in SOLAS chapter II-2 and in the context of these rules, also the enginecontrol room

blow down depressurization to specified limit within a given time period

Part

6 C

hapt

er 5

Sec

tion

20


DNV GL AS

Term Definitions

enclosed space

any space which, in the absence of artificial ventilation, the ventilation will be limited and anyexplosive atmosphere will not be dispersed naturally

Guidance note:Ref. IEC 60092-502:1999


ERS emergency release system - system that provides means of quick release of transfer connectionsand safe isolation of the vessel and the approaching tanker for liquefied gas

ESDemergency shut-down system shall stop fuel liquid and vapour flow in the event of an emergencyand to bring the fuel handling system and power plant to a safe, static condition. Isolation ofuncertified ignition sources to be automatically carried out

fault ride through fault ride through (FRT) means surviving any fault possible in electrical systems includingovervoltage ride through and undervoltage ride through.

fuel natural gas, either in its liquefied or gaseous state

gas defined as a fluid having a vapour pressure exceeding 2.8 bar absolute at a temperature of37.8°C

gas control systems providing control and monitoring for bunkering, gas storage and gas supply to machinery

gas process area an area where gas is processed, (including where liquefied gas is handled)

grid codea document that sets out the procedures and requirements relating to the activities ofconnection, management, planning, development and maintenance of the national electricaltransmission and distribution grid, as well as dispatching and metering. etc.

GVU enclosure space or box containing valves for control and regulation of gas supply before the consumer

open decka deck that is open at one or both ends and equipped with adequate natural ventilation that iseffective over the entire length of the deck through permanent openings distributed in the sidepanels or in the deck above

own power electric power distribution for the power plant vessel itself. (Not including the power plant forpower export)

power plant electric installation onboard the vessel, used for power production for export.

process pressurevessel pressure vessel in the process plant which during the normal operation will contain fuel or gas

PSD process shut-down – Isolation of one or more process segments by closing designated shutdownvalves and tripping equipment

service spacesspaces outside the cargo area used for galleys, pantries containing cooking appliances, lockers,mail and specie rooms, store rooms, workshops other than those forming part of the machineryspaces and similar spaces and trunks to such spaces

SF6 sulphur hexafluoride - An inorganic, colorless, odorless, non-flammable, potent greenhouse gas,and excellent electrical isolator

process utility deck areas for combustion equipment, power generation, switchboards, boiler, facilities, workshops,storage areas and general machinery

storage tank deck deck, or part of a deck, which forms the top of a product storage tank

laydown area area on deck that is for the receipt by crane operations, storage and partial assembly of processequipment

Part

6 C

hapt

er 5

Sec

tion

20


DNV GL AS

Term Definitions

shuttle tanker ship offloading/ supplying gas as cargo to the to the floating gas power plant vessel

risk assessment systematic evaluation of safety involving identification and evaluation of hazards and events thatcould result in loss of life, property damage, environmental damage, or the need to evacuate

1.6 Documentation1.6.1 Documentation requirements

1.6.1.1 Documentation shall be submitted as required by Table 3.



Z050 – Design philosophy

Including information on the machinery configuration,machinery space arrangements, fuel arrangements, shutdown philosophy, redundancy considerations, etc. shall besubmitted before other documentation, to give support forapproval of these

FI

G010 – Risk analysis Risk assessment report as given in [3.2.1.1] FI

G120 – Escape routedrawing FI

Z253 - Test procedure forquay and sea trial AP

Arrangements,general

Z030 – Arrangement plan

Including:

— machinery and boiler spaces, accommodation, serviceand control station spaces

— fuel containment systems— fuel preparation rooms— fuel bunkering pipes with shore connections— tank hatches, vent pipes and any other openings to the

fuel tanks— ventilating pipes, doors and openings to fuel preparation

rooms, and other hazardous areas— entrances, air inlets and openings to accommodation,

service and control station spaces.— power export arrangement

AP

Z160 - Operation manual [1.2.2] AP

Z240 – Calculation report Explosion analysis (ESD protected machinery spaces) FIFuel gas system

C030 – Detailed drawing Gastight bulkhead penetrations AP

Part

6 C

hapt

er 5

Sec

tion

20


DNV GL AS


C030 – Detailed drawing

— tanks— supports and stays— secondary barriers— insulation— marking plates— tank connection space— tank hatches, pipes and any openings to the gas tanks.

AP

C040 – Design analysis

— design loads and structural analysis of fuel tanks— complete stress analysis for independent tanks type B

and type C— membrane tanks

FI

H080 – Strength analysis Sloshing assessment, if relevant AP

H130 – Fabricationspecification Building tolerances AP

S070 – Pipe strengthanalysis

Strength analysis of piping inside outer tank (vacuuminsulated tank)

S080 – Thermal stressanalysis When design temperature is below -110°C. FI

C050 – NondestructiveTesting (NDT) plan

Including

— NDT procedures— information about strength and tightness testing

AP

Z265 - Calculation report Holding time calculation when pressure accumulation isused as boil off gas handling method FI

Z265 - Calculation report Filling limit curve FI

M060 – Welding procedures(WPS) AP

M010 – Materialspecifications, metals

Including connected pipes

— forming procedure of dished ends— specification of stress relieving procedures for

independent tanks type C (thermal or mechanical)

FI

Z030 – Arrangement plan Overview of tanks with all tank connections and tankconnection space FI

Z250 – Procedure Cooling down AP

C030 – Detailed drawing Safety relief valves and associated vent piping AP

S030 – Capacity analysis Safety relief valves and associated vent piping. Includingback pressure AP

Z100 – Specification Safety relief valves and associated vent piping AP

Fuel gas tanks

S010 – Piping diagram (PD) Gas freeing and purging system. Including vent lines forsafety relief valves or similar piping, and ducts for gas pipes AP

Part

6 C

hapt

er 5

Sec

tion

20


DNV GL AS



Functionality as required by [6] APFuel gas control andmonitoring system

I260 – Field instrumentsperiodic test plan AP


Functionality as required by [6] AP

G180 – Shutdown hierarchy AP

G130 – Cause and effectdiagram

— shall cover the safety functions as required by Table 7 -Gas detection alarms

— interfaces to other safety and control systems shall beincluded

FI

Gas safety systems

C030 – Detailed drawing Insulation of low temperature piping FI

S010 – Piping diagram (PD) Including vent lines for safety relief valves or similar piping,and ducts for gas pipes AP

S060 – Pipe routing sketch FI

S080 – Thermal stressanalysis When design temperature is below -110°C FI

S090 – Specification ofvalves, flanges and fittings

Including offsets, loops, bends, expansion elements suchas bellows and slip joints (only inside tanks). For valvesintended for service with a design temperature below -55°C,documentation of leak test and functional test at designtemperature (type test) shall be included

FI

Z253 - Test procedure forquay and sea trial AP

Z100 – Specification Closing time of shutdown valves in liquefied gas fuel linesoperated by the safety system FI

Z030 – Arrangement plan Vent masts, including location and details of outlets fromfuel tanks safety relief valves AP

Fuel gas pipingsystem

Z030 – Arrangement planHull protection beneath piping for liquefied fuel whereleakages may be anticipated, such as at shore connectionsand at pump seals. Including specification

AP

Fuel gas drip trays S010 – Piping diagram (PD) AP

Fuel gas coolingsystem S010 – Piping diagram (PD) AP

Fuel gas heatingsystem S010 – Piping diagram (PD) Including arrangement of explosion relief or verification of

strength of piping system, see [5.5] AP

Exhaust gas system G080 – Hazardous areaclassification drawing AP

Hazardous areaclassification Z030 – Arrangement plan Location and construction details, including alarm

equipment AP

Part

6 C

hapt

er 5

Sec

tion

20


DNV GL AS


Air lockarrangements

S012 – Ducting diagram(DD) Including capacity and location of fans and their motors AP

C030 – Detailed drawing Rotating parts and casings for fans and portable ventilatorsfor gas fuel system spaces AP

Ventilation systemsfor gas fuel systemspaces


Including detection of ventilation function, safety actionsand sequences, arrangement of powering of fans, etc. AP

Ventilation controland monitoringsystem

Z030 – Arrangement plan

Where relevant, based on an approved ‘hazardous areaclassification drawing’ where location of electric equipmentin hazardous area is added (except battery room, paintstores and gas bottle store)

FI


Single line diagrams for all intrinsically safe circuits, for eachcircuit including data for verification of the compatibilitybetween the barrier and the field components

AP

Z100 – SpecificationList of “non-certified safe” electrical equipment that shallbe disconnected (ESD protected machinery spaces, spacesprotected by air lock)

FI

Z071 – Failure mode andeffect analysis (FMEA) If required by Ch.2 Sec.5 [8.1.1] AP

Z163 - Maintenance manual Electrical equipment in hazardous areas FI



AP

Z030 – Arrangement plan APHydrocarbon gasdetection and alarmsystem, fixed

G060 – Structural fireprotection drawing AP



AP

External surfaceprotection waterspraying system


AP

Bunkering stationfire extinguishingsystem


AP


Fire detection andalarm system


AP

Machineryspaces fixed fireextinguishingsystems


Part

6 C

hapt

er 5

Sec

tion

20


DNV GL AS


Fire extinguishingequipment, mobile AP

Electric powersystem, general Z030 - Arrangement plan

Including locations of power sources, switchboards anddistribution boards for main and emergency power, UPSsand batteries. Arrangement of access doors, fire divisionsand high fire risk areas related to the above

FI

Electric powersystem, general

E010 - Overall single linediagram FI

1.6.1.2 Additional documentation for qualifier performance shall be submitted as required by Table 4.

Table 4 Documentation requirements for qualifier performance


E120 - Electrical data sheet,general Including parameters for power quality AP

E200 - Short circuitcalculations

Calculation of single phase fault against earth shall beincluded for systems with earthed neutral for power plant FI

E220 - Electrical systemphilosophy AP

E240 - Electrical assemblyfunctional description

General power supply systems with description of alloperating modes unless the overall single line diagram issufficient to give necessary understanding of the operationand relevant operation modes of the system

FI

Z253 - Test procedure forquay and sea trial For the power plant AP

Power plant

Z254 - Commissioningprocedure

Compliance simulation for power plant; Only if required byCommission Regulation (EU) 2016/631 FI

Control systemfor remote and/orautomatic control ofpower plant


AP

1.6.1.3 For full definition of the documentation types, see Pt.1 Ch.3 Sec.3.

1.6.1.4 Other plans, specifications or information may be required depending on the arrangement and theequipment used in each separate case, and for vessels transporting liquefied gas as cargo in addition, seePt.5 Ch.7.

1.7 On-board documentation1.7.1 Contents

1.7.1.1 An operational manual as described in Table 3 shall be kept onboard. The operation manual is ingeneral to give information regarding the following:

Part

6 C

hapt

er 5

Sec

tion

20


DNV GL AS

1) Arrangement and lay-out of the gas fuel supply system, including:

— description of main components in the gas fuel supply system— a general description of how the fuel system is intended to work.

2) Description of the safety shutdown system for the gas fuel supply system, including:

— How to respond to gas leakages in:

— the fuel system— tank connection spaces— ESD protected machinery spaces— fuel preparation rooms.

— How to respond to cryogenic leakages in:

— the fuel system— tank connection spaces— fuel preparation rooms.

— How to respond to loss of ventilation in:

— the secondary enclosures in the gas fuel system— tank connection spaces— ESD protected machinery spaces— fuel preparation rooms

— How to respond to fire in:

— the machinery space— on deck— fuel preparation room.

3) Description of hazards with regard to inerted spaces and the use of inert gas.

4) Description of bunkering operations, including:

— how to prevent overfilling of tanks— how to control the tank pressure when bunkering— how to prevent release of fuel gases to the atmosphere— how to gas free the bunkering system at termination of bunkering operation— safety precautions.

5) Description of entry procedures for:

— tank connection spaces— fuel preparation rooms— GVU enclosures— hold spaces— other spaces where entry may constitute a hazard to the ship or personnel.

6) Procedure for emptying and gas freeing of fuel gas tanks.

7) Relevant drawings of the gas fuel installation, including:

— fuel gas piping diagram— fuel gas system arrangement plan— ventilation systems.

Part

6 C

hapt

er 5

Sec

tion

20


DNV GL AS

1.8 Certification and standards1.8.1 Certification requirementsProducts shall be certified as required by Table 5.


Object Certificate type Issued by Certificationstandard*


Process pressurevessels in fuel system

PC Society Shall be certified as class I pressure vesselsin accordance with Pt.4 Ch.7.

Pumps in fuel system PC Society In accordance with Pt.5 Ch.7.

Compressors PC Society In accordance with Pt.4 Ch.5.

Valves in fuel system PC Society For valves with design temperature below 0°CIn accordance with Sec.5 - Process pressurevessels and liquids, vapour and pressurepiping systems (irrespective of size).

Valves in fuel system PC Society For valves with design pressure above 10bar in accordance with Pt.5 Ch.7 Sec.5(irrespective of size).

Valves in fuel system PC Manufacturer For valves with design pressure equal to orlower than 10 bar, and design temperatureequal to or above 0°C.

Expansion bellows infuel system

PC Society In accordance with Pt.5 Ch.7.

Fuel gas control andmonitoring systems

PC Society Shall be certified in accordance with Pt.4Ch.9.

Gas safety systems PC Society Shall be certified in accordance with Pt.4Ch.9.

Hydrocarbon gasdetection and alarmsystem, fixed

PC Society Shall be certified in accordance with Pt.4Ch.9.

Gas/Dual FuelEngines

PC Manufacturer NFPA 37 For power production.

Gas Turbines PC Manufacturer NFPA 37 For power production.

Auxiliary boilers PC Society In accordance with Pt.4 Ch.7.

Steam Turbines PC Manufacturer NFPA 850 For power production.

Electric generators/motors

PC Manufacturer For power plant.

Electric motor starters PC Manufacturer For power plant.

Switchboards PC Manufacturer For power plant.

Transformers PC Manufacturer IEC 60076 For power plant.

Part

6 C

hapt

er 5

Sec

tion

20


DNV GL AS

Object Certificate type Issued by Certificationstandard*


Semi- conductorassemblies

PC Manufacturer For power plant.

Power ManagementSystem

PC Society Shall be certified in accordance with Pt.4 Ch.8when used in gas supply systems, ventilationsystems, or other important services asdefined in Pt.4 Ch.8 Sec.13.

For general certification requirements, see Pt.1 Ch.3 Sec.4.For a definition of the certification types, see Pt.1 Ch.1 Sec.4 and Pt.1 Ch.3 Sec.5.

1.8.2 Certification requirements for qualifier performanceEngines, turbines, boilers and electrical equipment for the power plant shall be certified in accordance withmain class requirements.

Table 6 Additional certification requirement for qualifier performance

Object Certificate type Issued by Certificationstandard* Additional description

Power plant electricalsystem PC Society DNVGL-

ST-0125

Applicable for the electrical power plant whenprepared for delivery to non-ship distribution/grid systems. Shall be certified in accordancewith DNVGL-ST-0125 on local, national orinternational level depending on agreementbetween operator of the electrical power plantand operator of interconnected distributionnetwork. Including compliance testing andcompliance simulations, etc.

For general certification requirements, see Pt.1 Ch.3 Sec.4.For a definition of the certification types, see Pt.1 Ch.1 Sec.4 and Pt.1 Ch.3 Sec.5.

1.8.3 Standards

1.8.3.1 Applicable normative standards that may be considered in each case is given in Table 7.

Table 7 Typical standards/codes suitable for assessment of gas equipment

Process Equipment

TEMA Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association

NFPA 37 Standard for the Installation and Use of Stationary Combustion Engines and Gas Turbines

ASME BPVC VIII Boiler and Pressure vessel Code

API Std 520 Sizing, Selection, and Installation of Pressure-relieving Devices

API Std 521 Pressure-relieving and Depressuring Systems

API Std 610 Centrifugal Pumps for Petroleum, Petrochemical and Natural Gas Industries

API Std 6D Specification for Pipeline and Piping Valves

Part

6 C

hapt

er 5

Sec

tion

20


DNV GL AS

Process Equipment

API Std 617 Axial and Centrifugal Compressors and Expander-compressors

API Std 618 Reciprocating Compressors for Petroleum, Chemical and Gas Industry Services

API Std 619 Rotary-Type Positive-Displacement Compressors for Petroleum, Petrochemical, and Natural GasIndustries

Electrical installations

IEC 60092 Electrical Installations in ships

IEC 60533 Electrical and electronic installations in ships - Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) - Ships witha metallic hull

IEC 61363-1 Electrical installations of ships and mobile and fixed offshore units - Part 1: Procedures forcalculating short-circuit currents in three-phase a.c.

IEC/ISO/IEEE 80005-1 Utility connections in port - Part 1: High Voltage Shore Connection (HVSC) Systems - Generalrequirements

IEC 62271-200 High-Voltage switchgear and Control Gear -Part 200: AC metal-enclosed switchgear andcontrolgear for rated voltages above 1 kV and up to and including 52 kV

IEC 62271-203 High-voltage switchgear and controlgear - Part 203: Gas-insulated metal-enclosed switchgearfor rated voltages above 52 kV

IEC 60076 Power transformers

IEC 61936-1 Power installations exceeding 1 kV a,c, Part 1: Common rules

IEC 62271-1 High-voltage switchgear and controlgear - Part 1: Common specifications for alternatingcurrent switchgear and controlgear

IEC 60376 Specification of technical grade sulfur hexafluoride (SF6) for use in electrical equipment

IEC 60071 Insulation coordination

IEC 60300-3-11 Dependability management - Part 3-11: Application guide - Reliability centred maintenance

IEC 62305 Protection against lightning

NFPA 850 Recommended Practice for Fire Protection for Electric Generating Plants and High Voltage DirectCurrent Converter Stations

DNVGL-ST-0125 Grid code compliance

Commission Regulation(EU) 2016/631 Network code on requirements for grid connection of generators

CIGRE TB 528 Guide for preparation of specifications for power transformer

Process Piping

ASME B31.3 Process Piping

API 14E Design and Installation of offshore production platform piping systems

Gas System

IGC Code International Code for the Construction and Equipment of Ships Carrying Liquefied Gases inBulk

Part

6 C

hapt

er 5

Sec

tion

20


DNV GL AS

Process Equipment

DNV GL rules

— Pt.5 Ch.7 Sec.20 Tanker for liquefied gas— Pt.5 Ch.11 Non-Self propelled vessels— DNVGL-RU-OU-0103 Rules for Classification of Offshore units Floating LNG/LPG Production,

Storage and Loading Units

Metering System

AGA Report 3AGA: American Gas Association:Orifice Metering of Natural Gas, Fuel Gas Energy Metering, Measurement of Gas by TurbineMeters

Process Safety

ISO 10418 Petroleum and natural gas industries - Offshore production installations - Analysis, design,installation and testing of basic surface process safety systems

API RP 14C Analysis, Design, Installation, and Testing of Safety Systems for Offshore Production Facilities

Loading (if installed on-board)

ISO 16904 Petroleum and natural gas industries - Design and testing of LNG marine transfer arms forconventional onshore terminals

OCIMF Design and Construction Specification for Marine Loading Arms

1.9 Classification1.9.1 Survey extent

1.9.1.1 Survey requirements for vessels with the class notation Gas Power Plants are given in the rules ,Pt.7 Ch.1 Sec.2 [1] and Pt.7 Ch.1 Sec.2 [3], Pt.7 Ch.1 Sec.3 [3] and Pt.7 Ch.1 Sec.4 [3].

2 Materials

2.1 General2.1.1 Material requirements

2.1.1.1 Materials shall be in accordance with the requirements in Pt.2, unless otherwise stated.

2.1.1.2 For vessels carrying liquefied gases as cargo, see Pt.5 Ch.7. For other vessels, the requirements[2.1.1.3] to [2.1.1.7] apply.

2.1.1.3 Materials used in fuel containment and fuel piping systems shall comply with the requirements inPt.5 Ch.7 Sec.6 [1], Pt.5 Ch.7 Sec.6 [2], Pt.5 Ch.7 Sec.6 [3] and Pt.5 Ch.7 Sec.6 [4]. For tanks containingcompressed natural gas (CNG), the use of materials other than those covered by Pt.5 Ch.7 Sec.6 may bespecially considered and approved by the Society.

2.1.1.4 High pressure gaseous fuel pipes shall as a minimum fulfil the requirements for pipe materials withdesign temperature down to minus 55°C in Pt.5 Ch.7 Sec.6 Table 4.

Part

6 C

hapt

er 5

Sec

tion

20


DNV GL AS

2.1.1.5 The secondary enclosure around high pressure gaseous fuel pipes shall as a minimum fulfil thematerial requirements for pipe materials with design temperature down to minus 55°C Pt.5 Ch.7 Sec.6 Table4.

2.1.1.6 The secondary enclosure around liquefied fuel pipes shall as a minimum fulfil the materialrequirements for pipe materials with design temperature down to minus 165°C in Pt.5 Ch.7 Sec.6 Table 4.

2.1.1.7 The materials used in fuel gas piping systems shall be furnished with documentation in accordancewith Table 4.For the definition of material documentation, see Pt.1 Ch.3 Sec.5.

3 Gas Systems

3.1 Arrangement and protection3.1.1 Reference to other rules

3.1.1.1 Unless the vessel is built to transport liquefied gas as cargo in accordance with tanker/barge forliquefied gas in Pt.5 Ch.7, the vessel shall in addition to the requirements [3.1.2] to [3.2.7] comply with therules for gas fuelled vessels in Ch.2 Sec.5 [3], Ch.2 Sec.5 [4], Ch.2 Sec.5 [5] and Ch.2 Sec.5 [6], exceptthat the following items may be exempted for the power plant: Ch.2 Sec.5 [5.1.1.2]: Redundancy of pipingsystem, [5.1.2.3]: Redundant fuel supply, [5.1.2.4] FMEA for non-conventional fuel gas supply, [5.6.1.1]Redundant circulation pumps for heating fluid.Vessels built to transport liquefied gas as cargo shall comply with Pt.5 Ch.7 in addition to 3.1.2 -3.1.3.

3.1.2 Physical protection

3.1.2.1 The area with storage tanks containing fuel, and process area handling gas shall be separatedfrom other areas of the vessel. Liquefied gas/vapour processing area and the vent/flare system shall bearranged to minimize the possibility of an accidental event in one area impinging on another area or on theaccommodation area, or affecting escape and evacuation.

3.1.2.2 Safe separation may be achieved by ensuring sufficient distance between areas or by installation ofphysical barriers (e.g. fire/blast walls) to prevent escalation from one area to another.

3.1.2.3 Accommodation spaces and evacuation spaces shall be located forward or aft of fuel storage tanksand the gas process area. Entrances and openings to accommodation spaces, machinery spaces, servicespaces and control stations shall be fitted with airlocks, where located on the bulkhead facing the hazardousarea, an adjacent bulkhead within 3 m of a facing bulkhead, or within hazardous area.

3.1.2.4 The space between process/utility deck and storage tank deck shall be designed to allow easy accessfor operation, inspection and maintenance, and shall be sufficiently open to allow efficient natural ventilationand possibility of firefighting. This normally implies an elevation of 3 m or more above storage tank deck.

3.1.2.5 The storage tank deck should not be used as a laydown area. In cases where this limitation is notpracticable, the tank deck shall be provided with adequate impact protection against dropped objects.Precautions shall also be taken to avoid spark generation in gas hazardous area.

3.1.2.6 Gas fuel loading systems shall be located at a safe distance from accommodation spaces, air inlets,and equipment important for safety. Special consideration shall be given to protection of systems importantfor safety in the event of collision with a shuttle tanker.

3.1.2.7 The power plant shall be placed in a sheltered location on the vessel protected from green seas.

Part

6 C

hapt

er 5

Sec

tion

20


DNV GL AS

3.1.3 Sloshing

3.1.3.1 Operating such a vessel will involve load cases where the liquefied gas storage tanks will haveintermediate filling levels. An assessment of the sloshing capabilities of the storage containment system shallbe carried out and documented as relevant, taking load cases with intermediate filling levels into account.The capacity of the hull shall be evaluated for increased loads resulting from these load cases. The requireddegree of documentation will depend on the storage containment system.For all vessels the sloshing assessment shall include:

— pump tower— pump tower supports.

Guidance note:Sloshing assessment is relevant for offshore locations.


3.1.3.2 For assessment on membrane cargo tanks, see DNVGL-CG-0158 Sloshing analysis of LNG membranetanks.

3.1.4 Damage stability requirements and tank locations

3.1.4.1 If gas fuelled storage tanks onboard have capacity for more than 10 days production or 10000 m3

without refuelling, whichever is less, the vessel shall comply with damage stability requirements in Rules forliquefied gas tankers in Pt.5 Ch.7 Sec.2 and Pt.5 Ch.7 Sec.3, as ship type 2G.In this case, the location of the cargo tanks may be as per Pt.5 Ch.7 Sec.2 [4] as an alternative to location ofcargo tanks as per IGF code as given in Ch.2 Sec.5 [1.3].

3.2 System design3.2.1 Risk assessment

3.2.1.1 A risk assessment shall be conducted, preferably in the early phase of the project, and shall at leastinclude a systematic and thorough identification of potential hazards that could directly or indirectly result in:

— loss of life— major fire or explosion— cryogenic release— loss of structural integrity— the need for escape or evacuation— loss of stability— environmental impact.

A typical, but not necessarily exhaustive, list of hazards for a floating gas power plant vessel are:

— fire and explosion— evacuation— electrical hazards— consideration of hazardous areas— high-pressure gas venting— process upset conditions— storage and handling of flammable heating mediums— continuous presence of liquid and vapour cargo outside the cargo containment system— tank over-pressure and under-pressure— ship-to-ship transfer of liquid cargo— collision risk during berthing manoeuvres.

Part

6 C

hapt

er 5

Sec

tion

20


DNV GL AS

The consequences of hazards shall be controlled and mitigated with the aim of reducing risk to personnelwhere practicable through:

— separation of hazardous spaces from less hazardous spaces and each other— relocation of equipment, improved layout— provision of physical barriers, distance separation, fire walls, etc.— provision of detection and protection systems— provisions of means to escape and evacuate.

The findings from the risk assessments carried out shall be considered in the design phase and addressed inthe documentation submitted to class.

Guidance note:Risk assessment principles are outlined in DNVGL-CG-0158 Safety principles and arrangements.


3.2.1.2 The power plant is to be designed so that a single accidental event shall not result in a criticalsituation.

3.2.2 Classification and extent of hazardous area

3.2.2.1 The extent of hazardous areas shall be in accordance with the IEC standard 60092-502, unless therisk assessment results in extended hazardous areas.

3.2.3 Escape

3.2.3.1 Passages for safe escape from areas of gas power plant and loading manifold shall be arranged.Shielding from fire and heat radiation shall be provided for as necessary.

3.2.3.2 Two escape ways from normally manned areas shall be arranged where at least one shall be availablefollowing an accidental event.

3.2.4 Heating system for LNG vaporisers

3.2.4.1 Heating may be arranged as direct heating or indirect heating. Means shall be provided to detectleakage of high pressure LNG/NG into the heating fluid and to prevent overpressure in the heating system.

3.2.4.2 Non-hydrocarbon heating medium may be returned to non hazardous machinery spaces provided adegassing tank with gas detector is arranged. The degassing tank shall be located in the gas process area.

3.2.4.3 Vaporizers shall be protected against freezing of the heating medium.

3.2.4.4 Hydrocarbon heating medium storage tanks shall be considered as cargo tanks in Pt.5 Ch.7.

3.2.5 Pressure relief and vent system

3.2.5.1 If a suction drum is arranged to supply gas fuelled pumps it shall be provided with a relief valve sizedfor relevant cases i.e. fire exposure with relief valve capacity for cargo tanks. See Pt.5 Ch.7 Sec.8 for cargotanks.

3.2.5.2 Pressure relief valves shall be fitted in sections of the piping system where gas fuelled liquid can betrapped, complying with the requirements in Pt.5 Ch.7 Sec.5 [5.3.6] and Pt.5 Ch.7 Sec.5 [5.3.7].

3.2.5.3 In case of relief to storage tanks, the effect of routing high pressure LNG/NG to the storage tank shallbe documented.

Part

6 C

hapt

er 5

Sec

tion

20


DNV GL AS

3.2.5.4 A knock out drum shall be fitted between the blow down valves and the vent mast, unless it isdocumented that liquid release cannot occur. The knock out drum shall be fitted with high level sensor andalarm. At the high activation level the knock out drum shall still have sufficient capacity to allow full processdepressurisation.

Guidance note:For permanently moored vessels it may be considered disposing of gas via a flare rather than a vent. In such cases the capacityshould be assessed per API Std 521 and it should be ensured that radiation levels are within acceptable limits.


3.2.5.5 Pressure relief valves shall be sized according to requirements in Pt.5 Ch.7 or can be considered afterthe standards listed in Table 4.

3.2.6 LNG loading

3.2.6.1 Operational limitations for the transfer operation shall be set with respect to parameters such as:

— sea conditions for safe approach, berthing and departure of the LNG carrier— operational envelopes (relative motion, accelerations)— loads in the mooring lines and fenders.

3.2.6.2 Where novel transfer solutions are intended to be used, the technology shall undergo some form ofqualification. See DNVGL-RP-A203 Qualification procedures for new technology.

3.2.6.3 For ship to ship transfer, each transfer line shall be fitted with emergency release system (ERS) tominimize the possible liquid spill and with insulating flange.

4 Fire safety

4.1 General4.1.1 Reference to other rules

4.1.1.1 Unless the vessel is built to transport liquefied gas as cargo in accordance with tanker/barge forliquefied gas in Pt.5 Ch.7, the vessel shall in addition to the requirements [4.1.2] to [4.1.4] below complywith the rules for gas fuelled vessels in Ch.2 Sec.5 [7].Vessels built to transport liquefied gas as cargo to comply with Pt.5 Ch.7 in addition to the requirements[4.1.2] to [4.1.4] below.

4.1.2 Fire main and water spray

4.1.2.1 The fire water main shall be such that at least two jets of water can reach any part of thegas processing part of the power plant and with a pressure of at least 0.5 MPa gauge. The water supply tothe fire main serving the gas processing part of the power plant shall be a ring main supplied by the main firepumps or a single main supplied by fire pumps positioned fore and aft, one of which shall be independentlydriven.

4.1.2.2 A fixed water-spray system with an application rate of 10 l/m2/min. of the horizontally projectedarea and 4 l/m2/min of the vertical surface of the gas processing part of the power plant shall be arranged toprotect, when fitted:

— suction drum— storage tanks for propane or other flammable fluids— equipment such as metering station

Part

6 C

hapt

er 5

Sec

tion

20


DNV GL AS

— HV equipment such as main transformer(s), switchgear and semiconductor converters, except that for drytype transformers, gas systems may be used.

4.1.2.3 The water spray system shall be provided with an alternative supply of water from the fire mainoperable from outside of the protected area.

4.1.2.4 If the fire water pumps and spray pumps are combined the capacity shall be sufficient to supplywater spray to the largest fire section as well as two fire hoses.

4.1.2.5 Release of the water spray systems shall be possible both locally and remotely at the control stationwhere the operating status of the systems is monitored.

4.1.3 Dry chemical powder fire extinguishing system

4.1.3.1 The fixed dry chemical powder fire extinguishing system shall cover on deck gas processingequipment and the LNG bunkering station.

— The system shall be capable of delivering powder from at least two hand hose lines or a combinationmonitor and hand hose line(s) to the on deck gas processing equipment.

— The LNG bunkering area shall be covered by a monitor.— If loading arms are installed, the dry chemical powder shall cover the presentation flange of the loading

arm.

The system shall comply with the requirements in Pt.5 Ch.7 Sec.11.

4.1.4 Fire detection

4.1.4.1 Flame detectors shall be fitted to cover the gas handling equipment and import manifold.

5 Electrical systems

5.1 General5.1.1 Reference to other rules

5.1.1.1 For the vessels own electrical power the requirements of Pt.4 Ch.8 are applicable.

5.1.1.2 For the power plant, only safety related items in Pt.4 Ch.8 are applicable.Guidance note:Since the power plant do not supply power to main functions of the vessel, the power plant is not regarded as an important systemin the context of Pt.4 Ch.8.


5.1.1.3 For vessels built to transport liquefied gas as cargo in accordance with tanker/barge for liquefied gasin Pt.5 Ch.7 the electrical requirements of Pt.5 Ch.7 Sec.10 is applicable for own power and safety relateditems as given in this subsection.

5.1.1.4 For other vessels with gas fuel, the electrical requirements stated in Ch.2 Sec.5 [8] is applicable,except [8.1.1.3].

5.1.1.5 The vessel's high voltage part of power installation for the electrical power plant shall generallycomply with IEC 61936-1, where applicable.

Part

6 C

hapt

er 5

Sec

tion

20


DNV GL AS

5.1.1.6 Exposure of human beings to hazards caused by faults in the electrical system or e.g. cloud or arc-flash discharge shall be reduced to a minimum. As a basis, electro technical equipment for high voltageinstallations above 52 KV shall additionally comply with established technical standards and practicesstipulated in publications of the international electrotechnical commission (IEC) from a safety of personnelperspective. Where the requirements for electrical equipment, facilities or special applications are not laiddown in the IEC standards, the scope of class involvement is subject to special consideration in the riskassessment to be carried out as per [4.1.1].

5.1.1.7 Areas with high voltage installations hazardous to human health or safety including areas whichcontain SF6 gas following leakage in gas-insulated switchgear (GIS) shall be segregated and accessrestricted.

5.1.1.8 Vessel's electrical system shall be designed and installed so that personnel are protected as far aspractical during installation, operation and maintenance. Particular attention shall be given to personnelsafety, which may require;

1) manuals and instructions for transport, storage, installation, operation and maintenance;2) special tools required for operation, maintenance and testing;3) safe working procedures developed for specific locations and equipment;4) safe earthing measures.And further detailed safety measures are given in Sec. 8 in IEC 61936-1.

5.1.1.9 Inspection and testing shall be carried out to verify compliance of the electrical system withapplicable IEC standards and compliance of the equipment with applicable technical specifications.

5.1.1.10 Maintenance plan of electrical system shall be established which states actions shall be taken forpreventive and corrective maintenance in accordance with IEC 60300-3-11.

6 Safety, control and monitoring systems

6.1 General6.1.1 Reference to other Rules

6.1.1.1 Unless the vessel is built to transport liquefied gas as cargo in accordance with tanker/barge forliquefied gas in Pt.5 Ch.7, the vessel shall in addition to requirements [6.1.1.2]-[6.1.4.6] comply with therules for gas fuelled vessels in Ch.2 Sec.5 [9] and Ch.2 Sec.5 [10], except that the following items neednot be complied with for the power to be supplied externally: Ch.2 Sec.5 [9.1.1.1] (4) and (5). Maintainingpropulsion upon single failure, Ch.2 Sec.5 [10.2.1]. Requirements for gas turbines shall comply with Pt.4Ch.3 Sec.2.

6.1.1.2 For vessels built to transport liquefied gas as cargo in accordance with tanker/barge for liquefied gasin Pt.5 Ch.7 the instrumentation requirements of Pt.5 Ch.7 Sec.13 apply in lieu of [6.1.2] and [6.1.3].

6.1.1.3 The safety systems shall be able to carry out all safety functions independently from the processcontrol systems.

Guidance note:Safety systems in this section includes all systems that provides required safety shutdown functions, including ESD, PSD, Fire &Gas and blow down systems.


6.1.1.4 All shutdowns shall be executed in a predetermined logical manner. The shutdown system shall bedesigned in a hierarchical manner where higher level shutdowns automatically initiate lower level shutdowns.

Part

6 C

hapt

er 5

Sec

tion

20


DNV GL AS

6.1.1.5 Separate transmitters shall be provided for control and shutdown functions as given in Pt.4 Ch.9Sec.3 [1.1.3].

6.1.2 Gas detection

6.1.2.1 The gas detection system shall comply with requirements in Ch.2 Sec.5 [9] and extended with asufficient number of gas detectors of continuous monitoring type provided for:

— additional gas handling equipment— ventilation inlets to accommodation and machinery spaces— metering unit— non-hydrocarbon heating systems with degassing tank— additional locations as indicated in the risk assessment as per [3.2.1].

6.1.2.2 Gas detection system shall give alarm as given in Ch.2 Sec.5 Table 5.

6.1.3 Emergency shut down - ESD

6.1.3.1 The emergency shutdown system addressed in Ch.2 Sec.5 [9] and Ch.2 Sec.5 [10] shall be arrangedand shall in addition include all power production related equipment.

6.1.4 Blow down system (Depressurising)

6.1.4.1 Any high-pressure (> 1.7 MPa) segments of the gas process system shall be provided with a blowdown system (vapour depressuring) to limit the consequences of equipment and piping failure duringemergency conditions as per the design principles in API Std 521. Process systems with segments thatcontain less than 400 kg of hydrocarbon inventory may be exempted from this requirement.

6.1.4.2 The blow down system shall be as simple as practicable and shall be designed for fail safe operation.

6.1.4.3 Gas process systems required as per [6.1.4.1] shall be depressurised during an emergency. The rateof depressurising shall be sufficient to ensure that rupture will not occur in case of external heat input froma fire, and shall be arranged to depressurize all parts of the high pressure gas fuelled system beyond thestorage tanks. The capacity of the system should be based on evaluation of:

— system response time, including time for manual activation— heat input from defined accident scenarios— other protection measures, e.g. active and passive fire protection— system integrity requirements.— fire water systems are not regarded as reliable protection measures for systems exposed to jet fires.

6.1.4.4 It shall be possible to activate the blow down system manually from the control station.

6.1.4.5 During a dimensioning accidental event, the integrity and functionality of depressurising piping andvalves shall be maintained for the required period of time in order to ensure that successful depressurisationcan be performed. It shall ensure reduction to at least 50% of initial pressure or 0.69 MPa within 15 minutes.

Guidance note:To ensure this functionality, passive fire protection or other measures may be required to ensure that depressurization is initiatedbefore excessive temperatures are reached.


6.1.4.6 In relation to activation of blow down system, visual and audible alarm in control room and in gasprocess area shall be given to alert crew.

Part

6 C

hapt

er 5

Sec

tion

20


DNV GL AS

Guidance note:Prior to activation of the blow down system pre-warning alarm to give crew time to evacuate may be accepted.


7 Manufacture, workmanship and testing

7.1 Manufacture, testing and commissioning7.1.1 General

7.1.1.1 Unless the vessel is built to transport liquefied gas as cargo in accordance with tanker for liquefiedgas in Pt.5 Ch.7, the vessel shall in addition to the requirements below comply with the rules for gas fuelledvessels in Ch.2 Sec.5 [11].

7.1.1.2 All alarms and safety functions shall be tested, including:

— ESD system— gas detection system— fire alarms— fire extinction systems— water spray.

7.1.1.3 At the first loading of liquefied gas, the overall performance of the gas fuelled power plant includingfunction of equipment and automatic control systems shall be verified by the sSociety for compliance withdesign parameters.

7.1.1.4 Inspection and testing of the electrical system shall be performed as required in relevant parts of Pt.4Ch.8 Sec.10 [4].

8 Additional requirements for qualifier performance

8.1 General

8.1.1 The requirements in [1] to [7] shall be complied with in addition to the requirements in thissubsection.

8.2 Electrical power plant8.2.1 System design

8.2.1.1 The electrical power plant shall be designed according to relevant requirements in Pt.4 Ch.8 Sec.2.Guidance note:Since the electrical power plant do not supply power to main functions of the vessel, the electrical power production system is notregarded as an important system in the context of Pt.4 Ch.8. However, product certification is required as given in [8.3.1].


8.2.1.2 When the electrical power plant shall export power to another ship, the electrical power plant shall bedesigned to interface with a ship designed for a shore connection system compliant with Ch.7 Sec.5.

Part

6 C

hapt

er 5

Sec

tion

20


DNV GL AS

8.2.1.3 When the electrical power plant shall deliver power to a ship, the power quality shall be as stated inPt.4 Ch.8 Sec.2 [1.2].

8.2.1.4 When the electrical power plant shall provide power supply to non-ship distribution systems, theelectrical power plant shall be able to deliver the power quality as specified for the distribution system withrelevant grid code compliance given in DNVGL-ST-0125.

Guidance note:Electrical power plant shall have fault ride through capability including undervoltage ride through(UVRT), overvoltage ride through(OVRT), etc. in accordance with relevant grid codes.


8.2.1.5 The following electrical design parameters for the power plant shall be stated in the appendix to classcertificate:

— rated supply voltage— rated supply frequency— rated supply power— rated tolerable transient power variations— rated short circuit capacity.

8.2.2 Equipment design

8.2.2.1 The electrical power plant equipment shall be designed according to the environmental requirementsgiven in Pt.4 Ch.8 Sec.3 [2].

8.2.2.2 Switchboards shall be designed according to relevant requirements given in Pt.4 Ch.8 Sec.4.

8.2.2.3 Generators shall be designed according to relevant requirements given in Pt.4 Ch.8 Sec.5.

8.2.2.4 Power transformers shall be designed according to relevant requirements given in Pt.4 Ch.8 Sec.6and IEC60076 series. For environmental considerations, see CIGRE TB 528 Ch.8.

8.2.2.5 Semiconductor assemblies shall be designed according to relevant requirements given in Pt.4 Ch.8Sec.7.

8.2.2.6 Power management system shall be designed according to relevant requirements given in Pt.4 Ch.8Sec.9.

8.2.3 Installation

8.2.3.1 Installation shall be performed according to relevant requirements given in Pt.4 Ch.8 Sec.10.

8.2.3.2 Relevant installation requirements given in IEC 61936-1 Sec.7 shall be considered.

8.2.3.3 Insulation concerning withstand values of minimum clearance in air may be confirmed in accordancewith IEC 61936 Sec. 5.3 & 5.4, or as an option, to be confirmed in an insulation coordination study inaccordance with IEC 60071.

Part

6 C

hapt

er 5

Sec

tion

21


DNV GL AS

SECTION 21 CYBER SECURITY

1 General

1.1 ObjectiveThe requirements in these rules aim to ensure that sufficient and correctly performed cyber security barriersare established to prevent, mitigate and respond to cyber-attacks. The barriers are a combination oftechnical, organizational and behavioural measures implemented onboard the vessel. Cyber security barriersfor onshore facilities and organization are not covered in these rules.

1.2 Scope1.2.1 GeneralThe additional class notation Cyber secure includes requirements to cyber security for a vessel, intending toprotect the safety of the vessel, crew and passenger.

Guidance note:For the asset owner/ asset operating organization to have a complete approach to cyber security, the onshore facilities and landorganization should also be addressed. For such a purpose, it is recommended that e.g. ISO 27000 or IEC 62443 series or similaris applied. If the asset owner/ asset operating organization holds a valid ISO 27000 certificate, the requirements in these rules areintended to be a subset adapted for a single vessel.


1.2.2 Use of standardsThe requirements for the additional class notation Cyber secure are mainly based on IEC 62443 series forcyber security of operational technology (OT) systems.IEC 62443-2-1 standard forms the basis for requirements related to policies, procedure and responsibilities in[2], where a subset of the standard is defined for a single vessel.IEC 62443-3-3 standard forms the basis for requirements in [3], where each requirement has been tailoredfor use in the maritime industry and integration into DNV GL's class systematics. For communication andnavigation functions, the requirements in these rules have been tailored to align with IEC 61162-460.

1.2.3 Considered functionsThese rules consider critical systems, which individually or collectively make up vessel functions subject forcyber security assessment. The following vessel functions are considered:

— functions necessary for maintaining the vessel's propulsion and steering (hereafter called essentialsystems). See Pt.4 Ch.8 Sec.13 [1.3.1] for details.

— functions necessary for maintaining the vessel's safety (hereafter called important systems). See Pt.4Ch.8 Sec.13 [1.3.2] for details.

— functions necessary for maintaining the vessels communication and navigation capabilities (hereaftercalled bridge systems). See SOLAS Regulation IV and V for details.

— selected functions necessary for maintaining the vessels industrial purpose (depending on class notation)(hereafter called industrial purpose systems).

Class notation Cyber secure has predefined a list of cyber physical systems within each function that shallbe addressed for cyber security. See [5].

1.2.4 Other functionsUpon request, other cyber physical system(s) onboard the vessel, than listed in [5], may be assessedfor cyber security in accordance with these rules. Selection of security level may be done based on a riskassessment, where requirements for procedurals and technical barriers shall follow the requirements withinthese rules.

Part

6 C

hapt

er 5

Sec

tion

21


DNV GL AS

Guidance note:System(s) to be assessed, additional to the ones listed in [5], may be freely selected. DNVGL-RP-0496 and DNVGL-RP-G108 maybe used as guidance for conducting a risk assessment.


1.3 ApplicationThese rules apply to any vessel where one or more functions in [1.2.3] are controlled by cyber physicalsystems. The class notation Cyber secure has three options denoted by qualifier Basic, Advanced or+. Cyber secure(Basic) is primarily intended for vessels in operation and Cyber secure(Advanced) isintended for new-build vessels where more stringent requirements shall be applied and incorporated into thevessel design. Where other systems and functions than those listed in [1.2.3] are included (see [1.2.4]), thisis reflected in the class notation by use of the character +.

1.4 Class notationVessels constructed and tested in accordance with the requirements in these rules may be assigned the classnotation Cyber secure, with qualifiers, as outlined in Table 1.

Table 1 Class notation for cyber security


+Selected and specified system(s) are coveredand implemented as required by [3] - Systemdesign.

BasicThe requirements are based on IEC62443-3-3 security level 1 with specificadaptations for the maritime industry.

Cyber secure

Mandatory:

No

Designrequirements:

Sec.21

FiS surveyrequirements:

<None>Advanced

Establish barriers to prevent,mitigate and respond to cyber-attacks.

The requirements are based on IEC62443-3-3 security level 3 with specificadaptations for the maritime industry.

Guidance note:If class notation Cyber secure(Basic) is selected and it proves difficult to achieve required SL-T, procedural barriers may beaccepted to compensate for technical barriers not achieving the requirements.


Guidance note:Security level for Cyber secure(+) may be one of the reference IEC 62443-3-3 levels (SL-1 to SL-4), or one of the DNVGLsecurity profiles, Cyber secure(Basic) or Cyber secure(Advanced), in [7].Cyber secure(+) denotes cyber security consideration for selected system(s) not mention in [5].Qualifier + may be combined with Cyber secure(Basic) or Cyber secure(Advanced), where e.g. Cyber secure(Basic+),denotes more systems then required in [5] have addressed cyber security.


Guidance note:Detailed information for systems that have addressed cyber security, will be given in appendix to class. This may e.g. be securitycapabilities for each system, component configuration, achieved security level, and countermeasures to achieve a target securitylevel (if applicable).


Part

6 C

hapt

er 5

Sec

tion

21


DNV GL AS

1.5 Alternations and additions of approved systemsModification to approved system(s) shall be performed in accordance with change management requirementsin Pt.4 Ch.9 Sec.1 [1.5]. Modified systems shall maintain compliance with applicable requirements. Majormodifications, such as e.g. change of remote gateway, shall be documented and submitted for assessment/approval before implemented onboard. Testing may be required witnessed by DNV GL surveyor. Suchmodifications shall follow policies, procedures and responsibilities laid out for the specific vessel as requiredin [2]. If applicable test scope is not feasible due to e.g. operational limitations, alternative methods forverification may be accepted.

Guidance note:Part of maintaining cyber security such as patching known software vulnerabilities and updating signature files for malwareprotection software, etc., is not intended to be encompassed by this requirement.


1.6 References1.6.1 Normative referenceThe standards listed in Table 2 are recognized international standards referenced in these rules.

Table 2 Normative references

Reference Title

IEC 27001 Information technology - Security techniques - Information security management systems - Requirements

IEC 27002 Information technology - Security techniques - Code of practice for information security controls

IEC61162-460

Maritime navigation and radiocommunication equipment and systems - Digital interfaces Part 460:Multiple talkers and multiple listeners - Ethernet interconnection - Safety and security

IEC62443-1-1

Industrial communication networks - Network and system security Part 1-1: Terminology, concepts andmodels

IEC62443-2-1

Industrial communication networks - Network and system security Part 2-1: Establishing an industrialautomation and control system security program

IEC62443-3-1

Industrial communication networks - Network and system security - Part 3-1: Security technologies forindustrial automation and control systems

IEC62443-3-2

Security for industrial automation and control systems Security Risk Assessment, System Partitioning andSecurity Levels

IEC62443-3-3

Industrial communication networks - Network and system security Part 3-3: System security requirementsand security levels

1.6.2 DNV GL rules and standardsThe rules and standards in Table 3 are DNV GL rules and standards referenced in these rules.

Table 3 DNV GL Rules and standards

Reference Title

Pt.1 Ch.3 Documentation and certification types, general

Pt.4 Ch.8 Electrical installations

Part

6 C

hapt

er 5

Sec

tion

21


DNV GL AS

Reference Title

Pt.4 Ch.9 Control and monitoring systems

DNVGL-CP-0231 Cyber security capabilities of control system components

DNVGL-OS-D201 Electrical installations

DNVGL-RP-0496 Cyber security resilience management for ships and mobile offshore units in operation

DNVGL-RP-G108 Cyber security in the oil and gas industry based on IEC 62443

1.6.3 Informative referencesInformative references are listed in Table 4.

Table 4 Informative references

Reference Title

Pt.6 Ch.3 Additional class notations - Navigation, manoeuvring and position keeping

DNVGL-OS-D203 Integrated software dependent systems (ISDS)

DNVGL-OS-D202 Automation, safety and telecommunication systems

DNVGL-OS-E101 Drilling facilities

DNVGL-OS-E201 Oil and gas processing systems

IEC 62443-2-2 Security for industrial automation and control systems - Implementation Guidance for and IACSSecurity Management System

IEC 62443-2-3 Security for industrial automation and control systems - Part 2-3: Patch management in the IACSenvironment

IEC 62443-2-4 Security for industrial automation and control systems - Part 2-4: Security program requirementsfor IACS service providers

NIST 800-46 Guide to Enterprise Telework Remote Access, and Bring Your Own Device (BYOD) Security

NIST 800-82 Guide to Industrial Control Systems (ICS) Security

1.7 Terminology and definitionsDefinitions are given in Table 5.

Table 5 Definitions

Term Definition

authentication process of validating identity

authorization right or permission that is granted to a system entity to access a system resource. Authorizationis dependent on authentication

availability ability of an item to be in a state to perform a required function under given conditions at a giveninstant or over a given time interval, if the required external resources are provided

asset operator responsible part operating the vessel

asset owner responsible part owning the vessel

Part

6 C

hapt

er 5

Sec

tion

21


DNV GL AS

Term Definition

conduit logical grouping of communication channels, connecting two or more zones, that share commonsecurity requirements

cyber attack actions required to preclude unauthorized use of, denial service to, modifications to, disclosure ofor destruction of critical systems or informational assets

cyber physicalsystems systems which have combined computing, networking and physical process

cyber security barrier any measure taken that acts against some undesirable force or intention, in order to maintain adesired state

cyber threat

a circumstance or event that has, or indicates, the potential to exploit vulnerabilities and toadversely impact (create adverse consequences for) organizational operations, organizationalassets (including information and information systems), individuals, other organizations, orsociety

firewall inter-network connection device that restricts data communication traffic between two connectednetworks

hardening process of securing a system by reducing its vulnerability surface

island mode self-contained operation and no connections to other resources

logical segmentation segregation by "virtual" means (e.g. VLAN) between two or more systems utilizing same physicalresources

IT Information Technology - the application of computers to store, study, retrieve, transmit, andmanipulate data, or information, often in the context of a business or other enterprise

malware malicious software that may be harmful and/ or intrusive to cyber physical systems. Suchsoftware includes e.g. worms, wiperware and ransomware, etc.

OTOperational Technology - the hardware and software dedicated to detecting or causing changes inphysical processes through direct monitoring and/ or control of physical devices such as valves,pumps, etc.

penetration successful unauthorized access to a protected system resource

penetration testing authorized simulated attack on a computer system, performed to evaluate the security of thesystem

physicalsegmentation physical division between resources

remote access use of systems that are inside the perimeter of the security zone being addressed from a differentgeographical location with the same rights as when physically present at the location

sheep dipping station a standalone computer used to clean removable devices for malware before connecting to a cyberphysical system

vulnerability flaw or weakness in a system's design, implementation, or operation and management that maybe exploited to violate the system's integrity or security policy

whitelisting restricted use of resource unless especially permitted

1.8 AbbreviationsAbbreviations are given in Table 6.

Part

6 C

hapt

er 5

Sec

tion

21


DNV GL AS

Table 6 Abbreviations

Abbreviation Description

AES advanced encryption standard

AIS automatic identification system

BNWAS bridge navigational watch system & alarm system

BOP blowout preventer

CAT customer acceptance test

CCR central control room

CSRS cyber security requirements specification

DMZ demilitarised zones

DoS denial of service

ECDIS electronic chart display & information system

ECR engine control room

EPIRB emergency position indicating radio beacon

FAT factory acceptance test

GPS global positioning system

HAT harbour acceptance test

IDS intrusion detection system

IP intrusion prevention system

IPS internet protocol secure

MC mechanical completion

MPD manage pressure drilling

PSD process shut down

RAS remote access server

REDS removable external data source

RSA encryption algorithm made by Ron Rivest, Adi Shamir and Leonard Adleman

SAT systems acceptance test

SIS safety instrumented system

SL-T security level target

USB universal serial bus

VLAN virtual local area network

VPN virtual private network

Part

6 C

hapt

er 5

Sec

tion

21


DNV GL AS

1.9 Documentation requirements1.9.1 GeneralGeneral requirements for documentation may be found in Pt.1 Ch.3 Sec.2. See Pt.1 Ch.3 Sec.3 for definitionsof documents types.

1.9.2 DesignDocumentation related to design and philosophy shall be submitted as required in Table 7.

Table 7 Documentation requirements for design and philosophy

Object Documentation type Additional Description Info

I070 - Instrument andequipment list

A document listing all inventory (i.e. components and software) in thesystems covered by scope. The document shall include at least thefollowing information for each component:

— hardware model(s) and version— connection points (USB, Ethernet, etc.)— address lists, e.g. IP address lists— firmware and software application versions— configuration settings— patch levels— malware protection— hardening.

AP

Cybersecuritydesignof thevessel

I100 - System diagram

Cyber security system architecture drawings showing zones andconduits for all systems and interconnections covered by scope.The architecture drawings shall include both logical and physicalsystem topologies. The drawings shall include at least the followinginformation:

— name and/ or unique identifier— entry points (integrations, wireless, remote access …)— list of external data flows (and internal data flows within a zone)— assets (equipment and software)— connected zones— SL-T for each system and zone— barrier devices (e.g. firewall, routers, VPN devices).

AP

Part

6 C

hapt

er 5

Sec

tion

21


DNV GL AS


Z050 - Design philosophy

A cyber security requirement specification (CSRS) documentdescribing each system covered by scope and their integration/interconnections. The specification shall include at least the followinginformation for each system:

— SL-T for each system, zone and conduit— specification of interfaces between each system— specification of interfaces to systems not covered by scope— specification of interfaces to remote sites (e.g. other vessels or

shore)— specification of applicable technical security requirements

in [3] - System design and description of any compensatingcountermeasures

— specification of applicable policy-related security requirements in[2] - Policies, procedures and responsibilities for the vessel andrelevant description of how these shall be complied with

— considerations for software obsolescence management— any relevant assumptions and dependencies.

AP

AP=For Approval

1.9.3 Cyber Security proceduresDocumentation related to cyber security policies, procedure and responsibilities shall be submitted asrequired by Table 8.

Table 8 Documentation requirements for vessel cyber security policies, procedure andresponsibilities


Policies,proceduresandresponsibilities

Q010 - Qualitymanual

A document describing the policies, procedure and responsibilities forcyber security onboard the vessel. This shall include details coveringthe requirements in [2].

AP

AP=For Approval

1.9.4 Manufacture documentationDocumentation for each system shall be submitted as required in Table 9.

Table 9 Documentation requirements from manufacture


Vesselsystemsubjectfor cybersecurityassessment

I020 - System functiondescription

A textual description with necessary supporting drawings, diagramsand figures to cover:

— cyber security configuration and arrangement for system— scope of supply— cyber security diagnostics and alarming functionalities— safe states for cyber security incidents— implementation of requirements in CSRS.

AP

Part

6 C

hapt

er 5

Sec

tion

21


DNV GL AS


I030 - System blockdiagram (topology)

Schematic drawing(s) showing arrangement of systems to beaddressed for cyber security. This should include:

— local and remote control for individual systems— integration into logical zone model— system interfaces— connection outside of vessel (if any)— physical location.

AP

I150 - Circuit diagram Detailed drawing showing electrical and communication wiringcomplying with requirements in the CSRS. AP

I320 - Software changehandling procedure

A procedure describing how software changes to the system areproposed, evaluated and implemented using a standardized,systematic approach that ensures traceability, consistency andquality; and that proposed changes are evaluated in terms of theiranticipated impact on the entire vessel system. See [4.3.2].

FI

AP=For Approval; FI=For information

1.9.5 Onboard testingDocumentation for final testing shall be submitted as required in Table 10. The combination of the two testprocedures shall cover testing of both cyber security requirement for each individual system, and overallcyber security requirement for the vessel. E.g. operator station configuration, firewall settings betweendifferent zones and security properties for remote connection, etc.

Table 10 Documentation required to verify requirements specification


Z253 - Test procedurefor system verificationonboard

Test procedure for each individual system covering verification ofrelevant cyber security requirements set forth in the CSRS. Thisdocument is typically submitted by the system supplier, however mayalso be submitted by the system integrator. Typical documents forsuch tests may be CAT/ SAT/ HAT/ Commissioning procedures, or inthe form of a separate document.

AP

Testing

Z251 - Test procedure forintegration test.

A document describing the test configuration and test methods,specifying for each test:

— initial condition— how to perform the test— what to observe during the test and acceptance criteria for each

test.

The tests shall cover all systems subject for cyber securityassessment and the integration of these. This document is typicallysubmitted by the system integrator, or 3rd party performing the tests.

AP

AP=For Approval

Part

6 C

hapt

er 5

Sec

tion

21


DNV GL AS

1.10 Implementing cyber security1.10.1 GeneralTo implement cyber security, these rules are targeting all five phases of an implementation project. Thedivision into phases are intended to provide guidance for involved roles in a generic and adaptable way bothfor sailing and new-build vessels. For all roles, each of the phases shall be completed before the next phasemay start. Figure 1 illustrates the process for sailing vessels, and Figure 2 illustrates the process for a newbuild vessel.

Figure 1 Phases for implementing cyber security on a sailing vessel

Figure 2 Phases for implementing cyber security for a new build vessel

The expected outcome is stated in the detailed description of each phase in [1.10.3] to [1.10.7].

1.10.2 RolesThe following roles are defined:

— asset owner/Asset operator— system integrator— product supplier— independent verifier.

Guidance note:For sailing vessels, the system integrator and asset owner/ asset operator might be the same organization.


1.10.3 Phases 1In this phase, cyber security requirements for all systems under consideration shall be detailed accordingto the requirements in these rules. For sailing vessels, a gap analysis will form the basis for the initial work,where for new builds the cyber security design of the vessel shall be derived from the requirements in theserules. Table 11 describes the task for each role for phase 1.

Part

6 C

hapt

er 5

Sec

tion

21


DNV GL AS

Table 11 Phase 1 responsibilities for roles

Role Sailing vessel New-build vessel

Asset owner/asset operator

Asset owner/asset operator shall give inputincluding a cyber security threat analysis(threat actors, motivations, scenarios) tosystem integrator creating the CSRS, withdetails of organisational dependencies. Thevessel and vessel's documentation shall beavailable for system integrator's survey ofcurrent cyber security status.

Asset owner/asset operator shall give input includinga cyber security threat analysis (threat actors,motivations, scenarios) to system integratorcreating the CSRS, with details of organisationaldependencies.

Systemintegrator

System integrator shall create the CSRSdocument based on a gap analysis betweencurrent cyber security status onboard thevessel and requested security requirements.Best practice input from product supplier andselections by asset owner including assetowner organisational dependencies shallalso be considered. If the asset owner/ assetoperator has a generic CSRS this can form thebasis for the vessel specific one.

System integrator shall create the CSRS documentbased on requirements in these rules, best practiceinput from product supplier and selections byasset owner including asset owner organisationaldependencies. If the asset owner/ asset operator hasa generic CSRS this can form the basis for the vesselspecific one.

Product supplierProduct supplier shall provide input on bestpractice to system integrator for creating theCSRS.

Product supplier shall provide input on best practiceto system integrator for creating the CSRS.

Independentverifier

Independent verifier shall approve thedocumentation listed in Table 7 and Table 8 forcompliance with these rules.

Independent verifier shall approve the documentationlisted in Table 7 and Table 8 for compliance withthese rules.

Expected outcome:This phase shall end up with a complete CSRS and related documents, providing all parties a clear overviewof how cyber security shall be achieve for the specific vessel. Documentation shall be distributed to allinvolved parties.

1.10.4 Phase 2Based on documentation from phase 1, each of the different systems shall be modified or constructedaccordingly. Table 12 describes the task for each role for phase 2.




The policies, procedures and responsibilitiesdescribed in [2] shall be made for the vesselin a format that suits the asset owner/asset operator. It is recommended to useone format for all vessels in the fleet. Thedocumentation may also be prepared by thesystem integrator; however, it is recommendedthat asset owner/asset operator create thisfor better security and integration into theorganization.

The policies, procedures and responsibilitiesdescribed in [2] shall be made for the vessel in aformat that suits the asset owner/asset operator. It isrecommended to use one format for all vessels in thefleet. The documentation may also be prepared bythe system integrator; however, it is recommendedthat asset owner/asset operator create this for bettersecurity and integration into the organization.

Part

6 C

hapt

er 5

Sec

tion

21


DNV GL AS


Systemintegrator

System integrator may make the policies,procedures and responsibilities, however inthat case asset owner/asset operator shallprovide input on organizational structuredependencies. System integrator shall plan forsecure transport and storage of the modifiedequipment, specifying handling requirementsfrom product supplier to modification onboardthe vessel.

System integrator may make the policies, proceduresand responsibilities, however in that case assetowner/asset operator shall provide input onorganizational structure dependencies. Systemintegrator shall plan for secure transport and storagefor the delivery, specifying handling requirementsfrom product supplier to installation onboard thevessel.

Product supplier

The product supplier must review the designwith respect to requirements and design rulesto implement, or prepare the modificationof, the requirement set forth in the CSRS fortheir delivery, where also equipment deliveryaccording to CSRS's requirement for safeand secure transport and storage shall beconsidered.

The product supplier must review the designwith respect to requirements and design rules toimplement the requirements set forth in the CSRSfor their delivery, where also equipment deliveryaccording to CSRS's requirement for safe and securetransport and storage shall be considered.

Independentverifier

Independent verifier shall for each of therelevant systems, verify that requirements setforth in the CSRS are implemented by approvalof documents listed in Table 9

Independent verifier shall for each of the relevantsystems, verify that requirements set forth in theCSRS are implemented by approval of documentslisted in Table 9

Expected outcome:This phase shall end up with modified or complete systems (including standalone components) ready foronboard handling.

Guidance note:Between completion at the manufacture and until installation onboard the vessel, limited or restricted access methods should beused for transportation and storage.


1.10.5 Phase 3When starting phase 3, the mechanisms in the policies, procedures and responsibilities related to systemmodification or installation activities shall be followed. As part of the modification or installation of eachindividual system, requirements from the CSRS shall be verified. Table 13 describes the task for each role forphase 3.




Asset owner/asset operator should participatein test activities, approving the cyber securitymodification of each system and to gainknowledge of the system's cyber securitymechanisms.

Asset owner/asset operator should participatein test activities, approving the cyber securityimplementation of each system and to gainknowledge of the system's cyber securitymechanisms.

Systemintegrator

System integrator shall, when modifyingeach system, enforce barriers limiting cybersecurity incidents during this phase. Testingof each system, shall include verification ofcyber security requirements described in thedocumentation from phase 1.

System integrator shall, when installing andcommissioning each system, enforce barriers limitingcyber security incidents during this phase. Testingof each system, shall include verification of cybersecurity requirements described in the documentationfrom phase 1.

Part

6 C

hapt

er 5

Sec

tion

21


DNV GL AS


Product supplier

Product supplier shall prepare testing of cybersecurity requirements as part of the CAT/SAT/HAT/MC test procedure for each system.Product supplier must prepare patchingprocedure and backup & restore manuals andcomplete them before testing for each system(see [6.3.11]).

Product supplier shall prepare testing of cybersecurity requirements as part of the CAT/SAT/HAT/MC test procedure for each system. Product suppliermust prepare patching procedure and backup &restore manuals and complete them before testingfor each system (see [6.3.11]).

Independentverifier

Independent verifier shall verify requirementsset forth in the documentation from phase 1for each cyber physical system included in thescope. The test procedure in Table 10 shall beapproved and test shall be witnessed.

Independent verifier shall verify requirements setforth in the documentation from phase 1 for eachcyber physical system included in the scope. The testprocedure in Table 10 shall be approved and test shallbe witnessed.

Expected outcome:This phase shall end up with a complete implementation of all cyber security requirements for each systemdescribed in documentation from phase 1, including testing of same requirements.

1.10.6 Phase 4When modification or installation is finished, a final integration test shall be executed. This test shall verifythe overall requirements set forth in the documentation from phase 1, including firewall setting betweenzones and remote access solution(s). Table 14 describes the task for each role for phase 4.




Asset owner/asset operator should participatein testing, approving the vessel's overall cybersecurity mechanisms and to gain operationalknowledge of the same mechanisms.

Asset owner/asset operator should participate intesting, approving the vessel's overall cyber securitymechanisms and to gain operational knowledge of thesame mechanisms.

Systemintegrator

System integrator shall verify that the vessel'soverall cyber security requirements have beenimplemented by executing a final integrationtest. This may e.g. be done by vulnerabilityscanning of applicable systems onboard thevessel.

System integrator shall verify that vessel's overallcyber security requirements have been implementedby executing a final integration test. This may e.g.be done by penetration testing of applicable systemsonboard the vessel.

Product supplierProduct supplier should assist in the executionof final integration test for their delivery ifneeded.

Product supplier should assist in the execution of finalintegration test for their delivery if needed.

Independentverifier

Independent verifier shall approve the testprocedure listed in Table 10 and witness theexecution of the final integration tests.

Independent verifier shall approve the test procedurelisted in Table 10 and witness the execution of thefinal integration tests.

Expected outcome:This phase shall verify that the overall cyber security target for the vessel have been reached.

Guidance note:For sailing vessels, final integration testing should be carefully planned not to endanger the vessel and the people onboard.


Part

6 C

hapt

er 5

Sec

tion

21


DNV GL AS

1.10.7 Phase 5When the vessel is ready for operation, policies, procedures and responsibilities related to cyber securitymanagement of the vessel shall be enforced. It is recommended that all policies, procedures andresponsibilities are created at the same time as documentation in phase 1, reflecting the requirements indesign and philosophy. Table 15 describes the task for each role for phase 5.


Role Sailing and new-build vessels


Asset owner/asset operator shall have policies, procedures and responsibilities in place to have acontinues focus on cyber security. Threat analysis for relevant segment, software patching, training ofpersonnel and audits are items that shall be periodically updated to stay secure.

Systemintegrator N/ A

Product supplierProduct suppliers shall keep the asset owner/asset operator updated with the latest patches for thedelivered system(s). Upon service request, asset owner's/ asset operator's requirements for suppliersshall be adhered to.

Independentverifier

When DNVGL act as independent verifier, DNV GL shall upon renewal of the class notation performauditing on the use of policies, procedures and responsibilities.

Expected outcome:In this phase, the asset owner/asset operator shall adhere to cyber security mechanisms, includingdocumentation for cyber security policies, procedures and responsibilities for the vessel. For class notationCyber secure, DNV GL will at regular intervals verify this during the lifetime of the vessel.

2 Policies, procedures and responsibilities for the vessel

2.1 GeneralCyber security barriers apply to people, process and technology. The technical requirements are coveredin [3], while the requirements for people and processes are given in this subsection. The requirementsfor policies, procedures and responsibilities are based on the IEC 62443-2-1, which is an extension of ISO27001/ 2, specifically made for industrial automation and control systems. The IEC standard defines a cybersecurity management system where most of the requirements apply to the ship-owner organization. In theserules, a subset is defined that applies onboard the vessel.

2.2 Procedural requirements2.2.1 Policies, procedures and responsibilities for the vesselThe procedural requirements may be divided into 3 main parts:

1) System documentation describing and indicating the logical and/ or physical grouping, including thesystem's security capabilities. Procedural requirements are given in [6.2].

2) Addressing cyber security with procedural barriers, which includes (not limited to) training of personnel,management of security mechanisms, physical security and incident handling and reporting. Proceduralrequirements are given in [6.3].

3) Monitoring and improving procedural barriers by performing audits. Procedural requirements are given in[6.4].

Part

6 C

hapt

er 5

Sec

tion

21


DNV GL AS

2.2.2 Verification of policies, procedures and responsibilitiesCompliance with requirements to policies, procedures and responsibilities for the vessel shall bedemonstrated. Audit of the cyber security management system shall be performed by the society.

3 System design

3.1 GeneralWhen systems for consideration have been determined, their properties shall be evaluated for groupingthem into zones. Communication between the zones and trusted/ un-trusted networks shall follow therequirements in [7.5].

3.2 Assigning cyber security requirements3.2.1 Zones and conduits

3.2.1.1 Systems with similar properties shall be grouped into logical zones.

Interpretation:Operational technology (OT) systems with similar properties shall be grouped into zones. The same applies toinformation technology (IT) systems with similar properties.

---e-n-d---o-f---i-n-t-e-r-p-r-e-t-a-t-i-o-n---

Guidance note:The grouping of systems into zones should be based on assigned security level, operational function, physical location, networksconnection and systems access. Additional guidance may be found in IEC 62443-3-2.


3.2.1.2 Systems that do not naturally belong together shall not be grouped into zones.

Interpretation:Business and enterprise systems shall not be grouped with essential, important, bridge and industry purposesystems. It is recommended that essential, important and industry purpose systems are grouped intodifferent zone(s) than bridge systems. This requirement should be seen in context with Pt.4 Ch.9 Sec.4[3.1.8] and Pt.4 Ch.9 Sec.4 [3.1.9] for network design.


3.2.1.3 Safety systems, as required in the rules, shall be logically and/ or physically separated from non-safety system zones. If safety and control systems share the same zone, the entire zone shall be treated as asafety zone.

Interpretation:Separation between safety and control systems, when required in the rules, shall comply with Pt.4 Ch.9Sec.3 [1.1.3]. If communication between these systems are needed, e.g. for indication and alarming, theseparation shall include data flow restriction as required in [7.5]. E.g. one way communication from safety tocontrol on dedicated communication channels.


3.2.1.4 Facilities for handling and management of removable devices shall be grouped into a separate zone,separate from permanently installed devices. When removable devices have been handled/managed in sucha zone, they may be connected to zones with permanently installed devices.

Part

6 C

hapt

er 5

Sec

tion

21


DNV GL AS

Guidance note:Transfer of data between secure zones and to/from removable devices, such as USB sticks, portable hard drives and maintenancelaptops, should be centrally managed to control the exchange of information. Connecting USB sticks or maintenance laptopsdirectly to systems in secure zones without proper management could pose a cyber security risk such as e.g. malware infections.


Guidance note:Vendor specific cleaning facilities, e.g. sheep dipping station, may be located in the same zone where the removable device isintended connected.


3.2.1.5 Wireless devices shall be grouped in zones separate from wired devices.

Interpretation:Any form of wireless communication by e.g. wi-fi or bluetooth for crew and passenger shall be separatedfrom zones for permanent and/ or temporarily connected wired devices. Wireless sensors used in OTapplications for operational purposes may be connected to relevant zones containing wired devices. Suchwireless devices shall then follow the requirements in [7] and Pt.4 Ch.9 Sec.4 [3.5]


3.2.1.6 Remote access possibilities for the vessel shall be grouped into a separate zone, providing the assetowner / asset operator full control of any cyber related access external to the vessel.

Guidance note:If a common solution is not possible, e.g. due to owner's IT infrastructure, individual remote access solution may be acceptedgiven that monitoring and control are handled in the supplier agreement. This applies for all relevant remote access solutionsonboard the vessel. Ref. [3.3] for details.


3.2.1.7 Communication crossing zones shall be controlled and security events shall be logged by the firewallbetween the zones. The firewall shall have the capabilities satisfying security level 1 in DNVGL-CP-0231 forclass notation Cyber secure(Basic) and level 3 for class notation Cyber secure(Advanced)

Guidance note:The conduits and their numbering should be reflected in network filtering rules for routers and firewalls.


3.2.1.8 Firewalls between the different zones shall follow the security level of the zone with highestrequirement.

3.2.1.9 Figure 3 shows an example of zones and conduits for a solution with remote access possibility.

Part

6 C

hapt

er 5

Sec

tion

21


DNV GL AS

Figure 3 Examples of zones and conduits

3.2.2 Cyber security barrier management

3.2.2.1 Making a vessel cyber secure may be achieved through barrier management. The purpose ofbarrier management is to establish and maintain barriers so that risk of cyber-attack at any given time isacceptable, by preventing an undesirable event from occurring, or by limiting the consequence should suchan event occur.

3.2.2.2 Barriers used in these rules are technical, organizational and person-related measures which areintended, individually or collectively, to:

Part

6 C

hapt

er 5

Sec

tion

21


DNV GL AS

1) reduce the possibility for a cyber security incident by detecting, deterring, delaying and denying anattack

2) limit the consequences of a cyber incident by responding and recovering from the attack.A way to visualize the barriers is to use the bow-tie representation. Such samples may be seen in DNVGL-RP-0496 App.A.

3.2.2.3 A barrier function is the task or role of a barrier, e.g. preventing un-authorized access to thesystems, mitigating the consequence of malware infection, etc.

3.2.2.4 A barrier strategy is the result of a process that based on the threat picture, describes and clarifiesthe barrier function and elements that need to be implemented in order to establish adequate barriers toreduce the risk of cyber security incidents to an acceptable level.

3.2.3 Preventing and mitigating cyber security incidentsThe following threats, having the potential for creating undesirable cyber security incident, is considered. Thislist is not exhaustive.Passive threats:

— information gathering (e.g. sniffing).Active threats:

— communication attack— database injection (e.g. attack to database-driven applications and dump the data to the attacker)— replay (e.g. captured process signal to be played back for falsifying process parameter)— spoofing and impersonation (e.g. forging IP addresses to appear as authorized device)— phishing (e.g. lure information from vessel crew)— malicious code (e.g. virus, worms, trojan horses, automated exploits)— denial of service (e.g. attack affecting availability of OT networks)— escalation of privileges (e.g. attacker gains admin rights)— physical destruction (e.g. destroying and/ or disabling physical OT hardware).These threats may lead to cyber security incidents such as:

— malware infection (e.g. from internet, intranet, removable device or connected 3rd party devices, etc.)— un-authorized access from outside the vessel (e.g. via remote access, etc.)— un-authorized access from inside the vessel (e.g. via public wi-fi or physical access to equipment, etc.)— security breach (e.g. successful hacking of password, man in the middle attack, etc.).

Guidance note:As part of maintaining barriers to cyber security in the vessel's lifetime, a continues threat assessment is important. New threatsmight create new cyber security incidents that should be assessed and mitigated. See [2] for requirements to cyber securitymanagement system.DNVGL-RP-0496 may be used as guidance for barrier management and bow-tie visualization for relevant hazard.


Guidance note:More details on threats may be found in IEC 62443-1-1.


3.2.3.1 The seven foundational requirements in Table 16 shall be implemented as barriers to protect andmitigate any cyber security incident from occurring.

Part

6 C

hapt

er 5

Sec

tion

21


DNV GL AS

Table 16 Foundational cyber security requirements

No. Foundational requirement 1) Objective

1 Identification and authentication All users shall be identified and authenticated before given access to a system.

2 Use Control Enforce user's privileges and monitor these.

3 System integrity Ensure system integrity from unauthorized manipulation.

4 Data Confidentiality Ensure confidentiality and prevent unauthorized disclosure of systemcommunication.

5 Restricted Data Flow Limit unnecessary data flow by segmenting.

6 Timely Response to Events Respond to incidents and evidence of violations, and correct action when incidentsare discovered.

7 Resource Availability Ensure the availability of the system in case of cyber security incident.1)Additional guidance on foundation requirements may be found in IEC 62443-1-1 and IEC 62443-3-3.

3.2.3.2 Detailed requirement for each of the seven foundational requirements is described in [7.1] to [7.7].

3.3 Remote access3.3.1 Components in a remote access solutionFor class notation Cyber secure(Basic) the gateway(s) for remote access shall have the security capabilityof level 3 in DNVGL-CP-0231.For class notation Cyber secure(Advanced) the gateway(s) for remote access shall be type approvedsatisfying security level 3 in DNVGL-CP-0231.

Guidance note:If the gateway(s) for Cyber secure(Basic) is not able to demonstrate security capability of level 3 per DNVGL-CP-0231, othermeans of demonstrating the same capability might be accepted.


Guidance note:It is recommended that a common remote access solutions is provided where all communication is routed via the asset owner's/asset operator's IT infrastructure. This way the asset owner/asset operator may have full control of remote communication to andfrom the vessel.


3.3.2 CommunicationSecure tunnels shall be used for communication between vessel and on-shore facilities.

Guidance note:All access from outside the vessel should go through RAS as a hardened and monitored device to control the communication flow.


3.4 Incident handling and reportingThere shall be mechanisms for reporting, storing and handling all cyber security incidents. At all times theincident information shall be kept secure.

Part

6 C

hapt

er 5

Sec

tion

21


DNV GL AS

Guidance note:Cyber incidents should be stored in a database for continued threat analysis and management. Such database may be a part ofasset owner's/asset operator's IT infrastructure or a 3rd party database from providers specialising in data management, e.g.DNVGL's Veracity platform.


4 Certification and classification

4.1 GeneralThe correct security capabilities for each system and the integration of system capabilities for the overallvessel shall be verified as described in the vessel specific CSRS document. Part from documentation reviewas required in Table 9, the capabilities for each system may be demonstrated as pre-approved components ora complete system where correct parameterisation for each vessel shall be demonstrated by onboard testing.

Guidance note:Type approval programme DNVGL-CP-0231 may be used to achieve pre-approval of components and/ or systems.


4.2 Pre-approvalIf a component in a system or the entire system itself is type approved according to DNVGL-CP-0231,documentation submittals according to Table 9 might be reduced or omitted. Verification of vessel specificparameterisation shall be included in test documentation as required in Table 10.

4.3 Verification and scopeVerification shall be done in phase 3 and 4 as described in [1.10.5] and [1.10.6]. Details for testing each ofthe phases is described in [4.4] and [4.5]. Examples of verification tests for both phases for the differentnotations may be seen in Table 17.

Table 17 Examples of verification tests

Cyber secure(Basic) Cyber secure(Advanced) Cyber secure(+)

— Test Anti-virus— Survey physical security— Guarding of vessel's public IP

addresses— Network storm— Default credentials, administrative

interfaces and authentication— Operator station lock-down, and

access control— Vulnerability scanning— Network segregation

— All tests for Cyber secure(Basic)— Firmware screening— Verification of continuous

monitoring (e.g. IDS), if applicable— Penetration testing

— The content of the testing willdepend on selected system(s) andsecurity level

4.3.1 Between test phasesDuring and in-between all test phases, the systems shall be protected from unauthorized access andtampering.

Part

6 C

hapt

er 5

Sec

tion

21


DNV GL AS

Guidance note:This may be done by access control of test labs, storage facilities and equipment rooms onboard.


4.3.2 Change handlingSoftware and hardware change handling as required in Pt.4 Ch.9 Sec.1 [1.5] applies.

4.4 Testing at site/ onboard4.4.1 General

4.4.1.1 The security capabilities for each individual system and its components shall be verified as partof modification/installation and commissioning. For pre-approved components and systems, the correctparameterisation shall be verified.

4.4.1.2 For all systems, relevant software shall be checked for un-authorized modification from manufactureuntil start-up of commissioning.

4.4.1.3 For all systems, user accounts and authorization mechanisms shall be applied prior to start ofcommissioning.

4.4.1.4 Policies and procedural requirements to removable device and remote access shall be applied prior tostart of commissioning.

4.4.2 Test documentsA cyber security test procedure shall be submitted for approval as a part of the required documents in Table10 (Z253).

4.5 Final integration testing4.5.1 GeneralWhen all systems are modified/ installed, commissioned and tested, the overall security target of the vesselshall be verified.

Guidance note:Testing should include integration of all systems, remote access possibilities, proper configuration of firewall between zonesand systems, and integration of all equipment relevant for achieving targeted cyber security level. Testing may be done e.g. byvulnerability scanning and penetration testing.


4.5.2 Test documentsTest procedure for final integration tests shall be submitted for approval as required in Table 10 (Z251).

5 Systems for consideration

5.1 GeneralThe systems in Table 18, Table 19 and Table 19 shall be addressed for cyber security. The selectionmechanisms in [5.2] shall be used to determine if a system shall be included in scope for relevant vessel.

Part

6 C

hapt

er 5

Sec

tion

21


DNV GL AS

5.2 Initial system selectionCyber physical systems in [5.3] to [5.5] that possess any of the following capabilities, shall be subject toverification of security capabilities in these rules.

— remote connection (from outside the vessel)— connected and/ or integrated (with other systems)— possibility for software updates (of application and/ or operating systems).

If such systems allow for modification of parameters, relevant requirements in [3] shall still apply.

5.3 Essential and important systemsEssential and important systems to be considered are listed in Table 18.

Table 18 Essential and important systems to be considered

Function2 Additional description and example systems3

Propulsion1 The following control and monitoring system(s) for propulsion shall be addressed;CPP, RPM, electrical thrusters and related electrical drives.

Steering1 The following control and monitoring system(s) for steering shall be addressed;rudder, azimuth thrusters and related electrical drives.

Watertight integrity1 The following control and monitoring system(s) for watertight integrity shall beaddressed; internal watertight doors and shell doors.

Fire detection and mitigation1 The following control and monitoring system(s) for fire detection and mitigation shallbe addressed; fire detection & alarm system and fire pumps.

Ballasting1 The following control and monitoring system(s) for ballast shall be addressed; ballastvalves, pumps and levels gauges.

Thrusters not part of propulsionfunctions1

The following control and monitoring system(s) for thrusters shall be addressed;auxiliary thruster.

Power generation supplyingessential and important systems1

The following control and monitoring system(s) for power generation shall beaddressed; main and auxiliary engine, generator and electrical power management.

Auxiliary systems for essentialand important systems1

The following control and monitoring system(s) for auxiliary services shall beaddressed; cooling, fuel, lube oil, compressed air and ventilation.

1. Both local and remote control possibilities (Local, ECR, CCR, Bridge) onboard the vessel shall be addressed.

2. If these rules are applied to an offshore unit, other essential functions might have to be addressed for cyber security.Please see DNVGL-OS-D201 Ch.1 Sec.1 [4.4.1] and DNVGL-OS-D201 Ch.1 Sec.1 [4.4.2] for additional details.

3. The systems indicated here are mainly intended as examples. To cover the listed functions, other systems might beapplicable depending on vessel type.

5.4 Bridge systemsBridge systems to consider are listed in Table 19.

Part

6 C

hapt

er 5

Sec

tion

21


DNV GL AS

Table 19 Bridge systems to be considered

Function Additional description and example systems1, 2

Navigation

The following navigation systems shall be addressed: Radar, AIS, GPS, ECDIS, Compass,Gyro, Heading and bearing indicator, BNWAS, echo sounder, electronic plotting, speed anddistance measuring device, tracking aid, rate of turn indicator and transmitting headingdevice.

CommunicationThe following communication systems shall be addressed: distress alert, EPIRB, publicannouncement, general alarm, satellite communication3, wireless communication andintegrated network communications systems.

1. The systems indicated here are mainly intended as examples. Other systems might be applicable depending on vesseltype.

2. Equipment that combine or integrate some of the mentioned functions shall also be addressed. E.g. conning system,multi-function-display system.

3. Satellite communication shall be considered in context with remote access possibilities for essential, important andindustry purpose systems.

5.5 Industrial purpose systemsIndustry purpose systems to be considered are listed in Table 20.

Table 20 Industrial purpose systems to be considered

Function Additional description and systems

Dynamic positioning (DP)

Applicable for DYNPOS and DPS notation. The following control and monitoring system(s)for dynamic positioning shall be addressed; Automatic main control system, Automaticback-up control system, Automatic alternative control system and Manual independentjoystick control system.

Drilling Applicable for DRILL notation. The following control and monitoring system(s) for drillingshall be addressed; hoisting and rotating, active heave compensation, MPD and BOP.

Production Applicable for PROD notation. The following control and monitoring system(s) forproduction shall be addressed; PSD.

6 Requirements to policies, procedures and responsibilities

6.1 GeneralRequirements to policies, procedure and responsibilities are described in [6.2] to [6.4]. These requirementsare a subset of the requirements in IEC 62443-2-1 adapted to a single vessel.The procedures and documented evidence that the procedures are followed, shall at any time be keptupdated and available onboard the vessel. Documentation shall be stored in a secure manner where onlyauthorized personnel have access.

6.2 System documentationDocumentation to enable the crew to identify the systems and relevant security mechanisms, shall existsonboard the vessel.

Part

6 C

hapt

er 5

Sec

tion

21


DNV GL AS

6.2.1 System inventory, major devices, segmentation and physical location

No. Requirement

.1 Documentation shall exist identifying the various systems, their nature of security risk, their grouping intological systems and their interfaces to other systems.

.2 Diagrams shall exist for each of the logically integrated systems showing the major devices, network types andlocations of the equipment.

Guidance note:The documentation fulfilling above requirement might be the same document as required in Table 7 and Table 9.


6.3 Addressing cyber security with policies, procedures and responsibilitiesAppropriate behaviour of personnel to avoid phishing attacks, spoofing attacks, malware infection, etc.shall be made known to the crew and to any other personnel onboard, including service suppliers andother visitors. By correct usage of and adherence to security mechanisms such as account management,authentication, event logging, malware scanning, etc., the risk of cyber security incidents will be greatlyreduced. If an incident should occur, relevant personnel shall have a clear understanding of their expectedactions.

6.3.1 Scope

No. Requirement

.1 A formal written scope for the cyber security management system shall exist.

6.3.2 Organizing for security

No. Requirement

.1 The vessel's captain shall know and support the cyber security program.

.2 Responsibilities of the organization onboard shall be clearly defined. This includes responsibilities related tophysical access to locations onboard.

6.3.3 Staff training and security awareness

No. Requirement

.1All personnel onboard handling IT or OT equipment shall be trained initially and periodically thereafter.The content of the training shall include correct security policies and procedures, as well as correct use ofinformation processing facilities. This also applies to 3rd party service suppliers.

.2 All personnel (crew, service suppliers, etc.) involved with IT and OT systems onboard the vessel shall haverecords of training. Schedules for training updates shall exist.

6.3.4 Business continuity plan

No. Requirement

.1Business continuity plans shall exist to detect and minimize impact of on-going cyber security incidents and torecover from such incidents. Procedures shall be documented to disable all external data-communication to andfrom the ship. Procedures shall be documented to disable all data-communication to critical segments.

Part

6 C

hapt

er 5

Sec

tion

21


DNV GL AS

No. Requirement

.2 A business continuity plan shall exist, defining the crew specific roles and responsibilities for each part of theplan.

.3 Backup and restore procedures shall exist supporting the business continuity plan.

.4 Periodic training for the business continuity plan shall be scheduled and the plan shall be updated as necessary.

6.3.5 Security policies and procedure

No. Requirement

.1 Security policies shall exist. The policies shall describe principles for secure communication to and from theship, and authorised access to onboard systems.

.2 Cyber security policies, procedures and responsibilities, shall be known by all personnel (crew, servicesuppliers, etc.).

.3 The cyber security policies and procedures shall be reviewed periodically.

6.3.6 Personnel security

No. Requirement

.1There shall be a personnel security policy established, clearly stating the security responsibilities of personnel(crew, service suppliers, etc.). Policies for the use of IT and OT equipment including use of mobile devices andremovable storage shall be included.

.2 Expectations and responsibilities to security for relevant personnel shall be clearly documented and regularlycommunicated.

.3The contractual agreements with crew and asset owner/asset operator shall clearly state the personnel'sresponsibility for cyber security. It is recommended that contractual agreements are extended a period aftertermination of employment.

6.3.7 Physical and environmental security

No. Requirement

.1 Physical security policies shall exist. The policies shall describe principles for controlling access to IT and OTsystems.

.2 The established physical security procedure shall be followed and enforced by the crew, contractors andservice suppliers.

.3 There shall exist procedures for monitoring, alarming, logging and responding when physical security iscompromised.

6.3.8 Network segmentation

No. Requirement

.1 There shall exist a network segmentation countermeasure strategy aligned with the requirement in [7.5.1]and Pt.4 Ch.9 Sec.4 [3].

Part

6 C

hapt

er 5

Sec

tion

21


DNV GL AS

6.3.9 Access control: Account administration

No. Requirement

.1Access to systems shall only be granted to a required minimum. A record shall be maintained for allaccounts. Strong passwords shall be used. Passwords shall be written down and stored in a secured locker/safe.

.2 No default passwords for accounts shall be used.

.3 Periodic reviews of compliance to the account administration policy shall be performed.

Guidance note:The procedural requirements for account administration should be aligned with the technical requirements in [7].


6.3.10 Access control: Authentication

No. Requirement

.1 All users shall be authenticated before granting access to the systems.

.2 Enhanced authentication practices (such as requiring strong passwords) for all administrator andconfiguration access accounts shall be used on all relevant IT and OT.

.3 Successful and failed access attempts to access relevant systems shall be logged and reviewed.

.4 Two-factor authentication shall be used to positively identify a remote interactive user.

.5 Policies for remote access shall exist, addressing failed login attempts and inactivates.

.6 The system shall disable user accounts for a defined period of time after a number of failed login attempts bya remote user.

.7 A remote user shall be required to re-authenticate after a period of inactivity, before the user may gainaccess to the system again. Such re-authentication should not block on-going jobs.

Guidance note:The procedural requirements for authentication should be aligned with the technical requirements in [7].


6.3.11 System development and maintenance

No. Requirement

.1 A procedure for patch management shall exist. Personnel working with relevant IT and OT systems shalladhere to this procedure. The status of patch updates shall be available.

.2 A procedure for antivirus/ malware management shall exist. Personnel working with relevant IT and OTsystems shall adhere to this procedure. The status of activated signature files shall be available.

.3 A procedure for backing up and restoring relevant cyber physical systems in [5] shall exist. The sameprocedure shall include protection of verified backup copies.

Part

6 C

hapt

er 5

Sec

tion

21


DNV GL AS

6.3.12 Information and document management

No. Requirement

.1

All relevant systems that have addressed cyber security shall keep system documentation such as controlsystem design information, network diagrams and operations programs protected from unauthorizeddisclosure or modification. For any non-protected documentation, sensitive information (e.g. username andpassword) enabling or aiding access to IT or OT systems shall not be disclosed.

6.3.13 Incident planning and response

No. Requirement

.1 An onboard incident response plan shall exist. The responsible personnel and their actions upon an incidentshall be included.

.2 The incident response plan shall be known by relevant personnel.

.3 A procedure shall exist to detect and report unusual activities and events which might be cyber securityincidents.

.4 Possibilities for crew and contractors to report cyber security incidents shall exist. All relevant personnel shallbe educated on their responsibility to report such incidents and the methods of reporting.

.5 The vessel crew should report cyber security incidents in a timely manner.

.6 The vessel crew shall have procedures in place to identify failed and successful cyber security breaches.

.7 The crew shall perform drills, testing the incident response plan on a regular basis.

6.4 Monitoring and improving the policies, procedure and responsibilitiesTo maintain the correct focus on cyber security e.g. by analysing any incidents and being updated on thelatest threat mitigation, the management system shall be monitored and improved at a continues basis.Mitigation of any possible new threats shall include patch management, updated signature files for malwareprotection and event log analysis.

6.4.1 Conformance

No. Requirement

.1 Periodic audits shall be performed to validate that the policies and procedures as required in these rules arefollowed.

6.4.2 Review, improving and maintaining policies, procedure and responsibilities

No. Requirement

.1 Based on the periodic audit of the policies and procedures, relevant action and modification shall be identifiedand implemented to achieve the security objectives.

7 Security requirementsAll requirements which refer to external standards shall be considered as interpretations. The referencesstandard shall be used to determine the full content, rationale and relevant guidance.For class notation Cyber secure(Basic), IEC 62443-3-3 SL-1 forms the basis. The requirements are tailoredto create a profile suitable for the maritime industry and sailing vessels with high focus on remote access.Deviations from IEC 62443-3-3 SL-1 are indicted in the requirement tables.

Part

6 C

hapt

er 5

Sec

tion

21


DNV GL AS

For class notation Cyber secure(Advanced), IEC 62443-3-3 SL-3 forms the basis. The requirements aretailored to create a profile suitable for the maritime industry and new-build vessels. Deviations from IEC62443-3-3 SL-3 are indicted in the requirement tables.For class notation Cyber secure(+), requirements for all IEC 62443-3-3 security levels, tailored for themaritime industry, are listed in the requirement tables. Ref. selectable systems in [1.2.4].

7.1 Identification and authenticationThis chapter describes requirements for identification and authentication of user prior to accessing thesystem.

7.1.1 User identification and authentication

Requirements forCyber secure

(Basic) (Advanced)

Requiredfor IECsecuritylevel 1

Requirement description

YES YES

SL-1

SL-2

SL-3

SL-4

Interfaces for human user access, shall have the possibility to identify andauthenticate all human users.

Requirement reference: IEC-62443-3-3 SR 1.1

Access to configuration shall follow the requirement in Pt.4 Ch.9 Sec.4 [1.9].

Additional guidance for bridge systems:

Only administrator account is required.

N/ A YES

SL-2

SL-3

SL-4

Interfaces for human user access, shall have the possibility to uniquely identifyand authenticate all human users.

Requirement reference: IEC-62443-3-3 SR 1.1 RE 1


Not a requirement for bridge systems.

YES 2 YESSL-3

SL-4

All human user access from untrusted networks shall use multifactorauthentication.



This applies only to administrator account.

N/ A N/ A SL-4

All human user access shall use multifactor authentication.




1. Related IEC standard is IEC 62443-3-3

2. Requirement is additional to IEC 62443-3-3 SL-1

Guidance note:Above requirements are not intending to prohibit the system from resuming operation automatically after loss of power as requiredby Pt.4 Ch.9 Sec.3 [2.1.1]. However compensating measure should be taken to ensure that access to the system is controlled (e.g.restricted/ controlled access to equipment location, system located in continuously manned space, etc.).


Part

6 C

hapt

er 5

Sec

tion

21


DNV GL AS

7.1.2 Application or device identification and authentication


(Basic) (Advanced)



N/ A YES

SL-2

SL-3

SL-4

The cyber physical system shall be able to identify and authenticate all devicesand software processes. All interfaces to the systems shall enforce identificationand authentication control to support policies and procedure for least privileges.


N/ A YESSL-3

SL-4

All components and software processes for the cyber physical system, shall beuniquely identify and authenticated.



7.1.3 Account management


(Basic) (Advanced)



YES YES

SL-1

SL-2

SL-3

SL-4

The cyber physical system shall have mechanisms to manage all user accounts.This shall at least include adding, activating, modifying, disabling, and removingaccounts.



Not required for bridge systems.

N/ A N/ A 2SL-3

SL-4

The cyber physical system shall have mechanisms for unified management alluser accounts. If a complete integrated system solution is delivered from onevendor, this requirement shall be implemented.





2. Requirement is removed compared to IEC 62443-3-3

7.1.4 Identifier management


(Basic) (Advanced)



YES YES

SL-1

SL-2

SL-3

SL-4

The cyber physical system shall be able to handle management of identifiers byuser, group, role or control system interface.




Part

6 C

hapt

er 5

Sec

tion

21


DNV GL AS


(Basic) (Advanced)




7.1.5 Authenticator management


(Basic) (Advanced)



YES YES

SL-1

SL-2

SL-3

SL-4

The cyber physical system shall be able to protect the authenticators duringstorage and transmission. It shall be possible to change authenticators.


N/ A YESSL-3

SL-4

Relevant authenticators shall be protected via hardware mechanisms forsoftware process and users.



Not a requirement for bridge system.


7.1.6 Wireless access management


(Basic) (Advanced)



YES YES

SL-1

SL-2

SL-3

SL-4

All users of wireless communication shall be identified and authenticated.



Wireless access to bridge systems shall go through a gateway.

Requirement reference: IEC-61162-460 Ch.6.3.6

N/ A YES

SL-2

SL-3

SL-4

All users of wireless communication shall be uniquely identified andauthenticated.



Part

6 C

hapt

er 5

Sec

tion

21


DNV GL AS

7.1.7 Strength of password-based authentication


(Basic) (Advanced)



YES YES

SL-1

SL-2

SL-3

SL-4

The cyber physical systems shall have the possibility to configure the minimumlength and the variety of character types for passwords.



If password is used as user authentication mechanism, the password shall atleast have 8 characters.

Requirement reference: IEC-61162-460 Ch.6.2.4.1

N/ A YESSL-3

SL-4

The cyber physical systems shall have the possibility to configure reuselimitation for passwords, in addition to minimum and maximum lifetime of thepassword.




N/ A N/ A SL-4

The cyber physical systems shall have the possibility to configure minimum andmaximum lifetime of a password for all user.





7.1.8 Public key infrastructure (PKI) certificates


(Basic) (Advanced)



N/ A YES

SL-2

SL-3

SL-4

If a public key infrastructure (PKI) is used, the cyber physical systemsshall operate such PKI according to industry best practice or the public keycertificates may be obtained from existing PKI. PKI might not be relevant forinternal communication onboard the vessel; hence this requirement is notabsolute for such use. This may be assessed case by case.



Requirement is only applicable for execution of content on removable devices.


Part

6 C

hapt

er 5

Sec

tion

21


DNV GL AS

7.1.9 Strength of public key authentication


(Basic) (Advanced)



N/ A YES

SL-2

SL-3

SL-4

If a public key infrastructure (PKI) is used, requirements in referenced standardshall be complied with. PKI might not be relevant for internal communicationonboard the vessel; hence this requirement is not absolute for such use. Thismay be assessed case by case.



Requirement is only applicable for execution of content on removable devices.

N/ A YESSL-3

SL-4

The cyber physical systems shall have the possibilities to keep relevant privatekeys protected by hardware mechanisms. PKI might not be relevant for internalcommunication onboard the vessel; hence this requirement is not absolute forsuch use. This may be assessed case by case.





7.1.10 Authenticator feedback


(Basic) (Advanced)



YES YES

SL-1

SL-2

SL-3

SL-4

The cyber physical system shall be able to obscure the feedback during theauthentication process.





7.1.11 Unsuccessful login attempts


(Basic) (Advanced)



YES YES

SL-1

SL-2

SL-3

SL-4

The cyber physical system shall enforce a limit of consecutive invalid loginattempts during a limited time period shall be provided. Access shall be denieduntil time limit is exceeded or until an administrator unlocks the account. Forcritical services or servers, the control system shall provide the capability todisallow interactive logons.




Part

6 C

hapt

er 5

Sec

tion

21


DNV GL AS


(Basic) (Advanced)




7.1.12 System use notification


(Basic) (Advanced)



YES YES

SL-1

SL-2

SL-3

SL-4

The cyber physical systems shall be able to show a use notification messagebefore user is authenticated. This message shall be configurable.





7.1.13 Access via untrusted networks


(Basic) (Advanced)



YES YES

SL-1

SL-2

SL-3

SL-4

The cyber physical systems shall be able to monitor and control all methods ofaccess from untrusted networks.



A gateway is required for access from un-trusted networks, where all dataexchange through the gateway shall be encrypted.

YES 2 YES

SL-2

SL-3

SL-4

The cyber physical system shall have the possibility to deny access requests viauntrusted networks, if the request is not approved by assigned crew member.



This requirement applies for bridge systems. 3



3. Requirement is additional to IEC 61162-460

Part

6 C

hapt

er 5

Sec

tion

21


DNV GL AS

7.2 Use control7.2.1 Authorization enforcement


(Basic) (Advanced)



YES YES

SL-1

SL-2

SL-3

SL-4

The cyber physical systems shall be able to enforce authorizations assigned toall human users based on segregation of duties and least privilege.




N/ A YES

SL-2

SL-3

SL-4

The cyber physical systems shall be able to enforce authorizations assigned toall users based on segregation of duties and least privilege.


N/ A YES

SL-2

SL-3

SL-4

The cyber physical system shall have the possibility to define and changepermissions of roles for all human users.



Only administrator role is required.

N/ A YESSL-3

SL-4

The cyber physical systems shall have manual override of the current humanuser authorization for a configurable time.




N/ A N/ A SL-4

The cyber physical systems shall have dual approval if operation may result insafety issues for vessel and/ or its crew.





Part

6 C

hapt

er 5

Sec

tion

21


DNV GL AS

7.2.2 Wireless use control


(Basic) (Advanced)



YES YES

SL-1

SL-2

SL-3

SL-4

The cyber physical system shall be able to authorize, monitor and enforce usagerestrictions for wireless connectivity.



Wireless access point within the bridge zones is not allowed. If access fromwireless devices is needed, the communication needs to go through a wirelessgateway.

N/ A YESSL-3

SL-4

The cyber physical system shall identify and report unauthorized wirelessdevices transmitting within the system physical environment.



Wireless access point within the bridge zones is not allowed.


7.2.3 Use control for portable and mobile devices


(Basic) (Advanced)



YES YES

SL-1

SL-2

SL-3

SL-4

The cyber physical system shall be able to enforce configurable usagerestrictions as descried in requirement reference.



This requirement applies only to REDS.

N/ A YESSL-3

SL-4

The cyber physical system shall have the possibility to verify that portable andmobile devices connecting to a zone, comply with the security requirements ofthat zone.





Part

6 C

hapt

er 5

Sec

tion

21


DNV GL AS

7.2.4 Mobile code


(Basic) (Advanced)



YES YES

SL-1

SL-2

SL-3

SL-4

The cyber physical system shall be able to restrict the use of mobile code suchas e.g. java scripts, ActiveX and PDF to limit the consequence of damage it maydo to a system. The restriction shall include the requirements described in thereferenced standard.




N/ A YESSL-3

SL-4

Prior to executing mobile code, the integrity of the code shall be verified by thecyber physical system.



This requirement applies only to REDS and manual execution of content.


7.2.5 Session lock


(Basic) (Advanced)



YES YES

SL-1

SL-2

SL-3

SL-4

The cyber physical systems shall prevent further access to the systems after aconfigurable time of inactivity. Session lock by manual initiation shall also beprovided. Only authorized human user is allowed to re-established or create anew session.





Part

6 C

hapt

er 5

Sec

tion

21


DNV GL AS

7.2.6 Remote session termination


(Basic) (Advanced)



YES 2 YES

SL-2

SL-3

SL-4

The cyber physical system shall automatically terminate a remote sessionafter a configurable time-period of inactivity or by manually activation of theresponsible crew member. The effect of terminating a remote session during on-going operations shall be considered and not endanger the vessel and its crew.



The gateway shall lock after 10 min as default if there is no traffic on theconnection.

Requirement IEC 61162-460, Ch.6.3.5.1



7.2.7 Concurrent session control


(Basic) (Advanced)



N/ A YESSL-3

SL-4

The cyber physical system shall limit the number of concurrent sessions perinterface for all users. The number of sessions shall be configurable.






7.2.8 Auditable events


(Basic) (Advanced)



YES YES

SL-1

SL-2

SL-3

SL-4

The cyber physical system shall generate audit records for access control,request errors, operating system events, control system events, backup andrestore events, configuration changes, potential reconnaissance activity andaudit log events. Each record shall include timestamp, source, category, type,event ID and event result.



Gateway maintenance records and syslog record shall as a minimum begenerated.

Part

6 C

hapt

er 5

Sec

tion

21


DNV GL AS


(Basic) (Advanced)



N/ A N/ A 2SL-3

SL-4

The cyber physical systems shall provide the possibility to centrally manageaudit events, and combine all such events into a common audit file for thesystem. The format of the files shall support standard commercial tools foranalysing the events. If a complete integrated system solution is delivered fromone vendor, this requirement should be implemented.



Central management of audits records is not required.


2. Requirement is removed compared to IEC 62443-3-3

7.2.9 Audit storage capacity


(Basic) (Advanced)



YES YES

SL-1

SL-2

SL-3

SL-4

The cyber physical system shall be equipped with sufficient storage capacity foraudits records. As part of the audit, storage capacity for such records shall bemonitored.



Audit log shall either be stored for at-least 3 months or the last 10.000 entries;whichever creates the smallest storage capacity.

N/ A YESSL-3

SL-4

The cyber physical systems shall alert the operator in a manned control space ifthe size of the audit records exceeds a configurable limit.





7.2.10 Response to audit processing failures


(Basic) (Advanced)



YES YES

SL-1

SL-2

SL-3

SL-4

The cyber physical system shall alert the operating personnel in a mannedcontrol space and prevent the loss of essential services and functions in theevent of an audit processing failure. If such failures occur, they shall be handledaccording to best practice.



Part

6 C

hapt

er 5

Sec

tion

21


DNV GL AS

7.2.11 Timestamp


(Basic) (Advanced)



YES 2 YES

SL-2

SL-3

SL-4

The cyber physical shall timestamp each entry in the audit records.


N/ A YESSL-3

SL-4

The cyber physical system shall synchronize internal system clocks at aconfigurable frequency.

Requirement reference: IEC-62443-3-3 SR 2.11 RE 1 3

N/ A N/ A SL-4

Unauthorized modification of the time source shall not be possible. Ifmodification has occurred an audit event shall be logged.






3. Requirement is additional to IEC 61162-460

7.2.12 Non-repudiation


(Basic) (Advanced)



N/ A YESSL-3

SL-4

The control system shall have the possibility to identify when a human user tooka particular action.




N/ A N/ A SL-4

The control system shall have the possibility to identify when a user took aparticular action.





Part

6 C

hapt

er 5

Sec

tion

21


DNV GL AS

7.3 Systems integrity7.3.1 Communication integrity


(Basic) (Advanced)



YES YES

SL-1

SL-2

SL-3

SL-4

The cyber physical system shall protect the integrity of transmitted information.



Checksum shall be generated and the syntax shall be monitored.

N/ A YESSL-3

SL-4

The cyber physical system shall have cryptographic mechanisms to detectchanges to information during communication.



Not a requirement for bridge systems. Encryption is only required for externaldata exchange.


7.3.2 Malicious code protection


(Basic) (Advanced)



YES YES

SL-1

SL-2

SL-3

SL-4

The cyber physical system shall have protection mechanisms against maliciouscode or unauthorized software. This shall include prevention, detection,reporting and mitigating countermeasures. The protection mechanism shall beupdated in regular intervals.



Any application server located in the DMZ in 460-gateway shall have means forprotecting against malware.

YES 2 YES

SL-2

SL-3

SL-4

At all entry and exit points to the cyber physical system, there shall bemalicious code protection mechanism.


YES 2 YESSL-3

SL-4

Management of malicious code protection mechanisms shall be provided.



No direct requirement for bridge systems, however malware protection shall bekept updated.



Part

6 C

hapt

er 5

Sec

tion

21


DNV GL AS

7.3.3 Security functionality verification


(Basic) (Advanced)



YES YES

SL-1

SL-2

SL-3

SL-4

The cyber physical system shall have verification methods for the intendedoperation of security functions and reporting mechanism when anomaliesare discovered. Verification shall be performed during all testing phases andscheduled maintenance.


N/ A YESSL-3

SL-4

The cyber physical system shall have automatic methods for verifications ofsecurity functions during all test phases and scheduled maintenance.




N/ A N/ A SL-4

The cyber physical system shall have methods for verifications of securityfunctions during normal operation.





7.3.4 Software and information integrity


(Basic) (Advanced)



YES YES

SL-1

SL-2

SL-3

SL-4

Un-authorized changes to software and information in the cyber physical systemat rest shall be detected, recorded, reported and protected against.




N/ A YESSL-3

SL-4

Responsible crew member(s) shall be notified upon discovering integritydiscrepancies. The notifications shall use automated tools.





Part

6 C

hapt

er 5

Sec

tion

21


DNV GL AS

7.3.5 Input validation


(Basic) (Advanced)



YES YES

SL-1

SL-2

SL-3

SL-4

Validation of the syntax and content of input (e.g. from external networkdevices) which is used as an industrial process control input or input thatdirectly impacts the action of the cyber physical system shall be provided.


This requirement shall be seen in context with Pt.4 Ch.9 Sec.6 [4.1.8].




7.3.6 Deterministic output


(Basic) (Advanced)



YES YES

SL-1

SL-2

SL-3

SL-4

The cyber physical system shall set outputs to a predetermined state if normaloperation may not be maintained as a result of a cyber security incident. Thepredetermined state shall be decided based on criticality of each systems.





7.3.7 Error handling


(Basic) (Advanced)



N/ A YES

SL-2

SL-3

SL-4

Error conditions shall be identified for the cyber physical system. The conditionsshall be handled in a manner such that effective restoration of the systemsoccurs. Information related to error condition shall only be revealed if necessaryfor troubleshooting problems.





Part

6 C

hapt

er 5

Sec

tion

21


DNV GL AS

7.3.8 Session integrity


(Basic) (Advanced)



YES 2 YES

SL-2

SL-3

SL-4

The cyber physical system shall protect the integrity of sessions over untrustednetworks. Invalid session IDs shall be rejected.




YES 2 YESSL-3

SL-4

The cyber physical system shall invalidate session IDs upon user logout or othersession termination (including browser sessions) over untrusted networks.




YES 2 YESSL-3

SL-4

The cyber physical system shall be able to generate a unique session ID foreach session over untrusted networks. All unexpected session IDs shall betreated as invalid.




N/ A N/ A SL-4

The cyber physical system shall be able to generate a unique session ID withsources of randomness.






7.3.9 Protection of audit information


(Basic) (Advanced)



N/ A YES

SL-2

SL-3

SL-4

Audit information and audit tools shall be protected from unauthorized access,modification and deletion.




N/ A N/ A SL-4

Audit logs for the cyber physical system shall be recorded on write-once media.





Part

6 C

hapt

er 5

Sec

tion

21


DNV GL AS

7.4 Data confidentiality7.4.1 Information confidentiality


(Basic) (Advanced)



YES YES

SL-1

SL-2

SL-3

SL-4

The cyber physical system shall explicitly protect the confidentiality of readauthorized information.




YES 2 YES

SL-2

SL-3

SL-4

The cyber physical system shall protect the confidentiality of information at restand communicated on un-trusted network upon a remote access session.



When navigation systems are communicating over un-trusted networks VPNtunnelling with encryption shall be used.

N/ A N/ A SL-4The cyber physical system shall protect the confidentiality of informationcommunicated between any zone boundary.




7.4.2 Information persistence


(Basic) (Advanced)



N/ A YES

SL-2

SL-3

SL-4

The cyber physical system shall have the possibility to completely destroy allread authorized information on relevant components that may be replaced ordecommissioned.




N/ A YESSL-3

SL-4

The cyber physical system shall prevent information transfer via volatile sharedmemory resources that is not authorized and/ or intended.





Part

6 C

hapt

er 5

Sec

tion

21


DNV GL AS

7.4.3 Use of cryptography


(Basic) (Advanced)



YES YES

SL-1

SL-2

SL-3

SL-4

The cyber physical system shall use cryptographic algorithms, key sizes andmechanisms for key establishment and management based on best practicesand recommendations.



When bridge systems are communicating over un-trusted networks,communication shall be encrypted. The encryption shall use either asymmetric(RSA) or symmetric (AES) algorithms.

Requirement reference: IEC-61162.460 Ch.6.3.3


7.5 Restricted data flow7.5.1 Network segmentation


(Basic) (Advanced)



YES YES

SL-1

SL-2

SL-3

SL-4

The cyber physical system shall support logical segmentation of control systemsfrom non-control system networks, as well as logical segmentation of criticalcontrol systems from other control system networks.



VLAN may be used for segmentation of networks within bridge systems.

N/ A YES

SL-2

SL-3

SL-4

The cyber physical system shall support physical segmentation of controlsystems from non-control system networks, as well as physical segmentation ofcritical control systems from other control system networks.



For interconnection with other controlled networks a 460-Forwarder shall beused.

N/ A YESSL-3

SL-4

The cyber physical system shall provide network services to control systemnetworks, without a connection to non-control system network.




Part

6 C

hapt

er 5

Sec

tion

21


DNV GL AS


(Basic) (Advanced)



N/ A N/ A SL-4

The cyber physical system shall support logical and physical isolation betweencritical control system networks and non-critical control system networks.





7.5.2 Zone boundary protection


(Basic) (Advanced)



YES YES

SL-1

SL-2

SL-3

SL-4

The cyber physical systems shall monitor and control communications at zoneboundaries to enforce the compartmentalization for zones and conduits.


YES 2 YES

SL-2

SL-3

SL-4

The cyber physical system shall by default deny network traffic. To allowparticular network traffic, an exception has to be made (whitelisting).


YES 2 YESSL-3

SL-4

The cyber physical systems shall prevent any communication through thecontrol system boundary (island mode). Use of data diodes / unidirectional oneway communication may be accepted.


N/ A YESSL-3

SL-4

Upon failure of the zone boundary protection mechanisms, the cyber physicalsystems shall prevent any communication through the system boundary. This"fail close" functionality shall not interfere with the operation of a SIS or othersafety-related functions.






Part

6 C

hapt

er 5

Sec

tion

21


DNV GL AS

7.5.3 General purpose person-to-person communication restrictions


(Basic) (Advanced)



YES YES

SL-1

SL-2

SL-3

SL-4

Person-to-person messages from users or systems external to the controlsystem shall not be received by the cyber physical system.




N/ A YESSL-3

SL-4

Person-to-person messages from users or systems external to the controlsystem shall not be received or transmitted by the cyber physical system.





7.5.4 Application partitioning


(Basic) (Advanced)



YES YES

SL-1

SL-2

SL-3

SL-4

The cyber physical system shall support partitioning of data, applications andservices for implementing defined and established zones.





7.6 Timely response to events7.6.1 Audit log accessibility


(Basic) (Advanced)



YES YES

SL-1

SL-2

SL-3

SL-4

The cyber physical systems shall have the possibility to access audit logs forauthorized user. The access shall only permit monitoring of the data.



The network monitoring log shall be available for all users in a read-only format.

Part

6 C

hapt

er 5

Sec

tion

21


DNV GL AS


(Basic) (Advanced)



N/ A YESSL-3

SL-4

The cyber physical system shall be able to grant access to retrieve the auditlogs by an application programmatic interface (API). If a complete integratedsystem solution is delivered from one vendor, this requirement shall beimplemented.





7.6.2 Continuous monitoring


(Basic) (Advanced)



N/ A YES

SL-2

SL-3

SL-4

The cyber physical system shall be able to continuous monitor the performanceof all security mechanisms. This may be e.g. achieved by use of IDS, IPS,monitoring of network etc.



7.7 Resource availability7.7.1 Denial of service protection (DoS)


(Basic) (Advanced)



YES YES

SL-1

SL-2

SL-3

SL-4

The cyber physical system shall be able to operate in a degraded mode during aDoS event.


This requirement shall be seen in context with Pt.4 Ch.9 Sec.4 [3.1.3].Monitoring and alarming of network status shall follow the requirements in Pt.4Ch.9 Sec.4 [3.1.4].

N/ A YES

SL-2

SL-3

SL-4

The cyber physical system shall be able to handle communication loads tomitigate consequences of DoS events, e.g. by use of rate limiting.


N/ A YESSL-3

SL-4

The cyber physical system shall be able to minimize the possibility for all usersto cause DoS events affecting other systems and networks.



A 460-forwarder is required for communication between different 460-networks.

Part

6 C

hapt

er 5

Sec

tion

21


DNV GL AS


(Basic) (Advanced)




7.7.2 Resource management


(Basic) (Advanced)



YES YES

SL-1

SL-2

SL-3

SL-4

The cyber physical system shall be able to schedule system resources for higherpriority software process such as e.g. shutdowns, alarming and monitoring overlower priority resources such as e.g. networks scans.



7.7.3 Control system back-up


(Basic) (Advanced)



YES YES

SL-1

SL-2

SL-3

SL-4

The cyber physical systems shall support creation of back-up on user- andsystem-level. It shall be possible to create back-ups during normal operation.



Bridge systems shall follow the relevant application performance standard.

N/ A YES

SL-2

SL-3

SL-4

The cyber physical system shall support verification of the reliability of the back-up possibility.



Only when required by individual standards.

N/ A YESSL-3

SL-4

The cyber physical system shall be able to automatically take back-up of itssoftware application.



Only when required by individual standards.


Part

6 C

hapt

er 5

Sec

tion

21


DNV GL AS

7.7.4 Control systems recovery and reconstitution


(Basic) (Advanced)



YES YES

SL-1

SL-2

SL-3

SL-4

The cyber physical system shall support the possibility to recover after anycyber incidents or failure to a known secure state.



Network configuration shall be restored to previous state upon power failure.

Requirement reference: IEC 61162-460 Ch.6.4


7.7.5 Emergency power


(Basic) (Advanced)



YES YES

SL-1

SL-2

SL-3

SL-4

Power supply to the cyber physical systems shall be from main and emergencysource. Switching between the two sources shall be possible without affectingthe current state of the system.



7.7.6 Network and security configuration


(Basic) (Advanced)



YES YES

SL-1

SL-2

SL-3

SL-4

It shall be possible to configure the cyber physical system according torecommended guidelines from the systems supplier for configuration of networkand security setting. An interface shall exist to monitor these settings.


N/ A YESSL-3

SL-4

The cyber physical systems shall support the generation of current securitysetting in an electronic report.



Part

6 C

hapt

er 5

Sec

tion

21


DNV GL AS

7.7.7 Least functionality


(Basic) (Advanced)



YES YES

SL-1

SL-2

SL-3

SL-4

Configuration of the cyber physical systems shall prohibit or restrictunnecessary functions and services, e.g. such as file transfer protocols, instantmessaging, etc.



7.7.8 Control systems components inventory


(Basic) (Advanced)



N/ A YES

SL-2

SL-3

SL-4

The cyber physical systems shall support generation of inventory lists andassociated properties.



Part

6 C

hapt

er 5

Cha

nges

– h

isto

ric


DNV GL AS

CHANGES – HISTORIC

January 2018 edition

Changes January 2018, entering into force 1 July 2018.Topic Reference Description

Sec.4 [2.1.2] New subsection for passenger ships and cargo ships.

Sec.4 [2.2] New subsection for restricted use of combustible materials.

Sec.4 [2.3] New subsection for escape.

Sec.4 [2.4.3] Rule text clarified w.r.t. applicablility.

Sec.4 [2.4] New subsection for fire integrity.

Sec.4 [2.5.1] Specific overpressure requirement removed, louvers permitted.

Sec.4 [2.5] New subsection for ventilation.

Sec.4 [2.6] New subsection for fire detection and alarm.

Sec.4 [2.7] New subsection for portable fire extinguishers.

Sec.4 [2.8] New subsection for fire main systems.

Accommodation spaces - F(A)

Sec.4 [2.9] New subsection for other items.

Sec.4 [3.1.15] New subsection establishing fire categories of casings inpassenger ships.

Sec.4 [3.1.16] New subsection clarifying test standards for plastic piping withincasings of passenger ships carrying more than 36 passengers.

Sec.4 [3.2.6] Revised requirement for shielding of oil piping within machineryspaces of category A.

Sec.4 [3.2.7] New subsection stipulating required method for visualinspection of oil leaks.

Sec.4 [3.3.6] Revised requirements for insulation of hot surfaces.

Sec.4 [3.4.3] Updated with increased scope covering detection withinpassenger ship casings.

Sec.4 [3.4.5] Updated with increased scope for CCTV within passenger shipcasings.

Machinery spaces - F(M)

Sec.4 [3.6.3] Updated with scope for passenger ship casings.

Sec.4 [4.5.6] Updated with additional requirements for placement of portablefire extinguishers in ro/ro spaces.

Sec.4 [4.5.15] New subsection with requirements for deluge and water mistsystems.

Sec.4 [4.5.16] New subsection for piping.

Cargo spaces - F(C)

Sec.4 [4.5.17] New subsection for water monitors on weather decks.

Part

6 C

hapt

er 5

Cha

nges

– h

isto

ric


DNV GL AS

Topic Reference Description

Sec.4 [4.5.18] New subsection for access points to weather decks.

Sec.4 [4.5.19] New subsection not permitting open ro/ro / special categorydecks.

Sec.4 [4.5.20] New subsection for ventilation requirements on open ro/rodecks.

Sec.4 [4.5.21] New subsection with requirements for safe operations on ro/rodecks.

New additional class notation -ADW

Sec.17 New section covering requirements for deep water anchoring.

New additional class notation -BCLIQ

Sec.18 New section covering requirements for bulk cargo liquefaction.

New additional class notation -RO/RO

Sec.19 New section covering requirements for ro/ro cargoes.

New additional class notation -Gas power plant

Sec.20 New section covering requirements for gas power plant.

July 2017 editionThis document supersedes the January 2017 edition of DNVGL-RU-SHIP Pt.6 Ch.5.

Changes July 2017, entering into force 1 January 2018Topic Reference Description

Sec.2 [1] Inserted description of requirements applicable to multi-purpose drycargo ships and general dry cargo ships.

Hatchcoverless:Class notationHatchcoverlessapplicable for MPV andGeneral dry cargo ships. Sec.2 [3]

Requirements to multi-purpose dry cargo ships and general dry cargoships have been developed based on MSC.609. The requirementsin MSC. 609 have been evaluated and tailored to these ship types,considering the difference in cargo carried.

Sec.5 [3.2.1] Scale the k1 factor so the requirement relates to load levelcorresponding to yield strength.

Sec.5 [3.2.2]

Scale the k1 factor so the requirement relates to load levelcorresponding to structural yield.

Added corrosion margin 1.5mm on steel structure.

Reduced gross thickness of aluminium plating requirement by 0.85.

Helicopter installations:Formula corrections torequirements to structuralstrength

Sec.5 [2.5] Adjusted PWd to align load with yield acceptance criteria.

Sec.5 [2.4.1] Minimum sea pressure changed to 3.5 kN/m2.Helicopter installations:

Reduced minimum greensea pressure Sec.5 Table 9 Minimum sea pressure changed to 3.5 kN/m2 for load combination

minimum deck load.

Helicopter installations:Modify night operationmarking requirements

Sec.5 [6.5]Complete revision of the requirements to night operation marking.

Part

6 C

hapt

er 5

Cha

nges

– h

isto

ric


DNV GL AS

January 2017 editionThis document supersedes the July 2016 edition.

Main changes January 2017, entering into force 1 July 2017

• Sec.1 Transportation of containers - Container— Sec.1 [2], Sec.1 [3], Sec.1 [4]: Additional sub-sections covering requirements to non-typical container

securing arrangements have been added to the class notation Container.

• Sec.5 Helicopter installations - HELDK— Sec.5 [1.10.4]: Added clarification that aluminum-steel transition joints (bi metallic connections) are not

permitted when exposed to tensile loads.— Sec.5 [5.2.3]: Requirement for deck cambering is replaced with a general requirement for the deck to be

constructed so that water/fluids will not accumulate on the deck.

• Sec.16 Offshore gangway installations - Walk2work— New class notation

July 2016 editionThis document supersedes the January 2016 edition.

Main changes July 2016, entering into force 1 January 2017

• Sec.5 Helicopter installations - HELDK— Sec.5 [8]: The requirements for loads and allowable stresses is aligned with the Norwegian Civil Aviation

Authorities.

• Sec.8 Inert gas systems - Inert— The requirements in the section have been replaced with references to Pt.5 Ch.5 and Pt.5 Ch.6 for

requirements to documentation, arrangements and systems.— Sec.8 [1.5.3] has been added regarding maximum oxygen content.

January 2016 editionThis document supersedes October 2015 edition.

Main changes January 2016, entering into force 1 July 2016

• Sec.8 Inert gas systems - Inert— [1.3]: New and revised text.— Table 3: New table.

Part

6 C

hapt

er 5

Cha

nges

– h

isto

ric


DNV GL AS

• Sec.15 Transportation of toxic chemicals for offshore service vessels - CHEM— New section.

October 2015 editionThis is a new document.The rules enter into force 1 January 2016.

About DNV GLDNV GL is a global quality assurance and risk management company. Driven by our purpose ofsafeguarding life, property and the environment, we enable our customers to advance the safetyand sustainability of their business. We provide classification, technical assurance, software andindependent expert advisory services to the maritime, oil & gas, power and renewables industries.We also provide certification, supply chain and data management services to customers across awide range of industries. Operating in more than 100 countries, our experts are dedicated to helpingcustomers make the world safer, smarter and greener.

SAFER, SMARTER, GREENER

rules for classification ships part 6 additional class ......7 requirements for helicopter...

Documents